IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


/. 


1.0 

■A^IZB     12.5 

I.I 

:     U£  UA    IIIII2.2 

m 

125 

mm  . 

L 6" 

Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  "4580 

(716)  873-4503 


t 


jfiJtfMHf^  ~  ^V  ^  .f  ■   - 


■itaia»j»j»»— 


I 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


!> 


I 

I 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
origincjl  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  nnay  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


L'Institut  a  microfllm6  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  6t^  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-§tre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  unia 
modification  dans  la  m^thode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiquds  ci-dessous. 


D 
D 
D 

D 
D 
D 
D 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 

Covers  damaged/ 
Couverture  endommagee 

Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaur^e  et/ou  pelliculee 

Cover  title  missing/ 

Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 

Coloured  maps/ 

Cartes  geographiques  en  couleur 

Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 

Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 

Bound  with  other  material/ 
Relie  avec  d'autres  documents 


□    Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 

□    Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagees 

□    Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restaur^es  et/ou  pelliculees 

□    Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 
Pages  decolor6es,  tachet6es  ou  piqu6es 

□    Pages  detached/  •. 

Pages  detachees  •: 

□    Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

□    Quality  of  print  varies/ 
Quality  in^gale  de  rimpression 

□    Includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  materiel  supplementaire 


D 


D 


Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

Lareliure  serree  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  int^rieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajout§es 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte, 
mais,  lorsque  cela  6tait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  dt6  film^es. 


D 
D 


Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponible 

Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata.  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  6t6  film6es  d  nouveau  de  fapon  d 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


D 


Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  suppl6mentaires; 


•ifr- 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  filmd  au  taux  de  r6duction  indiqu6  ci-dessous. 


10X 


14X 


18X 


22X 


Q 


12X 


Wi 


20X 


m 


24X 


26X 


30X 


28X 


32X 


tails 
idu 
odifier 
unia 
mage 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


L'exemplaire  film6  fut  reproduit  grdce  d  la 
gdn^rositd  de: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

Les  images  suivantes  ont  6t6  reprodultes  avec  le 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettet6  de  I'exempiaire  fiim6,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 


IS 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  -^  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 


Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprim^e  sont  filmds  en  commen^ant 
par  ie  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  le  second 
plat,  selon  le  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  film4s  en  commen9ant  par  la 
premiere  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  darnidre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
dernidre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  le 
cas:  le  symbols  — ►  signifie  "A  SUIVRE  ",  le 
symbole  V  signifie  "FIN". 


Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  dtre 
film6s  d  des  taux  de  reduction  diff6rents. 
Lorsque  ie  document  est  trop  grand  pour  dtre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clichii,  il  est  film6  d  partir 
de  Tangle  supdrieur  gauche,  de  gauche  d  droite. 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  ndcessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  mdthode. 


errata 
to 


i  pelure, 
on  d 


n 


1  2  3 


32X 


■  1 

z 

3 

4 

5 

6 

mm 


( 


o< 

AL 

L 

PO 

% 

-;^ 

A I 


THOMPSON'S 


COAST 


AND  SAILING  DIRECTIONS  FOR  THE 


PILOT 

NORTH-WESTERN  LAKES, 


OODENSBURO    TO    BUFFALO.    CHICAGO,    GREEN    BAY. 
GEORGIAN  BAY  AND  LAKE  SUPERIOR. 

)  INCLUDING 

ALL    THE  RIVER  NAVIGA  TION,  COURSES  AND  DISTANCES  ON  EACH  LAKE, 

WITH  DIRECTIONS  FOR   ENTERING  ALL    THE 

PRINCIPAL  HARBORS   THEREON. 

ALSO  A   DESCRIPTION  OF 

LIGHTS   AND    LIGHT-HOUSES. 

"      TO  DULUTH,  AT  THE  HEAD  OF  '.AKE  SUPERIOR. 


'^' 


v\^^ 


HARBORS    COMPLETED, 


AND   IN   PROGRESS     OF    CONSTRUCTION,    DEPTH    OF    WATER   IN    EACH 
HARBOR  DANGERS  TO  BE  A  VOIDED,  THE  POSITION  OF LIFE-SA  VING 

Stations,  RULES  for  the  management  of  open  row 

BOATS  IN  A  SURF,  BEACHING  THEM,  ETC.,  AND  OTHER 

VALUABLE  MARITIME  SUGGESTIONS,  TAKEN  FROM 

THE  U.  S.  LIFE-SAVING  SERVICE  REPORTS, 

BY  SPECIAL  PERMISSION. 

CORRECTED   AND   REVISED   FROM   THE    ORIGINAL    COPIES    OF    THOMPSON'S    COAST     PILOT    AND  THE 
LATEST  U.  S.  SURVEYS,  WITH  THE  EXPLANATION  OF  NAUTICAL  TERMS. 


r 


Compiled  by  THOS.  S.  THOMPSON,  Licensed  Pilot  for 

IDSlTXi.OXI',    JSCIOIX. 


DETROIT: 

WM.   A.   SCRIPPS,  PRINTER   AND    PUBLISHER. 


1878. 

IT 


nmctcil  accordinit  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  yew  1878.  by 

THOS.  S.  THOMPSON, 

In  the  onii :c  uf  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


— «S*^ 


PREFACE. 


In  presenting  the  sixth  editionof  the  Coast  Pilot  in  a  new  form 
the  subscribe!  would  respectfully  say,  by  the  assistance  of  the  United 
States  Lake  Surveys  and  his  own  experience  of  forty-three  years  on 
these  Lakes,  as  a  Pilot  and  Navigator,  he  hopes  to  meet  the  support  of 
his  old  friends  as  well  as  the  Young  Navigator,  who  will  find  in  it  all  that 
is  requisite  for  Lake  Pilotage,  a  description  of  all  the  late  improvements 
of  Harbors,  new  Lighthouses,  Breakwaters,  and  Buoys  that  will  be 
placed  this  season,  also  positions  of  Life  Saving  Stations,  etc.,  which 
will  make  this  book  a  valuable  companion  to  all  those  who  are  look- 
ing forward  to  become  Masters  and  Pilots.  I  beg  to  return  my  sincere 
thanks  to  my  former  patrons,  and  also  to  those  who  have  extended 
the  hand  of  friendship,  in  this  my  last  effort,  to  produce  a  work  that 
is  really  useful  to  the  Lake  Mariner. 

THOS.  S.  THOMPSON,  Pilot. 


A 


;i 


M 


i 


Remarks  on  the  Mariner's  Compass, 


By  frequent  experiments,  it  has  been  found  that  compasses  should 
not  be  nearer  together  than  4  feet  6  inches,  to  avoid  the  disturbance 
known  to  exist  when  two  needles  are  placed  near  each  other.  The 
error  from  this  source  has,  in  many  cases,  been  eight  degrees.  Where 
it  is  convenient,  one  compass  to  steer  by  is  particularly  recommended, 
and  a  standard  compass  for  reference  placed  on  the  centre  line  of  the 
vessel,  and  as  far  from  iron  work  as  possible— say  7  feet.  Vertical 
iron  stanchions  should  be  at  least  14  feet  from  the  compasses.  In 
steamboats,  the  compass  is  materially  affected  by  the  telescopic  fun- 
nels, or  smoke  stacks,  especially  when  hot ;  and  when  taken  down, 
can  be  sensibly  observed.  The  standard  compass  should  be  raised 
much  higher  from  the  decks  of  iron  vessels  than  wooden  ones. 

I  have  found  great  difference  in  compasses  on  these  lakes— 
hardly  two  will  agree.  In  going  from  a  vessel  into  a  propeller  or 
steamboat,  the  difference  is  seen  immediately.  No  doubt  that  many 
accidents  to  boats  and  vessels  have  happened  from  this  cause— not 
knowing  how  your  compasses  will  lead  you.  There  is  no  remedy  for 
this  difference,  except  by  constant  running  on  a  route,  when  you  will 
find  out  how  your  compasses  will  lead  you ;  and  by  strict  observation, 
the  use  ot  the  lead,  and  a  good  look-out,  you  may  run  with  safety  in 
all  pilotable  waters. 


% 


t  -lifisi-ia^-ir^-W-: 


Notes  and  Remarks  on  the  Barometer. 


mpass, 

jmpasses  should 
the  disturbance 
ach  other.  The 
iegrees.  Where 
y  recommended, 
entre  line  of  the 
7  feet.     Vertical 

compasses.  In 
•  telescopic  fun- 
len  taken  down, 
should  be  raised 
jen  ones, 
n  these  lakes — 
to  a  propeller  or 
doubt  that  many 

this  cause — not 
is  no  remedy  for 
e,  when  you  will 
trict  observation, 
an  with  safety  in 


^-« 


When  the  mercury  falls  in  the  barometer  it  announces  rain  or 
wind,  or  in  general  what  is  called  bad  weather  j  and,  on  the  contrary, 
when  it  r/'sfs,  it  announces  fair  weather. 

When  the  mercury  falls  in  frosty  weather,  either  snow  or  a  thaw 
may  be  expected ;  but  if  it  rises  in  the  winter,  with  a  north  or  east 
wind,  it  generally  betokens  frost. 

If  the  mercury  sinks  slowly,  we  may  expect  rain,  which  will  prob- 
ably be  of  some  continuance ;  but  if  it  rises  gradually,  we  may  expect 
fine  weather  that  will  be  lasting. 

When  the  barometer  is  fluctuating,  rising  and  falling  suddenly, 
the  weather  may  be  expected  like  it— changeable.  When  the  mercury 
falls  very  low,  there  will  be  much  rain  ;  but  if  its  fall  is  low  and  sud- 
den, a  high  wind  frequently  follows.  When  an  extraordinary  fall  of 
the  mercury  happens,  without  any  remarkable  change  near  at  hand, 
there  is  some  probability  of  a  storm  at  a  distance. 

In  very  warm  weather,  the  fall  of  the  mercury  indicates  thunder. 
The  barometer  will  descend  sometimes  as  an  indication  of  wind  only, 
and  sometimes  rise  when  the  wind  is  to  the  north  or     ,?t. 

A  NE  wind  generally  causes  the  barometer  to  rise,  ind  it  is  gen- 
erally low  with  a  SW  wind. 

An  extraordinary  fall  of  the  mercury  will  sometimes  take  place  in 
summer  previous  to  heavy  showers,  attt  nded  with  thunder  ;  but  in 
spring,  autumn  and  winter,  it  indicates  violent  winds. 

The  mercury  is  higher  in  cold  than  in  warm  weather,  and  lower 
at  noon  and  midnight  than  at  any  other  period  of  the  day. 

The  mercury  generally  falls  at  the  approach  of  new  and  full 
moon,  and  rises  at  the  quadratures. 

Before  high  tides,  there  is  almost  always  a  great  fall  of  the 
mercury ;  this  takes  place  oftener  at  the  full  than  at  the  new  moon. 


ThompsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


The  greatest  changes  of  the  barometer  commonly  take  place  dur- 
ing clear  weather  with  a  north  wind,  and  the  smallest  risings  during 
cloudy,  rainy  or  windy  weather,  with  a  south  or  nearly  south  wind. 

The  words  generally  engraved  on  the  plate  of  the  barometer  rather 
serve  to  mislead  than  to  inform  ;  for  the  changes  of  weather  depend 
rather  on  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  mercury,  than  on  its  standing  at 
any  particular  height.  When  the  mercury  is  as  high  as  "fair,"  and  the 
surface  of  it  is  concave  (which  is  the  case  when  it  begins  to  descend ), 
it  very  often  rains  ;  and,  on  the  contrary,  when  the  mercury  is  opposite 
"rain,"  and  the  surface  convex  (which  is  the  case  when  it  begins  to 
ascend),  fair  weather  may  be  expected.  These  circumstances  not 
being  duly  attended  to,  may  be  said  to  be  the  principal  cause  of  many 
people  not  having  a  proper  confidence  in  this  instrument. 

For  sea  service,  it  would  be  as  well  to  read  off  the  barometer  at 
least  three  times  a  day,  viz :  at  8  a.  m.  ,  noon,  and  8  p,  M. ;  and  oftener 
if  bad  weather.  • 

In  Europe,  if  the  alteration  in  the  quicksilver  should  be  in  as 
great  a  proportion  as  six-tenths  of  an  inch  to  twenty-four  hours,  sud- 
den but  not  lasting  changes  of  weather  may  be  expected.  If  the  alter- 
ation should  be  gradual,  probably  in  the  proportion  of  two  or  three- 
tenths  to  twenty-four  hours,  the  weather  indicated  will  be  likely  to 

last. 

One-filth  of  the  variation  of  the  barometer  in  any  climate  may  be 
considered  as  an  indication  of  sudden  change. 

If  wind  should  follow  rain,  the  wind  may  be  expected  to  increase. 

Rain  following  wind  is  likely  to  lull  it,  and  the  wind  may  be  ex- 
pected to  abate. 

Explanation  of  the  Aneroid  Barometer. 

The  graduation  and  figuring  on  the  dial  represents  the  perpen. 
dicular  scale  of  the  mercurial  barometer.  The  falling  of  the  barometer 
is  understood  to  be  the  passage  of  the  long  or  steel  index  from  the 
higher  to  the  lower  number  of  figures,  which  movement  comes  under 
the  same  atmospheric  change  in  which  the  mercury  passes  over  part 
of  its  scale.  The  short  pointer  is  simply  a  register,  and  is  only  movable 
with  the  fingers,  to  be  placed  over  the  steel  index,  thus  enabling  the 
observer  to  see  more  readily  any  movement  of  the  index. 


igaipjii  iL<Wim'i»miim*' 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


y  take  place  dur- 
;st  risings  during 
iy  south  wind. 
I  barometer  rather 

■  weather  depend 
on  its  standing  at 
as  "fair,"  and  the 
igins  to  descend), 
lercury  is  opposite 
when  it  begins  to 
ircumstances  not 
)al  cause  of  many 
nent. 

the  barometer  at 
p.  M. ;  and  oftener 

• 

■  should  be  in  as 
-four  hours,  sud- 
ted.  If  the  alter- 
1  of  two  or  three- 
I  will  be  likely  to 

ly  climate  may  be 

lected  to  increase, 
wind  may  be  ex- 

leter. 

sents  the  perpen. 
g  of  the  barometer 
el  index  from  the 
nent  comes  under 
passes  over  part 
id  is  only  movable 
thus  enabling  the 
idex,  •    • 


Rules  for  Barometrical  Observation. 

1st.  There  is  no  point  at  which  the  barometer  must  stand  to  in- 
dicate rain  or  wind. 

ad.  The  judgment  must  be  governed  by  the  rising  or  falling  of 
the  barometer. 

3d.  The  falling  of  the  barometer  indicates  the  approach  of  a 
storm,  the  extent  of  which  will  be  proportionate  to  the  amount  and 
rapidity  of  the  fall. 

4th.  Showers.— The  barometer  falls  previously  from  four  to 
twelve-hundredths  of  an  inch,  varying  in  time,  from  one  to  three 
hours.  The  greater  and  more  rapid  the  fall,  the  more  violent  will  be 
the  shower,  accompanied  more  or  less  with  wind. 

5th.  Northeasterly  storms. — The  barometer  falls  previously  from 
four  to  eight-tenths  of  an  inch,  varying  in  time  from  one  to  four  hours, 
and  continues  falling  until  the  storm  arrives  at  its  crisis,  when  the 
barometer  begins  to  rise  and  continues  rising  until  that  part  of  the 
storm  which  romes  Irom  the  NW  passes  off. 

6th.  Southerly  storms. — The  barometer  falls  previously  from  one 
to  four-tenths  of  an  inch,  varying  in  time  from  six  to  twelve  hours. 
These  storms  generally  precede  unsettled  weather ;  at  such  times  the 
barometer  continues  low,  and  very  slight  additional  depressions  are 
followed  by  rain. 

A  southerly  storm  is  perhaps  the  most  difficult  to  judge  of  by 
appearances,  as  appearances  change  so  frequently  without  any  real 
change  in  the  atmosphere.  During  this  class  of  storms,  the  utmost 
confidence  should  be  placed  in  the  barometer.  After  the  first  indica- 
tion as  above,  and  the  barometer  does  not  rise,  but  remains  stationary, 
it  is  a  strong  indication  that  the  storm  has  not  all  passed. 

The  foregoing  rules  are  the  result  of  long  and  careful  observation. 
It  must  be  remembered  that  storms  occur  under  different  circumstances 
in  different  parts  of  the  globe,  yet,  taking  the  first  three  of  the  above 
rules  as  a  basis  of  calculation,  a  short  experience,  with  the  exercise  of 
the  judgment,  will  enable  one  to  determine  very  correctly  concerning 
approaching  changes  in  the  weather. 


m 


4^»' 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


TABLE  OF  DISTANCES 

At  which   Objects   can  be   seen   at    Sea.    according   to  their   respective 
elevations  and  the  elevation  of  the  eye  oi  the  observer. 


1 

1 

1 
miles.           ! 

i      1 

n 
Biles. 

1 
1 

in 
miles. 

ra 

s 

■a 

'S 

S-5 

9     M 

II 

§■ 

.9 

.|(S 

11 

1  2 

.s 

Itl 
JO 

■t 

SI 

.11 

Si 
a'' 

X 

& 

X 

^ 

Q 

X 

a 

i 

'X 

•565 

36,8 

70 

II  067 

9598 

•50 

ao.gii 

18.14 

lO 

75 

11.456 

9935 

300 

13.91a 

19.87 

IS 

S  l>3 

4443 

80 

11.83a 

10.36 

350 

34.748    1           31.46 

to 

S.916 

5. no 

85 

11,196 

10.57 
10.8B 

400 

36.457                "94 

*5 

«6i4 

57.16 

90 

H.549 
IJ.89. 

450 

38.06a 

14.33 

3° 

7-»45 

6,»B3 

95 

11.18 

Soo 

39.580 

1565 

35 

7  8»6 
8.<66 
8.«74 

6.787 

■00 

I3.«8 

11.47 

1    550 

600 

31.034 

16  90 

40 

7»55 

no 

13-874 

la.oj 

31-403 

iB.io 

45 

7.696 
8.111 

'          IJO 

14.490 
15083 

650 

33.716 

1915 

50 

9'3!4 

130 

13.08 

IZ 

35.000                       30  3» 

55 

g.Sii 

8.,^og 

140 

ij.65» 

13-57 

37.416      1                 3145 
39-836                       34.54 

4«»33              3«.«8 

60 

10.946 

8  886 

150 

1       17.J01 

•49' 

,    900 

<S 

io/i«5 

9.249 

aoo 

18.708 

1 

1611 

1    1000 

Ri'LK.— If  the  dbtance  at  which  n  liijht  of  11  given  height  cap  be  seen  by  a  person  on  a 
given  level  be  required,  it  in  only  needful  to  .idd  together  the  two  number*  in  the  column  of 
disl.inces  corresponding  to  those  in  the  column  of  heights,  which  repretent  reipectively  the 
height  of  the  observer's  lye  and  the  height  of  the  focal  plane  above  the  hea.  When  the 
height  required  to  render  alight  visible  at  a  giv.?n  distance  is  required,  we  must  first  seek 
for  the  number  corresponding  to  the  height  of  the  observer's  eye,  and  deduct  this  from  the 
whole  proposi!d  range  nf  the  light,  and  op  "^^itc  ih^-  remainder  in  the  column  of  distances, 
seek  for  the  corresponding  number  in  the  column  of  heights.  A  tower,  100  feet  high,  will  be 
visible  to  an  observer,  whose  eye  is  elevated  15  feet  above  the  water,  16  nautical  milet,  ihut 
from  the  tabic : 

KxAMi'LE  — «5  feet  elevation,  distance  visible,  4.443  nautical  miles. 
100     '•  "  "  "      11.47  " 

•5.9>3         "  " 


TABLE  OF  THE  ANGLES      '■ 

Which  every  Point  and  Quarter  Point  of  the  Compass  makes  with   the 

Meridian. 


Pt«. 

0 

«        Pts. 

0 

1 

It 

1  Pts. 

0 

1 

"  ! 

1 

Pti. 

0 

t 

ti 

V, 

1 

48 

45    '    a5i 

IS 

18 

45 

*H 

47 

48 

1 
♦* 

65i 

70 

18 

45 

A 

s 

37 

30 ;    'H 

18 

07 

30 

4H 

50 

37 

30 

6% 

73 

07 

30 

M 

8 

16 

•5-  'V4 

1o 

S6 

'5 

*V* 

53 

16 

IS  1 

bh 

75 

56 

15 

1 

II 

IS 

00     3 

H 

45 

00 

5 

56 

15 

00  ' 

'     7 

7« 

45 

00 

iVi 

>4 

03 

45         3H 

36 

33 

45 

i% 

|9 

03 

45 

'     7H 

81 

33 

45 

16 

5' 

30         3H 

39 

i« 

30 

Hi 

61 

5« 

30 

7% 

s* 

11 

30 

iH 

19 

41 

«S 

3K 

41 

II 

IS 

ih 

i* 

41 

15  i 

l^* 

«7 

II 

•5 

1 

11 

30 

00 

4 

45 

00 

00 

6 

67 

30 

oo| 

8 

90 

00 

00 

'E.TPii^.-:?*TrsP3«TWBr-rr'.'*».'i> 


>  their   respective 
observer. 


J. 

i 

«J 

ra 

.si 

.3 

B 

\% 

S 

1 

\  1 

3 

3 

2 

a 

Q 

90.916 

18.14 

aa.qia 

19.87 

J4.748 

1 

11.46 

'6457 

11.94 

aS.o'ij 

1 

»4-p 

15*5 

19. 580 

1 

3i.o»4 

16  90 

3a.4oj 

iS.io 

33.7»6 

1915 
3018 

35.000 

37.4'6 
39.836 

1 

3»45 

1 

36.38 

41*33 

seen  by  a  person  on  a 
Linbem  in  the  column  of 
irescnt  ropectively  the 
ive  ihc  sea.  When  the 
:d,  we  must  first  seek 
nd  deduct  thi«  from  the 
he  column  of  distances, 
r,  100  feet  high,  will  be 
,  t6  nautical  miles,  thus 


ss  makes  with   the 


Pti. 

0 

f 

91 

1 

70 

18 

4$ 

(1% 

73 

07 

30 

6« 

75 

56 

«5 

7 

7« 

45 

00 

81 

33 

45 

7H 

«4 

19 

.30 

r* 

87 
90 

II 
00 

15 

00 

THOMPSON'S 

COAST  PILOT  FOR  THE  LAKES. 


Magnitude  of  the  Lakes  or  "Inland  Seas." 

Nothing  but  a  voyage  over  all  the  great  bodies  of  water  forming 
the  "  Inland  Seas,"  can  furnish  the  tourist  or  scientific  explorer  a  just 
idea  of  the  extent,  depth,  and  clearness  of  the  waters  of  the  Great 
Lakes  of  America,  together  with  the  healthy  influence,  fertility,  iind 
romantic  beauty  of  the  numerous  islands,  and  surrounding  shores, 
forming  a  circuit  of  about  4,000  miles,  with  an  area  of  90,000  square 
miles,  or  about  twice  the  extent  of  the  State  of  New  York— extending 
through  eight  degrees  of  latitude,  and  sixteen  degrees  of  longitude  - 
this  region,  embracing  the  entire  north  half  of  the  temperate  zone, 
where  the  purity  of  the  atmosphere  vies  with  the  purity  of  these  ex- 
tensive waters,  or  '■  Iiland  Seas,"  being  connected  by  navigable  rivers 
or  straits. 

The  States  washed  by  the  Great  Lakes,  are  New  York,  Pennsyl- 
vania,  Ohio,  Michigan,  Indiana,  Illinois,  Wisconjin,  Minnesota,  and 
Ontario— the  boundary  line  between  the  United  States  and  the  Brilish 
Possessions  running  through  the  centre  of  Lakes  Superior,  Huron,  St. 
Clair,  Erie  and  Ontario,  together  with  the  connecting  rivers  or  straits, 
and  down  the  St.  Lawrence  River  to  the  4Sth  parallel  of  latitude. 
From  thence  the  St.  Lawrence  flows  in  a  northeast  direction  through 
Canada  into  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence.  The  romantic  beauty  of  the 
rapids  of  this  noble  stream,  and  its  majestic  fiort*  through  a  healthy 
and  rich  section  of  country,  is  unsurpassed  for  grand  lake  and  river 
scenery. 

Lake  Superior,  the  largest  of  the  Inland  Seas,  lying  between 
46"  30'  and  49°  north  latitude,  and  between  83°  30'  and  92°  30'  west 


I 


'Hi 


it 


■^ 


lO 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


longitude  from  Greenwich,  is  situated  at  a  height  of  600  feet  above  the 
Gulf  of  St  Lawrence,  from  which  it  is  distant  about  1,500  miles,  by 
the  course  of  its  outlet  and  the  St.  Lawrence  River.  It  is  460  miles 
long  from  east  to  west,  and  170  miles  broad  in  its  widest  part,  with  an 
average  breadth  of  85  miles;  the  entire  circuit  being  about  1,200 
miles.  It  is  800  feet  in  greatest  depth,  extending  200  feet  below  the 
level  of  the  ocean.  Estimated  area,  3 1,500  square  miles,  being  by  far 
the  largest  body  of  fresh  water  on  the  face  of  the  globe— celebrated 
alike  for  its  sparkling  purity,  romantic  scenery,  and  the  healthy  in- 
fluence of  its  surrounding  climate  About  one  hundred  rivers  and 
creeks  are  said  to  flow  into  the  lake,  the  greatest  part  being  small 
streams,  and  but  few  navigable  except  for  canoes,  owing  to  numerous 
falls  and  rapids.  It  discharges  its  waters  eastward,  by  the  straits,  or 
River  St.  Mary,  60  miles  long,  into  Lake  Huron,  which  lies  26  feet 
below,  there  being  about  20  feet  descent  at  the  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  which 
is  overcome  by  means  of  two  locks  and  a  ship  canal.  Its  outlet  is  a 
most  lovely  and  romantic  stream,  embosoming  a  number  of  large  and 
fertile  islands,  covered  with  a  rich  foliage. 

Lake  Michigan,  lying  about  576  feet  above  the  sea,  is  320  miles 
long,  84  miles  broad,  and  700  feet  deep;  area,  22,000  square  miles. 
This  lake  lies  wholly  wiihin  the  confines  of  the  United  States.  It 
presents  a  large  expanse  of  water,  with  but  few  islands,  except  near  its 
entrance  into  the  straits  of  Mackinac,  through  which  it  discharges  its 
surplus  waters.  The  strait  is  30  or  4c  miles  in  length,  and  discharges 
its  accumulated  waters  into  Lake  Huron,  on  nearly  a  level  with  Lake 
Michigan.  At  the  north  end  of  the  lake,  and  in  the  straits,  are  several 
large  and  romantic  islands,  affording  delightful  resorts. 

Green  Bay,  a  most  beautiful  expanse  of  water,  containing  several 
small  islands,  lies  at  about  the  same  elevation  as  Lake  Michigan ;  it  is 
100  miles  long,  20  miles  broad,  and  60  feet  deep;  area,  2,000  square 
miles.  This  is  a  remarkably  pure  body  of  water,  presenting  lovely 
shores,  surrounded  by  a  fruitful  and  healthy  section  of  country. 

Lake  Huron,  lying  at  a  height  of  574  feet  above  the  sea,  is  250 
miles  long,  100  miles  broad,  and  750  feet  greatest  depth ;  area,  21,000 
square  miles.  This  lake  is  almost  entirely  free  of  islands,  presenting 
a  large  expanse  of  pure  water.    Its  most  remarkable  feature  is  Sagi- 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


1 1 


5oo  feet  above  the 
t  1,500  miles,  by 
It  is  460  miles 
dest  part,  with  an 
eing  about   1,200 

00  feet  below  the 
11  lies,  being  by  far 
globe — celebrated 
[id  the  healthy  in- 
mdred  rivers  and 

part  being  small 
wing  to  numerous 

by  the  straits,  or 
which  lies  26  feet 

Ste.  Marie,  which 
I.  Its  outlet  is  a 
Tiber  of  large  and 

e  sea,  is  320  miles 
,000  square  miles. 
United  States.  It 
ids,  except  near  its 
;h  it  discharges  its 
;th,  and  discharges 
■  a  level  with  Lake 

straits,  are  several 
rts. 

containing  several 
ike  Michigan ;  it  is 
area,  2,000  square 
,  presenting  lovely 

1  of  country. 

(ove  the  sea,  is  250 
lepth;  area,  21,000 
islands,  presenting 
)le  feature  is  Sagi- 


naw Bay,  lying  on  its  western  border.  The  waters  of  this  lake  are 
now  whitened  by  the  sails  of  commerce,  it  being  the  great  thorough- 
fare to  and  from  Lakes  Michigan  and  Superior. 

Georgian  Bay,  lying  northeast  of  Ldhe  Huron,  and  of  the  same 
altitude,  being  separated  by  islands  and  headlands,  lies  wholly  within 
the  confines  of  Canada.  Ii  is  140  miles  long,  55  miles  broad,  and 
500  feet  in  depth  ;  area,  5.000  square  miles.  In  the  North  Channel, 
which  communicates  with  St.  Mary's  River,  and  in  Georgian  Bay,  are 
innumerable  islands  and  inlets,  forming  an  interesting  and  romantic 
feature  to  this  pure  body  of  water.  All  the  above  bodies  of  water, 
into  which  are  discharged  a  great  number  of  streams,  find  an  outlet 
by  the  River  St.  Clair,  commencing  at  the  foot  of  Lake  Huron,  where 
it  has  only  a  width  of  1,000  feet,  and  a  depth  of  from  20  to  60  feet, 
flowing  with  a  rapid  current  downward,  38  miles,  into 

Lake  St.  Claik,  which  is  25  miles  long  and  about  as  many 
broad,  with  a  small  depth  of  water.  Detroit  River,  27  miles  in  length, 
is  the  recipient  of  all  the  above  waters,  flowing  southward  through  a 
fine  section  of  country  into 

Lake  Erie,  the  fourth  great  lake  of  this  immense  chain.  This 
latter  lake  again,  at  an  elevation  above  the  sea  of  564  feet,  250  miles 
long,  60  miles  broad,  and  204  feet  at  its  greatest  depth,  but  on  an 
average,  considerably  less  than  one  hundred  feet  deep,  discharges  its 
surplus  waters  by  the  Niagara  River  and  Falls,  into  Lake  Ontario,  330 
feet  below;  51  feet  of  this  descent  being  in  the  Rapids  immediately 
above  the  Falls,  160  feet  at  the  Falls  themselves,  and  the  rest  chiefly 
in  the  Rapids  between  the  Falls  and  the  mouth  of  the  river,  22  miles 
below  Lake  Erie.  This  is  comparatively  a  shallow  body  of  water  ; 
and  the  relative  depths  of  the  great  series  of  lakes  may  be  illustrated 
by  saying,  that  the  surplus  waters  poured  from  the  vast  basins  of 
Superior,  Michigan  and  Huron,  flow  across  the  plate  of  Erie  into  the 
deep  bowl  of  Ontario.  Lake  Erie  is  reputed  to  be  the  only  one  of  the 
series  in  which  any  current  is  perceptible.  The  fact,  if  it  is  one,  is 
usually  ascribed  to  its  shallowness ;  but  the  vast  volume  of  its  outlet— 
the  Niagara  River— with  its  strong  current,  is  a  much  more  favorable 
cause  than  the  small  depth  of  its  water,  which  may  be  far  more  appro- 
priately adduced  as  the  reason  why  the  navigation  is  obstructed  by  ice 
much  more  than  either  of  the  great  lakes. 


.-.m^"""" 


12 


Thompson' s  Coast  Pilot. 


Lake  Ontario,  the  fifth  and  last  of  the  Great  Lakes  of  Amer- 
ica, is  elevated  2  34  feet  above  tide-water  at  Three  Rivers,  on  the  St. 
Lawrence;  it  is  180  miles  long,  60  miles  broad,  600  feet  deep. 

Thus  basin  succeeds  basin,  like  the  locks  of  a  great  canal,  the 
whole  length  of  waters  from  Lake  Superior  to  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 
being  rendered  navigable  for  vessels  of  a  large  class  by  means  of  the 
Welland  and  St.  Lawrence  Canals— thus  enabling  a  loaded  vessel  to 
ascend  or  descend  600  feet  above  the  level  of  the  ocean  or  tide-water. 
Of  these  five  great  lakes,  Lake  Superior  has  by  far  the  largest  area, 
and  Lake  Ontario  has  the  least,  having  a  surface  only  of  about  one- 
fifth  of  that  of  Lake  Superior,  and  being  somewhat  less  in  area  than 
Lake  Erie,  although  not  much  less,  if  any,  in  the  circuit  of  its  shores. 
Lake  Ontario  is  the  safest  body  of  water  for  navigation,  and  Lake  Erie 
the  most  dangerous.  The  lakes  of  greatest  interest  to  the  tourist  or 
scientific  traveler  are  Ontario,  Huron,  together  with  Georgian  Bay 
and  North  Channel,  and  Lake  Superior.  The  many  picturesque 
islands  and  headlands,  togetiier  with  the  pure,  dark  green  waters  of 
the  Upper  Lakes,  form  a  most  lovely  contrast  during  the  summer  and 
autumn  months. 

The  altitude  of  the  land  which  forms  the  water-shed  of  the  Upper 
Lakes  does  not  exceed  from  600  to  2,1500  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
ocean,  while  the  altitude  of  the  land  which  forms  the  water-shed  of 
Lake  Champlain  and  the  lower  tributaries  of  the  St.  Lawrence  River 
rises  from  4,000  to  5,000  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea  or  tide-water, 
in  the  States  of  Vermont  and  New  York. 

The  divide  which  separates  the  waters  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
from  those  flowing  northeast  into  the  St.  Lawrence,  do  not  in  some 
places  exceed  ten  or  twenty  feet  above  the  level  of  Lakes  Michigan 
and  Superior ;  in  fact,  it  is  said  that  Lake  Michigan,  when  under  the 
influence  of  high  water  and  a  strong  northerly  wind,  discharges  some 
of  its  surplus  waters  into  the  Illinois  River,  and  thence  into  the  Miss- 
issippi and  Gulf  of  Mexico— so  low  is  the  divide  at  the  southern 
terminus. 

When  we  consider  the  magnitude  of  these  Great  Lakes,  the 
largest  body  of  fresh  water  on  the  globe,  being  connected  by  navigable 
straits  or  canals,  we  may  quote  with  emphasis  the  words  of  an  Eng- 


-        -JHtMUW  jLWV4,"l 


Lakes  of  Amer- 
ivers,  on  the  St. 
eet  deep, 
great  canal,  the 

of  St.  Lawrence 
by  means  of  the 
loaded  vessel  to 
an  or  tide-water. 

the  largest  area, 
y  of  about  one- 
less  in  area  than 
:uit  of  its  shores, 
n,  and  Lake  Erie 

to  the  tourist  or 
li  Georgian  Bay 
lany  picturesque 
k  green  waters  of 

the  summer  and 

ihed  of  the  Upper 
the  level  of  the 
the  water-shed  of 
Lawrence  River 
sea  or  tide-water, 

Gulf  of  Mexico, 

e,  do  not  in  some 

Lakes  Michigan 

when  under  the 

1,  discharges  some 

ice  into  the  Miss- 

at  the  southern 

[Jreat  Lakes,  the 
cted  by  navigable 
words  of  an  Eng- 


Thompsotis  Coast  Pilot. 


13 


lish  writer  :  "How  little  are  they  aware,  in  Europe,  of  the  extent  of 
comm-rce  upon  these  '  Inland  Seas,'  whose  coasts  are  now  lined  with 
flourishing  towns  and  cities ;  whose  waters  are  plowed  with  magnifi- 
cent steamers  and  vessels— numbering  5,496— shows  the  rising  im- 
portance of  these  great  lakes,  as  connected  with  the  Far  West." 


\ 


k 


Lake  Ontario. 


Ogdensburs  Lighthouse  near  the  mouth  of  Oswegatchie  River, 
in  St.  Lawrence  River,  on  a  square  tower,  with  dwelHng  attached, 
built  of  Limestone,  on  a  low  Island,  one  fourth  of  a  mile  N  by  W 
of  the  mouth  of  the  River.  A  shoal  extends  out  northerly  from  the 
Island,  is  a  Fixed  White  Light,  visible  12 j4  miles,  42  feet  above 
Lake  level. 

Channel  to  Ogdensburg  Harbor,  black  buoy,  spar  in  1 1  feet  of 
water.  This  buoy  is  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  dredged  channel  on 
the  outer  bar  of  Ogdensburg  Harbor.  Ogdensburg  Lighthouse 
S>^VV,  522  yards. 

Outer  Buoy,  red  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  water,  bearings  Ogdens- 
burg lighthouse,  SJ2E,  493  yards.  The  red  buoys  should  be  kept 
well  aboard  in  passing  in  and  out,  as  there  is  a  strong  current  setting 
toward  the  opposite  or  Northeasterly  bank  of  the  channel. 

Middle  Buoy,  red,  spar  buoy,  in  10  feet  water,  Ogdensburg  Light- 
house, bearing  S|^W,  300  yards. 

Inner  Buoy,  red  spar  buoy  in  10  feet  water,  Ogdensburg  Light- 
house bearing  SSVV  133  yards.  After  passing  this  buoy  steer  for  the 
warehouse  of  the  R.  VV.  &  O.  Railroad  on  the  first  wharf. 

Windmill  Point  Lighthouse  one  and  one  quarter  miles  above 
Fort  Wellington,  Prescott,  Ontario.  A  fixed  white  light. visible  15 
miles.     Round  stone  Tower  92  feet  above  River  level. 

Cole's  Shoal  Lighthouse,  on  pier,  5  miles  west  of  Brockville  and 
3^  mile  from  North  shore,  Ontario. 

Cross-over  Island  Lighthouse  on  Cross-over  Island,  St.  Lawrence 
River.  Fixed  white  light,  visible  12  miles  37  feet  above  Lake  level. 
A  River  Light  shown  from  keeper's  dwelling,  brick  front  and  rear, 
natural  color,  gables  sheathed  with  boards  and  painted  white.  Cross- 
over Island  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  channel  and  is  20  miled  south- 
west from  Ogdensburg. 


S 


■^rfrw-rsTWwr  r 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


15 


wegatchie  River, 
irelling  attached, 
a  mile  N  by  W 
)rtherly  from  the 
1,  42  feet  above 

ipar  in  1 1  feet  of 
dged  channel  on 
)urg   Lighthouse 

learings  Ogdens- 
should  be  kept 
g  current  setting 
innel. 
gdensburg  Light- 

jdensburg  Light- 

luoy  steer  for  the 

vharf. 

rter  miles  above 

:  light. visible  15 

el. 

if  Brockville  and 

nd,  St.  Lawrence 
ibove  Lake  level. 
:  front  and  rear, 
!d  white.  Cross- 
is  20  miled  south- 


Bay  State  Shoa),  red   spar  buoy,  north  side  of  channel  below 
Cross-over  lighthouse  in  5  feet  water. 

Wnale's  Back  Shoal,  black  spar  buoy,  south  side  of  channel 
above  Whale's  back  in  8  feet  water. 

Superior  Shoal,  black  spar  buoy,  south  side  of  channel,  off 
Chippawa  point  in  3  feet  water. 

Oneida  Shoal,  red  spar  buoy,  north  side  of  channel  above  Cross 
over  Island  Lighthouse,  in  4  feet  water. 

Lower  Sister  Island  shoal,  black  spar  buoy  south  side  of  channel, 
and  north  side  of  the  Island  in  7  feet  water. 

Sister  Islands  Lighthouse,  on  Sister  Island,  St.  Lawrence  River, 
on  the  lower  of  the  Three  Sisters.  Fixed  white  light  visible  13  miles, 
43  feet  above  Lake  level,  shows  the  entire  horizon.  A  River  light, 
square  tow^r  rises  from  keeper's  dwelling,  both  built  of  limestone. 
Bears  from  Alexandria  Bay  NE,  distance  about  7  miles.  The  Islands 
are  on  the  south  side  of  the  channel. 

Sunken  Rock  Lighthouse,  on  Bush  or  Sunken  Rock  Island,  in  the 
St.  Lawrence  River.  Fixed  white  light  visible  :i  miles,  31  feet  above 
River  level.  A  River  light,  brick  beacon,  with  an  exterior  sheathing 
of  shingles,  whitewashed,  on  pier  of  protection,  one  fourth  of  a  mile 
north  of  Alexandria  Bay.     Shoal  is  on  north  side  of  channel. 

Sunken  Rock,  black  spar  buoy,  west  of  Sunken  Rock  Lighthouse, 
opposite  Alexandria  Bay. 

Frontinac  Shoal,  red  spar  buoy,  north  side  of  channel,  opposite 
Alexandria  Bay  in  3  feet  water. 

Channel  Buoy,  black  spar  buoy,  south  side  of  channel,  opposite 
Alexandria  Bay. 

Channel  Buoy,  red  spar  buoy,  north  side  of  channel,  opposite 
Pulman's  Island,  bearings  Sunken  Rock  Lighthouse  NE^E. 

Niagara  Shoal,  black  spar  buoy,  south  side  of  channel,  below 
Rock  Island  Lighthouse. 

Granite  State  Shoal,  red  spar  buoy,  north  side  of  channel,  below 
Rock  Island  Lighthouse. 

Rock  Island  Lighthouse,  in  St.  Lawrence  River.  Fixed  white 
light  visible  15  miles,  67  feet  above  River  level.  A  River  light, 
keeper's  dwelling  of  brick,  with  light  on  top,  bears  from  Alexandria 


%. 


i6 


Thompson!  s  Coast  Pilot. 


Bay  SW  by  W,  distant  about  7  miles.  Rock  Island  is  on  the  South 
side  of  the  channel. 

Rock  Island  Reef,  black  spar  buoy,  on  west  end  of  the  reef  off 
Rock  Island,  in  5  feet  water. 

Feather  Bed  Shoal,  black  ballon  buoy,  with  white  top,  west  end 
of  the  shoal  off  the  head  of  Cowleton  Island,  in  2  feet  water. 

Tibbett's  Point  Lighthouse,  on  the  Southeast  side  of  the  entrance 
to  St.  Lawrence  River,  Fixed  white  light  visible  15  miles,  67  feet 
above  Lake  level.  Lake  coast  and  River  light,  stone  dwelling,  con- 
nected by  covered  way  with  conical  tower,  whitewashed.  Bearings 
Galoo  Islands  SbyVV  19  miles;  Charity  Island  or  shoal  SWby  W 
distant  8  miles;    Pigeon  Island,  (Canada  Light)  Wj^S,  distant  10 

miles. 

Charity  Shoal,  black  iron  can  buoy  in  51^  feet  water.  This  buoy 
is  placed  on  the  Southeast  side  or  end  of  the  Shoal ;  2>^  fathoms  of 
water  close  to,  the  channel  is  to  the  Southward  or  Eastward  of  the 

buoy. 

Galoo  Island  Lighthouse,  on  the  west  point  of  Galoo  Island,  N. 
of  Lake  Coast  Light.  Fixed  white  light  visible  14  miles,  62  feet 
above  Lake  level.  Conical  tower  and  dwelling  of  limestone,  connec- 
ted by  covered  way  ;  a  shoal  N  by  VV,  distant  i  mile  is  marked  by  a 

buoy.  ' 

Galoo  Island  Shoal,  red  nun  buoy,  with  staff.  This  shoal  is 
about  100  yards  in  length  and  30  in  width,  with  a  depth  of  water 
varying  from  2>^  to  6  feet,  rocky  bottom.  The  buoy  in  2»^  fathoms 
of  water,  on  the  southeast  end,  and  northwest  side  of  the  shoal. 
Bearings  Galoo  Island  Lighthouse,  SbyE,  one  mile  Stony  Point 
Lighthouse,  ESE  8  miles. 

Sackett's  Harbor  Lighthouse,  on  the  middle  of  Horse  Island,  and 
west  of  Sackett's  Harbor,  N.  Y.  Fixed  white  light  visible  i3>^ 
miles,  49  feet  above  Lake  level,  a  harbor  light,  dwelling  with  square 
tower  attached,  of  brick.  The  Island  is  on  the  south  side  of  entrance 
to  harbor,  i  Yz  miles  west  of  Sackett's  Harbor,  and  is  connected  with 
the  main  land  by  a  narrow  spit,  visible  at  low  water.  Bearings 
Sackett's  Harbor,  E>^N,  i>^  miles.  Point  Peninsular,  WNW  5  miles. 
Stony  Point  Lighthouse,  on  Stony  Point,  N.  Y.     Fixed  varied  by 


atta 

be 

35 


atti 


K^*WTr5Sf»«ifWftv;^asas«^^t««a6^^ 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


17 


is  on  the  South 

I  of  the  reef  off 

ite  top,  west  end 
;et  water. 
;  of  the  entrance 
;5  miles,  67  feet 
le  dwelling,  con- 
ished.  Bearings 
shoal  SWbyW 
V^S,  distant  10 

ater.  This  buoy 
;  2%  fathoms  of 
Eastward  of  the 

[^aloo  Island,  N. 
[4  miles,  62  feet 
tnestone,  connec- 
le  is  marked  by  a 

r.  This  shoal  is 
I  depth  of  water 
y  m  2)4  fathoms 
le  of  the  shoal, 
lile   Stony  Point 

Eiorse  Island,  and 
light  visible  13^ 
elling  with  square 
1  side  of  entrance 
is  connected  with 
water.  Bearings 
ar,  WNW  5  miles. 
Fixed  varied  by 


white  flashes,  time  between  flashes  two  minutes,  visible  13  miles,  45 
feet  above  Lake  level.  Lake  coast  light,  square  tower  and  dwelling 
attached,  of  limestone.  Shore  rocky  and  dangerous,  at  .1  can  only 
be  approached  in  small  boats,  in  smooth  water.  Oswego  Light  SbyW 
35  miles,  bearings  Galoo  Island  Lighthouse,  N  by  W>^W,  7  miles. 

Oswego  Lighthouse,  on  west  pier  at  the  entrance  of  Oswego 
Harbor.  Fixed  white  light  visible  15  miles,  72  feet  above  Lake  level. 
Lake  Coast  and  Harbor  Light.  Octagonol  tower  and  oil  room 
attached,  of  lime  stone,  the  light  is  500  feet  from  Pier  head. 


COURSES  AND   DISTANCES  ON    LAKE  ONTARIO. 


From  Port  Dalhousie  to  the  Ducks  Lighthouse. 

EbyNj^N  136  miles;  thence  NE>^N  22  miles,  to  Nine  Mile 
Point  Lighthouse ;  thence  4  miles  along  the  shore  of  Simcoe  Island, 
to  abreast  of  Four  Mile  Point,  with  Snake  Island  red  light  to  port. 
The  channel  here  is  about  5^  of  a  mile  wide;  you  will  have  from  3 
to  4>^  fathoms  water.  Keep  Four  Mile  Point  well  aboard,  in  4^ 
fathoms ;  when  clear  of  the  point,  steer  for  Kingston :  haul  round  the 
west  point  of  the  harbor,  and  come  to  off  the  old  wooden  Lighthouse 
in  6  fathoms  water,  soft  bottom,  or  run  alongside  the  docks. 

Garden  Island  is  directly  opposite  Kingston  Bay,  and  is  the 
principal  timber  port. 

From  Port  Dalhousie  to  Oswego. 

Run  out  of  the  harbor  2  miles NNE;  thence  EbyNj^^N  30  miles; 
thence  EJ^N  northerly  106  miles,  to  Oswego. 

From  Oswego  to  Kingston  north  60  miles,  leaving  the  Real 
Ducks  Island  to  port.  Pigeon  Island  and  the  Charity  Shoals  to  star- 
board, also  Nine  Mile  Point  Lighthouse,  Siracoe  Island,  and  run  for 
Kingston  as  directed  before. 

From  Oswego  to  Long  Point,  Ont.,  NW^W  47  miles. 

From  Oswego  to  Galloo  Island  N|^E  30  miles;  thence  to  Tib- 
bett's  Point  NbyEj^E  19  miles. 


m 
3. 


1 


»f.j^9^>if&ir^ij&BS^»t/^Km*>3rilS^^»tSt^  4 


i8 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


From  False  Ducks  lo  Tibbett's  Point  NEbyE^E  24>^ 


miles. 


From  Real  Ducks  to  Tibbett's  Point  NEJ^N  19  miles.  Good 
holding  ground  under  the  Real  Ducks  Island  in  5  to  7  fathoms,  blue 
clay. 

From  Genesee  River  to  False  Duclcs  Island  NEj^lN  65  miles. 

From  Stony  Island  to  Oswego,  SSW  30  miles. 

From  Welland  Canal  to  Toronto  N>^W  29^^  miles. 

From  Welland  Canal  to  Credit  River  NNW^^W  27  miles. 

From  Niagara  to  Toronto  N\V  byN  30  miles. 

From   Port  Dalhousie  to  Genesee  River   Eighty-Six   and 
One-Half  miles,  as  follows: 

NNE  3  miles;  EbyNj^N  40  miles;  thence  Ej^S  southerly  17?^ 
miles;  thence  EbyS^S  19  miles,  to  Braddock's  Point;  thence  SE^ 
E  7  miles,  to  the  piers. 

Port  Dalhousie  Harbor 

Is  the  entrance  to  the  Welland  Canal.  This  is  an  easy  harbor  to 
make  In  beating  up  towards  the  harbor,  close  in,  keep  out  of  range 
of  the  ends  of  the  piers,  as  the  water  shoals  qi-ickly  inside  that  range. 
The  piers  are  3,000  feet  long,  200  feet  apart,  and  run  out  from  the 
bend  southwest  of  the  lock  N&S.  There  is  a  middle  ground  opposite 
the  bend  in  the  west  pier.  Vessels  can  pass  on  either  side  of  it. 
The  railroad  station  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbor,  12  miles  from 
Niagara  River. 

Sackelt's  Harbor  is  situated  on  the  SE  side  of  Black  River  Bay, 
and  W  byN  from  Point  Peninsula,  9  miles  distant  The  Lighthouse 
stands  on  a  rock,  called  Horse  Island,  at  the  southwestern  point  of 
Black  River  Bay,  i>^  miles  west  of  the  harbor.  It  shows  a  fixed 
bright  light.  To  enter  this  harbor  from  the  lake,  run  past  Stony  Point 
light,  and  follow  the  land  along,  keeping  the  starboard  hand  best 
aboard  to  clear  a  middle  ground  which  lays  off  the  south  end  of  Stony 
Island,  nearly  mid-channel,  haul  up  for  Horse  Island  Lighthouse,  pass 
it  pretty  close  to,  and  run  round  the  point  and  into  the  Bay  of  Sack- 
ett's.  There  is  a  good  channel  on  either  side  of  Great  Galloo,  Little 
Galloo  and  Stony  Island. 


^!!P««PW»'««WW 


g^ 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


19 


:  24)^  miles. 
)  miles.     Good 
7  fathoms,  blue 

^N  65  miles. 

;s. 

27  miles. 


;hty-Six   and 

southerly  i7j^ 
t ;  thence  SE^ 


easy  harbor  to 
ep  out  of  range 
iside  that  range, 
n  out  from  the 
ground  opposite 
ither  side  of  it. 
•,  12  miles  from 

lack  River  Bay, 
The  Lighthouse 
vestern  point  of 
t  shows  a  fixed 
past  Stony  Point 
ward  hand  best 
nth  end  of  Stony 
Lighthouse,  pass 
le  Bay  of  Sack- 
at  Galloo,  Little 


Salmon  River,  or  port  Ontario,  ao  miles  east  of  Oswego. 

Salmon  River,  or  Port  Ontario,  is  twenty  miles  NEbyE  from 
Oswego,  and  north  of  Mexico  Bay ;  has  two  good  piers,  with  plenty 
of  water.  The  Lighthouse  is  on  the  North  Pier  end,  is  52  feet  high, 
and  shows  a  white  light.  The  land  both  north  and  south  of  the  harbor 
is  very  low,  and  cannot  be  seen  at  any  great  distance. 

Big  Sodus  Bay  is  33  mile?  WSWi^S  of  Oswego,  and  36  miles 
E^N  from  Genesee  River— the  most  capacious  harbor  on  the  south 
shore  of  Lake  Ontario.  It  is  entered  from  the  lake  by  a  channel  470 
feet  wide,  between  piers  which  extend  out  into  13  feet  water.  The 
main  light  is  on  the  hill  to  the  westward  of  the  harbor,  and  the  beacon 
light  on  the  west  pier  head;  depth  of  water  going  in  9  to  12  feet, 
inside  the  bay  20  to  40  feet. 

Genesee  River  is  protected  by  piers  running  into  the  lake  2,000 
feet  NE  and  SW,  and  400  feet  apart.  To  run  in  between  the  piers, 
bring  the  pier  light  to  bear  SSE,  and  haul  up,  giving  the  west  pier  end 
a  berth  of  50  feet. 

Burlington  Canal  (Ontario)  light,  fixed,  visible  12  (rtiles,  on  the 
middle  of  the  south  pier,  at  the  entrance  to  Burlington  Bay,  Hamilton, 
Beacon  light  on  the  end  of  south  pier. 

To  enter  the  bay,  open  the  Beacon  light  about  handspike  wide 
with  the  main  or  inner  light,  and  run  in  between  the  piers;  thence 
about  WSW  up  to  abreast  of  Hamilton  docks,  4>^  miles.  Depth  of 
water  in  the  bay  from  2  to  5,  7,  9  and  12  fathoms. 

Toronto  Harbor,  Ontario. 

This  spacious  bay  is  one  of  the  best  harbors  on  Lake  Ontario 
It  is  nearly  circular,  and  formed  by  the  mainland  on  the  north  and  a 
long,  low  narrow  spit  of  land  on  the  east,  south  and  southwest,  called 
the  Peninsula  or  Island.  It  extends  in  a  southwesterly  direction  from 
the  highlands,  in  the  township  of  Scarboro',  upon  which  trees  of 
stunted  growth  are  thickly  scattered.  Thus  is  inclosed  a  beautiful 
basin,  about  2^  miles  in  diameter,  capable  of  containing  a  large  fleet 

of  vessels. 

To  run  into  Toronto  Bay,  give  Gibraltar  Lighthouse  a  berth  of  1 
mile,  and  run  in  north  for  the  harbor  lights,  which  keep  in  range  until 


i 


*. 


:  <;eeSflS<£(WdnB^ff) 


'f^'  "' 


20 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


^ 


well  up  to  the  wharf ;  then  follow  the  buoys  round,  leaving  them  on 
the  starboard  hand,  two  red  buoys  iO  the  westward,  and  two  white 
buoys  to  the  eastward ;  thence  straight  up  the  bay,  in  line  with  the 
wharfs,  or  come  to  in  any  part  oJ  the  bay,  in  1 8  to  2  a  feet  water. 
The  depth  of  water  between  the  piers  and  the  buoys  is  1 1  to  1 2  feet, 
and  is  being  deepened  every  year.  A  sandy  shoal  stretches  into  the 
lake  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  in  a  SW  direction  off  Gibraltar  Point,  and 
continues  along  the  west  side  of  the  island,  to  the  entrance  of  the 
bay,  due  north,  to  the  buoys,  at  an  average  distance  of  a  quarter  of 
a  mile  from  the  island,  with  5  to  6  feet  water  on  it,  and  at  the  point 
drops  off  suddenly  to  12  and  20  feet. 

Danger.— There  is  a  large  boulder  stone,  in  5  feet  water,  nearly 
midway  between  the  Queen's  and  Garrison  wharfs,  and  a  little  to  the 
south  of  them.  To  make  lee  under  the  island,  come  to  in  from  5  to 
6  fathoms. 

Note.— In  running  up  the  lake  for  Toronto  Harbor,  keep  2^ 
miles  from  the  shore,  so  as  to  open  Gibraltar  light  from  the  projection 
of  the  island,  where  the  highest  trees  are.  A  channel  has  formed  at 
the  east  end  of  the  bay,  with  5  or  6  feet  water  in  it,  by  the  force  of 
the  sea  in  heavy  gales.  It  was  proposed  some  few  years  ago  to  cut  a 
channel  through  here,  but  was  given  up,  supposing  it  would  spoil  the 
western  entrance.  It  will  now  be  proved  by  this  break  in  the  narrow 
neck  of  the  Peninsula,  whether  it  will  have  that  effect  at  the  western 
entrance  or  not. 

The    Port  of   Liverpool  or    Pickering,    Formerly   Called 

Frenchman's  Bay. 

This  port  is  26  miles  NEi/^E  of  Toronto.  It  is  formed  by  a  bay 
running  into  the  land,  and  separated  from  the  laktf  by  a  sandy  and 
gravelly  beach,  through  which  is  a  cut  100  feet  wide. 

The  harbor  itself  is  well  sheltered,  being  completely  land-locked ; 
but  from  the  foulness  of  the  bottom  (principally  from  weeds)  an  anchor 
will  not  hold  during  a  hard  blow. 

The  average  depth  of  water  inside  the  bay  is  9  feet  6  inches ;  at 
the  outer  mouth,  between  the  piers,  1 1  feet  6  inches ;  and  the  inner 
mouth  7  feet  6  inches. 

Through  the  cut  into  this  harbor,  a  current  runs  in  and  out  with 
great  regularity,  once  in  about  every  four  minutes. 


H-ffWTMIW!<BH|g!B.'-'- 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


31 


leaving  them  on 
and  two  white 
n  line  with  the 
0  23  feet  water, 
is  II  to  13  feet, 
retches  into  the 
altar  Point,  and 
entrance  of  the 
of  a  quarter  of 
nd  at  the  point 

•et  water,  nearly 

td  a  little  to  the 

to  in  from  5  to 


irbor,  keep  2)^ 
m  the  projection 
1  has  formed  at 

by  the  force  of 
:ars  ago  to  cut  a 

would  spoil  the 
ak  in  the  narrow 
t  at  the  western 


rmerly   Called 

formed  by  a  bay 
\  by  a  sandy  and 

tely  land-locked ; 
veeds)  an  anchor 

feet  6  inches ;  at 
s ;  and  the  inner 

s  in  and  out  with 


Whitby  Harbor. 

Six  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Liverpool,  and  34  m'les  NEbyE  of 
Toronto,  one  of  the  best  and  most  secure  harbors  on  the  north  shore. 
It  stands  near  the  center  of  a  deep  bay,  between  Raby  Head,  on  the 
east,  and  Scarboro'  Heights  on  tlie  west,  and  three  and  a  half  or  four 
miles  north  of  a  line  drawn  between  these  two  points.  The  harbor  is 
formed  by  a  strong  breakwater  of  crib  work,  stretching  across  the  head 
of  the  bay,  by  which  it  is  separated  from  the  lake,  and  forms  a  large 
basin,  the  entrance  to  which  is  at  its  eastern  extremity,  between  piers 
running  south  a  considerable  distance  into  the  lake,  250  feet  apart, 
with  13  to  14  feet  water  in  the  channel.  The  west  pier  is  much  long- 
er than  the  east  pier. 

A  strong  tide  or  current  sets  in  and  out  of  this  harbor,  which  at 
times  is  so  strong  as  to  turn  a  vessel's  head  round,  when  entering  with 
a  light  wind.  To  enter  the  harbor,  run  through  between  the  piers  and 
haul  up  for  the  red  warehouse,  and  round  to  with  your  head  to  the 
S\V,  in  14  feet  water. 

Danger.— Midway  between  Whitby  and  Liverpool,  there  is  a 
shoal  in  shore,  one  mile  west  of  the  township  line. 

Oshawa. 
The  Port  of  Oshawa  is  6  miles  east  of  Whitby.  It  is  situated  in 
the  bend  of  a  small  bay,  and  consists  of  a  well  constructed  pier  run- 
ning out  from  the  mainland  into  10  feet  water.  At  the  south  end  of 
the  pier  is  a  storehouse,  painted  red,  and  under  the  angle  formed  by 
the  roof  is  placed  a  large  lamp,  which  serves  the  purpose  of  a  light- 
house. 

This  port  is  well  protected  from  any  wind  north  of  E  and  W,  but 
is  exposed  to  southerly  winds.  The  west  side  of  the  Bay  of  Oshawa 
is  formed  by  a  high  clay  bank,  almost  perpendicular  towards  the  lake, 
on  the  extreme  point  of  which  stand  three  or  four  trees. 

Danger.— The  east  point  is  called  Oshawa  Island,  bearing  south 
by  east  from  the  pier.  The  water  here  is  very  shoal,  and  a  reef  of 
large  boulders  extends  into  the  lake  SE,  for  400  /ards,  which  must  be 
given  a  wide  berth.  From  the  point  of  land  about  midway  between 
Whitby  and  Oshawa  there  is  another  reef  of  large  boulders  running 
out  ESE  into  the  lake.  ^ 


23 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


Port  Darlington 

Is  8  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Oshawa,  50  miles  iMV.  ol  Toronto,  and 
a9  miles  WbyS  of  Cobourg. 

This  port  has  been  much  improved  by  extending  the  piers  into  13 
feet  water,  and  dredging  the  land-locked  l)a»in  within,  where  vessels 
drawing  9  feet  or  less  may  lie  in  safety  in  any  weather.  The  west 
pier  extends  about  30  feet  farther  south  than  the  east  pior,  w  b 
breaks  the  rolling  sea  from  the  SVV.  The  light  is  on  the  en  pier, 
and  visible  but  a  short  distance. 

One  and  one-half  miles  west  of  Darlington,  is  Rab>  >{'*id,  a  higd 
clay  bluff  point,  destitute  of  trees  or  bushes. 


;.  1 


Bond  Head  or  Port  of  Newcastle. 

Between  4  and  5  miles,  E  byN  of  Darlington,  is  the  Port  of  Bond 
Head.  It  consists  of  a  pier  run  out  into  10  feet  water ;  but  from  its 
exposed  situation,  can  only  be  approached  in  fine  weather,  or  when 
the  wind  is  off  shore. 

Danger. — Four  miles  east  of  this  port,  there  is  a  large  boulder, 
some  distance  in  the  lake,  called  the  Peach  Stone,  and  four  miles  east 
of  this  again,  there  is  a  rtcf  of  boulders,  extending  300  yards  into  the 
lake,  in  a  southerly  direction  off  the  headland.  Course  to  clear  these 
reefs,  bound  to  Cobourg,  F_^N,  20  miles,  giving  the  shore  a  berth  of 
I  mile;  thence  NEbyE><JE  for  Port  Hope,  and  ENE^E  for  Co- 
bourg. 

Port  Hope 

Is  83  miles  E^N  of  Darlingtoi.,.  which  is  formed  by  running  two  rows 
of  piers  into  13  feet  water,  having  a  basin  at  their  inner  or  northern 
extremity.  During  a  SE  or  SW  gale,  this  port  cannot  be  made  by 
large  vessels,  drawing  over  9  '■■j:\  witer,  with  safety,  owing  to  the 
tremendoi  .;•  swell  rolling  in  from  ^he  iaku  ,  besides  vy'>i -h^  the  piers 
being  only  125  feet  apart  at  tl  -  t..,  ^id  the  basin  very  small, 
there  is  no  room  to  check  the  speed  of  a  vessel,  or  to  snub  her  with- 
out danger  to  herself  or  others.  During  a  southerly  gale,  also,  the 
swell  in  the  basin  is  so  great  as  to  cause  vessels  to  lay  uneasy.  Jrom 
any  wind  N  of  E  or  W,  this  is  a  perfectly  safe  and  snug  harbor. 


IkmnMon's  CoMi  Pilot. 


n 


oi  Toronto,  and 

the  piers  into  I3 
n,  where  vessels 
ither.  The  we:it 
east  pior,  W'  i  b 
on  the  e  111  pier, 

.b>  >{*id,  a  hi^;u 


the  Port  of  Bond 
er  ;  but  from  its 
.ve.ither,  or  when 

I  a  large  boulder, 
d  four  miles  east 
00  yards  into  the 
rse  to  clear  these 
shore  a  berth  of 
:NE;^E  for  Co- 


'unning  two  rows 
nner  or  northern 
not  be  made  by 
ety,  owing  to  the 
whifl^  the  piers 
asiin  very  small, 
to  snub  her  with- 
ly  gale,  also,  the 
|r  uneasy.  J"rom 
lug  harbor. 


Cob'  wrg. 

The  Harbor  of  Cobourg  is  situated  seven  i  'iles  east  of  l*ort  Hop«, 
and  is  formed  of  pier  work.  A  shifting  bar  of  saiuJ  '«  thrown  up  dur 
ing  a  S\V  gale,  which  tenders  the  entrance  to  it  still  aiore  dangerous 
than  I'ort  Hope  for  vessels  of  deep  drau,  t.  The  'arbor  is  more 
capacious,  and  when  once  entered  more  sc  ure  thai,  that  of  i'ort 
Hope,  having  a  second  or  inner  basin  with  plc/i'v  of  water,  where  no 
sea  can  injure  or  disturb  the  vessels  lying  there  The  mouth  of  the 
harbor  is  130  feet  wide,  with  water  varying  from  10  to  13  feet.  The 
Lighthouse  is  on  the  east  pier,  20  feet  high,  and  visi'  le8  mil  -s. 

Danger.— In  entering  this  port,  at  night,  care  m  st  be  taken  not 
to  run  too  close  to  the  south  end  of  the  west  pier,  where  broken  crib 
work  and  numerous  piles  project  nearly  100  feet  farther  nto  the  lake 
than  the  end  of  the  east  pier. 

Smoai,.— Midway  between  Port  Hope  and  Cobour  <here  is  a 
dangerous  shoal,  called  Gull  Island,  which  is  about  two  miles  long, 
and  one  mile  from  the  shore.  It  is  sometimes  bare,  nd  h  s  a  Light- 
house erected  upon  it,  45  feet  high,  showing  a  bright,  fi  ed  white 
light,  and  visible  10  to  \2  miles.  In  passing  this  shoal  give  t  a  berth 
of  two  miles. 

Grafton. 

This  village  is  about  8  miles  east  of  Cobourg,  has  a  pier  1  in  out 
into  10  feet  water. 

Colborne 

Is  a  village  8  or  9  miles  below  Grafton  ;  has  a  pier  for  the  accommo- 
dation of  trading  craft.  Both  these  ports  are  exposed  to  the  1  eavy 
seas  of  the  lake,  and  afford  no  shelter  to  vessels,  except  when  the 

wind  is  off  shore. 

Danger.— One  mile  west  of  Colborne  there  is  a  projecting  point, 
off  which  is  a  reef  of  boulders.  In  approaching  Colborne  give  the 
point  a  good  berth. 

Presqu'ile  Harbor. 

The  West  Bluff  of  Presqu'ile  is  24  miles  fiJ^N  of  Cobourg,  well 
wo.>ded,  and  has  90  feet  water  close  in  shore.     Five  miles  NEbyE 


1 


I 


♦ 


.-^•''"' 


24 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


off  this  point  brings  you  abreast  of  the  Lighthouse,  'vhich  is  67  feet 
high,  and  shows  a  bright  white  light,  visible  12  to  15  miles.  Give 
the  Lighthouse  point  a  berth  of  half  a  mile,  to  clear  a  shoal  that  sets 
off  from  it,  in  a  southerly  direction,  haul  up  N  byE  for  the  lone  pine 
tree,  until  the  inner  range  lights  are  in  line ;  then  haul  up  SW,  keep- 
ing within  fifty  yards  north  of  the  beach  of  the  first  range  light  station, 
as  there  is  18  to  22  feet  water  close  to  it.  When  past  this  point  corae 
to,  between  the  two  range  points,  in  18  feet  water. 

Danger. —Between  the  main  Lighthouse,  on  the  SE  point,  and 
the  range  light  on  the  NE  point,  extending  in  a  northeasterly  direc- 
tion, is  a  shoal  ^  of  a  mile  long,  and  forms  a  triangular  point,  called 
the  Middle  Ground,  with  4  to  6  feet  water  on  it,  which  you  have  to 
haul  round  in  going  into  the  harbor. 

To  the  north  of  the  Lighthouse  built  on  the  NE  point,  running 
out  from  the  mainland,  there  is  a  low  marshy  spit,  destitute  of  timber, 
and  easily  recognized  by  a  large  dead  elm  tree,  bearing  north  of  the 
Lighthouse.  This  point  is  called  Elm  Tree  Point.  The  channel  here 
is  about  half  a  mile  wide.  WNVV  of 'the  second  range  light,  there  is 
another  small  shoal,  called  Four  Acre  shoal,  nearly  half  a  mile  from 
the  shore,  with  plenty  of  water  all  around  it.  Two  miles  ESE  of  the 
main  Lighthouse,  there  is  a  dangerous  rocky  shoal  in  the  lake,  with  3 
to  5  feet  water  on  it.  It  is  to  the  eastward  of  the  course  from  the 
Lighthouse  to  Scotch  Bonnet.  SE  from  this  shoal  is  another  small 
shoal,  with  5  feet  water  on  it.  These  shoals  obstruct  the  entrance  to 
Weller's  Bay. 

South  Bay  Point. 

Good  anchorage  and  shelter  can  be  found  inside  South  Bay 
Point ;  to  make  it,  keep  the  Outer  Duck  Island  to  the  eastward  and 
the  Inner  Duck  to  the  northward,  and  come  to  off  the  NE  point,  or 
make  fast  to  the  dock.  In  leaving  this  anchorage,  bound  for  King- 
ston, if  the  wind  is  favorable,  a  passage  can  be  made  by  passing 
through  the  Upper  Gap,  between  Indian  Point  on  the  west  and  Am- 
herst Island  on  the  east.  Steer  NbyE,  till  between  Amherst  Island 
and  the  mainland.  Thence  ENE,  till  north  of  the  Brother's  Ishuds. 
Tiience  east  to  Kingston.  Good  anchorage  can  be  found  on  the  NE 
side  of  the  Real  Duck  Island. 


lVIlL. 


»^.,>,M.^pw-il»a'J^<ii.43W^.-'.^VlJk>Jft^A^J^ 


Thompson! 5  Coast  Pilot. 


25 


'vhich  is  67  feet 
15  miles.  Give 
I  shcal  that  sets 
for  the  lone  pine 
j1  up  SW,  keep- 
ige  light  station, 
I  this  point  cbrae 

le  SE  point,  and 
theasterly  direc- 
lar  point,  called 
[lich  you  have  to 

;  point,  running 
stitute  of  timber, 
ng  north  of  the 
Phe  channel  here 
ge  light,  there  is 
half  a  mile  from 
liles  ESE  of  the 

the  lake,  with  3 
course  from  the 

is  another  small 
t  the  entrance  to 


side  South  Bay 
:he  eastward  and 
the  NE  point,  or 
jound  for  King- 
nade  by  passing 
le  west  and  Am- 
Amherst  Island 
Brother's  Ishi.ds. 
found  on  the  NE 


Kingston. 

Kingston  Harbor  is  one  of  the  best  harbors  on  Lake  Ontario. 
There  are  three  channels  by  which  it  may  be  made  from  the  lake  ; 
The  Bateau  Channel,  between  Wolf  and  Long  Island  and  Simcoe 
Island,  leaving  Hare  Island  also  to  starboard,  as  you  enter.  This 
channel  has  from  12  to  18  feet  water  in  it.  The  south  channel, 
between  Simcoe  Island  and  Snake  Island.  This  is  a  good  deep  chan- 
nel ;  run  through,  giving  Simcoe  Island  a  berth  of  ^  to  5^  of  a  mile, 
and  when  abreast  of  Four  Mile  Point  haul  off  for  Kingston.  The 
North  or  Old  Ship  Channel  is  the  best  channel  of  the  three,  and  has 
4  to  10  fathoms  water.  To  run  this  channel  haul  off  towards  Am- 
herst Island,  and  when  Cedar  Island  (which  is  close  under  Fort 
Henry)  is  open  with  Snake  Island,  steer  for  Fort  Henry,  and  run  up 
to  the  harbor;  you  leave  Snake  Island  to  starboard  and  Salmon  Island 
to  port. 


COURSES  AND  DISTANCES  ON  LAKE  ONTARIO. 

(According  to  the  Chart  of  Captain  Ford,  U.  S.  Navy.) 

From  Sackett's  Harbor  to  mid-channel  between  Stony  Point  and 
Stony  Island  SW  byW  12  mi!es. 

From  Stony  Point  to  False  Ducks  WNW  25  miles. 

From  Fort  Tomkins  to  Real  Ducks  W^N  22  miles. 

From  NE  end  of  Stony  Island  to  the  West  end  of  Grenadier  Is- 
land NNW  1 1  miles. 

From  Stony  Point  to  Long  Point  W^^N  45  ™iles. 

From  Stony  Point  to  Burlington  Bay  and  Hamilton   180  miles. 

From  Stony  Point  to  the  Devil's  Nose  WSW>^W  95  miles. 

From  Stony  Island  to  Fort  Niagara  WbyS54:S  14S  miles. 

From  Snake  Island  to  Navy  Point  NEbyE  6  miles. 

From  Snake  Island  to  Four- Mile  Point  E  i^^  miles. 

From  Three  Sisters  to  Snake  Island,  ESE  4>^  miles. 

From  the  NE  end  of  Stony  Island  to  middle  of  Charity  Shoal 
NNW  14  miles. 

From  Oswego  to  Real  Ducks  N  35  miles. 

From  Oswego  to  Long  Point  NW^W  40  miles. 


>ji> 


26 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


14 


From  Oswego  to  Bay  Quinte  N  by W  47  miles. 

From  Nine-Mile  Point  east  of  Oswego  to  Stony'Point  NbyEj^E 
a  I  miles;  and  from  Nine-Mile  Point  west  of  Oswego  to  Stony  Point 
NE1/2N  zs%  m\\ts. 

From  Oswego  to  Thirty-Mile  Point  W  100  miles. 

From  Oswego  to  Big  Sodus  WSW  9  miles;  thence  SWbyW^^W 
17  miles. 

From  Oswego  to  Toronto  W^N  135  miles. 

From  mid-channel  between  Point  Peninsula  and  Stony  Island  to 
Fifth  Town  Point,  Upper  Gap,  Bay  Quinte,  WNW  26  miles. 

From  the  anchorage  at  the  Real  Ducks  to  Nine-Mile  Point,  off 
Simcoe  Island,  NbyE  iS  miles. 

From  Real  Ducks  to  Upper  Gap  of  the  Bay  Quinte  NNW|^W 
14  miles. 

From  anchorage  at  the  Real  Ducks  to  south  side  of  False  Ducks, 
W  i%  miles. 

From  False  Ducks  to  Upper  Gap  N  9  miles. 

From  mid-channel  between  the  Real  and  False  Ducks  to  Ship 
Island,  between  Snake  Island  and  Salmon  Island,  NEbyN  22  miles. 

From  Long  Point  to  the  channel  between  the  Scotch  Bonnet  and 
Nicholson's  Island  WNW  17  miles. 

From  Long  Point  to  Toronto  W  byS  100  miles. 

From  Toronto  to  Burlington  Bay  SW  32  miles. 

From  Toronto  to  Fort  Niagara  SEbyS  28^  miles. 

From  Burlington  Bay  to  Niagara  River  E  byS  3a  miles. 

From  False  Ducks  to  Long  Point  WSW  25  miles. 

From  Genesee  River  to  Presqu'ile  N  55  miles. 

From  Genesee  River  to  mid-channel  between  Real  and  False 
Ducks  SW  73  miles. 

From  Big  Sodus  to  entrance  of  the  channel  between  the  Real  and 
False  Ducks  NNE  50  miles. 

From  Devil's  Nose  to  Toronto  W  byN^N  60  miles. 

From  Niagara  River  to  Presqu'ile  NEbyE  75  miles. 

From  Genesee  River  to  Port  Hope  NW  byN  58  miles. 

From  Thirty-Mile  Point  to  Fort  Niagara  WSW  26  miles. 

From  Tibbett's  Point  to  Jordan  Point  W  byN>^N  5  miles. 


ill 


l'i|«W!tllSWJJlKi!r!.".>''-.v''»-J! 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


27 


Point  NbyEj^E 
;o  to  Stony  Point 


ice  SWbyW>^W 

[  Stony  Island  to 

\6  miles. 

e-Mile  Point,  off 

>uinte  NNWI^W 

:  of  False  Ducks, 


e  Ducks  to  Ship 
BbyN  22  miles, 
otch  Bonnet  and 


From  Tibbett's  Point  to  Pigeon  Island  W^S  8  miles. 

From  Gravelly  Point  to  Tibbett's  Point  SWi^S  3 -miles. 

From  Grenadier  Island  to  anchorage  off  the  Real  Ducks  NEbyE 
II  miles. 

From  Upper  Gap  of  Bay  Quinte  to  the  Three  Sister  Islands,  at 
the  lower  end  of  Amherst  Island,  ENE  9  miles. 

From  Duffin's  Bay  to  Niagara  S  byW  40  miles. 

From  Big  Sodus  to  Presqu'ile  NWbyN  60  miles. 

From  Big  Sodus  to  Long  Point  N  byW  38  miles. 

From  Nine-Mile  Point,  west  of  Oswego,  to  Braddock's  Point 

W^S  52  miles. 

Oakville. 

The  Port  of  Oakville  is  2  miles  W^S  from  Toronto,  and  14 
miles  NEbyN  from  Burlington  Canal.  The  piers  are  100  feet  apart, 
and  run  out  nearly  north  and  south  into  the  lake. 

Danger  — Between  the  port  and  Port  Credit  there  is  a  shoal,  and 
numerous  large  boulders,  extending  a  considerable  distance  out  from 
the  shore,  which  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  a  mile. 
Wellington  Square  and  Nelson. 

These  small  ports  are  situated  between  Oakville  and  the  Burling- 
ton Canal.  Their  docks  run  out  into  10  feet  water.  No  protection 
from  east  and  south  or  southeast  winds. 


I 


2S. 

2  miles. 

s. 

Real  and  False 

een  the  Real  and 

liles. 
niles. 
(  miles. 
26  miles. 
N  5  miles. 


SAILING  DIRECTIONS  FOR  LAKE  ONTARIO. 

(From  U.S.  Survey.    All  bearines  are  true,  and  distance*  Statute  Mile*.) 


From  Port  Dalhousie  to  Kingston. 

When  4  miles  north  of  Port  Dalhousie  light,  steer  EbyNj^N 
for  131  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  south  of  False  Ducks  light,  when 
steer  NE  by  N  on  range  of  Snake  Island  light,  passing  ^  of  a 
mile  to  the  westward  of  Simcoe  Island  light  for  22^  miles  to  a  point 
one  mile  Nj^W  of  Simcoe  Island  light  j  thence  N^W  for  2>^  miles, 
until  Snake  Island  light  bears  SEi^  miles;  thence  Eby^^N, 
keeping  within  one-quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  north  shore  for  4  miles 
until  abreast  of  Kingston. 


# 
^ 


f%. 


.:m" 


28 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


r 
4 


1  4? 
I?? 


From  Port  Dalhousie  to  Cape  Vincent. 

When  4  miles  north  of  Port  Dalhousie  light,  steer  EbyN^N 
131  miles,  to  a  point  4  miles  south  of  False  Ducks  light;  thence  NE 
J^E,  passing  Pigeon  Island  light  2}^  miles  to  port,  and  Tibbitt's 
Point  light  one  mile  to  the  starboard  for  28  miles,  until  abreast  of 
Cape  Vincent.  Note  that  this  route  passes  half  a  mile  north  of 
Charity  Shoal,  upon  which  there  is  only  five  feet  water.     See  buoys. 

From  Port  Dalhousie  to  Oswego. 

When  4  miles  north  of  Port  Dalhousie  light,  steer  E  by  N^N  42 
miles,  until  Thirty  Mile  Point  bears  south  6^  miles  distant;  thence 
due  east  99  miles  to  a  point  one  mile  north  of  Oswego  Lighthouse. 

From  Niagara  River  to  Kingston. 

When  one  mile  NW  from  Fort  Niagara,  steer  north  three  miles; 
thence  EbyN^N  121  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  south  from  False 
Ducks  Lighthouse ;  thence  as  above  for  Kingston  from  Port  Dalhousie. 

From  Niagara  River  to  Cape  Vincent. 
When  one  mile  NW  from  Fort  Niagara  light,  steer  north   three 
miles;  thence  E by  N^N  121  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  south  from 
False  Ducks ;  thence  as  above  Irom  Port  Dalhousie. 

From  Niagara  River  to  Oswego. 

When  one  mile  NW  from  Fort  Niagara  light,  steer  north  three 
miles;  thence  EbyN^N  32  miles  until  Thirty  Mile  Point  Lighthouse 
bears  south  6yi  miles  distant ;  thence  due  east  99  miles,  to  a  point 
one  mile  north  of  Oswego  light. 

From  Oak  Orchard  to  Kingston. 

When  two  miles  north  of  Oan  Orchard  light,  steer  NEby  E^E 
7  7  »^  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  south  of  False  Ducks  light ;  thence  as 
above  from  Port  Dalhouse. 

From  Oak  Orchard  to  Cape  Vincent. 

When  two  miles  north  of  Oak  Orchard  light,  steer  NE  by  E^E 
77  j4  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  south  of  False  Ducks ;  thence  as  above 
from  Port  Dalhousie. 


of  th 
soutl 
to  K 


the( 
from 
Cap( 


the 

threi 

tOWc 

^% 
Dall 


the  I 
bitt' 

3/4E 


Pig( 
of  i 
for 
W 
Kir 


mil( 
E  i 
thei 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


29 


ent. 

teer  EbyN^N 
;ht ;  thence  NE 
t,  and  Tibbitt's 
until  abreast  of 
,  mile  north  of 
r.     See  buoys. 

I. 

r  EbyN^N  42 
distant;  thence 
ego  Lighthouse. 

1. 

)rth  three  miles; 
)uth  from  False 
I  Port  Dalhousie. 

:ent. 

eer  north  three 

liles  south  from 


:eer  north  three 
'oint  Lighthouse 
nles,  to  a  point 


;er  NEbyE^E 
light;  thence  as 

ent. 

;er  NEbyE^E 
thence  as  above 


From  Charlotte  to  Kingston. 

When  three  miles  NE^N  from  Genesee  Beacon,  and  in  range 
of  the  Genesee  lights,  steer  NE^N  56^4  miles  to  a  point  4  miles 
south  from  False  Ducks  Light ;  thence  as  above  from  Port  Dalhousie 
to  Kingston. 

From  Charlotte  to  Cape  Vincent. 

When  three  miles  NE^N  from  Genesee  Beacon,  and  in  range  of 
the  Genesee  lights,  steer  NE^N  56^^  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  south 
from  False  Ducks  light;  thence  as  above  from  Port  Dalhousie  to 
Cape  Vincent. 

From  Big  Sodus  to  Kingston. 

When  two  miles  Nj^E  from  the  outer  beacon,  and  in  range  of 
the  two  beacons  at  Big  Sodus,  steer  N  by  E^E  61^  miles  to  a  point 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  west  of  Simcoe  Island  light,  when  steer 
toward  Simcoe  Island  light  NEby  N  for  i)^  miles  to  a  point  one  mile 
N^W  of  Simcoe  Island  light;  thence  to  Kingston  as  above  from  Port 

Dalhousie. 

From  Big  Sodus  to  Cape  Vincent. 

When  two  miles  NJ4;E  from  the  outer  beacon,  and  in  range  of 
the  two  beacons  at  Big  Sodus,  steer  NEbyN^N  62  miles,  until  Tib- 
bitt's Point  light  bears  east  one  and  a  half  miles  distant ;  thence  NE 
%E  4  miles,  until  abreast  of  Cape  Vincent. 

From  Oswego  to  Kingston,  Ontario. 

When  one  mile  north  of  Oswego  light,  steer  Njf^W,  passing 
Pigeon  Island  light  ^  mile  to  starboard,  for  461^  miles,  to  a  point  ^ 
of  a  mile  west  from  Simcoe  Island  light;  thence  NE  by  N  on  range 
for  Snake  Island  light,  (red)  for  i^^  miles,  to  a  point  onejnile  N^ 
W  of  Simcoe  Island;  thence  as  directed  from  Port  Dalhousie  to 
Kingston. 

From  Oswego  to  Cape  Vincent. 

When  one  mile  north  of  Oswego  light,  steer  due  north  28^ 
miles,  to  a  point  1%  miles  west  from  Galoo  Island  light ;  thence  NN 
E  16  miles,  till  Tibbitt's  point  light  bears  east  i>^  miles  distant 
thence  NE^E  4  miles,  until  abreast  of  Cape  Vincent. 


^mis^-vumsmit.- 


[' 


30  Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 

N.  B. — A  good  opportunity  's  afforded  masters  of  vessels  to  test 
the  working  of  their  compasses,  while  on  their  course  north  of  Simcoe 
Island  light,  by  dropping  upon  the  range  of  the  lights  of  Pigeon  and 
Simcoe  Islands,  about  two  miles  to  the  south  of  Pigeon  Island,  and 
sailing  upon  the  range  of  the  two  lights.  The  true  range  of  the  two 
lights  is  N3''W.  The  magnetic  variation  on  shore  in  that  vicinity  is 
about  7°W.  When  sailing  upon  this  range  the  course,  as  indicated  by 
the  needle,  should  be  either  N^^E,  or  S^W. 

Magnetic  Variations. 

Port  Dalhousie  4°  22'  W. 

Charlotte,  Genesee  River,  4°  32'  W. 

Big  Sodus 6°  50'  W. 

Salmon  River 8°  09'  W. 

Sackett's  Harbor 8°  15' W. 

Amherst  Island 7°  12' W. 

Timber  Island 7°  19'  W. 

Dangers. 

The  following  description  of  the  most  important  shoals  and  spits 
in  the  way  of  general  navigation  from  Port  Dalhousie  to  Kingston, 
and  to  Cape  Vincent,  will  be  of  great  assistance  to  the  navigator. 
There  are  many  shoals  and  spits  at  the  mouth  of  Niagara  River,  and 
in  the  northeastern  end  of  Lake  Ontario.  They  are  accurately  located 
on  the  U.  S  Chart  of  Lake  Ontario  as  far  as  the  U.  S.  Survey  goes. 
At  Fort  Niagara  a  spit  extends  for  a  mile  to  the  NW  and  to  the  north. 
There  is  a  11  foot  shoal  2^2  miles  NVV  froff<  Fort  Niagara  light,  and  a 
13  foot  shoal  lies  3  miles  NWbyN  from  the  same  point.  Other  Ifss 
dangerous  shoals  exist  in  this  vicinity.  From  Calf  Island,  the  SW 
end  of  Stoney  Island,  a  spit  extends  SW  1^  miles,  with  only  10  feet 
water  on  it.  Charity  shoal,  with  only  5  feet  water,  bears  SEby  E  3 
miles  distant  from  Pigeon  Island  light,  and  SWbyW  7^  miles  from 
Tibbitts  Point  light.  Spits  extend  from  Long  Point,  from  Bear  Point, 
and  from  the  western  point  of  Grenadier  Island.  An  extensive  shoal, 
with  only  4  feet  water  on  it,  lies  2  miles  WSW  from  Snake  Island 
light,  and  2  miles  NW  byN)^N  from  Simcoe  Island  light.    Snake  Is- 


land 
feet 
mile 
from 


AD 


are  I 

entrj 
abov 
heig 
harb 

bear 
the! 
The 
900 
thel 
fronc 
bear 
aboi 
und( 

entr 
32  I 
towe 
blufl 
the 

entr 
feet 
Frai 


'^*^«-^ 


,,„,,, ,  vMris^MBHjfaawJifea  J^afoi^JMrdKaSTrg^ 


Thompson's  Coast  IHlot. 


3« 


[)f  vessels  to  test 
north  of  Sinicoe 
;  of  Pigeon  and 
;eon  Island,  and 
■;inge  of  the  two 
I  that  vicinity  is 
:,  as  indicated  by 


t°  22'  W. 

1°  32'  w. 
5°  50'  W. 
8°  09'  W. 
8°  15'  VV. 
7°  12'  W. 
7°  19'  W. 


\  shoals  and  spits 
lie  to  Kingston, 

the  navigator, 
agara  River,  and 
ccurately  located 

S.  Survey  goes, 
and  to  the  north, 
igara  light,  and  a 
oint.  Other  It-ss 
f  Island,  the  SW 
with  only  10  feet 

bears  SEby  E  3 
S  lY^,  miles  from 
from  Bear  Point, 
!  extensive  shoal, 
im  Snake  Island 
light.    Snake  Is- 


land and  Snake  Island  Light  are  connected  by  shoal  water.     Two  12 
feet  shoals  lie  W  byS^^S  from  Brown  Point  light,  respectively  ;  half  a 
mile  S  byE  from  the  penitentiary,  and  half  a  mile  from  shore  south 
from  the  western  end  of  the  city  of  Kingston. 
Note. — See  buoy  list  for  shoals. 


ADDITIONAL  LIGHTHOUSES  ON  THE  AMERICAN 

SHORE. 


In  addition  to  the  list  of  Lighthouses  on  pages  14,  13,  16  and  17, 
are  the  following  on  the  American  shore  of  Lake  Ontario  : 

Oswego  Pier  Head  Light,  near  the  end  of  the  west  pier,  at  the 
entrance  to  Oswego  Harbor.  Fixed  red  light  visible  10  miles,  22  feet 
above  lake  level.  Frame  tower  painted  black  below  and  red  above  ; 
height  15  feet.  A  breakwater  is  being  constructed  outside  this 
harbor. 

To  enter  Oswego  Harbor  ;  bring  the  light  on  the  pier  head,  to 
bear  SE,  and  run  for  it,  and  when  close  up  to  it,  say  500  feet,  open 
the  harbor  and  run  in  S  by  E^E,  leaving  the  Main  Light  to  starboard. 
The  breakwater  runs  out  from  the  shore  to  the  westward  S  5''3'  SW 
900  feet,  and  from  this  point  it  runs  S  S°35'W.  The  finished  part  of 
the  breakwater  is  about  2500  feet  long,  and  is  1,000  feet  due  south 
from  the  shore  and  when  completed  will  be  4,900  feet,  and  will  then 
bear  from  the  Light  on  the  end  of  the  West  Pier  head  NNWi^W 
about  700  feet.  The  depth  of  water  going  in  is  18  feet,  and  the  same 
under  that  part  of  the  breakwater  that  is  finished. 

Fair  Haven  Lighthouse,  near  the  north  end  of  west  pier,  at  the 
entrance  of  Little  Sodus  Bay.  Fixed  white  light  visible  \\%  miles, 
32  feet  above  lake  level.  Lake  Coast  and  Harbor  Light.  Frame 
tower,  pain:ed  black  below  and  white  above;  keeper's  dwelling  on 
bluff  west  of  harbor,  and  painted  drab ;  an  elevated  walk  connects 
the  tower  with  the  shore. 

Big  Sodus  Outer  Beacon,  on  crib  at  the  head  of  west  pier,  at  the 
entrance  to  Big  Sodus  Bay.  Fixed  white  light,  visible  1 2  miles,  34 
feet  above  lake  level,  are  illuminated  entire  horizon,  harbor  light. 
Frame  beacon  painted  black  below  and  white  above. 


I 
I 
I 
1 

I 


*'^^.:. 


p 


TAompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


i 

4 


Big  Sodus  Inner  Beacon,  on  inner  end  of  west  pier.  Fixed 
white  light,  visible  io)4  miles,  24  feet  above  Lake  level,  harbor  light. 
Frame  beacon  painted  black  below  and  white  above.  This  light  is 
not  visible  from  the  lake,  and  serves  only  as  a  guide  to  vessels  leav- 
ing the  harbor. 

Big  Sodus  Bay  Light,  at  Sodus  Point  west  side  of  Sodus  Harbor 
Light.  Fixed,  varied  by  white  flashes,  time  between  flashes  two 
minutes,  visible  13  miles,  63  feet  above  Lake  level.  Lake  coast  and 
harbor  light,  dwelling  two  stories  high,  with  square  tower  attached, 
of  dark  grey  limestone;  situated  on  a  bluff"  one  mile  west  of  the 
entrance  piers  to  Big  SoduF  Bay ;  bearings  Oswego  Lighthouse  WNW 
24  miles.     Peter  Point  Lighthouse  (Canada)  N>^E,  35  miles. 

Genesse  River  Lighthouse,  west  side  of  entrance  to  the  river. 
A  fixed  white  light  visible  is>^  miles,  75  feet  above  lake  level. 
Lake  Coast  and  Harbor  iighL  Octagonal  tower,  whitewashed,  with 
keeper's  dwelling  of  brick,  connected  by  covered  way;  situated  on 
bluff"  on  west  side  of  Genesee  River  on  the  inside  of  piers  of  entrance ; 
bearings  Big  Sodus  Light  E>^S  25  miles. 

Genesee  Beacon  Lighthouse,  on  the  end  of  the  west  pier,  at  the 
entrance  to  Genesee  River.  Fixed  white  light  visible  1 1  miles,  a8 
feet  above  lake  level,  harbor  light;  frame  beacon  painted  black 
below  and  white  above. 

Oak  Orchard  Lighthouse,  near  north  end  of  west  pier,  at  the 
entrance  to  Oak  Orchard  Creek.  Fixed  white  light  visible  ii>^ 
miles,  31  feet  above  lake  level,  harbor  light.  Frame  beacon  painted 
black  below  and  white  above. 

Thirty  Mile  Point  Lighthouse,  on  the  bluff"  called  Thirty  Mile 
Point,  on  Lake  Ontario,  about  30  miles  east  of  the  mouth  of  Niagara 
River.  White  flash  light,  time  between  flashes,  i  minute  30  seconds,  71 
feet  above  lake  level.  Lake  coast  light,  square  tower,  rising  from  the 
north  front  of  the  keeper's  dwelling,  both  built  of  dark  grey  lime- 
stone ;  dome  of  lantern  painted  white,  and  illuminates  entire  horizon. 
Olcott  Lighthouse,  near  north  end  of  west  pier,  entrance  to  Olcott 
Harbor,  Eighteen  Mile  creek.  Fixed  white  light  visible  ii>^  miles, 
32  feet  above  lake  level.  Frame  beacon  painted  black  below  and 
white  above. 


Thompson's  Coast  Piiot. 


33 


(vest  pier.  Fixed 
•vel,  harbor  light. 
)ve.  This  light  is 
de  to  vessels  leav- 

of  Sodus  Harbor 

ween  flashes  two 

Lake  coast  and 

e  tower  attached, 

mile  west  of  the 
Lighthouse  WNW 

35  miles. 

ance  to  the  river, 
above  lake  level, 
whitewashed,  with 

way;  situated  on 
•  piers  of  entrance ; 

le  west  pier,  at  the 
risible  ii  miles,  a8 
on  painted  black 

'  west  pier,  at  the 
light  visible  ii^ 
ne  beacon  painted 

called  Thirty  Mile 
!  mouth  of  Niagara 
nute  30  seconds,  71 
(rer,  rising  from  the 
)f  dark  grey  lime- 
ates  entire  horizon. 
,  entrance  to  Olcott 
:  visible  11^  miles, 
\  black  below  and 


Niagara  Fort  Lighthouse,  at  the  mouth  of  Nigara  River,  on  the 
bank  of  the  river  above  Fort  Niagara.  Fixed  white  light  visible  16 
miles,  78  feet  above  lake  level,  limestone  tower,  and  oil  room 
attached,  about  65  miles  to  the  westward  of  Genesee  Lighthouse,  and 
EbyN^^N  12  miles  from  Port  Dalhouse,  (Canada)  entrance  of  the 
Welland  Canal. 


LIGHTS  AND  LIGHTHOUSES 


On  the  Canada  Side  of  Lake  Ontario  from  Prescott  up  to 
Hamilton  and  Port  Dalhousie. 

Windmill  Point  and  Coles  shoal,  5  miles  above  Brockville,  are 
already  described. 

Grenadier  Island  Lighthouse,  on  southwest  point  of  island,  north 
side  of  channel,  2  miles  below  Rockport;  a  fixed  white  light,  visible 
10  miles.     White  square  tower  55  feet  above  river  level. 

Lindoe  Island  Lighthouse,  on  northwest  point  of  island,  south 
side  of  channel,  5  miles  west  of  Rockport  ;  a  fixed  white  light,  visi- 
ble 7  miles,  40  feet  above  river  level.     White  square  tower. 

*Gananoque  Narrows  Lighthouse,  on  northeast  end  of  Little 
Stave  Island,  south  side  of  channel,  5  miles  below  Gananoque  ;  a 
fixed  white  light,  white  square  wooden  tower,  44  feet  above  liver 
level. 

*Jack  Straw  Shoal  Lighthouse,  on  a  pier  north  side  of  channel,  3 
miles  below  Gananoque;  a  fixed  white  light,  white  square  tower,  31 
feet  above  river  level. 

♦Spectacle  Shoal  Lighthouse,  on  pier  north  side  of  channel,  2 
miles  west  of  Gananoque  ;  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  9  miles,  white 
square  wooden  tower,  28  feet  above  river  level. 

*Red  Horse  Rock  Lighthouse,  on  a  pier,  southeast  side  of  chan- 
nel, y2  mile  west  of  No.  92,  a  fixed  white  light,  white  square  wooden 
tower,  28  feet  above  river  level. 

♦  These  small  lights  are  for  the  purpose  of  marking  the  channel  through  the  Thousand 
Islands,  between  Brockville  and  Kingston.     Variation  of  Compass,  7°  15' W. 


•  ^lift^C.^ 


iSMiP***"    ' 


r  - 


34 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot 


♦Burnt  Island  Lighthouse,  on  southeast  point  of  Island,  north 
side  of  channel,  ^  of  a  mile  from  Spectacle  Shoal,  a  fixed  white  light, 
visible  lo  miles,  white  square  tower. 

*\Volfe  Island  Lighthouse,  northeast  entrance,  point  ot  island  i8 
miles  southeast  of  Kingston  ;  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  6  miles,  white 
square  wooden  tov/er. 

Brown's  or  Knapp's  Point,  '.Volfs  Island  Lighthouse,  Lake  On- 
tario, a  fixed  white  light;  visible  lo  miles,  white  square  wooden  tower, 
28  feet  above  lake  level. 

Snake  Island  Lighthouse,  on  pier  on  bar,  north  side  of  channel, 
5  miles  west  of  Kingston ;  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  6  miles,  stone 
square  tower,  35  feet  above  lake  level. 

Gage  or  Simcoe,  (nine  mile  Point)  fJghthouse,  on  southwest 
point  of  island,  9  miles  west  of  Kingston  ;  a  fixed  white  light,  visible 
15  miles,  round  stone  tower,  white,  45  feet  above  lake  level.  In  thick 
foggy  weather  or  snow  storm,  a  fog  bell,  near  the  lighthouse,  will  be 
sounded  four  times  a  minute,  and  will  probably  be  heard  a  distance  of 
four  miles. 

Pigeon  Island  Lighthouse,  4  miles  from  the  head  of  Wo'/e  Is- 
land;  a  white  flash  light,  in\-val  of  flash  i  minute  and  10  seconds, 
visible  15  miles,  46  feet  above  lake  level. 

False  Ducks,  (Outer  Drake),  on  the  east  point  of  Island,  a  fixed, 
white  light,  visible  22  miles,  68  feet  above  lake  level. 

Pleasant  Point  Lighthouse,  entrance  to  Quinte  Bay;  a  fixed  white 
light,  visible  xoYi  miles,  octagonal  tower,  52  feet  high. 

Telegraph  Island  Lighthouse,  Bay  of  Quinte ;  a  fixed  white  light, 
visible  1 2  miles,  white  square  tower  on  dwelling,   46  feet  above  lake 

level. 

Point  Peter  Lighthouse,  on  point,  white  flash  light,  interval  of 
flash,  I  minute  and  40  seconds.  Visible  21  miles,  circular  stone 
tower,  62  feet  above  lake  level.     Variation  of  compass,  6°  West. 

Salmon  or  Wicked  Point  Lighthouse,  on  the  point,  fixed  red 
light,  a  white  square  tower  on  dwelling,  40  feet  high. 

Scotch  Bonnett  or  Egg  Island  Lighthouse,  on  a  small  island,  one 
mile  southwest  of  Nicholson's  Island;  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  12 
miles,  stone  tower,  white,  54  feet  above  lake  level. 


'vn^iSa^mss^nSSSr,: 


TTiompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


35 


of  Island,  north 
fixed  white  light, 

loint  ot  island  i8 
ble  6  miles,  white 

thouse,  Lake  On- 
re  wooden  tower, 

1  side  of  channel, 
ble  6  miles,  stone 

se,  on  southwest 
rhite  light,  visible 
B  level.  In  thick 
ighthcuse,  will  be 
eard  a  distance  of 

head  of  Wolfe  Is- 
;  and  i  o  seconds, 

)f  Island,  a  fixed, 

1. 

Bay;  a  fixed  white 

gh. 

I  fixed  white  light, 

46  feet  above  lake 

light,  interval  of 
ies,  circular  stone 
lass,  6°  West. 
I  point,  fixed  red 
I. 

L  small  island,  one 
te  light,  visible  12 


Presqu'ile,  east  point,  fixed  white  light,  visible  18  miles,  67  feet 
above  lake  level.  Lighthouse  on  a  hill  in  shore,  bearing  from  each 
other  WSW  and  ENK,  nearly.     Fixed  white  light,  visible  3  miles. 

Weller's  Bay  Range  Lights,  near  west  end  of  the  Quinte  carrying 
place.  No.  i,  fixed  red,  No.  2  fixed  white,  on  open  frame-work 
towers,  painted  white.  No.  i,  29  feet  above  lake  level ;  No.  a,  43 >4 
feet  above  lake  level.  White  above  red,  to  guide  vessels  through  the 
entrance  to  Weller's  Bay. 

Cobourg  Lighthouse,  on  pier  head,  fixed  white  light,  visible  8 
miles,  square  wooden  tower,  painted  white,  20  feet  above  lake  level. 
Harbor  light  not  under  Marine  Department. 

Peter  Rock  or  Gull  Island,  W  byS,  4  miles  from  Coburg.  Fixed 
white  light,  visible  10  miles,  octagon  stone  tower,  48  feet  above  lake 
level,  on  a  rock  off  the  point. 

Port  Hope  Lighthouse,  pier  head,  east  side,  a  fixed  red  and 
white  light.     Not  under  Marine  Department. 

Darlington  Pier  Head  Lighthouse,  a  fixed  white  light,  on  a  stone 
house.  Not  under  Marine  Dejiartment.  Variation  of  compass, 
3"  38'  W. 

Oshawa  Point  Pier  Head,  light  fixed  white.  Not  under  Marine 
Department. 

Whitby  Harbor,  light  on  west  pier,  fixed  white.  Not  under 
Marine  Department. 

Pickering  or  Liverpool,  on  east  pier  head,  fixed  white.  Not  under 
Marine  Department. 

Gibraltar  Point  Lighthouse,  on  the  southwest  side  of  the  point, 
ij^  miles  of  Toronto  City.  Is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  18  miles, 
hexagonal  stone  tower,  66  feet  above  lake  level.  A  fog  bell  is  placed 
on  this  station. 

Toronto  Lighthouse,  on  the  Queen's  wharf,  west  part ;  the  other 
on  arm  of  pier.  Fixed  white  light,  visible  6  miles,  wooden,  square 
red  tower,  22  feet  above  lake  level.  The  red  light  is  on  the  arm  of 
the  pier,  to  be  passed  closely  on  the  port  hand.  This  light  is  not 
under  the  Marine  Department.     Variation  of  compass,  2°  50'. 

Port  Credit  Lighthouse,  on  the  east  pier,  at  the  entrance  of  the 


4. 


r-^fie>^ 


36 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


river  Credit.  This  light  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  lo  miles,  is  la 
miles  SWbyVV  from  Toronto,  and  lo  miles  from  OakviUe. 

Oakville  Lighthouse,  on  the  east  pier,  at  the  entrance  of  the  har- 
bor. Fixed  white  light,  visible  la  miles,  43  feet  above  lake  level. 
Depth  of  water  going  in  10  feet. 

Burlington  Bay  Canal  Lighthouses,  on  the  south  pier  of  entrance. 
Fixed  white  light,  visible  15  miles,  stone  building.  Light  60  feet 
above  lake  level.     Beacon  light  on  the  end  ol  south  pier. 

Dalhousic  Harbor  Lighthouse,  on  the  end  of  the  east  pier. 
Flashes  white,  visible  la  miles,  on  wooden  tower,  painted  white. 


•»«»SS^3SS8S5S 


Tsrwsgr 


Aumim- 


lo  miles,  is  la 
illc. 

mce  of  the  har- 
ove  lake  level. 

)ier  of  entrance. 

Light  60  feet 
lier. 

the  east  pier, 
ited  white. 


Lake  Erie. 


BUOYS  IN  NIAGARA  RIVER. 


Coming  up  the  Channel  between  Grand  and  Strawberry 

Islands. 

Buoy  in  middle  of  Chippewa  Channel,  red  iron  can  buoy  No.  2 
in  12  feet  water.  This  buoy  is  about  600  yards  to  the  northward  of 
Grand  Island,  and  near  the  middle  of  Chippewa  channel.  The  best 
water  is  between  these  two  buoys. 

Buoy  on  Hell's  Half  .'Vcre,  black  iron  can  buoy  No.  i,  in  13  feet 
water.     This  buoy  is  on  the  west  side  of  Strawberry  Island  near  the 
centre.     Mouth  of  French  creek  SbyE^^E  one  half  mile. 
Tonawanda  Channel. 

Buoy  on  shoal  near  Mink  Island,  red  iron  can  buoy.  This  buoy 
is  on  a  shoal  a  little  below  or  to  the  northward  of  Mink  Island,  and 
about  300  yards  distant,  in  9  feet  water,  and  should  be  left  well  on 
tlic  starboard  hand  in  p.issing. 

Buoy  on  south  point  of  Strawberry  Island,  red  iron  can  buoy  in 
12  feet  water.  This  buoy  is  on  a  shoal  at  the  south  end  of  Strawberry 
Island,  and  should  be  kept  well  on  the  starboard  hand  in  passing. 

Buoy  on  Limekiln  Reef,  red  iron  can  buoy  in  14  feet  water ; 
current  here  4  miles  per  hour.  The  tendency  of  the  current 
is  to  set  vessels  toward  the  reef,  hence  the  red  buoy  should 
be  kept  nearer  aboard  than  the  black.  Horseshoe  Reef  light,  S 
three  quarters  mile.     Fort  Erie,  SW  600  yards. 

Buoy  on  Bird's  Island  Reef,  black  iron  can  buoy  in  12  feet  water. 
This  is  nearly  east  of  the  red  buoy  on  Limekiln  Reef  and  the  passage 
between  them  leads  to  the  Emerald  and  Canadian  channels ;  bearings. 
Black  Rock  pier  head,  EbyN>^N,  one  third  mile.  Fort  Erie  W^S, 
one  half  mile. 


,jmifi'^imm:.- 


^T^' 


38 


Thompson!  s  Coast  Pilol. 


Canadian  or  West  Channel. 

Buoy  on  Middle  Reef,  black  iron  can  buoy  in  1 2  feet  water,  cur- 
rent 1  Yi  miles  per  hour.  Horseshoe  Light,  SE^'E,  300  yards.  Fort 
Erie,  NW^^N  three  fourths  mile. 

Horseshoe  Reef  Lightliouse  on  Horseshoe  Reef,  at  the 
entrance  to  the  Niagara  River.  Light  fixed,  varied  by  white  flashes, 
visible  12  miles;  43  feet  above  lake  level,  arc  illuminated,  entire 
horizon.  Harbor  and  river  light,  an  elevated  iron  beacon,  with 
keeper's  dwelling  painted  white,  on  masonry  pier  of  protection  with 
ice  guard  on  north  and  west  faces,  built  upon  Horseshoe  Reef  shoal, 
forming  southern  end  of  middle  reef  which  seperates  Canadian  fiom 
Emerald  channel.  It  bears  SEbyS^S  from  Fort  Erie,  and  from 
Buffalo  light  WbyN^N. 

Buoy  on  northern  end  of  Middle  Reef,  red  iron  can  buoy  in  1 2 
feet  water,  current  here  t  i^  miles.  The  Emerald  channel  is  used  in 
passing  from  Buffalo  harbor  into  Niagara  River ;  it  enters  the  main 
channel  between  black  buoy  No.  3,  and  red  buoy  No.  8. 

Buoy  on  Horseshoe  Reef,  black  iron  can  buoy  This  buoy  is  on 
south  or  seaward  end  of  reef,  current  1  mile  per  hour. 

Buffalo  Breakwater,  north  end,  on  pier  of  protection,  at  north 
end  of  breakwater  in  the  harbor  of  Buffalo;  fixed  red  light  visible 
12  miles.  Fog  signal  bell  struck  3  times  in  quick  succession  at 
intervals  of  30  seconds.  Entrance  to  the  Harbor  by  the  north  end 
of  breakwater;  Buffalo  Main  Light  Eia'S,  Horseshoe  Reef  light, 
WbyN^N;  Fort  Erie  Canada  NVV;4:W  ;  Buffalo  breakwater  south 
end  light  fixed  red,  visible  12  miles. 

Buffalo  Main  Light,  near  the  end  of  the  south  pier  head,  at 
junction  of  Buffalo  Creek  and  Lake  Erie.  Fixed  white  light,  fog  bell 
struck  at  intervals  of  7  seconds.  Dunkirk  Light  SWJ^S  distance  40 
miles.     Long  Point  Light,  Ont.,  WbyS^^S,  distance  64  miles. 

To  Enter  Niagara  River. 

Leave  Horseshoe  Reef  Lighthouse  about  400  yards  to  starboard, 
then  steer  direct  for  the  beacon  at  Black  Rock  Pier,  leaving  red  iron 
can  buoys  No.  2  and  4  to  starboard,  and  the  black  iron  can  buoy  No. 
I  to  port. 


j:!'^^-'".'"^fe^i.i^>i'.;  . 


Thompson! s  Coast  Pilot. 


39 


feet  water,  cur- 
30  yards.     Fort 

Reef,  at  the 
y  white  flashes, 
minated,  entire 

beacon,  with 
protection  with 
loe  Reef  shoai, 
Canadian  fiom 
Erie,  and  from 

can  buoy  in  12 

annel  is  used  in 

enters  the  main 

8. 

This  buoy  is  on 

;ction,  at  north 
ed  light  visible 
.  succession  at 
y  the  north  end 
hoe  Reef  light, 
reakwater  south 

^»  pier  head,  at 
:e  light,  fog  bell 
J^S  distance  40 
4  miles. 


ds  to  starboard, 
leaving  red  iron 
n  can  buoy  No. 


To  enter  the  river  from  Buffalo  pier,  leave  the  wooden  can 
buoys  No.  2  and  4  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  the  black  wooden 
can  buoy  to  port.  The  water  works  crib  can  be  passed  on  either  side, 
and  the  draw  of  the  bridge  is  on  the  American  side.  To  enter  the 
Tonawanda  channel  to  the  eastward  of  the  Strawberry  Islands,  leave 
the  black  spar  buoys  No.  3  and  5  to  port.  To  enter  the  Tonawanda 
channel  to  the  westward  of  the  Strawberry  Islands,  leave  the  red  spar 
buoys  No.  6  and  8  to  starboard  and  the  black  spar  buoys  No.  7  and 
9  to  port. 

There  is  a  strong  current  setting  down  this  river  at  Black 
Rock,  at  all  times,  and  more  especially  when  the  wind  is  blowing 
strong  from  the  westward.  Boats  coming  up  keep  in  the  eddy  on  the 
Canada  side,  until  up  to  the  old  red  mill,  then  drop  over  gradually  to 
the  American  side,  and  run  up  along  the  dam  until  up  the  bend, 
then  sheer  off  again  and  take  the  center  of  the  river. 
To  Enter  Buffalo  Harbor. 

From  Point  Abino  steer  E  byN^N,  n  miles  direct  for  Buffalo 
lighthouse,  leaving  Horseshoe  reef  and  lighthouse  to  port,  and 
the  breakwater  to  starboard  about  1 50  yards  ;  clear  the  north  end  of 
the  breakwater,  open  the  harbor  and  run  in  ;  depth  of  water  going  in 
from  14  to  14^  feet. 


COURSES  AND  DISTANCES  ON  LAKE  ERIE. 
On  Both  Shores. 

Courses.        Miles. 

From  Buffalo  to  Point  Pelee WbyS^S  200 

Buffalo  to  Marble  Head SWbyWj^W  218 

Buffalo  to  Cleveland SWbyWi^ W  150  ) 

thence  SW^VV     24)    ^''^ 

Buffalo  to  Dunkirk SW^^S    40 

Buffalo  to  Grand  Kiver  or  Fairport SWbyWi^W  141 

Buffalo  to  Black  River SWbyW^W  207 

Buffalo  to  Middle  Island WSW  213 

Buffalo  to  Long  Point,  Ont WbyS^S    64 

Erie  to  Point  Pelee WbyS  130 


.^^ 


40  Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 

Counu.        Miles. 

Erie  to  Grand  River  or  Fairport SWbyWi^W     60 

Erie  to  Black  River SWbyW^W  129 

Erie  to  Peninsular  of  Sandusky WbyS^^S  144 

Erie  to  Middle  Island WbyS^S  140 

Erie  to  Long  Point,  Ont N^W     28 

Erie  to  Welland  Canal  or  Gravelly  Bay NE^^N     65 

Cleveland  to  Sandusky..... W>^N     14 

Thence WJ<S    38 

Cleveland  to  Middle  Island WbyN     52 

Cleveland  to  Point  Pelee  Island  Lighthouse WNW     55 

Cleveland  to  Rondeau  Harbor,  Ont NbyW     54 

Cleveland  to  Point  Talbot,  Ont NbyE     79 

Cleveland  to  Port  Stanley,  Ont NbyE>^E     86 

Cleveland  to  Burwell,  Ont NEbyN>^N     92 

Cleveland  to  Long  Point,  Ont NEJ^E  110 

Fairport  to  Long  Point NE  Eesterly     82 

Fairport  to  Welland  Canal NE>^E  Easterly  128 

Ashtabula  to  Long  Point,  Ont NE^N     57 

Conneaut  to  Long  Point NNE^E    46 

Long  Point  to  Grand  River,  Ont NE>^E   '33 

Long  Point  to  Welland  Canal  or  Gravelly  Bay  NE  byE^E    47 

Long  Point  to  Port  Stanley W>^N     29 

Thence WbyN     30 

Port  Stanley  to  the  Rondeau SWi^W     43 

Buffalo  to  Point  Abino WbyS^S     11 

Point  Abino  to  Gravelly  Bay WNW      9 

Port  Dover  to  Long  Point SEbyS^S     18 

Long  Point  to  Port  Burwell W)<N     29 

Thence WNW><Nii>^ 

Port  Burwell  to  Port  Stanley Wj^N     20 

Port  Burwell  to  Cat  Fish  Creek 10 

Dunkirk  Beacon  Light,  on  pier  west  side  of  entrance  to  Dunkirk 
Harbor.  Fixed  while  light ;  color  of  tower  black  and  red,  distance 
visible  12  miles;  harbor  light  on  pier  of  protection  at  pier  head  of 
west  pier  of  entrance  to  the  harbor;  channel  two  hundred  ftet  wide; 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


41 


CoursM.        Miles. 

IWbyWi^W  60 
iWbyW^W  129 
...WbyS^^S  144 
..  WbyS^S  140 

N^W    28 

NE>^N    65 

W^N     14 

WJ<S    38 

WbyN     5a 

WNW    55 

NbyW     54 

NbyE     79 

...NbyE>^E  86 
NEbyN>^N     92 

NEJ^E  no 

NE  Eesterly  82 
J^E  Easterly  128 

NE^N     57 

....NNE^E    46 

NE>^E   '33 

NEbyE^E    47 

W>^N    29 

WbyN    30 

swi4:w   43 

....WbyS^S     II 

WNW      9 

...SEbyS^S     18 

Wi^N     29 

..  WNW^Nii>^ 

Wi^N     20 

10 

trance  to  Dunkirk 

and  red,  distance 

n  at  pier  head  of 

undred  ftet  wide; 


on  west  side  near  beacon,  dangerous  rocks  outcrop,  with  8  or  9  feet 
of  water,  and  on  the  east  (inside)  lie  the  ruins  of  the  old  breakwater, 
with  10  feet  of  water.  A  pyramidal  wooden  day-beacon  painted 
black,  surmounted  by  a  round  close  cage,  painted  white,  is  placed  on 
the  east  side  of  entrance  to  harbor ;  this  beacon,  in  range  with  the 
west  end  of  the  new  breakwater,  marks  the  eastern  limit  of  the 
channel  of  entrance. 


SAILING  DIRECTIONS  FOR  LAKE  ERIE. 


From  Buffalo  to  Silver  Creek. 

SWbyS  1 7  miles,  thence  SSW,  9^  miles  to  Silver  Creek  bearing 
south.  Silver  Creek  light  discontinued,  about  6  feet  water  going  in ; 
lighthouse  on  west  pier. 

Silver  Creek  to  Dunkirk. 

NNW,  I  mile,  thence  WSW  9  miles.  Dunkirk  light  fixed  varied 
by  white  flasher,  iake  coast  and  harbor  light  on  the  point  west  of 
the  harbor,  visible  i6j^  nantical  miles,  87  feet  above  lake  level ; 
Erie  Harbor  Light  bears  SWbyW  distant  42^  miles;  Port  Colbone 
Light,  Ont.  N^^^E  27  mies. 

From  Dunkirk  to  Erie. 

Run  out  \]^  miles  north;  then  steer  SW^W  43  miles,  to  north 
pier,  entrance  to  Erie  Harbor.  Erie  main  light,  south  shore  of  Lake 
Erie,  marks  the  approach  to  eastern  entrance  to  Presqu'ile  Bay,  and 
about  one  mile  to  the  northward  and  eastward  of  Erie,  Pa.,  is  a  fixed 
white  light,  115  feet  above  lake  level,  and  visible  18  miles;  Grand 
River  or  Fairport  light  SW  by  W^W,  distance  66  miles. 

Presqu'ile  Beacon  Range  No.  i,  behind  north  pier  on  the  north 
side  of  entrance  to  Presqu'ile  Bay,  fixed  white,  visible  12  miles,  and  is 
38  feet  high,  on  pier  of  protection  to  harbor ;  channel  between  piers 
340  feet  wide ;  depth  of  water,  14  feet.  Best  water  on  north  side, 
along  the  line  of  buoys.  The  light  is  obscured  from  Peninsular  Pjint 
around  by  west,  to  near  the  line  of  the  north  pier.     Vessels  coming 


« 


42  Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 

from  the  west,  intending  to  make  the  harbor,  will  not  haul  up  till  this 
light  has  been  opened,  which  indicates  that  Peninsular  Point  has  been 

cleared.  . 

Presqu'ile  Beacon  Range  No.  2,  on  the  west  end  of  north  pier, 
fixed  white;  height  above  lake  level,  9%  feet;  visible  7  miles;  tower 

paint(d  white.  . 

Presqu'ile  Beacon  Range  No.  3,  on  east  end  of  north  pier;  fixed 
while,  visible  8  miles;  height  above  lake  level,  9)4  feet ;  tower  painted 
white.  This  light  and  the  preceding  one,  form  a  range  for  entering 
the  harbor ;  and  their  intersection  with  the  range  lights  on  the  Pen- 
insular, just  north  of  keeper's  dwelling,  marks  the  channel  across  the 

inside  bar.  ^ 

Buoys  at  Entrance  of  Erie  Harbor. 

Outer  Buoy,  Black  Spar  Buoy.  iniaJ^  feet  water.  This  buoy  is 
nearly  on  a  line  with  the  south  pier  of  entrance  to  harbor. 
To  leave  Erie  Harbor  from  the  City  Docks. 
Run  out  until  the  beacon  ranges  on  the  peninsular  are  in 
line,  stand  for  them  until  the  beacon  and  pier  lights  are  in  range  or 
line',  when  steer  for  them,  passing  the  lights  on  the  port  hand,  and 
giving  the  north  pier  a  berth  of  30  feet ;  thence  as  above. 

Note  -  A  new  breakwater  has  been  built  from  the  west  end  of 
south  pier,  to  the  beach;  also  new  north  pier.  There  are  two  coal 
docks  on  the  west  side  of  the  breakwater,  and  railroad  elevators  west 
of  them,  with  slips  to  load  at. 

Peninsular  Beacon  Range  Nos.  i  and  2,  on  the  peninsular  NW  of 
north  pier,  both  fixed  wtiite  lights,  on  masts  painted  white  and  tipped 
with  red;  are  162  feet  apart,  and  indicate  the  channel  ciossing  the 
inner  bar;  and  thence  to  the  city  docks. 

Presqu'ile,  on  north  shore  of  peninsular  of  Erie  Harbor;  light 
fixed  varied  by  red  flashes  every  minute;  visible  14  miles;  57  feet 
above  lake  level,  400  feet  from  lake,  and  three-fifths  of  a  mile  west  of 
the  most  northern  projection  of  peninsular. 

From  Erie  to  Conneaut. 
Run  out  from  Erie  piers  NE^E  one  mile ;  thence  NWone  mile; 
thence  WNW  1  mile;  thence  W  25 >^  miles,  to  abreast  of  Conneaut 


^^H^y 


'^f^^m^i^^s^^^ 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


43 


haul  up  till  this 
r  Point  has  been 

d  of  north  pier, 
;  7  miles ;  tower 

north  pier ;  fixed 
t ;  tower  painted 
nge  for  entering 
hts  on  the  Pen- 
annel  across  the 

)r. 

;r.  This  buoy  is 
larbor. 

Docks. 

leninsular   are  in 

;s  are  in  range  or 

I  port  hand,  and 

ibove. 

n  the  west  end  of 

lere  are  two  coal 

ad  elevators  west 

peninsular  NW  of 

white  and  tipped 

innel  ciossing  the 

rie  Harbor;  light 
[4  miles;  57  feet 
,  of  a  mile  west  of 


nee  NWone  mile; 
reast  of  Conneaut 


lighthouse  one  mile  south  ;  harbor  light,  near  the  pier  head  of  west  pier 
of  entrance  to  harbor ;  fixed  white,  visible  12  miles;  33  feet  above 
lake  level;  tower  painted  black  below  and  white  above;  depth  of 
water,  7  feet. 

From  Conneaut  to  Ashtabula. 
Run  out  north  one  mile,  and  steer  WSW  13^  miles,  to  abreast 
of  Ashtabula,  bearing  south  one  mile  oflT.  Ashtabula  light  on  the  present 
end  of  the  west  pier,  at  the  mouth  of  Ashtabula  River;  fixed,  varied  by 
flashes ;  is  33  feet  above  lake  level  and  visible  12  miles ;  tower  paint- 
ed black  below  and  white  above.     Depth  of  water,  12  feet. 

From  Ashtabula  to  Grand  River  or  Fairport. 
Run  out  from  Ashtabula  piers  one  mile  north ;  thence  WSW  1 1 
miles,  to  abreast  of  Madison  Dock ;  thence  SW  by  W^W  15  miles,  to 
abreast  of  Fairport,  bearing  south  one  mile.  Lake  coast  and  harbor 
light,  situated  on  the  bluff  on  the  east  side  of  Grand  River,  one-quarter 
of  a  mile  from  its  mouth,  is  a  fixed  white  light ;  stands  100  feet  above 
lake  level,  visible  17  miles.  Cleveland  light,  SW^W,  distant  28 
miles.     Beacon  light,  on  the  end  of  east  pier,  mouth  of  Grand  River, 

Ohio ;  tower  painted  black  below  and  white  above.  Depth  of  water, 
12  feet. 

From  Grand  River  to  Cleveland. 

Run  out  from  Grand  River  pier  north  i  y^  miles ;  thence  SW  by 
W  II  miles  to  abreast  of  Chegrin,  bearing  south  one  mile  off;  .hence 
SW^W  18  miles  to  Cleveland  piers,  bearing  SEbyS  one  mile  off. 
Light  on  the  hill,  east  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor,  lake  coast  and 
harbor  light;  fixed  white,  visible  21  miles,  and  is  154  feet  above  lake 
level. 

Marble  Head  lighthouse  bears  W^N,  distant  53 1^  miles.  Mouth 
of  Detroit  River  NW  by  W^W,  distant  84  miles. 

Cleveland  beacon  No.  i,  on  the  end  of  the  west  pier,  at  the 
entrance  to  Cleveland  Harbor,  has  a  bell  in  front  of  beacon,  struck  at 
intervals  of  ten  seconds  in  foggy  weather  Fixed,  varied  by  red 
flashes.  Time  between  flashes,  20  seconds.  Forty  seven  feet  above 
lake  level ;  tower  painted  black  below  and  white  above. 

Cleveland  beacon  No.  2,  near  the  pier  head  on  east  pier,  support- 


Thofnpsm:'s  Coast  Pilot. 


W 


44 

ing  two  lights,  one  red  and  the  other  white.  The  white  light  9  Jeet 
vertically  above  the  red  light,  forms  range  for  entering  the  harbor. 
Beyond  the  arc  of  .80°  the  naked  lights  shows  dimly,  and  warns 
vessels  that  they  are  too  far  in  shore.  The  tower  is  painted  black 
below  and  white  above.     Depth  of  water,  14  feet. 

Bearings  of  water  works  crib  from  Cleveland  west  p.er  head, 
N7o°  16'  west,  distance  7i7>.6  feet,  and  from  the  water  works  on 
shore,  N32<'  10'  west,  6580  feet.  The  depth  of  water  at  the  cnb  38 
feet.  The  light  is  a  "Fresnel"  of  the  sixth  order,  illummating  360  , 
or  the  entire  horizon. 

From  Cleveland  to  Black  Rivjr. 
Run  out  from  Cleveland  pier  head  NW  by  N  two  miles ;  thence 
WI/.N  14  miles,  to  abreast  of  Black  River  point ;  thence  W  by  Sj^S 
10^/3  miles,  to  abreast  of  Black  River  piers,  bearing  SSEJ^E  one  and 
a  half  miles  off  lighthouse  near  the  end  of  the  west  p.er.  Fixed 
white  light,  visible  13  miles.  Forty-five  feet  abov  .  lake  level.  Tower 
painted  black  below  and  white  above.     Depth  of  water  going  in,  12 

^^^*'  From  Black  River  to  Vermillion. 

Run  out  from  the  pier  head  NNW>^W  1  y^  miles ;  thence  W  by 
S^^S  ^o%  miles  to  abreast  of  Vermillion  piers,  bearing  south  ^y^ 
miles  off.  Lighthouse  on  the  west  pier  head;  fixed  white;  3^  feet 
above  lake  level;  visible  .x  miles;  stands  on  pier  of  V^^'^^^or.^^ 
hind  west  end ;  tower  painted  black  below  and  red  above.  Depth  of 
water  going  in,  9  to  10  feet. 

From  Vermillion  to  Huron. 
Run   out  from  Vermillion  north   .^  miles;  thence  Wby  S  10 
„,iles,  to  abreast  of  Huron  piers,  bearing  SW  by  S>^S  two  miles  off 
Harbor  light  on  west  pier  stands  on  pier  of  protection  behind  wes 
pierhead;  cast  iron  tower,  painted  black  below  and  red  above  ;  nxed 
white  light,  visible  1 2  y.  miles,  and  is  40  feet  above  lake  level.    Depth 
of  water  going  in,  12  feet. 

From  Huron  to  Entrance  of  Sandusky  Bay. 
Run  out  from  the  pier  hear^  NNE  one  mile ;  thence  NWJ^N   to 
miles,  to  abreast  of  the  lights  in  range  i^  "Hes  off.     Cedar  Pent 


light  or 

12  mile 

C« 

dwellin 

to  travi 

ted  she 

N3o''E 

miles,  1 

Ir 

form, 

inner  1 

T 

Cedar 

large  1 

cribs 

crib,  1 

and  3 

ward 

Ball  I 

Buo] 

1 
water 
13  m 
entra 
regio 
Sand 
blacli 


outei 
Marl 
here 
ble  ] 
side 


■i 


"ki^JIi'^ijifi^t-.- 


■■■.■mmiissii-:- 


^nn 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


45 


e  light,  9  feet 
g  the  harbor, 
ly,  and  warns 
painted  black 

■est  pier  head, 
'ater  works  on 
at  the  crib,  38 
ninating  360°, 


miles;  thence 
ice  WbyS.'^S 
JEJ^E  one  and 
3t  pier.  Fixed 
;  level.  Tower 
er  going  in,  12 

5 ;  thence  W  by 
aring  south  i^ 
white;  32  feet 
f  protection  be- 
love.     Depth  of 


lence  Wby  S  10 
;S  two  miles  off. 
on,  behind  west 
red  above  ;  fixed 
ke  level.    Depth 

cy  Bay. 

enceNWj^N   10 
)ff.     Cedar  Point 


light  on  east  side  of  entrance  to  Sandusky  Bay  ;  fixed  white,  visible 
,2  miles  •  38  feet  above  lake  level ;  on  top  of  keeper's  dwelling. 

Ced'ar  Point  Range  Beacon  light.  A  fixed  red  light  on  keeper's 
dwelling.  Frame  dwelling,  painted  white ;  the  outer  face  panneled 
to  traverse  the  light  at  pleasure.  Stands  in  5  feet  water  on  an  insula- 
ted shoal,  and  is  surrounded  by  pier  of  protection.  Forms  a  range 
N30°E  with  Cedar  Point  .light,  for  crossing  outer  bar.  Visible  10^ 
miles,  and  26  feet  above  lake  level. 

In^'de  ranges.  There  are  three  square  cribs,  lying  in  a  triangular 
form,  with  white  lights  on  masts  about  20  feet  high,  as  ranges  for  the 
inner  bar  and  channel  to  the  city.  No.  i,  2,  and  3. 

To  enter  the  harbor  from  outside,  run  in  on  the  outside  range  of 
Cedar  Point  and  red  beacon,  until  well  up  to  the  beacon,  and  abreast  the 
large  red  can  buoy  on  your  starboard  hand,  until  you  range  the  two  first 
cribs  lights  No.  1  and  2;  run  on  this  range  until  well  up  to  the  first 
crib  No  I.  Then  haul  sharply  round  and  range  crib  hghts  No.  i 
and'3  ;  this  range  runs  you  to  the  city.  Crib  No.  3  Hes  to  the  north- 
ward  of  No.  1,  and  No.  i  and  2  are  nearly  in  line  with  south  side  of 
Ball  Island ;  depth  of  water  going  in  from  11  to  12  feet. 

Buoys  in  Sandusky  River  at  the  Head  of  Sandusky  Bay. 

Near  the  month  of  Sandusky  River,  black  spar  buoy  in  8  feet 
water;  Musquash  ,^oint  due  east  6  miles.  Cedar  Point  beacon  Ej^N 
n  miies  This  buoy  is  off  the  east  end  of  Eagle  Island,  to  mark  the 
entrance  to  Sandusky  River,  which  passes  through  a  flat  marshy 
region,  and  is  navigable  only  for  vessels  of  lighl  draught.  Note.- 
Sandusky  River  is  marked  with  ten  small  stakes,  alternate  red  and 
black,  black  to  port  and  red  to  starboard  going  up. 

From  Sandusky  Bay  to  Marble  Head 

Run  out  of  the  Bay  on  the  opposite  ranges,  and  when  over  the 
outer  bar  and  clear  of  the  outer  red  stake,  haul  up  NNW  3^  miles  till 
Marble  Head  Light  bears  SSW  %  mile  off.  There  are  good  docks 
here  where  vessels  load  stone  ;  Marble  Head  Light,  fixed  white,  visi- 
ble  14  miles.  60  feet  above  lake  level,  stands  on  the  peninsular  north 
side  of  Sandusky  Bay. 


--IM 


»•' 


46 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


From  Marble  Head  Light. 

To  Kelley'sdock  on  the  south  side  of  Kelley's  Island,  N>^W 
4^  miles.  There  are  good  stone  docks  on  this  side  of  the  Island,  to 
the  west  of  Kelley's  dock ;  also  good  anchorage  south  of  the  dock  in 
4^  fathom  water ;  protection  from  NE  to  NW  winds. 

From  Kelley's  Dock  to  Toledo. 
Run  out  from  the  dock  loo  yards,  and  steer  west  2%  miles. 
Thence   NWbyW^V/  22ii(  miles  to  abreast  of  West  Sister  Island 
Lighthouse,  bearing  north,  distant  %  mile.     Thence  W^N  15  miles 
to  a  point  bearing  SVVbyS  from  Turtle  Island  Lighthouse  i^  miles. 

West  Sister  Island  Light. 

On  the  west  end  of  the  Island,  is  a  fixed  white  light  visible  13^ 
miles,  51  feet  above  lake  level,  12  miles  east  of  Maumee  Bay.  From 
the  point  above  mentioned  15  miles  from  West  Sister,  then  steer 
SW^S  1%  miles  to  the  middle  of  the  channel  leading  into  Maumee 
Bay.  Turtle  Island  Light  at  the  entrance  to  Maumee  Bay,  is  a  fixed 
white  light  visible  13)^  miles,  51  feet  above  lake  level,  9  miles  from 
Toledo  and  18  miles  from  the  mouth  of  Detroit  River,  NEbyN. 

From  Marble  Head  to  Strontian  or  Green  Island. 

Isioyi  miles  NW^W,  bearing  north  ^  a  mile.  Light  on  the  west 
end  of  Green  Island,  fixed,  varied  by  white  flashes ;  mouth  of  Detroit 
River  NWbyN,  northerly  33  miles,  visible  14  miles  and  is  57  feet 
above  lake  level. 

Buoys  Entering  Portage  River. 

No.  2  Outer  Buoy,  red  spar  buoy  in  6  feet  water.  Port  Clinton 
Lighthouse,  bearing  SW^W,  1 1^  miles. 

No.  4  Channel  Buoy,  red  spar  buoy  in  6  feet  water. 

No.  6  Channel  Buoy,  red  spar  buoy  in  6  feet  water. 

To  enter  the  channel,  find  outer  buoy  No.  2  about  one  mile 
north  of  lighthouse,  and  nearly  abreast  of  a  small  cluster  of  willows 
on  the  beach.  Thence  'parallel  with  beach  to  buoys  No.  4,  6  and  8, 
into  the  river.  The  general  depth  of  water  in  the  channel  is  6  feet, 
and  the  width  about  50  yards. 


on  th 
Islan 

entra 


a  dai 
near 
pass* 
6  mi 


Out< 
Oute 

Mid 
Mid 

Inn( 
Inn( 


i,oc 

The 

Can 

whii 

the 

The 


one 

8; 
SW 
bla< 
nea 


Thanr^son's  Coast  Pilot, 


47 


Island,  NX  W 

the  Island,  to 

of  the  dock  in 


miles. 
\  Sister  Island 
iV^N  IS  miles 
se  i^  miles. 

ht  visible  13^ 
56  Bay.  From 
iter,  then  steer 
into  Maumee 
Bay,  is  a  fixed 
I,  9  miles  from 
NEbyN. 

Island. 

jht  on  the  west 
•uth  of  Detroit 
nd  is  57  feet 


Port  Clinton 


t)out  one  mile 
ter  of  willows 
\o.  4,  6  and  8, 
tnnel  is  6  feet, 


Port  Clinton  Lighthouse,  south  side  of  Portage  River,  and  passed 
on  the  port  hand  in  entering.  Light  discontinued ;  bearings  Green 
Island  Lighthouse  NNE  10  miles,  Moor's  Point  NE>^N,  6  miles. 

No.  8  Channel  Buoy,  red  spar  buoy  in  6  feet  water,  near 
entrance  of  river. 

Niagara  Shoal 

Niagara  Reef,  black  iron  can  buoy  in  9  feet  water.  This  reef  is 
a  dangerous  reef  of  rocks,  between  West  Sister  and  Green  Island, 
near  the  track  of  vessels  passing  east  and  west,  and  should  be 
passed  to  the  northward ;  bearings,  Green  Island  Lighthouse,  EbyS, 
6  miles.  Port  Clinton  Lighthouse,  SbyE,  1 1  miles. 

Maumee  Range  Lights. 

Outer  Range  Front   )  West  side  Maumee  River. 

Outer  Range  Rear     j  Fixed  white  lights. 

Middle  Range  Front )  West  side   Maumee    River    1 J^  miles  below 

Middle  Range  Rear  \  former  lights.    Fixed  red  lights. 

Inner  Range  Front   )  East  side   Maumee   River,  2  miles  south   of 
Inner  Range  Rear     [  Middle  Range.     Fixed  red  lights. 

Range  Lights. 

Two  lights  to  each  range ;  frame  structures.  The  front  ones 
1,000  feet  in  advance  of  the  rear  ones,  traversed  on  short  railways. 
These  ranges  mark  the  channel  from  the  Bay  into  Maumee  River. 
Care  must  be  taken  not  to  mistake  the  middle  range,  both  lights  of 
which  are  red,  for  the  outer  ranges.  Rear  towers  are  painted  white, 
the  front  towers  have  the  lower  parts  painted  white,  upper  red. 
These  lights  are  visible  from  10  to  xi  miles. 

To  enter  Maumee  Bay  and  to  Toledo. 

When  Turtle  Island  lighthouse  bears  east,  distance  a  quarter  and 
one-eight  of  a  mile,  steer  S^^W  i^  miles  to  red  iron  can  buoy  No. 
8 ;  thence  SWby W  one  mile,  and  find  red  spar  buoy  No.  4 ;  thence 
SW  one  mile,  and  find  black  iron  can  buoy  No.  11;  thence  follow 
black  spar  buoys  around  the  elbow,  and  fmd  red  spar  buoy  No.  28 
near  mouth  of  river. 


ft. 


48 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


To  run  the  Channel  at  Night. 

When  abreast  of  and  due  west  of  Turtle  Island  Light,  steer  Sj^W 
until  the  Outer  Range  lights  (both  white)  are  in  line,  when  steer  for 
them  until  the  Middle  Range  lights  (both  red )  arc  in  line  :  run  on  that 
line  until  the  Inner  Range  lights  (both  white)  are  in  line,  when  steer 
for  them,  passing  Grassy  and  Presqu'ile  Point  and  into  the  river. 
Depth  of  water  going  in  ii^  to  14  feet. 

When  into  the  river  keep  the  port  side  well  aboard,  until  above 
the  middle  ground,  which  lies  off  the  Manhattan  docks,  and  some 
little  distance  above,  leaving  red  buoy  to  starboard  and  black  buoys 
to  port ;  haul  over  to  the  Toledo  side  and  run  up  to  bridge,  etc. 

To  Run  the  East  Channel  into  Maumee  Bay. 

Make  the  outer  buoy,  a  black  spar  buoy  with  fly  No.  i.  Turtle 
Island  Lighthouse  bearing  WbyN^N,  2){  miles  distant;  pass  the 
buoy  on  your  port  hand  1 50  feet  feet  off,  also  the  black  spar  buoys 
No.  3  and  5,  about  the  same  distance  on  the  port  hand ;  thence  steer 
WSW,  4  miles  to  the  black  iron  can  buoy  No.  i ;  thence  as  above. 


HEAD  OP  LAKE  ERIE. 


From  Bois  Blank  Lighthouse  to  Cleveland. 

Run  out  4  miles  S^W  from  Bois  Blank  Lighthouse;  thence 
ESE,  11^  miles  to  abreast  Little's  Point,  bearing  east,  \y{  miles; 
thence  SEbyE^E,  73^  miles  to  Cleveland.  Leaving  Colchester 
Reef  light  ship,  red  light,  one  mile  to  the  eastward,  and  Point  Pelee 
Island  Lighthouse,  i  ^  miles  west.  ,  - 

From  Detroit  River  to  Point  Pelee. 

From  Bois  Blanc  Lighthouse,  S^W,  4  miles;  thence  ESE  11^ 
miles  to  Little's  Point,  bearing  east  i^  miles;  thence  E  byS^S,  23 
miles  to  Point  Pelee,  distant  ^  mile  north. 

From  Detroit  River  to  Sandusly. 

From  Bois  Blanc  Lighthouse,  S^W  4j^  miles ;  thence  SEby 
S^S  to  abreast  of  Strontian  or  Green  Island  Lighthouse,  33  miles, 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


49 


,ight,  steer  S»^W 
e,  when  steer  for 
line  :  run  on  that 
I  line,  when  steer 
d  into  the  river. 

oard,  until  above 
locks,  and  some 
and  black  buoys 
bridge,  etc. 

ee  Bay. 

y  No.  I.  Turtle 
listant;  pass  the 
black  spar  buoys 
nd ;  thence  steer 
;nce  as  above. 


'eland. 

;hthouse;  thence 

;  east,  i  %  miles ; 

aving  Colchester 

and  Point  Peiee 

elee. 

hence  ESE  ii^ 
ce  E  byS^^S,  23 


s;    thence  SEby 
ihouse,  33  miles, 


»^  mile  off,  running  J^  of  a  mile  east  of  Middle  Sister  Island,  and  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  east  of  Strontion  Island,  to  a  point  Yi  mile  south  of 
South  Bass  Island  ;  thence  SE^E  9  miles,  to  abreast  of  Marble  Head 
Lighthouse ;  thence  SSE,  3  miles  to  entrance  to  Sandusky  Bay. 

In  case  of  heavy  weather  from  the  westward,  when  abreast  of 
the  light  ship  at  Bar  Point,  steer  SEli(S,  sy'^  miles,  passing  within 
^  mile  of  East  Sister  Island,  and  y^,  mile  of  the  NE  point  of  Kelley's 
Island;  thence  S>4\V,  %%  miles  to  entrance  of  Sandusky  Bay.  On 
this  route  you  leave  the  Hen  and  Chickens  Island  to  port  ^  mile. 
North  Bass  and  Middle  Bass  Islands  to  starboard.  Middle  Island 
light  and  Little  Gull  Island  to  port;  Middle  Island  can  be  passed 
close  to  on  either  side.  There  is  a  small  shoal  with  9  feet  water, 
ENEJ^N,  ^  of  a  mile  from  the  lighthouse ;  and  two  small  shoals, 
one  NE  from  north  point  of  Kelley's  Island  J^  of  a  mile  with  8  feet 
water,  and  the  other  NE)^E,  lYt,  miles  from  the  same,  with  6  to  10 
feet  water  on  it ;  rocky. 

From  Detroit  River  to  Put-in-Bay. 

From  Bois  Blanc  Lighthouse,  S^W,  41^  miles  to  abreast  of 
Light  ship  at  Bar  Point;  thence  SE^^S,  29  miles  to  Putin-Bay, 
leaving  Middle  Sister  Island  one  mile  to  starboard;  also  Snake 
Island  to  starboard  half  a  mile,  and  the  Bass  Islands  to  port.  To  run 
in  when  up  to  St.  Helena,  a  small  island  with  a  tower  on  top,  haul 
close  round  it  and  into  the  Bay,  and  come  to  anchor  in  3^^  fathoms 
or  run  to  the  docks  on  the  east  side  of  the  Bay. 

Detroit  River  to  Maumee  Bay. 

From  Bois  Blanc  Lighthouse  steer  SJ^W,  5^  miles;  thence 
SWbyS  for  23  miles;  thence  SWi^W,  i>4  miles  to  west  channel. 

Detroit  River  to  Monroe. 

From  Bois  Blanc  Lighthouse  steer  SJ^W,  5^  miles;  thence  SW 
byS  3  miles;  thence  SW^W,  10  miles  to  Monroe  piers,  passing 
within  yi,  mile  of  Stony  Point. 

Monroe  to  Point  Pelee. 
East  42^  miles,  passing  2  miles  north  of  Middle  Sister  Island. 


50 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


Monroe  to  Cleveland. 

(Middle  passage)  K  by  SJ^S,  36^^  miles,  passing  Y^  mile  north  of 
North  Bass  Island,  and  between  Middle  Island  and  Point  Pelee 
Island  ;  thence  E  by  S  53  miles  to  Cleveland. 

Monroe  to  Sandusky. 

SE  by  E  40  miles,  to  abreast  of  Marble  Head  Lighthouse ;  thence 
SSE  3  miles  to  entrance  to  Sandusky  Bay. 

Maumee  Bay  to  Sandusky. 

From  West  channel  NE_^N,  i^  miles;  thence  E^S  14  miles, 
to  half  a  mile  south  of  West  Sister  Island  Lighthouse;  thence 
SEbyE^E  to  a  point  y'l  uf  a  mile  south  of  South  Bass  Island  ;  thence 
as  above  discribed  to  entrance  to  Sandusky  Bay. 


NORTH  SHORE  OF  LAKE  ERIE. 


Buffalo  to  Point  Abino. 

W  byS^S  1 1  miles.  A  good  lee  can  be  made  under  this  point 
from  SW  to  West  winds.  Vessels  generally  do  not  run  far  enough 
into  and  up  the  Bay  to  lie  easy. 

Point  Atino  to  Port  Colborne 

Entrance  to  the  Welland  Canal  WNW  9  miles,  main  and  range 
lights  on  the  west  pier,  58  and  14  feet  high  ;  fixed  white  lights.  This 
harbor  is  under  improvement  by  the  extension  of  the  west  pier  and 
blasting  rock  from  the  bottom  of  the  channel,  next  to  t'.te  west  pier 
Black  bufoys  indicate  ttee  deep  water  going  in,  on  the  port  hand.  A 
jirge  dummy  has  also  been  built  at  the  outer  end  of  the  channel,  on 
thte  starboard  side,  going  in.  Sugar  Loaf  Hill,  z  miles  west  of  Port 
Colborne,  is  a  good  mark  for  vessels  coming  down  the  lake.  > 

Mohawk  Island,  25  miles  to  the  westward  from  Port  Colborne, 
and  2%  miles  from  Grand  River  or  Port  Maitland,  has  a  lighthouse 
64  feet  high,  a»d  flashes  white  every  3  minutes,  and  is  one  mile  south 
of  the  main  land.    Visible  16  miles — is  a  good  coast  light. 


Thompson's  Coast  Piiot. 


5^ 


I  mile  north  of 
i   Point   Pelee 


ihouse ;  thence 


E^S  14  miles, 
louse ;  thence 
[sland  ;  thence 


nder  this  point 
un  far  enough 


nain  and  range 
:e  lights.  This 
;  west  pier  and 

t'.iC  west  pier 
port  hand.  A 
[le  channel,  on 
;s  west  of  Port 

lake. 

Port  Colborne, 
las  a  lighthouse 
one  mile  south 
ght. 


A  good  harbor  can  be  made  under  the  lee  of  this  island  from  SW 
winds,  by  bringing  the  light  to  bear  west.  Vessels  can  lie  here  in  the 
heaviest  gales.  The  reef  sets  oflf  from  the  island  SE  a>^  miles,  which 
forms  the  lee.     The  bottom  is  red  clay.    Come  to  in  3^  fathoms 

w.iter. 

To  run  through  bound  down,  keep  midway  between  Mohawk 
Bluff  and  the  Island,  until  you  drop  into  14  feet  water,  then  haul  up 
to  the  northward  and  eastward  and  follow  the  island  round  in  la  to 
13  feet  water,  pretty  close  to  ;  and  when  pas>  the  island,  run  out  to 
the  eastward,  giving  Point  Selkirk  a  berth  of  half  a  mile,  and  come 
to  under  the  island,  with  the  lighthouse  bearing  west.  To  come  to  an 
anchor  from  the  eastward,  bring  the  island  to  bear  west,  and  let  go  in 
three  and  a  half  fathoms  »s  before. 

Grand  River  or  Port  Maitland,  lyi  miles  from  Mohawk  Island. 
Light  on  the  west  pier ;  fixed  white.  This  is  a  good  harbor.  lii  run- 
ning in,  keep  the  west  pier  well  aboard,  and  follow  up  the  pier  work 
until  into  the  river.  To  come  to  anchor,  run  well  up  past  the  entrance 
to  the  canal  on  the  starboard  side,  and  come  to  in  three  fathoms  water 
or  run  into  the  canal.  This  branch  of  the  Welland  Canal  goes  into 
the  feeder  which  is  at  Dunnville,  five  miles  above,  where  there  is  a 
dam,  and  the  town  of  Dunnville.  This  river  is  navigable  as  far  as 
Cayuga,  thence  hv  lorks  and  dams  to  Brantford,  50  miles  in  all. 

From  Grand  River  to  Port  Dover  Thirty-two  Miles. 
Ruft  mi  irom  Grand  River  piers  SW^S  4  miles,  thence  WSW  6 
milev  tv>  abfreast  of  the  shoal  that  lies  to  the  westward  of  Grand  River 
Blui  3  miles,  and  3  miles  from  the  shore.  This  shoal  is  three  miles 
long,  and  in  a  WSW  direction,  nearly  in  range  with  the  shore.  Thence 
Wi^S  22  miles  to  Port  Dover  Lighthouse,  bearing  NW  i}^  miles, 
then  run  for  the  piers,  range  them,  and  run  in,  keeping  the  west  pier 
best  aboard.  The  light  is  fixed  white,  20  feet  above  lake  level,  depth 
of  water  lo  to  11  feet ;  visible  10  miles. 

From  Port  Dover  to  Long  Point,  SEbyS^S  18  miles.  Long 
Point  light  is  on  th:  east  extremity  of  the  point,  flashes  white  every 
minute,  and  can  be  seen  25  miles  in  clear  'veather,  65  feet  high  from 
lake  level.    This  light  is  a  good  leading  mark  up  or  down  the  lake ; 


'- 1 


52 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


ill- 


good  holding  ground  under  the  point  between  the  lighthouse  and  Big 
Bluff,  bearing  from  the  point  to  anchorage  NW,  in  5  fathoms  water. 
Sandy  clay  bottom.  The  deepest  water  in  Lake  Erie  lies  SE  from  the 
lighthouse,  8  miles  off,  204  feet  deep,  and  south  from  the  same,  5  miles 
off,  182  feet  deep.  Vessels  come  to  anchor  under  the  point,  on  the 
west  side  near  the  centre  of  the  point,  in  5  fathoms  water,  with  a 
northeast  wind.    The  bottom  is  sandy. 

From  Long  Point  to  Port  Burwell. 

Long  Point  to  Port  Burwell  Wi^N  29  miles,  thence  WNWJ^N 
12  miles.  Port  Burwell  light  is  on  the  hill  on  the  east  side  of  the 
creek,  333  yards  from  the  beach.  Fixed  white,  can  be  seen  12  miles, 
and  is  96  feet  above  lake  level.  A  red  light  on  the  west  pier  end, 
channel  narrow,  depth  of  water  10  to  12  feet. 

Port  Burwell  to  Cat  Fish  or  Port  Bruce  Wj^N  lo  miles.  White 
light  on  a  pole.     No  government  light. 

Port  Burwell  to  Port  Stanley,  Wi^N  20  miles.  Light,  fixed 
white,  visible  9  miles,  on  the  west  pier.  The  entrance  to  this  harbor 
is  narrow ;  the  piers  run  out  straight,  depth  of  water  9  to  10  feet. 

From  Port  Stanley  to  the  Rondeau,  SWi^W,  43  miles;  good  hold- 
ing ground  under  the  east  side  of  Rondeau  in  5  to  6  fathoms.  There 
is  14  feet  water  going  into  the  Rondeau  piers,  on  the  west  side.  Vessels 
often  come  to  an  anchor  with  a  NE  wind,  but  the  holding  ground  is 
sandy.    No  harbor  for  large  vessels. 

From  the  Rondeau  to  Point  Pelee. 

SW|^W  44  miles.  Run  on  this  course  4  miles  further,  until 
Point  Pelee  Island  Lighthouse  bears  W^^N,  and  Point  Pelee  NNE 
3^E ;  thence  NWbyW^J^W  34  miles,  to  the  entrance  of  Detroit  River, 
with  Bois  Blanc  Island  Lighthouse  bearing  N^E  41^  miles.  On  this 
route  you  leave  the  middle  ground  to  starboard.  The  bottom  off 
Pelee  Point  is  sandy ;  and  along  the  east  side  of  the  island  and  round 
the  lighthouse  point  leading  into  McCormick  Bay  is  rocky,  with 
boulders  for  ^  of  a  mile  out  and  off  the  point.  The  light  is  a  fixed 
white  light,  and  can  be  seen  9  miles.  W  byN  clears  Pelee  shoal. 
Good  anchorage  in  McCormick's  Bay,  in  5  fathoms. 


•-«>*w©«i^«?.'&*;««wj 


'<s::^^CM<j^^^^^$m 


ThompsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


53 


thouse  and  Big 
fathoms  water. 
es  SE  from  the 
Bsame,  s  miles 
e  point,  on  the 
water,  with   a 


nee  WNW^N 

;ast  side  of  the 

seen  12  miles, 

west  pier  end, 

I  miles.    White 

Light,  fixed 
;  to  this  harbor 
to  10  feet, 
iles ;  good  hold- 
ithoms.  There 
st  side.  Vessels 
Iding  ground  is 


5  further,  until 
nt  Pelee  NNE 
f  Detroit  River, 
miles.  On  this 
rhe  bottom  off 
land  and  round 
is  rocky,  with 
light  is  a  fixed 
irs  Pelee  shoal. 


Point  Pelee  Spit  Caisson. 

Light  on  Caisson  or  Dummy,  2^  miles  south  from  the  extreme 
end  of  Point  Pelee,  north  shore.  Flashes  white,  height  from  rrater 
level  76  feet,  and  can  be  seen  in  clear  weather  20  miles.  Vessels  and 
tugs  with  rafts,  etc.,  lie  to  anchor  in  the  bight,  on  the  west  side,  close 
in  to  the  point,  with  NE  to  east  winds,  in  5  to  6  fathoms.  Mud  and 
sand  bottom. 

Middle  Island- 
Between  Pelee  and  Kelley's  Island.  A  fixed  red  light,  visible  10 
miles.  There  is  good  water  on  either  side  of  the  island.  Chicaloney's 
Shoal,  lays  off  the  south  end  of  Point  Pelee  Island,  and  well  clear  of 
the  extreme  end  of  the  same ;  it  bears  from  Middle  Island  NEi^E  3^ 
miles,  and  is  i  ^  miles  east  from  Pelee  Island.  This  shoal  is  one  of 
the  best  bass  fishing  places  around  these  islands. 

Bar  Point  Light  Ship. 

Lights,  I  fixed  red,    i  fixed  white,  one  above  the  other.     Ship 

red,  with  Bar  Point  Light  Ship  painted  on  each  side.     Is  anchored  in 

18  feet  water,  50  fathoms  to  the  southward  of  the  west  end  of  reef, 

and  distant  from  Amherstburg  light  5^^  miles,  bearing  nearly  due 

south;  and  from  Bar  Point  S^W  3  miles.     Vessels  passing  should 

not  go  within  half  a  mile  of  Light  Ship,  and  vessels  of  heavy  draught, 

should  pass  to  the  southward.     A  bell  will  be  rung  during  thick  and 

foggy  weather. 

Detroit  River 

To  run  up  Detroit  River  by  the  Canada  Channel  to  Wmdmill 
Point  on  Lake  St.  Clair.  From  the  Light  Ship,  as  described  above, 
run  for  Beaubilo  Island  Lighthouse,  bearing  N^E,  leaving  two  red 
barrel  buoys  off  Bar  Point  on  your  starboard  hand,  keep  the  light  a 
little  on  your  port  bow,  until  within  one  mile  from  it,  leaving  a  red 
buoy  pretty  close  in  to  the  main  shore  to  starboard  ;  then  steer  for  the 
centre  of  the  channel  between  Beaubilo  Island  and  the  main  land, 
leaving  a  black  buoy  io  port,  off  the  end  of  the  shoal  that  makes  down 
from  the  island,  ^  mile.  When  abreast  the  lighthouse  haul  off 
towards  the  docks  at  Amherstburg,  and  take  the  middle  of  the  river 
up  to  the  head  of  Beaubilo  Island,  leaving  a  red  buoy  on  the  bank 


54  Thompson's  Coast  PUot. 

shoal,  just  above  the  town,  and  range  the  two  lights  on  the  island. 
The  ranges  are  thus,  on  the  NE  point  of  the  island.  No.  i,  a  fixed 
white  light ;  No.  2,  stands  back  from  No.  i  450  feet,  SWj^  W,  and  is  a 
red  light. 

Bois  Blanc  Island  light  is  on  the  south  point  of  the  island  ;  is  a 
fixed  white  light,  visible  18  miles,  and  stands  56  feet  above  the  level 
of  the  river.     When  the  lights  are  in  range,  run  until  well  over  to  the 
Canada  Southern  Railroad  dock,  and  follow  the  shore  along,  until  you 
get  up  to  the  red  buoy  on  a  rock,  375  feet  from  the  shore,  and  directly 
opposite  the  gate  of  McDougal's  mansion,  a  large  brick  building ;  then 
run  across  and  up  river  NNW,  leaving  the  Fisheries  and  the  Alex- 
ander House,  on  Grosse  Isle,  pretty  close  to,  until  you  range  Mama- 
juda  light  with  Grassey  Island  light,  leaving  a  red  buoy  on  the  star- 
board hand  off  the  SW  point  of  Fighting  Island ;  thence  due  north  on 
the  range,  leaving  both  lighthouses  and  crib  work  about  200  yards  off. 
Keep  on  the  course  until  pfst  the  buoy  on  the  SW  corner  of  Fighting 
Island,  then  proceed  up  river.    Keep  either  side  of  the  river  aboard, 
but  time  can  be  gained  by  hauling  gradually  over  to  the  Canada  shore, 
and  run  up  in  the  eddy  close  to.     Mamajuda  light  is  a  fixed  white 
light,  visible  1 1  miles,  and  is  33  feet  above  river  level,  on  the  keep- 
er's dwelling,  painted  white.    It  stands  on  pile  work.      Grassey  Is- 
land light  the  same  as  Mamajuda.  Crossing  Sandwich  Bay  from  point  to 
point,  thence  up  the  river  on  the  Canada  side  or  over  to  Detroit.  To 
run  up  on  the  Canada  side  keep  that  shore  aboard  until  up  to  the 
head  of  Belle  or  Hog  Island,  (leaving  a  buoy  on  your  port  hand  on 
the  shoal  which   makes  down  from  Hog  Island,  and  is  painted  with 
black  and  red  horizontal  stripes),  pass  the  Fishery  on  the  NE  point  of 
the  island,  and  haul  up  for  the  ranges  on  Gross  Point,  a  little  below 
Windmill  Point  Lighthouse.     On  this  range  you  leave  a  red  buoy  to 
starboard  on  the  shoal  which  runs  down  from  Peach  Island,  and  a 
buoy  with  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  to  port,  on  a  shoal  off  the 
NE  end  of  Hog  Island.     This  buoy  is  on  the  eastern  end  of  the  shoal, 
and  marks  the  entrance  to  either  channel.     When  about  half  way  on 
the  range  from  the  red  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  the  striped 
buoy  to  port,  haul  up  river  and  run  out  ENE  3  miles  past  Windmill 
Point  Lighthouse  and  into  Lake  St.  Clair.    A  perpendicular  white 


r 


i^«^*i*»- 


Thompson's  Coast  Filot. 


55 


;  on  the  island. 

No.  I,  a  fixed 

^i^W,  and  is  a 

the  island  ;  is  a 
above  the  level 
well  over  to  the 
along,  until  you 
re,  and  directly 
building;  then 
i  and  the  Alex- 
u  range  Mama- 
loy  on  the  star- 
ce  due  north  on 
ut  200  yards  off. 
ner  of  Fighting 
le  river  aboard, 
e  Canada  shore, 
is  a  fixed  white 
1,  on  the  keep- 
k.      Grassey  Is- 
ay  from  point  to 
r  to  Detroit.  To 
until  up  to  the 
ir  port  hand  on 
1  is  painted  with 
the  NE  point  of 
nt,  a  little  below 
ve  a  red  buoy  to 
ch  Island,  and  a 
in  a  shoal  off  the 
end  of  the  shoal, 
l)OUt  half  way  on 
,  and  the  striped 
3  past  Windmill 
lendicular  white 


I 


and  black  striped  buoy  will  be  placed  this  season  at  the  turning  point, 
to  be  left  on  either  hand,  and  will  indicate  the  entrance  to  Detroit 
Kiver.  The  depth  of  water  all  through  Detroit  River  is  from  3j^  to  5 
and  6  fathoms,  except  at  the  Lime  Kiln  Crossing,  where  it  is  15  feet. 

Windmill  Point  Lighthouse  is  on  the  west  side  of  Detroit  River, 
and  entrance  to  Lake  St.  Clair ;  it  is  a  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  red 
flashes,  visible  13  miles,  stands  55  feet  above  lake  level. 

River  Thames  Lighthouse,  Lake  St.  Clair,  Ont.,  at  mouth  of 
river,  south  shore;  fixed  white  light,  visible  12  miles,  square  wooden 
tower,  34  feet  high.  Small  light,  on  round  stone  tower,  visible  6 
miles.  The  two  lights  in  one  lead  over  the  bar.  Range  S  26°  E,  and 
N  26°  W,  450  yards  apart. 

Course  from  Windmill  Point  Lighthouse,  after  clearing  the  river 
to  river  Thames  Lighthouse,  EbyS  35  miles. 

Monroe  Lighthouse  on  north  pier  at  the  entrance  to  River  Raisin, 
Vu-h.  Fixed  white  light,  visible  12^  miles,  42  ftet  above  lake  level. 
A  harbor  light ;  frame  tower,  painted  white,  with  keeper's  dwelling 
attached.  Bearings,  Stony  Point  NE>^E,  4^  miles.  Turtle  Island 
Lighthouse,  SbyWj^W  10  miles. 

Buoys  Entering  Gibraltar  or  West    Channel    of  Detroit 

River. 

Outer  buoy  No.  2,  red  spar  buoy.  This  buoy  is  located  about 
440  yards  to  the  southward  of  the  shoal  running  out  from  Celeron  Is- 
land, in  13  feet  water. 

Inner  buoy.  No.  4,  red  spar  buoy,  inn  feet  water.  This  buoy  is 
on  the  southern  extremity  of  a  narrow  shoal. 

There  are  three  more  red  buoys,  firsti  n  10  feet  and  the  others  in 
12  feet  water. 

Buoys  Above  Gibraltar. 

Red  spar  buoy,  in  10  feet  water.  This  buoy  is  on  the  end  of  a 
shoal,  and  the  channel  is  nearly  north  from  it,  800  yards  from  light- 
house. Red  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  water.  This  buoy  is  on  the  north 
end  of  Mamajuda  shoal,  and  opposite  the  town  of  Wyandotte. 


m 


MA 


* 


^■ 


,js*™- 


56 


Thompson!  s  Coast  Pilot. 


\n.,. 


To  Enter  Detroit  River  by  the  American  Channel,  from  the 

Light  Ship. 

From  the  Light  Ship  to  Bar  Point,  steer  NVVby  N  5^  miles,  or 
until  you  make  the  first  red  buoy ;  follow  up  the  buoys  leaving  red  to 
starboard,  until  into  the  river;  when  abreast  the  lighthouse,  which  is 
in  the  town  of  Gibraltar,  800  feet  from  the  river— the  light  is  a  fixed 
white  light,  visible  13  rniles,  and  47  feet  above  river  level— lun  up 
river  leaving  a  small  island  on  your  starboard  hand,  then  keep  Grosse 
Isle  side  best  aboard,  and  run  for  the  draw  of  the  bridge  across  the 
river  from  Trenton  to  Grosse  Isle. 

The  An^crican  Channel  Railroad  Lights. 

On  the  bridge,  fixed  red  or  green.     Three  lights,  in  lanterns,  to 
mark  the  draw  in  the  railroad  bridge  across  the  river.     When  the 
draw  is  closed,  three  red  lights,  arranged  in  the  form  of  a  triangle, 
will  show  to  vessels.    The  highest  middle  light  will  be  immediately 
over  the  pivot  of  the  draw,  at  an  elevation  of  28  feet  above  the  level 
of  the  top  girders;  and  the  ether  lights  will  be  placed  at  the  summit 
of  the  side  frames,  at  each  end  of  the  bridge,   next  the  draw  span. 
When  the  draw  is  open,  three  green  lights  will  be  displayed  as  above. 
When  through  the  bridge  keep  the  starboard  side  of  the  river  best 
aboard  for  one  mile,  to  clear  a  small  shoal  .;4  mile  above  Trenton 
docks,  ihen  keep  mid-channel  until  near  up  to  Wyandotte,  where 
there  is  good  vater  alongside  the  docks— 14  feet.     From  Wyandotte 
keep  the  port  side  of  the  river  aboard  all  the  way  up  to  Detroit,  leav- 
ing Mud  Island  opposite  the  River  Ecorse  to  starboard  (30  to  34  feet 
water  all  through)  passing  the  River  Rouge,  4)^  miles  from  the  River 
Ecorse,  Fort  Wayne,  the  Copper  docks  and  Clark's  dry  docks,  all  of 
which  docks  have  plenty  of  water  alongside.     In  passing  from  Clark's 
dock,  keep  the  river  docks  close  aboard,  and  run  up,  leaving  tho  mid- 
dle ground  off  the  Michigan  Central  Elevator,  to  starboard,   7  feet 
water).     From  Detroit  to  the  American  channel,  run  up  along  the 
city  dof;ks  till  you  make  the  buoys  off  Hog  Island.     A  buoy  will  be 
placed  on  this  middle  ground  this  spring 


'Is  ?'* 


Sill 


.■iae-s^afci- 


ThompsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


57 


inel,  from  the 


N  5"^  miles,  or 
>rs  leaving  red  to 
ithouse,  whi':h  is 
e  light  is  a  fixed 
;r  level — lun  up 
hen  keep  Grosse 
idge  acros3   the 


ghts. 

5,  in  lanterns,  to 
•iver.     When  the 
rm  of  a  triangle, 
1  be  immediately 
It  above  the  level 
;d  at  the  summit 
ct  the  draw  span, 
splayed  as  above, 
of  the  river  best 
;  above  Trenton 
i^yandotte,  where 
From  Wyandotte 
)  to  Detroit,  leav- 
ird  (30  to  34  feet 
ss  from  the  River 
dry  docks,  all  of 
5sing  from  Clark's 
,  leaving  tho  raid- 
starboard,   7  feet 
run  up  along  the 
A  buoy  will  be 


To  Run  the  Channel  Between  Grosse  Isle  and  Mamajuda 

Island. 

From  the  dock  at  the  Alexander  House,  on  the  east  side  of  Grosse 
Isle,  rufi  up  along  shore,  and  follow  up  the  grassy  point  that  makes 
up  from  the  north  end  of  the  island,  steering  about  north,  leaving 
Mamajuda  Island  and  the  grassy  flat,  which  makes  from  it  on  your 
starboard  hand,  until  up  to  the  stake  on  the  end  of  the  shoal,  which 
makes  upf  rom  the  head  of  Grosse  Isle ;  leave  this  stake  to  port,  and 
haul  over  to  Wyandotte,  or  run  up  river.  Depth  of  water  in  this  channel 
36  feet,  is  plain  to  be  seen  in  daylight,  especially  when  ihe  rushes 
are  up.  The  channel  between  Mud  Island  and  Grassey  Island  is 
generally  staked  out,  has  36  feet  water  in  it,  and  lies  NE  and  SW. 

Fighting  Island  Channel. 
To  run  up  Detroit  River  through  Fighting  Island  Channel.  When 
abreast  the  Canada  Southern  Railroad  dock,  follow  the  Canada  shore 
along  until  you  just  open  the  mouth  of  Detroit  River,  between  Bois 
Blanc  Island  and  the  main  land.  This  is  the  mark  for  entering  the 
channel.  It  is  3  miles  from  the  railroad  ferry  dock,  and  the  course  is 
Nj^  W.  Depth  of  water  30  feet.  Follow  the  island  along  all  the  way 
through,  port  side  best  aboard,  leaving  Turkey  Island  and  another 
swampy  island  3^  mile  long,  on  your  starboard  hand  ;  and  when  up 
n^ar  the  head  of  the  island,  haul  off  gradually  to  port,  and  run  out 
NW  into  main  river,  lea\'ing  Turkey  Creek  Shoal  to  starboard.  When 
Fighting  Island  bears  south,  steer  up  riv  .r. 


#1 
J. 


^*S«i^: 


Lake  St.  Clair  and  River. 


4^.- 


From    Windmill   Point    Lighthouse  to   Fort  Gratiot  and 

Lake  Huron. 

From  Windmill  Point  Lighthouse  to  New  Baltimore.  Run  out 
from  the  head  of  Detroit  River  in  Lake  St.  Clair,  ENE  3  miles ; 
thence  NNE  18  miles  to  Point  Huron  stake  which  leave  to  port ; 
thence  N  by  E  to  New  Baltimore  right  ahead.  Clinton  River  Light- 
house bears  from  the  entrance  of  the  old  north  channel  SWbyW^^W; 
light  discontinued,  6  feet  water  in  river. 
From  Windmill  Point  Lighthouse  to  the  Old  Cut  at  the 

Entrance  to  the  South  pass,  into  St.  Clair  River. 

Run  out  from  the  head  of  Detroit  River  ENE,  until  the  two 
first  points  are  open,  north  of  the  lighthouse,  or  about  2JS^  miles; 
thence  NEJ^N  20  miles,  till  in  15  feet  water,  with  the  lights  in  range, 
bearing  NE  by  E,  distan-  between  the  two  lights  1,000  feet.  Upper 
light  fixed  white,  visible  13  miles,  and  44  feet  above  lake  level. 
Lower  light,  beacon,  fixed  white,  visible  1 1  miles,  28  feet  above  lake 
level.  Run  on  the  range  leaving  black  buoys  to  port  and  red  to  star- 
board, and  when  close  up  to  the  beacon  light  haul  off  to  the  SE, 
leaving  buoys  as  above  until  into  the  river. 

From   Windmill    Point   Lighthouse  to  entrance  of  Ship 
Canal  through  Flats. 

Run  out  from  the  head  of  Detroit  River  EbyNj^N  3  miles,  or  to 
the  turning  buoy,  painted  with  perpendicular  white  and  black  stripes, 
(this  buoy  is  to  be  placed  as  a  leading  mark  for  the  river  this  season ;) 
and  will  be  in  16  feet  water;  thence  NE^N  18  miles,  with  the  two  lights, 
(red)  on  each  end  of  the  port  pier.  Both  these  lights  are  fixed  red 
lights,  and  mark  the  passage  each  way,  visible  13  miles,  45  feet  above 
lake  level ;  thence  run  up  river  in  mid-channel  for  7  miles  to  the  btioy 
on  the  starboard  hand,  painted  red,  on  the  edge  of  the  Flat  setting  of!  the 


,u^;^0eMt^' 


Thompson's  Coast  JHlot. 


59 


^er. 


Gratiot  bnd 

nore.  Run  out 
ENE  3  miles; 
I  leave  to  port ; 
n  River  Light- 
ilSWbyW^^W; 

d  Cut  at  the 
lir  River. 

E,  until  the  two 
)out  2ji^  miles; 

lights  in  range, 
30  feet.  Upper 
ove  lake  level. 
\  feet  above  lake 

and  red  to  star- 
1  off  to  the  SE, 

'ance  of  Ship 

N  3  miles,  or  to 
nd  black  stripes, 
ver  this  season ;) 
tth  the  two  lights, 
ts  are  fixed  red 
!S,  45  feet  above 
ailes  to  the  btioy 
Hat  setting  of!  the 


west  side  of  Squirrel  Island,  head  of  Bassets  channel,  bear'ngS  by  W^  W, 
three  quarters  of  a  mile.  The  strait  of  St.  Clair,  connecting  Lakes  Huron 
and  St.  Clair,  are  38  miles  in  length  ;  its  general  directions  are  north 
south  ;  thence  up  river  keeping  mid-channel  up  to  the  head  of  Russel 
or  Herson  Island,  where  there  is  a  red  and  black  horizontal  striped 
buoy.     To  run  over  to  Algonac,  leave  this  buoy  100  yards  to  port, 
good  water  at  all  the  docks.     From  either  side  of  the  river  you  may 
keep  along  shore  or  take  ihe  center,  as  there  is  good  water  on  each 
side.     From  the  head  of  Russel  Island  to  Marine  City  8  miles,  as  you 
approach  Marine  City  you  make  Woodtick  Island ;  a  shoal  sets  down 
from  this  island,  600  yards,  and  has  a  red  and  black  horizontal  striped 
buoy  on  the  south  end  of  it,  which  indicates  a  channel  on  both  sides  of 
the  island ;  there  is  also  another  buoy  of  the  same  kind  on  the  shoal  off 
the  north  end  of  the  Island,  the  widest  channel  is  on  the  American 
side.    From  Marine  City  to  St.  Ch     City,  8  miles,  keep  the  port  side 
well  aboard  or  run  from  point  to  pou.t ;   vessels  bound  through  gen- 
erally run  the  Canada  side  up  to  Sarnia,  to  run  up  on  the  St.  Clair 
side ;  keep  the  port  side  aboard  after  passing  the  point  on  the  Canada 
side  and  run  up  close  along  the  docks.    The  middle  ground  opposite 
St.  Clair  City  is  2,000  yards  long  north  and  south,  and  230  yards  wide, 
and  has  two  buoys  on  it,  one  at  the  north  and  one  at  the  south  end, 
with  black  and  red  horizontal  stripes,  which  indicate  a  channel  on 
both  sides  of  it ;  breadth  of  channel  on  St.  Clair  side  between  the 
middle  ground  and  St.  Clair  City,  460  yards.     Canada  side  to  Suther- 
land's dock  800  yards.     From  St.  Clair  City  to  Port  Huron  12  miles. 
To  run  up  keep  either  side  of  the  river  aboard.    On  the  Canada  side 
you  leave  Stag  Island  to  port,  and  on  the  American  side  you  leave  it 
to  starboad ;  a  shoal  extends  down  from  the  south  end  of  Stag  Island 
one  mile,  and  has  a  black  and  red  horizontal  striped  buoy  on  it,  indi- 
cating the  channel  on  either  side  of  the  island ;  another  buoy,  with  red 
horizontal  stripes  is  on  the  north  endof  a  shoal,  500  yards  NbyW^W 
from  the  north  end  of  the  island ;  width  of  the  Canada  channel  500 
yards.    From  the  head  of  Stag  Island,  the  shores  are  bold  as  far  as 
Sarnia  on  the  Canada  side,  and  up  to  Lake  Huron  on  the  American. 
From  Sarnia  to  head  of  rapids,  run  for  the  low  sandy  point  on  the 
starboard  hand,  and  run  up  jusi  in  the  eddy,  past  the  railroad  docks 
and  out  to  Lake  Huron. 


* 


!,■ 


it 


Lake  Huron. 


Port  Gratiot  at  the  head  of  St.  Clair  River,  Michigan. 

Light  fixewi,  varied  by  white  flashes.  Time  between  flashes,  2 
minutes.  Visible  16  miles.  Eighty-two  feet  above  lake  level.  Marks 
the  entrance  from  Lake  Huron  into  St.  Clair  River.  Has  an  eight 
inch  steam  whistle,  giving  every  minute  a  blast  of  8  seconds,  followed 
by  an  interval  of  52  seconds. 

From  the  head  of  St.  Clair  River  to  Sand  Beach  Harbor  of 

Refuge. 

Run  out  of  the  river  NNE  2j^  iniles;  thence  NbyW  57  miles, 
until  well  up  to  the  harbor  at  Sand  Beach  Bay.  Bring  the  light  to 
bear  NWJ^N,  and  run  in  on  that  bearing.  The  light  stands  on  the 
angle  of  the  breakwater,  at  the  north  end.  The  light  is  a  fixed  white 
light,  visible  13  miles;  is  44  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  Tower 
painted  white.  There  are  two  red  lights  on  masts,  at  the  northern 
entrance.  On  the  range  at  a  distance  of  i  >^  miles,  you  leave  a  buoy  on 
your  port  hand,  in  11  feet  water  }(  mile  from  the  range  line,  and  }4 
mile  from  the  dock  at  the  village  of  Sand  Beach,  W  byN^N ;  run  ^p 
alongside  the  breakwater,  or  come  to  anchor  well  up  under  the  SE 
part  of  the  breakwater,  in  4^  fathoms  water.  Mud  bottom.  In 
running  out  through  the  upper  passage,  which  is  350  feet  wide,  you 
leave  two  buoys  on  your  port  hand  near  the  upper  outlet ;  run  through 
between  the  two  red  lights,  one  on  each  end  of  the  piers,  and  haul  up 
NNE  for  two  or  three  miles,  leaving  a  buoy  on  your  port  hand  }( 
mile  off" in  12  feet  water;  thence  along  shore  at  the  distance  of  1500 
feet  from  piers,  i  }4  miles,  to  Point  Aux  Barques,  1 5  miles,  bearing  WSW 
3  »/^  miles.  Point  Aux  Barques  can  be  passed  at  a  distance  of  two  miles 
in  safety,  with  3>^  to  4  fathoms  water. 


.■^_. 


,  Michigan. 

tween  flashes,  2 
Ice  level.  Marks 
r.  Has  an  eight 
;conds,  followed 


ach  Harbor  of 

^IbyW  57  miles, 
ing  the  light  to 
ht  stands  on  the 
t  is  a  fixed  white 
he  lake.  Tower 
at  the  northern 
1  leave  a  buoy  on 
nge  line,  and  )^ 
jyN^N;  run  ^p 
up  under  the  SE 
[ud  bottom.  In 
o  feet  wide,  you 
ilet ;  run  through 
iers,  and  haul  up 
lur  port  hand  % 
distance  of  1500 
es,  bearing  WSW 
ince  of  two  miles 


Tftompsoiis  Coast  Pilot.  61 

From  the  Shore  line  at  Sand  Beach  to  the  First  Red  Light  on 
the  Pier  of  Protection, 

Is  2300  feelj;  the  channel  between  the  pier  heads  is  350  feet 
wide,  and  the  inner  angle  of  the  breakwater,  to  the  main  light,  is  350 
feet;  the  breakwater  completed  is  1250  feet;  the  cribs  sunk  to  water 
line,  ready  for  the  superstructure,  850  feet ;  and  the  whole  length  of 
the  breakwater  when  completed  will  be  4100  feet.  The  dock  at  the 
village  of  Sand  Beach  runs  out  E)^N  900  feet,  and  has  an  angle  pier 
running  SE^E'300  feet.  Also  another  extension  of  pier  frcm  the  same 
point  EbyS  200  feet,  so  that  a  vessel  can  lie  with  her  bow  in  the  angle 
of  the  two  last  named  piers.  Depth  of  water  alongside  the  piers,  14, 
15  and  17  feet.  The  bottom  of  a  wrecked  vessel  lays  300  feet  due 
east  from  the  end  of  the  long  angle  of  dock.  There  are  three  patches 
of  shoal  water  800  feet  east  from  the  main  pier,  with  10,  11  and  12 
feet  water  on  them ;  thence  to  the  breakwater  20,  24  and  27  feet 
water.  Distance  from  corner  of  Sand  Beach  village  dock  to  the 
breakwater,  NNE  yi  mile.  (Centre  of  finished  work.)  The  points 
of  land  to  the  southward  of  the  bay  are  rocky.  One  and  a  half  miles 
from  these  points  east,  the  water  is  4>^  to  5  fathoms.    Sandy  bottom. 

Ports  Along  Shore. 

From  Gratiot  to  Burchville 12  miles. 

From  Burchville  to  Lexington 7  miles. 

From  Lexington  to  Bark  Shanty 12  miles. 

From  Bark  Shanty  to  Cherry  Creek 5  miles. 

From  Cherry  Creek  to  Forrestville 12  miles. 

From  Forrestville  to  Sand  Beach 15  miles. 

From  Sand  Beach  to  Port  Hope 10  miles. 

From  Port  Hope  to  Point  Aux  Barques 15  miles. 

From  Port  Aux  Barques  to  Huron 3  miles. 

From  Huron  to  New  River 3  miles. 

From  New  River  to  Port  Austin 7  miles. 

From  Port  Austin  to  Pinnepog 8  miles. 

From  Pinnepog  to  Pigeon  River n  miles. 

From  Pigeon  River  to  Saginaw  River 38  miles. 

From  Saginaw  River  to  Pine  River 22  miles. 

From  Fine  River  toTawas 26  miles. 


ill 

;  • '   i 

^"1   1 


,»**"' 


I 


6ft 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


':  < 


r'.:' 


From  Head  of  St.  Clair  River  to  Saginaw  River. 

K  in  out  of  St.  Clair  River  NNE  a>4  miles;  thence  Nby  W6o 
miles ;  then  follow  the  coast  around  at  the  distance  of  two  miles, 
till  Point  Aux  Barques  and  the  seef  projecting  out  from  it  is  passed, 
then  steer   more  to  the  northward,  until  the  mill  chimney  at  Port 
Austin  bears  due  south  4  miles  off.     From  thence  to  pass  to  the 
northward  of  Charity  Islands,  steer  W^S  as  miles,  giving  the  island 
a  good  berth  of  two  miles,  as  there  are  rocky  lumps  extending  that 
distance  from  the  lighthouse  to  the  northward.     Having  passed  the 
island,  steer  SVV  byS  33  miles  for  Saginaw  River.    Point  Aux  Barques 
light,  on  the  shore  of  Lake  Huron,  and  south  side  of  the  entrance  to 
Saginaw  Bay.     Flashes  white;  visible  i6>^  miles;  89  feet  above  lake 
level,  and  marks  the  turning  point  for  vessels  entering  Saginaw  Bay. 
Port  Austin  lighthouse  building,  on  the  north  end  of  the  reef  which 
extends  out  three  miles  from  the  shore.     Charity  Island  light,  at  the 
mouth  of  Saginaw  Bay.     Fixed  white  ;  visible  13  miles ;  45  feet  above 
lake  level.    This  light  is  on  the  north  point  of  the  island,  from  which 
shoals  extend  from  NW  to  NE.    The  main  channel  is  to  the  westward 
of  the  light.     Strangers  should  not  attempt  to  pass  to  the  eastward  of 
the  light  or  island  except  with  a  good  pilot. 

Saginaw  River  Range  Lights. 

Front  light,  fixed  red,  visible  12  miles;  rear  light,  fixed  white, 
visible   i^yi  miles,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Saginaw  River,  Michigan. 

To  enter  the  cut  to  the  mouth  of  the  Saginaw  River.  When  in 
three  fathoms  water,  bring  the  i.ghthouse  to  bear  S  byW.  At  this 
point  the  light  should  be  3  miles  distant,  and  the  north  end  of  the 
cut  half  a  mile.  Stand  on  this  course  for  the  second  class  iron  can 
buoy,  which  marks  the  north  end  of  the  cut.  This  cut  is  6,800  feet 
long,  190  feet  wide,  and  12  feet  deep,  ranging  N)4E  and  S^W,  and 
marked  by  five  pair  of  buoys,  red  and  black,  opposite  to  each  other. 
These  pairs  of  buoys  are  1,650  feet  apart.  On  standing  through  the 
cut,  when  you  have  passed  buoys  9  and  10,  the  mouth  of  the  river 
will  have  been  entered,  the  water  deepening  to  16  and  20  feet;  then 
passing  between  'wo  pairs  of  buoys,  Nos.  1 1, 12, 13  and  14,  will  lead  you 
up  river.     All  the  ports  along  shore  from  Lexington  to  Port  Ho7e, 


except 
or  ran( 
on  the 


R 

in  thr 
land  L 
miles  < 
City  tc 
easterl 
T 
side  ol 
betwe< 
is  70^ 
south  V 
of  the 
length 
Vessel 
open  < 
up  for 
light  0 
ing  th 
City  b 
from  1 
WSW 
ing  N 
and  ri 
pier  a' 
cornel 
haulu 
street 
water 
the  n( 
City  t 
water, 


Sil 


Thompson's  Coast  IHlot. 


63 


V  River. 

ice  NbyW6o 
of  two  miles, 
n  it  is  passed, 
limney  at  Port 
to  pass  to  the 
ving  the  island 
extending  that 
ing  passed  the 
nt  Aux  Barques 
;he  entrance  to 
feet  above  lake 
\  Saginaw  Bay. 
the  reef  which 
id  light,  at  the 
s ;  45  feet  above 
md,  from  which 
to  the  westward 
the  eastward  of 


ght,  fixed  white, 
liver,  Michigan, 
.iver.    When  in 
S  by  W.    At  this 
orth  end  of  the 
d  class  iron  can 
:ut  is  6,800  feet 
and  S^W,  and 
e  to  each  other, 
ling  through  the 
uth  of  the  river 
id  20  feet;  then 
1 14,  will  lead  you 
.  to  Port  Ho7e, 


except  Sand  Beach,  can  be  made  by  bringing  the  piers  to  bear  west, 
or  range  them  and  run  alongside.  Port  Austin  has  two  good  docks 
on  the  east  side  of  the  old  harbor,  with  11  to  i  a  feet  water. 

From  Saginaw  River  to  Tawas. 

Run  out  of  Saginaw  River  on  opposite  courses  and  ranges  until 
in  three  fathoms  water,  then  steer  NEbyN  jflY^  miles  till  Charity  Is- 
land Lighthouse  bears  SE,  distant  y/i  miles ;  thence  due  north  13 
miles  to  East  Tawas.  In  running  up  you  leave  Alabaster  and  'I'awas 
City  to  port  They  both  have  good  docks  to  load  at,  but  are  open  to 
easterly  and  southerly  winds.     Depth  of  water  i  a  to  13  feet. 

Tawas  light  is  on  the  SW  end  of  Ottawa  Point,  on  the  easterly 
side  of  Tawas  Bay.    Is  a  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  red  flashes ;  time 
between  flashes  one  minute  and  thirty  seconds  ;  visible  15  miles,  and 
is  loYi  feet  above  lake  level.     A  sand  flat  extends  i^  miles  to  the 
southward  and  westward  from  the  light.     The  northwesterly  edge  of 
of  the  flat  is  very  abrupt,  dropping  off  from  6  to  24  feet  in  a  vessel's 
length.     A  second  class  can  buoy  is  placed  off" the  SV^  end  of  the  flat. 
Vessels  coming  from  the  northward  and  eastward  will  keep  the  buoy 
open  on  the  starboard  bow  about  a  point ;  when  abreast  the  buoy,  haul 
up  for  the  anchorage  ;  nothing  to  the  eastward  of  NbyE,  with  the 
light  on  the  point  bearing  from  E  to  SE.     The  soundings,  after  pass- 
ing the  buoy,  are  from  3^  to  5  fathoms.    Sand  and  clay.     Tawas 
City  bears  NWbyWi^W  3  miles.     Ottawa  Point  or  Tawas  Light  bears 
from  buoy  NEi^E,    i^   miles.     From  Point  Au  Barques,   bearing 
WSW  4  miles,to  Tawas  City  WNWi<  W  39  miles,  with  the  light  bear, 
ing  NEJ^E  2  miles ;  thence  leave  the  buoy  300  yards  to  starboard 
and  run  in  WNW><N  for  Tawas  City.     A  good  light  is  kept  on  the 
pier  at  Tawas  City,  and  also  at  East  Tawas.     The  light  stands  on  the 
corner  of  the  pier,  and  when  clear  of  the  buoy  off  Ottawa  Point  Shoal, 
haul  up  for  the  light,  or  steer  NWbyN  2^  miles.     In  the  night  the 
street  lights  make  a  very  good  range  to  run  in  by,   10  to   14  feet 
water  along  side  the  dock.     This  pier  is  docked  quite  a  long  way  to 
the  northward  of  the  corner,  where  vessels  load  lumber.    From  Tawas 
City  to  Alabaster,  4^^  miles  south,  has  a  good  pier,  with  12  to  14  feet 
water,  where  vessels  load  plaster. 


,  I 


i  I 


:ii 


;    ■  i 


* 


'"''^i^mki 


(,pi*^ 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


I' 


From  Point  Au  Barques  Light. 
Bearing  WSW  4  miles  to  Sauble  River  Lighthouse,  NW^^^W  38  »^ 
miles.  The  lighthouse  is  on  the  end  of  the  north  pier,  is  fixed  red, 
visible  ii>4  miles,  stands  33  feet  above  lake  level,  tower  painted 
white;  depth  of  water  going  in,  10  to  ii  feet;  best  water  on  north 
side.  The  principal  freight  dock  is  to  the  southward  of  the  harbor, 
14  feet  water.  There  are  three  or  four  mill  piers  to  the  north  of  the 
harbor,  with  11  to  14  feet  water. 

From  Point  Au  Barques  to  Sturgeon  Point  Lighthouse  and 

Harrisville. 
With  Point  Au  Barques  light  bearing  WSW  4  miles,  steer  NWby 
N  49  J^  miles,  to  Harrisville  piers  ;  thence  run  out  from  the  piers  i>^ 
miles,  and  steer  NbyE  4  miles,  to  abreast  of  Sturgeon  Point  Light- 
house. This  light  is  a  coast  light,  on  the  western  shore  of  Lake 
Huron,  24  miles  south  of  Thunder  Bay  Island  ;  is  a  fixed  white  light, 
visible  15  miles,  69  feet  above  lake  level,  and  is  a  white  tower.  From 
this  point  to  Thunder  Bay  Island  light,  bearing  west  2  miles,  steer 

NbyE22>^  miles 

From  Point  Au  Barques. 

Bearing  west  5  miles  to  Thunder  Bay  River,  Alpena  NNW  65 
miles ;  thence  with  the  south  point  of  Thunder  Bay,  bearing  west  5 
miles,  steer  WNW>^N  \6yi  miles  to  Thunder  Bay  River,  and  Irom 
the  same  point,  WNW^^N  G}^  miles,  to  abreast  of  Scare  Crow  Island, 
bearing  south  }4  mile ;  thence  WbyN  4  miles  to  abreast  of  Devil 
River,  bearing  SWbyWi^W  %  mile,  and  run  to  the  docks  on  this 
course. 

The  light  at  Alpena  is  on  a  crib  a  few  yards  from  the  end  of  the 
north  pier,  and  shows  a  light-colored  red  light,  and  is  visible  1 2  miles. 
To  enter  the  harbor,  run  for  the  red  light  on  the  middle  of  the  bridge, 
which  is  }4  mile  from  the  end  of  the  north  pier,  keeping  in  the  centre 
between  piers.  Twelve  to  14  feet  water.  Good  holding  ground  any- 
where outside. 

From  Alpena  Piers  to  Thunder  Bay  Island  Light. 

Run  out  of  the  river  SE>^S  ?4  mile,  thence  ESE  S}(  miles,  until 
North  Point  bears  N  1%  miles;  thence  ENE  4  miles,  till  the  south- 
east end  of  the  island  bears  NW  ^  mile  ofT,  thence  up  lake. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


65 


r,  is  fixed  red, 
;ower  painted 
Iter  on  north 
of  the  harbor, 
e  north  of  the 

ithouse  and 

s,  steer  NWby 
I  the  piers  i  ^ 
n  Point  Light- 
shore  of  Lake 
ed  white  light, 
tower.  From 
a  miles,  steer 


pena  NNW  65 
learing  west  5 
ver,  and  Irom 
e  Crow  Island, 
reast  of  Devil 
docks  on  this 

the  end  of  the 
isible  12  miles. 
;  of  the  bridge, 
ig  in  the  centre 
3g  ground  any- 

d  Light. 

J^  miles,  until 
,  till  the  south- 
lake. 


From  Devil  River  to  Thunder  Bay  Island. 
SE  point  bearing  NW  •<;  mile,  NEbyE^^E  13  miles. 

From  Point  Au  Barques. 

Bearing  west  5  miles  to  Thunder  Hay  Island  light,  bearing  west 
J  miles,  NbyVV^W  73  miles.  Thunder  Bay  Island  light,  on  north 
side  of  entrance  to  Thunder  Bay,  Mich.,  is  a  white  flash  light,  time  be- 
tween flashes  i  minute  30  seconds  ;  distance  visible  14  miles.  Note — 
this  light  has  been  seen  ao  miles  often— is  59  feet  above  lake  level, 
and  bears  from  Middle  Island  NNW^W  12  mihs.  A  ten  inch  steam 
fog  whistle,  giving  a  blast  of  8  seconds,  followeu  by  an  interval  of  10 
seconds,  then  a  blast  of  two  seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  40 
seconds,  altering  this  way  every  minute. 

From  Thunder  Bay  Island  Light. 

Bearing  west  a  miles,  steer  NNW^^W  26  miles,  to  Presqu'il«  ; 
North  Point  Lighthouse  bearing  WbyS^S  5  miles. 

Presqu'ile  Harbor  Ranges. 

Two  lights,  white,  visible  10  and  la  miles,  inside  the  harbor  of 
Presqu'ile.  Front  light  in  wooden  tower  j  rear  light  on  keeper's 
dwelling,  distance  apart  1,000  feet,  bearing  east  and  west.  In  ap- 
proaching the  entrance  to  the  harbor,  when  in  7  fathoms  water,  bring 
the  two  lights  in  range,  and  run  in  till  in  the  middle  of  the  bay  for  an 
anchorage,  in  3>^  fathoms,  or  run  to  the  docks.  Depth  of  water  over 
bar  13  feet. 

Presqu'ile  North  Point  Light. 

Is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  18^  miles,  stands  123  feet  above 
lake  level,  and  is  a  coast  light,  and  a  goc  ;  l-^ding  mark  up  or  down 
the  lake. 

From  Presqu'ile  North  Point  Light. 

Bearing  WbyS^S  a  miles,  to Ch'.oygan,  Mich.,  steer  NWbyW 
^W  47  miles;  thence  west  8  miks  to  abreast  of  Cheboygan  Light- 
house, one  mile  south.  Cheboygan  light,  on  the  main  land  opposite 
to  Bois  Blanc  Island,  marking  the  eastern  entrance  to  the  Straits  of 
Mackinaw,   Mich,  south  channel.     The  south  point  of  Bois  Blanc 


* 


.^^mmm&»i^em^sm&v^ssmm»'^" 


66 


Thompson!  s  Coast  Pilot. 


Island  bears  north,  and  the  channel  opposite  the  light  is  3  miles  wide. 
Old  Fort  Mackinaw  on  the  main,  NWbyWi^W,  16^  miles.  Cheboy- 
gan light  is  fixed,  varied  by  white  flashes,  time  between  flashes,  1 
minute  and  30  seconds,  vi  IMe  1 2  miles,  and  is  37  feet  above  lake  level. 
A  flat  makes  from  the  lighthouse  around  the  point  to  the  westward  and 
into  Duncan  Bay,  and  drops  off  prettv  suddenly. 

From  Presqu'ile  North  Point  Lighthouse. 

Bearing  WbyS>^S,  2  miles  to  Bois  Blanc  Lighthouse,  NWbyW 
i^W  58  miles,  to  a  point  >^  mile  north  of  the  light;  thence  W^N 
9^  miles  to  Mackinaw.  On  this  course  you  pass  Spectacle  Reef 
Lighthouse,  4  miles  to  the  northward. 

Spectacle  Reef  Lighthouse. 

Is  on  the  westerly  edge  of  the  reef,  to  the  eastward  of  the  entrance 
to  the  Straits  of  Mackinaw  in  Lake  Huron.  Flashes  red  and  white, 
at  intervals  of  thirty  seconds,  visible  16^  miles,  height  of  light  above 
lake  level  86  feet  A  square  wooden  pier,  12  feet  above  water,  sur- 
rounds the  tower.  A  ten  inch  steam  fog  whistle,  gives  a  blast  of  3 
seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  12  seconds;  then  a  blast  of  3 
seconds,  followed  by  a  pause  of  42  seconds,  and  in  the  same  way  every 
minute. 

Bois  Blanc  Lighthouse,  on  the  north  side  of  Bois  Blanc  Island, 
in  the  Strait  of  Mackinaw  ;  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  13^  miles, 
53  feet  above  lake  level,  and  is  a  guide  to  the  north  channel  of  Mack- 


inaw. 


From  Presqu'ile  North  Point  Lighthouse  to  Detour. 

From  the  light  bearing  WbyS^^S  2  miles,  steer  NWbyN  47  miles, 
bring  Detour  light  to  bear  west,  and  run  up  river.  Detour  light,  at 
the  mouth  of  St.  Mary's  River,  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  15^ 
miles,  75  feet  above  lake  level,  and  marks  the  entrance  to  St.  Mary's 
River.  A  10  inch  steam  fog  whistle,  giving  every  minute  a  blast  of  10 
seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  50  seconds.  Garden  City  Reef 
WSW>^W  \\y%  miles,  Spectacle  Reef,  SWi^S  17  miles.  >   - 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


67 


s  3  miles  wide. 
niles.  Cheboy- 
reen  flashes,  1 
bove  lake  level, 
e  westward  and 


)use. 

ouse,  NWbyW 
;  thence  W^N 
Spectacle  Reef 


of  the  entrance 
s  red  and  white, 
t  of  light  above 
DOve  water,  sur- 
ives  a  blast  of  3 
len  a  blast  of  3 
same  way  every 

is  Blanc  Island, 
ible  13^  miles, 
lannel  of  Mack- 


to  Detour. 

WbyN  47  miles. 
Detour  light,  at 
;ht,  visible  15^ 
ice  to  St.  Mary's 
mte  a  blast  of  10 
irden  City  Reef 
es.       -"-- 


From  Point  Aux  Barques,  to  pass  to  Southward  of  the 

Charity  Islands. 

When  abreast  of  Port  Austin  steer  WSW  22^^  miles,  till  Oak 

Point  bears  east,  and  Sandy  Point  due  south ;  then  haul  up  west  for 

4^  miles,  till  the  lighthouse  on  Charity  Island  is  in  range  with  the 

west  end  of  Little  Charity  Island;  thence  SW^^S  for  Saginaw  River, 

27>^  miles. 

To  enter  Saginaw  Bay  from  the  North. 

Follow  down  the  coast  to  Sauble  Point,  and  note  that  there  is  a 
shoal  extending  ^  of  a  mile  from  the  shore  above  Sauble  River. 
When  Sauble  Point  bears  NW,  distance  4  miles,  steer  SWbyS  for  the 
mouth  of  Saginaw  River,  distance  52  miles. 

To  make  the  dock  at  Forestville  and  White  Rock. 

Bring  them  to  bear  due  west  at  a  distance  of  2  miles,  and  run  in 

on  that  course. 

To  make  the  dock  at  Willow  River. 

Bring  it  to  bear  due  souih  at  a  distance  of  2  miles,  and  run  in  on 

that  course.       '"  . 

To  enter  Port  Austm, 

Run  the  coast  along  from  Point  aux  Barques  at  the  distance  of  3 
miles,  till  the  mill  chimney  bears  due  south  when  you  can  run  for  the 
dock  on  this  course,  keeping  a  lookout  for  a  rocky  spot  to  NW  off  the 
end  of  the  dock.  A  lighthouse  is  now  being  erected  on  the  end  of 
the  reef  off  Point  Aux  Barques,  (proper). 

To  enter  Wild  Fowl  Bay. 
After  crossing  the  Little  Charity  Flat  from  Pigeon  Bay,  as  pre- 
viously directed,  steer  due  south  till  Sandy  Point  bears  east.  Then 
steer  ESE  into  the  Bay,  when  haul  up  for  the  land,  not  approaching 
nearer  than  a  mile  to  the  north  shore,  as  a  bank  puts  off  that  distance. 
Excellent  holding  ground  and  protection  from  all  winds  is  found  in 
this  secure  harbor,  in  12  to  14  feet  water. 

To  make  the  Mouth  of  Pine  River. 
In  weathering  Point  aux  Ores,  look  out  for  the  spit  projecting 


1 1 


r 


!  i 


1 


i 
\  f 


ili 


■sSi*** 


it 

4^ 


i- 


68 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


from  Rifle  River,  which  extends  to  a  point  SW  from  Point  aux  Gres, 
and  distant  3  miles.  After  turning  this  spit,  run  west  into  10  feet 
water,  which  will  be  found  within  a  mile  of  the  shore. 

To  enter  Wild  Fowl  Bay  from  Saginaw  River. 

Steer  NE^E  for  Sandy  Point  and  when  midway  between  Sandy 
Point  and  North  Island,  steer  east  into  the  bay. 

To  make  Otter  Bay,  or  Tawas,  from  the  South. 

After  passing  Charity  Island  Lighthouse  and  getting  it  to  bear 
SE,  steer  up  north  for  Tawas  Bay.  The  anchorage  is  good  in  all 
parts  of  the  upper  bay,  and  generally  around  the  shores,  except  about 
Charity  Islands,  where  it  is  rocky.  Good  holding  ground  is  found 
under  Sauble  Point,  and  protection  from  all  winds  but  SW  and  SE ; 
close  under  the  land  around  Gravelly  Point  there  is  good  holding 
ground ;  and  along  the  shores  of  this  bay  the  water  is  deep  close  in 
on  the  north  side. 

To  enter  Thunder  Bay  from  the  South. 

When  abreast  of  Point  aux  Barques  Light,  bearing  due  west  and 
distant  5  miles,  steer  NNW  for  65  miles.  And  from  Saginaw  Bay, 
when  Point  Sauble  bears  NW  distant  2  miles,  steer  N  byE  for  40 
miles ;  run  the  shore  along  at  a  distance  of  2  miles,  till  the  south 
point  of  Thunder  Bay  bears  due  west;  thence  to  Thunder  Bay 
River  NW^N  16^  miles.  Anchorage  outside  the  bar  ^  a  mile 
from  shore,  in  16  feet  water. 

To  make  a  harbor  between  Thunder  Bay  Island  and  Sugar 

Island. 

From  the  point  mentioned,  steer  north  1 1  miles ;  run  in  on  this 
course  midway  between  the  two  islands,  and  anchor  in  14  feet  water, 
abreast  the  houses  (Paxton's)  on  the  port  side. 

Note.— There  is  a  passage  of  9  feet  water,  nearly  straight  out 
from  the  middle  of  the  bay,  NWbyN.     (See  below.) 

To  enter  the  Harbor  from  the  Eastward. 
Keep  round  the  island,  giving  the  SE  point  a  berth  of  >(  of  a 
mile,  till  you  get  the  opening  between  the  two  islands  about  N  and 


\ 


«:,■* 

»■»«•—.-- 


Thompson's  Coast  IHlot.^ 


69 


i*oint  aux  Gres, 
St  into  10  feet 

River. 

between  Sandy 

South. 

;tting  it  to  bear 
is  good  in  all 
;s,  except  about 
round  is  found 
t  SW  and  SE; 
s  good  holding 
is  deep  close  in 

ith. 

ig  due  west  and 
n  Saginaw  Bay, 
■  N  byE  for  40 
s,  till  the  south 
)  Thunder  Bay 
i  bar  ^  a  mile 

ind  and  Sugar 

;  run  in  on  this 
in  14  feet  water, 

rly  straight  out 

irard. 

berth  of  );(  of  a 

ds  about  N  and 


\ 


S ;  when  run  in  as  above  directed,  keeping  a  lookout  for  the  shoals 
projecting  from  each  side,  which  shoals  protect  the  harbor  from 
southerly  winds. 

Note.— This  Bay  is  called  Paxton's  Bay. 

To  make  Devil  River  from  the  Eastward. 
From  the  SE  point  of  Thunder  Bay  Island,  steer  SW  by  W>^W 
13  miles,  till  the  houses  are  seen  distinctly,  when  run  in  and  come  to, 
as  above  directed. 

General  Remarks. 

The  shores  of  Thunder  Bay  are  generally  good  holding  ground. 
Excellent  holding  ground  under  the  north  point,  in  3  >^  to  6  fathoms, 
and  all  along  the  north  shore  of  the  Bay.  Good  protection  from  all 
winds  except  SE.  Good  anchorage,  clay  and  sand,  is  found  to  the 
north  of  Gull  Island. 

Note.— Paxton's  Bay,  between  Thunder  Bay  and  Sugar  Island, 
can  be  entered  from  the  north  as  well  as  the  south ;  but  it  would  not 
be  safe  for  a  stranger  to  try  it  from  the  north,  as  the  channel  is  not 
quite  straight.  The  holding  ground  to  the  SW  and  south  of  the 
islands  is  not  good,  being  rocky,  but  under  the  north  point  it  is  good. 
Good  anchorage  under  Sugar  Island. 

There  is  a  channel  of  14  feet  water  between  Sugar  Island  and  the 
main  shore.  To  pass  through  it  from  the  south,  bring  north  point  to 
bear  west ;  distance  ^  of  a  mile ;  and  run  due  north  till  Gull  Island 
is  passed ,  then  haul  up  NNW  for  Middle  Island. 

Note.— During  the  prevalence  of  easterly  gales  from  north  to 
south  the  water  in  the  Bay  is  raised,  and  in  like  manner  depressed 
during  westerly  gales.  • 

Dangers  on  Lake  Huron. 
From  Fort  Gratiot  to  Point  aux  Barques  Lighthouse,  the  coast 
as  far  as  Blue  Ledge  can  be  approached  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile. 
Off  Indian  Creek  and  White  Rock  Point  there  are  rocks  and  rocky 
spots  within  >^  a  mile  of  the  shore  which  character  continues  to  Elm 
Creek,  at  which  place  a  bad  spit  extends  in  a  NE  direction  for  ^  of 
a  mile.     There  are  several  dangerous  ledges  running  N  and  S  about 


-4 


7-> 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


a  mile  from  the  shore,  off  Forest  Bay ;  fiom  thence  to  Point  aux 
B?rques  Lighthouse.  Boulders  and  rocky  spots  are  found  within  ^  of 
a  mile  of  the  shore,  from  the  Light  to  Point  aux  Barques  (proper). 

There  are  ledges  and  detached  rocky  spots,  rendering  the  coast 
iangerous,  within  i  ^  miles  from  the  shore.  There  is  a  4  foot  spot 
5^  of  a  mile  east,  and  a  9  foot  spot  \]i  miles  NNE  of  lighthouse. 
Orion  Rock,  with  6  feet  water,  lies  \)i  miles  NW  of  Willow  Creek 
wharf.  A  bad  Ledge  extends  ^  of  a  mile  from  NW  to  NE  from 
Burnt  Cabin  Point.  Point  aux  Barques  Reef  (proper)  extends  NW 
15^  miles. 

From  Point  aux  Barques  (proper)  to  Sauble  Point  Flat,  off  Port 
Austin  wharf,  y^  a  mile  to  the  NW.     Shoal  ground  off  Flat  Rock 
Point,  extends  out  1/2  a  mile,  and  continues  out  this  distance  along 
the  coast  to  Partridge  River.    Two  shoals  z^t  miles  from  shore,  off 
Partridge  River ;  good  water  inside  of  them.      Spit  from  Hat  Point 
extends  one  mile  to  the  northward.    There  is  a  shoal  spot  i^  miles 
WNW  from  Little  Oak  Point.    Foul  ground  around  the   Charity 
Islands,  extending  i^  miles  to  the  northward,  and  i^  ^il^s  to  the 
eastward  of  the  lighthouse.    A  flat  extends  for  i  mile  to  the  westward 
of  Big  Charity  Island;  and  there  is  a  rocky  spot  \]i  miles  BE  of 
Little  Charity  Island.     A  sand  bank  with  10  feet  water,  extends  from 
Little  Charity  to  the  main  land,  and  a  spit  puts  out  from  the  Sand 
Point  in  a  N W  direction,  for  i  J^   miles,  with  i  foot  least  water  on 
it.  A  of  flat  of  sand  extends  4  miles  from  the  shore,  near  Quannakisse, 
and  continues  around  the  south  shore ;  being  at  Saginaw  River  and 
Ogahkahning  River,  2  miles  from  shore.     Sand  Spit  2  miles  SE  from 
Nayahquing  Point,  also  one  extending  3  miles  east  from  Potato  River, 
and  another  3)^  miles  E  byS  from  Saginaw  River.    There  is  a  flat  in 
Pine  River  Bay  extending  out  three  miles  from  shore ;  and  a  rocky 
spit  2^  miles  SEbyS  from  the  mouth  of  Rifle  River;  a  rocky  spit  i 
mile  east  of  Point  aux  Ores ;  and  a  two  faihom  spot  ^  of  a  mile  ES 
E  from  Gravelly  Point ;  a  7  foot  shoal  i  mile  SE  of  White  Stone  Point; 
a  sand  spit  ^  of  a  mile  in  a  SW  and  westerly  direction  from  Ottawa 
Point ;  a  spit  extends  y%  a  mile  to  southward  of  Sauble  Point. 
Note. — These  remarks  take  you  clear  round  Saginaw  Bay. 


;  to  Point  aux 
nd  within  %  of 
ues  (i^roper). 
lering  the  coast 
is  a  4  foot  spot 
of  lighthouse. 
r  Willow  Creek 
W  to  NE  from 
r)  extends  NVV 

t  Flat,  off  Port 
off  Flat  Rock 
distance  along 
i  from  shore,  off 
from  Hat  Point 
,1  spot  i^  miles 
nd  the   Charity 

1  ^  miles  to  the 
to  the  westward 
%  miles  SE  of 
;r,  extends  from 
tt  from  the  Sand 
3t  least  water  on 
!ar  Quannakisse, 
;inaw  River  and 

2  miles  SE  from 
)m  Potato  River, 
There  is  a  flat  in 
e;  and  a  rocky 
■ ;  a  rocky  spit  i 
^  of  a  mile  ES 
hite Stone  Point; 
on  from  Ottawa 
lie  Point. 

ginaw  Bay. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 
From  Sauble  Point  to  Black  River  Island. 


71 


A  ID  foot  spot  I  mile  from  shore,  seven  miles  north  of  Sauble 
River.  Spit  off  Sturgeon  Point  extending  >^  a  mile  ENE.  Rocky 
spots  extending  out  i%  miles  east,  off  Black  River.  Foul  ground 
around  Black  River  Idand,  extending  ENE  for  ^  of  a  mile,  and  from 
thence  to  main  shore. 

Thunder  Bay. 

Foul  ground  aroi.  -d  South  Point  and  islands.  Shores  shoal  from 
thence  to  Devil  River ;  6  foot  spot  J^  of  a  mile  to  northwa.  \  of  Sul- 
phur Island;  ii  foot  shoal  i^  miles  NE  of  Partridge  Point.  Flat  in 
bay  west  of  White  Fish  Point ;  12  foot  spot  i  mile  SE  of  North  Point. 
Foul  ground  and  rocky  lumps  between  Sugar  Island  and  main  land. 
Spits  extending  SE  of  Sugar  Island  and  J^  of  a  mile  SE  of  Thunder 
Bay  Island. 

From  Thunder  Bay  to  Straits  of  Mackinaw. 

Shoa!  ^  of  a  mile  SE  of  Middle  Island.  Flats  ^  a  mile  from 
SW  point,  and  ^  of  a  mile  from  NW  point  of  Middle  Island.  Sec- 
ond  class  iron  buoy,  red,  off  the  SE  side  of  Middle  Islanr  ,  SE  point 
of  Middle  Island  WNWi^W,  distant  ^  of  a  mile,  in  21  feet  water. 
Vessels  from  the  northward  will  pass  outside  of  the  buoy,  and  con- 
tinue beyond  it  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  and  then  steer  WbyS^^S  until 
abreast  of  the  middle  of  the  island,  and  then  haul  up  for  the 
anchorage.  A  10  foot  spot  Yz  of  a  mile  NW  of  first  point  below 
Presqu'ile  harbor ;  a  10  foot  spot  ^  of  a  mile  SE  of  Presqu'ile  light- 
house, and  a  5  foot  spot  i  mile  SE  from  Adam's  Point. 

Note.— In  running  along  shore  from  Presqu'ile,  up  or  down,  it  is 
always  better  to  keep  the  west  shore  pretty  well  aboard,  say  from  a 
to  5  miles ;  and  should  a  fog  close  in  on  you  in  the  neighborhood  of 
the  turning  point  towards  Cheboygan,  you  have  only  to  keep  the  lead 
going,  and  after  running  as  near  as  possible  your  distance  from  Pres- 
qu'ile, which  is  50  miles,  you  may  safely  haul  up  to  the  westward  for 
Cheboygan  Lighthouse  ;  after  which,  shape  your  course  for  Old  Point 
Mackinaw,  NWbyW)^W  16  miles. 

See  entrance  to  Straits  of  Mackinaw.  -     ;     ' 


;« 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


•  > 


From  Detour  to  False  Detour. 

A  lo  foot  spot  2]^  miles  EbyS  fVoia  Detour  iijijiithoustf.  Detach- 
ed shoal  I  mile  from  shore,  and  laJ.^J  mil  -:  oast  of  Det-av  lighthouse. 
Spit  extending  i}^  miles  from  shore,  zy',  imilef  wt ,[  o  Harbor 
Island,  Shoal  spot  /^  of  ii  mile  S'vV  ironi  east  yoint  of  c-.trance  to 
False  Detour. 

Canadian  Sh'>re  from  i-'alse  Detour  to  St.  Clair. 

Magnetic  reefs  in  Mississauga  Passage.  Reefs  btiween  this 
passage  and  Green  Iblind,  v.id  UiO^e  around  the  Du'.k  Islands  Reef 
between  Providence  and  Michael  Bay,  and  oiT  outh  point  of  Michael 
Bay.  Eleven  foot  spot  in  (  ove  Island  Passage  K  W  from  lighthouse, 
distance  2  miles.  Spit  extending  V3  ii  nii!i«  west  from  Gat  Point  on 
Cove  island.  Reefs  extending  out  3  miles  between  Cove  Island  and 
Cape  Hurd.  From  Cape  Hard  to  the  Chantry  Islands  the  coast  is 
very  rocky,  and  dangerous  for  strangers,  within  lyi  miles  from  the 
shore.  The  same  chaiiicter  is  given  to  the  coast  from  the  Chantry 
Islands  to  Point  Clark.  At  Pt'int  Clark  a  reef  extends  from  the 
shore,  which,  together  with  a  detached  shoal,  requires  that  this  poin* 
should  have  a  berth  of  1^  miles  given  it  From  Point  Clark  to 
Goderich  the  coast  is  less  dangerous,  and  may  be  approached  safely 
within  ^  a  mile.  The  same  is  said  of  the  coast  from  Goderich  to 
Cape  Ippewash.  At  Cape  Ipperwash  a  dangerous  ledge  extends  to 
the  northward  for  1%  miles;  and  between  Cape  Ipperwash  and 
Point  Harris  there  are  boulders  and  rocky  spots  within  i  mile  of  the 
shore. 

From  Point  Harris  to  the  head  of  the  St.  Clair  River  the  coast 
is  bold  and  gradually  shelving,  and  can  be  approached  within  J^  of  a 
mile  with  safety. 

Harbors  of  Refuge. 

There  is  an  excellent  harbor,  with  protection  from  all  winds,  on 
Drummond  Island,  14  miles  east  of  Detour  lighthouse.  The  Detour, 
False  Detour  and  Mississauga  Passages  are  good  harbors.  Excellent 
anchorage  will  be  found  in  16  fathoms,  SE  of  Cove  Island  lighthouse. 
Protection  from  westerly  winds,  and  fair  holding  ground,  are  found 
midway  between  the  Chantry  Islands  and  the  village  called  Southamp- 


ton, 0 
good  1 
NNW 
ihe  he 
Thee 
holdir 
C 
4  and 
winds 
to  the 


From 
NEi: 
when 

Froir 


S 
roade. 

I 
Clark 
miles, 
try  Ii 
entrar 
lighth 
Island 
3  mile 
enter 
Eby> 

I 
From 
or  soi 

I 

oppos 


:ftS— 


>3»«sl! 


Thompson! 5  Coast  Pilot, 


73 


■juse.  Detach- 
our  lighthouse. 
ist  o  Harbor 
c»f  c '.trance   to 

.  Clair. 

i  btiween  this 
Islands  Reef 
nnt  of  Michael 
3ni  lighthouse, 
Gat  Point  on 
ove  Island  and 
Is  the  coast  is 
niles  from  the 
n  the  Chantry 
ends  from  the 
that  this  point 
Point  Clark  to 
iroached  safely 
n  Goderich  to 
Ige  extends  to 
[pperwash  and 
n  I  mile  of  the 

Liver  the  coast 
[  within  J^  of  a 


rn  all  winds,  on 
.  The  Detour, 
ors.  Excellent 
and  lighthouse, 
und,  are  found 
ailed  Southamp- 


ton, on  the  main  land.  At  Inverhuron,  south  of  Point  Douglas,  is 
good  holding  ground  and  protection  from  all  winds,  as  far  round  as 
NNW.  Goderich  Harbor  is  secure  from  all  winds  when  inside,  and 
ihe  holding  ground  off  Goderich  in  3  and  4  fathoms  is  excellent. 
The  clay  banks  extending  from  Goderich  to  Sauble  River  mak»;s  good 
holding  ground  on  this  part  of  the  coast. 

On  the  east  side  of  Cape  Ipperwash,  in  the  bight  of  the  hook,  in 
4  and  5  fathoms,  is  excellent  holding  ground,  and  protection  from  all 
winds  except  those  between  NW  and  NEbyN.  From  Point  Harris 
to  the  head  of  St.  Clair  River,  is  generally  good  holding  ground. 

To  Enter  Georgian  Bay, 

From  Charity  Island  lighthouse,  bearing  SE,  distant  3  miles,  steer 
NE  120  miles,  till  Cove  Island  lighthouse  bears  east,  distant  3  miles; 
when  enter  the  passage  on  the  herring  E  byN. 

Prom   Fort   Gratiot   Lighthouse    to   Goderich,    and    other 
Points  on  the  Canada  Shore. 

Steer  NE  byN  62  miles,  till  Goderich  lighthouse  and  piers  are 
made. 

From  Goderich  to  Inverhuron,  steer  N^W  23  miles,  till  Point 
Clark  lighthouse  bears  east,  distance  2  miles;  then  haul  up  NNE  17 
miles,  till  abreast  of  Inverhuron;  thence  NEbyN  19  miles,  till  Chan- 
try Island  lighthouse  bears  SE,  distance  2  miles;  thence  to  the 
entrance  of  Georgian  Bay  N  by  W^W,  59  miles,  till  Cove  Island 
lighthouse  bears  east,  giving  Gat  Point,  on  the  east  side  of  Cove 
Island,  a  berth  of  i^  miles,  and  lookout  for  the  reefs  extending  over 
3  miles  from  the  islands,  between  Cape  Hurd  and  Cove  Island.  To 
enter  Georgian  Bay,  run  in  for  Cove  Island  lighthouse  on  the  bearing 
E  byN,  and  give  the  lighthouse  point  a  berth  of  Yi  a  mile. 

From  Presqu'ile  to  Chantry  Island  lighthouse  NWbyW  115  miles. 
From  Cove  Island  to  the  entrance  of  the  Straits  of  Michilimackinac 
or  south  channel.  Why N  120  miles. 

From  Saginaw  to  Goderich. 

Run  out  from  Saginaw  River  and  round  the  Charity  Islands,  on 
opposite  courses  given,  from  Point  aux  Barques,  until  the  light  at 


I  I 


:ii; 

^i 


ThompsorCs  Coast  IHlot. 


n 

Point  aux  Barques  bears  due  south ;  thence  ESE  59  miles,  to  Goder- 
ich. 

From  Goderich  to  the  Straits  of  Mackinaw  and  St.  Mary's 

River. 

Steer  NWJ^N  140  miles,  till  Presqu'ile  lighthouse  bears  SVVbyW 
5  miles  off;  from  thence  NWbyN  to  Detour,  and  NWbyV/ii^W  for 
Bois  Blanc  lighthouse ;  thence  to  Mackinaw,  as  directed  before. 

From  Cove  Island  to  Straits  of  Michilimackinac  and   St. 

Mary's  River. 

From  Cove  Island  lighthouse,  bearing  E  byN  3  miles  off,  steer 
WbyN  122  miles,  or  till  the  east  end  of  Bois  Blanc  Island  bears  NW 
^N  and  Sheboygan  light  Wi^S ;  thence  steer  wert  for  Sheboygan 
light  until  abreast  of  it,  and  run  up  the  strait,  as  before  directed. 

To  make  Detour  or  St.  Mary's  River,  steer  WbyN,  as  above,  57 
miles,  till  the  Great  Duck  Island  bears  due  north ;  then  haul  up  NW 
byW  for  the  Detour  lighthouse,  56  miles,  bring  it  to  bear  west  and 

run  in. 

From  Southampton  to  Saginaw  Bay. 

Steer  W  byS>^S  for  107  miles,  till  Charity  Island  lighthouse  bears 
SE,  distant  3  miles ;  thence  up  the  bay  as  before  directed. 

From  Southampton  to  Straits  Michilimackinac. 

Steer  NWbyW  113  miles,  till  Presqu'ile  lighthouse  bears  SWby 
W,  distant  5  miles  ;  thence  as  before  directed  to  the  straits. 

The  above  courses  and  bearings  are  true,  and  the  distances  are 
statute  miles.  ; 

From  Point  aux  Barques  to  Mississagua  Strait,  Ontario. 

From  Point  aux  Barques,  bearing  west  5  miles,  steer  N  byW>6W 
128  miles,  to  entrance  lo  Strait  of  Mississagua,  with  light  beu  'ng  east 
The  lighthouse  is  on  the  SW  end  of  Grand  Manatoulin  Island,  and  is 
a  guide  for  vessels  through  the  strait  from  either  entrance.  The  light 
is  a  fixed  white  light,  and  can  be  seen  20  miles.  Run  through  mid- 
channel.     Plenty  of  water.     From  15  to  34  fathoms. 


■■■^uv. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


n 


lies,  to  Goder- 

1  St.  Mary's 

bears  SVVbyW 
VbyV/i^W  for 
d  before. 

[lac  and    St. 

miles  off,  steer 
md  bears  NW 
for  Sheboygan 
;  directed. 
J,  as  above,  57 
n  haul  up  NW 
bear  west  and 

ly. 

ighthouse  bears 
:ted. 

ackinac. 

e  bears  SWby 

traits. 

:  distances  are 

rait,  Ontario. 

teer  N  byW>^W 
;ht  beu  'ng  east 
n  Island,  and  is 
mce.  Thelight 
in  through  mid- 


From  Point  aux  Barques  to  Cove  Island,  Ont. 

From  Point  aux  Barques,  bearing  west  5  miles,  steer  NNEj^E 
100  miles.  The  lighthouse  stand';  n  the  northeast  point  of  Island, 
main  entrance  to  (leorgian  Bay.  Flashes  white  every  one  and  a  half 
mintues  ;  visible  15  miles,  and  stands  90  feet  above  lake  level. 

From  Sheboygan,  Michigan,  South  of  the  Straits  of  Macki- 
naw, to  Cove  Island. 

Run  out  from  alireast  Cheboygan  lighthouse  Yi  mile,  then  due  east 
8  miles;  thence  EbyS  125  miles  to  abreast  the  light,  bearing  south 
^  mile  off. 

From  m.  ith  of  St.  Clair  River  to  Goderich,  Ontario,  NEbyN  6a 
miles.     Goderich  main  light,  on  high  bank  south  of  entrance  to  the 
harbor,  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  25  miles;  stands  150  feet  above 
lake  level;  beacon  and  range  light  on  on  the  north  pier;  red  in  front 
and  white  in  rear;  depth  of  water,  15  feet. 

From  mouth  of  St.  Clair  River  to  Point  Clark  light,  bearing  east  3 
miles;  thence  same  course  to  Inverhuron  i7>^  miles.  Point  Clark 
light  is  a  white  flash  light;  flashes  every  minute;  visible  15  miles; 
87  feet  above  lake  level.  From  Inverhuron,  bearing  due  east  3  miles 
to  Chantry  Island  lighthouse,  bearing SE  2>^  miles;  steer  NEbyN  19 
miles.  Chantry  Island  lighthouse,  south  side,  about  2'^  miles  from 
Saugeen  River;  fixed  white  light,  visible  15  miles;  86  feet  above  lake 
level,  and  is  the  guide  to  Southampton. 

Note, — Directions  for  these  harbors  will  be  given  in  remarks. 

Kincardine  Harbor,  10  miles  NEbyN  from  Clark's  Point;  has  a 
light  on  the  north  pier,  fixed  red,  visible  15  miles,  37  feet  above  lake 
level.     This  light  shows  from  all  points  of  approach. 

From  Cove  Island  to  Michael's  Point  Lighthouse. 

Bearing  east  24^^  miles.  When  the  light  bears  east  the  bay  will 
be  open,  run  in  EbyN^N.  Michael's  Point  light  is  on  the  south  side 
of  the  Great  Manitoulin  Island,  on  the  SE  point  of  the  bay.  A  rocky 
shoal  sets  off  this  point  two  miles  WbyS,  and  to  make  the  harbor  from 
the  southward,  you  run  past  the  lighthouse  until  it  bears  as  above. 


JJ  ' 


-vs-^am--- 


76 


ThompsorCi  Coast  Pilot. 


The  light  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  13  miles,  and  40  feet  above 
lake  level. 

Ocorgian  Bay,  Ontario. 

Griinth  Isl.und  Light,  on  NNE  end  of  island,  20  miles  from  Owen 
Sound;  is  a  fixed  white  light  visible  12  miles,  stands  130  feet  above 
lake  level.  The  water  is  very  deep  close  in  on  the  west  side  of  this 
island  and  also  the  main  shore, 

Nottawasaga  Island,  4  miles  from  Collingwood  NW.  Light 
fl.isheR  while,  every  half  minute  ;  visible  10  miles,  86  feet  high,  and  is 
the  leading  mark  for  Collingwood. 

Collingwood  Harbor,  Breakwater  Pier  Light.  Fixed  red,  visible 
6  miles,  on  fra--ne  work.  %\  lect  abjve  lake  level. 

Christian  Island  Light,  on  SE  point  of  Island,  i>^  miles  from  the 
main  land  ;  fixed  white,  visible  8  miles. 

Gin  Rock.  Gloucester  Hay,  for  guiding  vessels  into  Penetan 
Guishene,  and  Maitland  Harbor;  fixed  white,  visible  10  miles. 

Georgian  Bay  and  the  Canada  Side  of  Lake  Huron; 

From  Fort  Gratiot  Lighthouse  to  Cape  Ipperwash,  Ontario, 
NEj-i^E  25  miles;  and  note  that  a  reef  sets  off  this  point  in  a  north- 
westerly direction  2  miles,  with  6  to  8  feet  water  on  it,  rock. 

Sauble  River  is  in  the  bight  of  the  bay  to  the  northward  of  this 

reef. 

From  Fort  Gratiot  to  Pine  Brook,  Ontario,  NbyE^E  76  miles. 
From  Fort  Gratiot  to  Cape  Hurd,  Ontario,  NbyEj^E  155  miles. 
From  Fort  Gratiot  to  Horse  Shoe  or  Lucas  Island  N^E   171 

miles. 

From  Point  aux  Barques,  U.  S.,  to  Goderich,  Ontario,  EbySj^S 

54  miles. 

From  Thunder  Bay  Island  Lighthouse,  U.  S ,  to  the  Chantry 
Islands,  Ontario,  ESE  95  miles. 

The  Saugeen  River  is  a  little  to  the  northward  of  these  islands, 
and  has  from  6  to  7  ftct  of  water  over  the  bar.  The  coast  from  this 
up  to  Cape  Hurd  is  very  rocky,  and  should  not  be  approached  with- 
out a  pilot  in  less  than  7  fathoms  water. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


77 


40  feet  above 


liles  from  Owen 

130  feet  above 

west  side  of  this 

1    NW.      Light 
'eet  high,  and  is 

xed  red,  visible 

^  miles  from  the 

Is  into  Penetan 
10  miles. 

ke  Huron. 

rwash,   Ontario, 
point  in  a  north- 
:,  rock, 
orthward  of  this 

yE^E  76  miles. 
E^^E  155  miles, 
iland  N^E   171 

intario,  EbySj^S 

to  the  Chantry 

of  these  islands, 
e  coast  from  this 
approached  with- 


From  Thunder  Bay  Island  Lighthouse,  U.  S,  to  Cape  Hurd, 
Ontario,  EbN  78  miles. 

From  Goderich,  Ontario,  to  the  Detour  Lighthouse,  U.  S., 
NW^N  141  miles,  to  abreast  of  Presqu'ilcj  thence  NWbyN  47 
miles. 

From  Goderich,  Ontario,  to  Mackinaw. 

From  Goderich  to  Presqu'ile  NW^N  135  miles,  to  abreast  of 
I'rcsqu'ile,  bearing  west,  8  miles  off;  thence  NWbyVV^  W  65^^  miles 
to  Bois  Blanc  Island  Lighthouse;  thence  W;J<N  9J^  miles  to  Macki- 
naw Harbor. 

From  Cove  Island,  Ontario,  to  the  Outer  Duck  Island  WbyN>4 
N  53  miles. 

From  Outer  Duck  Island,  Ontario,  to  the  Detour  Lighthouse,  U. 
S.,  NWbyVV;^VV  48  miles. 

From  Sulphur  Island  (inside  the  islands)  to  Clapperton  Island 
OnUrio,  Eji^S  60  miles. 

From  Christian  Island,  south  point,  to  Owen  Sound,  Ontario, 
W^S  29  miles. 

From  Christian  Island  to  Cabot's  Head,  Ontario,  NVVbyW    56 

miles. 

From  Christian  Island  to  Cape  Smyth,  Manitoulin   Island,  NW 

northerly  86  miles. 

From  Collingwood  to  Tiny  Mills  NEJ^N  14  miles. 

From  Collingwood  to  Lighthouse  on  Ciiristian  Island  NNE^N  . 

18  miles. 

From  Collingwood  to  Western  Islands  Nby  W  38  miles. 

From  Coilingwood  to  French  River,  entrance  NNW^N  100 
miles. 

From  Collingwood  to  Lonely  Island  NWJ^N  86  miles. 

From  Collingwood  to  Cabot's  head  NW  65  v..M^tv,. 

From  Lonely  Island,  the  route  is  past  Cape  Smytli  (or  around 
George  Island  to  Shebawananing)  to  Badgely  Is'.jnd  24  railed ;  from 
Badgely  Island  run  to  the  southward  of  Strawberry  Island,  and  up  to 
Little  Currant;  from  Little  Currant  to  Clapperton  Island  (passing 
either  north  or  south  of  it)  j  and  from  Clapperton  Island  to  Sulphur 


Ws«B. 


* 


78 


Thompson's  Ccast  Pilot. 


i 


Island  W|^N  60  nights;  thence  from  Sulphur  Island  to  Bruce  Mines; 
thence  through  intricate  channels  to  St.  Mary's  River. 

From  Mackinaw  to  CoUingwood,  Ontario. 

From  Mackinaw  to  Hois  Blanc  Island  Lighthouse  E^S  g'/j 
miles ;  thence  ESE  5^  miles,  to  abreast  of  the  SE  point  of  the  same  ; 
thence  EhyS^^S  135  '<  miles  to  Cove  Island.  Keep  to  the  northward 
of  Cove  Island,  pretty  close  to,  in  23  feet  of  water;  and  after  passing 
the  north  point  of  the  island  where  the  light  stands,  haul  up  for  Echo 
Island,  and  run  along  to  the  eastward,  pretty  close  to  the  Bear's 
Rump,  which  is  7  or  8  miles  from  the  Lighthouse,  leaving  two  ••/iioaN- 
the  White  Shingle  Island  and  shoal,  and  Snake  Island,  to  the  north- 
ward. The  first  or  outer  shoal  bears  NNVV^  W  from  Cove  Island  and 
Lighthouse  i3^  to  2  miles;  and  the  second  bears  SbyE  from  White 
Shingle  Island,  with  13  feet  water  on  it.  You  will  carry  deep  water 
until  you  are  past  Echo  Island  ;  leaving  it  to  starboard,  run  for  the 
Bear's  Rump,  which  is  the  next  island  to  the  eastward,  with  deep 
water  close  to ;  leaving  it  and  the  Flower  Pots  to  starboard  also; 
when  past  the  Bear's  Rump,  haul  up  SEbyE^E  for  Cabot's  Head, 
about  15  miles;  thence  SE^S  60  miles  for  CoUingwood. 

From  Cabot's  Head  to  Bear's  Rump  WbyN  15  miles,  leaving  the 
Rump  to  starboard,  and  the  Flower  Pots  to  port ;  thence  the  same 
course  to  Cove  Island  Lighthouse  7  miles. 

To  Run  Through  the  Channel  to  the  Southward  of  Cove 

Island. 

After  clearing  the  west  point  of  the  island,  which  is  shoal,  keep 
along  the  south  side  of  the  island  pretty  close  to,  leaving  Cove  Island 
and  several  small  islands  to  the  northward,  and  Middle  Island  on 
either  oide,  steering  due  east  23  miles  from  Middle  Island,  or  until 
Cabot's  Head  bears  SWbyW  4  or  5  miles  distant;  thence  SE^^^S  60 
miles  to  CoUingwood  Harbor.  This  route  runs  you  about  3^  miles 
from  Surprise  Shoal  and  5^  from  Cape  Croaker. 

Fronn  Cabot's  Head  to  Penetanguishene. 

From  Cabot's  Head  to  the  Giant's  Tomb  ESE  60  miles.  In 
running  on  this  route  to  Penetanguishene,  you  leave  a  group  of  small 


m~- 


Thompson' i  Coasi  Pilot. 


79 


to  Bruce  Mines ; 


itarto. 

louse  E^S  oVi 
)int  of  the  same  ; 
to  the  northward 
and  after  passing 
laul  up  for  Echo 
se  to  the  Bear's 
aving  two  •:iiOttl«- 
ind,  to  the  north- 
1  Cove  Island  and 
JbyE  from  White 
carry  deep  water 
)ard,  run  for  the 
tward,  with  deep 

starboard    also ; 
or  Cabot's  Head, 
.fOod. 
miles,  leaving  the 

thence  the  same 

tiward  of  Cove 

lich  is  shoal,  keep 
iving  Cove  Island 
Middle  Island  on 
le  Island,  or  until 
thence  S'Eyi^  60 
u  about  3^  miles 

ihene. 

sE  60  miles.     In 
e  a  group  of  small 


islands,  called  the  Western  Islands,  about  i  >^  to  a  miles  to  the  north- 
ward, and  Hope  Island,  close  to,  to  the  southward.  When  past  Hope 
Island,  haul  up  SF->iE  for  the  mainland,  leaving  the  Giant's  Tomb 
Island  well  to  port  to  clear  some  rocks  which  lie  off  the  SE  end  of  the 
island ;  follow  the  shore  round  until  nearly  abreast  of  Pine  Point ; 
then  haul  over  to  port,  keeping  the  islands  best  aboard  until  above 
the  point ;  then  haul  up  to  the  SW  and  run  into  the  bay. 

It  is  necessary  to  take  a  pilot  on  first  going  into  Penetanguishcne 
Harbor.     There  is  plenty  of  room  aftei  passing  Pine  Point. 

From    Cabot's    Head    to    Penetanguishcne,    through  the 
Christian  Island  Channel. 

From  Cabot's  Head  to  Christian  Islands  ESE^S  54}^  miles.  In 
running  through  this  channel,  keep  Hope  Island  to  port,  Christian 
and  Beckwilh  to  starboard  ;  and  when  past  Beckwith  Island  haul  up 
for  the  mainland  about  ESE  6  miles,  and  run  into  Penetanguishene  as 
directed  above  from  Hope  Island. 


From 


CoUingwood    to    Penetanguishene,     Leaving    the 
Christian  Islands  to  the  Northward. 

From  CoUingwood  to  Christian  Island  Lighthouse  NNE^N  18 
miles ;  thence  run  the  main  shore  from  point  to  point,  at  a  distance  of 
%  to  I  mile,  till  abreast  of  the  Giant's  Tomb  Island ;  then  run  as 
directed  above. 

SE  from  the  lighthouse  is  a  patch  of  rocks  off  the  mainland 
about  yi  a  mile.  The  depth  of  water  in  this  channel  is  from  ly  to 
18  feet,  until  well  past  the  lighthouse.  To  make  a  harbor,  haul  up 
into  the  bay  to  the  northward,  and  come  to  in  3  fathi  ms  water  close 


m. 


The  Duck  Islands,  Lake  Huron. 


The  Duck  Islands  lie  NbyE^E  43  ™'l«s  from  Thunder  Bay 
Island  Lighthouse,  U.  S.,  and  W  byNj^N  63  miles  from  Cove  Island, 
Ontario.         -\.:;^ ' .::.l'rw^  -['-r  /'-^ 

There  is  good  holding  ground  between  the  Great  Duck  and  Out- 
er Duck  Islands.    The  Outer  Duck  is  to  the  eastward  of  the  Great 


1 ' 


'n 


'i\ 


>f  I 


8o 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


m^ 


Duck,  off  the  south  end  of  it.  To  make  a  harbor,  bring  the  passage 
open  between  the  two  islands,  bearing  N  byW^W,  and  haul  up  on 
that  course,  leaving  the  reef  off  each  island  on  each  side,  in  22  to  30 
feet  of  water.  There  is  15  feet  of  water  on  the  end  of  the  Great 
Duck  Shoal,  and  1 1  on  the  Outer  Duck,  These  two  r  fs  run  out 
about  SSE,  which  makes  a  good  lee.  Run  well  up  and  past  the  south 
end  of  the  Great  Duck,  and  come  to;  anchor  in  any  part  of  the  bay. 
There  are  two  good  passages  between  these  islands ;  one  between 
the  Great  Duck  and  Middle  Duck,  and  the  other  between  the  West 
Duck  and  Middle  Duck.  These  passages  can  be  plainly  seen  in  clear 
weather. 

To  Run  into  Georgian  Bay  by  Fitzwilliam  Island  Channel. 

From  the  Duck  Islands  to  the  south  point  of  Fitzwilliam  Island 
E  byS  60  miles.  When  abreast  the  point  haul  up  NE  4  miles,  leaving 
Lucas  Island  and  Yeo  Island  to  starboard,  (  and  note  that  a  small 
island  named  James  Island,  with  a  reef  running  SW  from  it,  lays  NE 
from  Yeo  Island) ;  thence  SEbyE  26jS<  miles  to  Cabot's  Head,  leav- 
ing Half  Moon  Island  3^  miles  to  the  northward.  Nothing  less  than 
30  to  40  feet  through  this  channel.  To  run  through  to  the  southward 
of  Lucas  Island,  leave  Yeo  Island  and  James  Island  NE  of  Lucas, 
to  the  northward,  steering  due  east  for  1 1  miles ;  thence  SE  byE  for 
Cabot's  Head,   -s 

Cape  Hurd  Channel  is  very  difficult,  and  cannot  be  run  except 
with  a  good  pilot. 

Tober  Moray  or  Collins'  Harbor  is  an  excellent  one,  lying  SE 
southerly  from  the  east  end  of  Cove  Island,  and  is  easy  of  access  by 
daylight, 

Mississauga  Passage  is  deep — from  30  to  204  feet  water.  To  run 
through,  open  the  passage  and  steer  about  NJS^W,  keeping  the  east 
side  best  aboard.  The  west  side,  at  the  entrance,  is  rocky,  and  com- 
posed of  magnetic  reefs.  To  clear  the  rocks  on  the  east  side  before 
entering  the  channel,  keep  the  NE  point  of  Cockburn  Island  open 
with  the  SW  point  of  the  Great  Manitoulin  Island,  and  when  through, 
haul  up  NW  byW  22  miles,  lor  Sulphur  Island. 


Hli-  '-  '' 


:  one,   lying  SE 
isy  of  access  by 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


8i 


ring  the  passage 
and  haul  up  on 
side,  in  2  2  to  30 
id  of  the  Great 
o  r  fs  run  out 
id  past  the  south 
part  of  the  bay. 
ds ;  one  between 
tween  the  West 
nly  seen  in  clear 

land  Channel. 

tzwilliam  Island 
\  4  miles,  leaving 
)te  that  a  small 
from  it,  lays  NE 
lot's  Head,  leav- 
^othing  less  than 
to  the  southward 
[  NE  of  Lucas, 
snce  SE  byE  for 

t  be  run  except 


The  False  Detour  Passage  is  deep,  but  not  quite  so  straight  as 
the  Mississauga  Channel.  To  run  through,  keep  midway,  in  54  to 
120  feet  water.  Rocky  on  both  sides.  After  getting  well  into  the 
channel,  the  course  is  about  NNE ;  when  through,  steer  NW  for  Sul- 
phur Island  14  miles. 

Byng  Inlet,  fixed  white  light. 

Lonely  Island,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  20  miles,  195  feet  above 
lake  level. 

Parry  Sound,  on  Mink  Island ;  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  16 
miles,  white  square  tower,  on  dwelling,  56  feet  above  lake  level. 

Red  Rock  Point,  one  mile  east  of  Killarney,  north  side  of  channel 
leading  into  Killarney  harbor ;  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  8  miles. 

Partridge  Island,  one  and  a  half  miles  northwest  of  Red  Rock 
light ;  fixed  white  light,  visible  5  miles,  30  feet  above  lake  level. 

Shaftesbury  or  Little  Current,  range  lights,  fixed  white,  visible  6 

miles. 

Clapperton  Island,  north  point ;    a  fixed  white  light,  visible  8 

miles,  35  feet  above  lake  level. 

Sulphur  Island,  west  end  of  island ;  fixed  white  light,  visible  1 2 
miles,  45  feet  above  lake  level. 

Duck  Island  light  in  course  of  construction. 

All  the  Canadian  lights  are  corrected  copies  of  William  Smith, 
Depuiy  Minister  of  Marine  and  Fisheries  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada 
for  1877.     The  bearings  are  magnetic,  and  given  from  seaward. 


•^.' 


t  water.  To  run 
ceeping  the  east 
rocky,  and  corn- 
east  side  before 
urn  Island  open 
id  when  through, 


* 


.V^.-   --t,." 


Straits  of  Mackinaw  and  Lake  Mich. 


From    Duncan  Docks  North    One  and  a  Half  miles,   to 
Abt?ast  of  Cheboygan  River. 

The  light  at  Duncan  is  a  vbite  light ;  stands  on  the  end  of  the 
warehouse  dock;  is  a  private  light,  and  can  be  seen  8  miles  Che- 
boygan  River  entrance  has  been  dredged  to  14  feet  water.  Range 
lights  are  kept  in  the  harbor;  white  and  red,  white  above  red 
Range  the  lights  and  run  in  ;  two  barrel  buoys,  red,  to  starboard,  and 
two  barrel  buoys,  black,  to  port,  at  the  entrance  of  the  cut.  The 
channel  is  straight.     The  lights  are  private  lights. 

From  Cheboygan  to  McGulpin's  Point.       » 
NW  by WJ^ W  16  J^  miles  to  Old  Point  Mackinaw ;  give  the  point 
a  berth  of  yi  mile,  and  follow  the  land  round  at  that  distance  to 
abreast  of  McGulpin's  Point  Lighthouse.     Vessels  drawmg   14  feet 
should  give  the  point  a  berth  of  1%  miles;  thence  to  Point  Waugo- 
shance  Lighthouse,  W)<S  17^  miles,  which  may  be  approached  to 
within  %  mile.    McGulpin's  Point  Lighthouse  marks  the  turnmg  pomt 
in  the  Straits  of  Mackinaw  2%  miles  west  of  Old  Fort  Mackinaw,  and 
a  guide  through  the  Straits.      The   channel   abreast  of  this  light  is  3 
miles  wide.    The  South  Graham  Shoal,  NE>^E  4^  miles  4  St.  Helena 
Island  NW  6  miles  ;  Wau^oshancc,  W  15^^  miles  from  light  to  light ; 
is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  iVA  miles  ;  stands  102  feet  above  lake 
level,  and  is  to  have  a  syren  erected  this  year. 

Waugoshance  Lighthouse,  on  Waugoshance  Shoal,  and  the 
Straits  of  Mackinaw,  near  the  entrance  to  Lake  Michigan.  Tower 
and  dwelling  attached,  of  brick;  keeper's  dwelling  and  lower  part  of 
the  tower  white  ;  upper  part  of  the  tower  black ;  marks  Waugoshance 
Shoal  and  turning  point  at  western  end  of  Straits  of  Mackinaw.     St. 


ce  Mich. 


alf  miles,   to 

the  end  of  the 

1  8  miles.  Che- 
t  water.  Range 
^hite  above  red. 
lo  starboard,  and 
of  the  cut.    The 

'oint. 

iw ;  give  the  point 

that  distance  to 

drawing   14  feet 

to  Point  Waugo- 

je  approached  to 

3  the  turning  point 

rt  Mackinaw,  and 

of  this  light  is  3 

miles  ^  St.  Helena 

rom  light  to  light ; 

2  feet  above  lake 

Shoal,  and  the 
lichigan.  Tower 
and  lower  part  of 
irks  Waugoshance 
f  Mackinaw.     St. 


Thompson! s  Coast  Pilot.  %% 

Helena  reef  NEbyE  9^  miles;  the  southwest  end  of  Manitou  Pay- 
ment Shoal  N^E  12  miles;  the  east  end  of  Simmons'  reef  NNW^ 
W  io>^  miles;  White  Shoals  NWi^N  4>^  miles;  Gray's  reef  W  <,){ 
miles;  Hog  Island  reef  WSWi^W  12^  miles;  Skilligalee  Light  SSW 
^\V  8^  miles.  Light  fixed,  varied  by  white  flashes ;  visible  15 
miles ;  stands  74  feet  above  lake  level,  and  is  built  on  a  crib. 


From  Mackinaw  to  St.  Helena  Island  and  Point  Waugo- 
shance. 

From  the  middle  of  Mackinaw  Harbor,  W  byS^S  4^  miles,  so 
as  to  shut  in  Rabbits  Back  Peak  behind  Point  St.  Ignis;  thence  W^S 
19  miles  to  Point  Waugoshance  Lighthouse,  making  it  ahead  and 
leaving  the  height  of  Round  Island  dead  astern.  This  route  passes 
Yz  a  mile  south  of  the  reef  off  Point  St.  Ignis,  :,ometimes  called  the 
Graham  Shoals,  the  most  .southerly  one  being  well  indicated  by  the 
following  range  lines  :  .\  line  from  Grosse  Point  to  St.  Ignis,  and  a 
line  from  the  NE  side  of  St.  Helena  to  Point  la  Barb  ;  a  red  buoy  on 
the  southwest  point  of  Mackinaw  Island  marks  the  passage  between 
Mackinaw  and  Round  Island ;  vessels  pass  to  the  southward  of  this 
buoy  300  feet,  and  is  a  guide  coming  down  for  the  docks  at  Mackinaw. 

South  Graham  Shoal,  a  red  buoy.  This  buoy  is  on  the  south  side  of 
the  centre  of  the  shoal,  in  14  feet  water.  The  Graham  Shoals  bear 
NNE  andi  SSW  respectively  from  each  other,  five-eighths  of  a  mile. 
Between  the  shoals  and  Point  St.  I:?nis,  {Iv,;!-*  are  channels  which 
should  not  be  attempted  by  strangers.  The  currents  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  Graham  Shoals  and  the  Straits  of  M.\cki  law  are  often  strong 
and  irregular.  After  fresh  gales,  vessels  anchored  in  the  straits  often 
trend  to  windward.  The  least  waf  on  the  North  Graham,  4  feet, 
and  on  the  South  Graham,  6  feet.  North  Graham  Shoal  red  buoy  is 
on  the  south  side  of  the  shoal.  In  passing  St.  Helena,  you  leave  the 
lighthouse  3  miles  to  the  northward,  St.  Helena  Lighthouse  is  on  the 
southeast  point  of  the  island,  in  the  Straits  of  Mackinaw ;  is  a  fixed 
red  light,  visible  15^  miles,  71  feet  above  lake  level.  Tower  and 
dwelling  of  red  brick.  The  light  is  to  guide  vessels  under  the  lee  of 
St.  Helena  I^'.md.  It  is  also  a  leading  mark  for  vessels  passing  to 
the  westward,  and,  vice  versa,  to  the  northward  <A  the  Ecaver  Islands 


84 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


Waugoshance  Light  WSW   12  miles.     McGulpin's  Point  Light  S\V 
6^  miles.    White  Shoals  W_5^S  14  miles. 

To  Make  a  Harbor  at  St    Helena. 

From  Old  Point  Mackinaw  N\V  byWi^W  6%  miles,  leaving 
Point  la  Barb  at  a  distance  of  ij^  miles  to  starboard?,  and  the  island 
and  light  to  port ;  haul  round  the  NE  point  of  the  island,  giving  it  a 
good  berth,  and  come  to  anchor  in  the  bay  to  the  northward  of  the 
dock,  in  5  to  9  fathoms  water.     Soft  bottom. 

To  leave  St.  Helena.  North  about;  haul  close  round  the  NW 
end  of  the  island,  and  steer  WbyS^S  3  miles,  to  c  lear  a  shoal  which 
lies  due  west  i^  miles  from  it;  thence  WSW^S  10  miles  to  Point 
Waugoshunce.  A  buoy  is  placed  on  this  shoal,  painted  red  and  black 
horizontal  stripes.  This  buoy  is  on  the  south  side  of  the  centre  of 
the  shoal ;  soundings  are  irregular ;  rocky  bottom,  with  from  3  to  4 
fathoms  close  .  This  shoal  is  about  450  yards  in  extent,  northwest 
and  southeast,  and  300  yards  northeast  and  southwest.  Least  water, 
9  feet. 

From  Waugoshance  to  Mainitou  Passage. 

SW^S  72  miles.  The  White  Shoals,  has  a  first  class  iron  can 
buoy,  with  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes.  The  White  Shoals  are  com- 
posed of  three  irregular  rocky  reefs,  extending  east  and  west  about 
one  half  a  nile.  The  buoy  is  placed  between  the  southwest  shoals  in 
31/2  fathoms  water.  The  least  waier  on  this  shoal  is  four  feet. 
Waugoshance  Lighthouse,  SEj/^S  4^8  of  a  mile;  North  point  of  Hat 
Island,  Wi^S;^  miles;  southeast  pomt  of  Gray's  reef,  SWbyW^^? 
miles. 

Gray's  Reef,  a  first-ciacs  iron  can  buoy,  red.  Gray's  reefs  are 
composed  of  six  shoals,  the  greatest  extent  is  east  and  west  2  miles  ; 
north  and  south,  i^  miles,  least  water  3  feet.  The  buoy  is  placed  on 
the  east  end  of  the  shoals,  in  3  fathoms  water.  The  soundings  between 
these  reefs  and  H?t  island  are  irregular  and  foul.  Strangers  should 
not  attempt  to  pass  to  the  westward  of  the  buo/.  Waugoshance 
Lighthouse,  east  5^^  miles;  Skillegalee  Lighthouse  Sbyfe  8  miles; 
north  point  of  Hat  Island    WNW   5  miles;  While  Shoals  NEbyN  4 


Thompson' s  Coast  Pilot. 


85 


)int  Light  S\V 


miles,   leaving 

and  the  island 

md,  giving  it  a 

rthward  of  the 

round  the  NW 
ir  a  shoal  which 
miles  to  Point 
d  red  and  black 
the  centre  of 
ith  from  3  to  4 
tent,  northwest 
.     Least  water, 

sage. 

t  class  iron  can 
Shoals  are  com- 
and  west  about 
thwest  shoals  in 
al  is  four  feet, 
th  point  of  Hat 
eef,  SWbyVV^i/' 

Cray's  reefs  are 
id  west  2  miles  ; 
uoy  is  placed  on 
andings  between 
Strangers  should 
Waugoshance 
Sby6  8  miles; 
shoals  NEbyN  4 


miles.  In  running  on  the  course  SWj^S  for  the  Manitou  Passage, 
from  point  Waugoshance,  you  itsve  Skillegalee  Lighthouse  2  miles  east 
from  you.  Skillegalee  Lighthouse  cfands  on  Skillegalee  rock,  81^ 
miles  SSWi^W  from  Waugoshance  light,  and  6  rniles  from  the  main 
land,  has  a  first-class  steam  syren,  giving  blasts  sf  7  seconds,  at  inter- 
vals of  42  seconds  ;  is  a  fixed  white  light,  106  feet  above  lake  level, 
visible  18  miles,  illuminatei  the  entire  horizon  ;  tower  and  dwelling  of 
yellow  brick,  is  a  guide  to  and  from  the  Straits  of  Mackinaw,  6  miles 
from  the  Michigan  shore.  Reef  extends  from  the  light  NW  ^  of  s» 
mile,  and  NEbyEi^E  i^^  miles.  The  east  end  of  Hog  Island  reef 
bears  WNW  81^  miles ;  the  east  end  of  Gray's  reef  NbyWj^W,  7^ 
miles.  On  the  same  course  SW^^S  you  leave  Grand  Traverse  Light- 
he  ic  8^  miles  due  east.  Grand  Traverse  or  Cathead  Point  Light- 
house stands  on  the  northwest  point  of  Grand  Traverse  Bay,  and  is  a 
guide  into  the  bay,  and  to  the  passage  between  the  Manitous  and 
Sleeping  Bear.  The  northeast  point  of  the  north  Manitou,  WbyS,  23 
miles;  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible   12  miles,  stands  40  feet  above 

lake  level. 

Mission  Point  Light,  on  the  north  point  of  the  Peninsular  divid- 
ing Grand  Traverse  Bay ;  light  on  frame  dwelling.  A  guide  into  the 
east  and  west  arms  o*"  Grand  Traverse  Bay.  Reef  extends  from  this 
point  northward  i>^  miles;  Northport,  N22°W,  distant  iij^  miles; 
Elk  Rapids  SEbyS^S,  distant  7  miles ;  is  -.  fixed  white  light,  visible 
t3  miles,  stands  48  feet  above  lake  level.  On  same  course  SW^S  to 
Point  Betsey  97^  miles,  from  Point  Waugoshance.  You  leave  the 
South  Manitou  Lighthouse  3>^  miles  to  the  northwest. 

South  Manitou  Lighthouse,  on  the  SE  point  of  the  island,  is  a 
fixed  white  light,  visible  17^  miles,  stands  104  feet  above  lake  level, 
and  has  a  10  inch  steam  fog  whistle,  giving  a  blast  of  4  seconds  dur- 
ing each  minute  In  case  of  accidents  to  the  steam  fog  whistle,  a  fog 
bell,  struck  by  machinery,  will  be  sounded.  A  brick  tower,  white- 
washed, guide  to  anchorage  at  South  Manitou  Harbor,  and  showing 
the  passage  between  the  Manitou  Islands,  and  the  main  shcre ;  point 
Betsey  light  SbyW^W  24  miles;  Sleeping  Bear  SbyE^E,  y/i  miles. 
The  fog  signal  house  is  about  34  yards  northeast  of  the  l!.?;hthouse. 
Keep  on  same  course  to  Point  Betsey,  bearing  east  5  miles. 


86 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


i: 


Point  Betsey  Light,  on  Point  Betsey,  25  miles  SbyW^^W  of 
South  Manitou  Island,  east  side  of  Lake  Michigan ;  is  fixed,  varied 
by  white  flashes,  visible  13  miles,  stands  53  feet  above  lake  level, 
tower  and  dwelling  of  yellow  brick,  connected  by  a  covered  way. 
Canah  Island  Light  NW^W  48  miles,  on  the  west  shore. 

From  Waugoshance  to  Beaver  Harbor  and  through  the  Fox 
Island  Channel  Between  it  and  North  Manitou  Island. 

From  Waugoshance  to  the  west  side  of  the  North  Manitou,  bear- 
ing south,  SW>^W,  61^  miics.  On  this  course  you  leave  the  south 
Fox  Island  Light,  7>^  miles  to  starboard.  This  lighthouse  is  on  the 
extreme  southeast  end  of  South  Fox  Island,  is  fixed  red,  variec.  by 
red  flashes,  68  feet  above  lake  level,  tower  rises  irom  dwelling  of 
brick,  a  guide  through  the  passage  18  m=les  wide,  between  South  Fox 
and  North  Manitou  Islands.  From  the  light  a  bank  extends  south 
9^  miles,  which  is  from  i^  to  1^  miles  wide.  The  soundings  are 
from  4  to  6  and  8  fathoms.  To  the  east,  south  and  west  of  the  bank, 
there  is  from  20  to  30  fathoms  of  water,  close  to  on  the  bank.  There 
are  two  small  shoals  bearing  respectively  from  the  light  SbyW,  4^8 
miles,  andS>^W7^  mileu,  with  16  feet  water.  These  two  shoals 
will  be  buoyed  this  season,  with  horizontal  black  and  red  striped 
buoys.  . 

From  Waugoshance  to  the  Head  of  Beaver  Island. 

Steer  SW^W  for  25  miles,  then  around  Beaver  Island  for  three 
miles,  till  Beaver  Islp.nd  Lighthouse  bears  north  i^A  miles.  The 
lighthouse  is  on  the  south  end  of  Beaver  Island,  Lake  Michigan. 
Fixed,  varied  by  white  .lashes ;  visible  1 7  j^  miles  ;  stands  103  feet  above 
lake  level ;  tower  and  dwelling  of  brick ;  a  guide  through  the  passage 
between  the  Beaver  and  North  Fox  Islands.  This  channel  is  <)% 
miles  wide. 

From  Wangoshance  to  Beaver  Harbor,  Twenty  and  One- 
Half  Milss. 

,   When  %  mile  south  of  Wangoshance  Lighthouse,  steer  WbyS)i( 
S  12  miles;  thence  west  8  miles  to  the  dock  in  the  harbor,  leaving 


I'A-i- 


Thompson'o  Coast  Pilot, 


«7 


1  SbyW^^W  of 
is  fixed,  varied 
ove  lake  level, 
a  covered  way, 
lOre. 

■ough  the  Fox 
tou  Island. 

I  Manitou,  bear- 
leave  the  south 
thouse  is  on  the 
i  red,  variec.  by 
rom  dwellini5  of 
ween  South  Fox 
k  extends  south 
le  soundings  are 
irest  of  the  bank, 
le  bank.  There 
light  SbyW,  4^8 
hese  two  shoals 
and  red  striped 

/er  Island. 

Island  for  three 
I  1/^  miles.  The 
Lake  Michigan, 
ds  103  feet  above 
ough  the  passage 
;  channel  is  9)^ 

enty  and  One- 

;e,  steer  W  byS)i( 
e  harbor,  leaving 


the  light  to  starboard,  or  come  to  anchor  anywhere  near  the  middle  of 
the  bay,  in  5  to  9  fathoms  water.     Soft  bottom.    The  lighthouse  is  on 
the  north  point  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  ;  is  a  fixed  red  light, 
visible  12  miles;  stands  37  feet  above  lake  level.     (There  is   a  life 
saving  station  here.)     Brick  lower  and  dwelling.     Skillegalee  light 
bears  EbyS>^S  17  miles.    This  course  would  pass  seven-eighths  of  a 
mile  sD'Jth  o<  Hog  Island  reef,  E^S  7^  miles  from  the  harbor.     The 
entrance  to  Little  Traverse  Bay  SE.31  miles.     A  buoy  is  placed  on 
the  east  end  of  Hog  Island  reef,  in  3  fathoms  water.     The  greatest 
extent  of  the  reef  is  east  and  west  ^4  of  a  mile,  and  north  and  south 
233  yards.     Least  water  on  the  reef  6  feet.     The  soundings  adjacent 
to  the  shoalest  spot  are  4  and  5  fathoms.     The  buoy  is  red,  with  black 
horizontal  stripes.     First  class  iron  can  buoy.     Wangoshance  light  E 
byN^N  1 2 1.2  miles.     There  is  good  anchorage  along  the  island  for 
5  miles  south  of  the  Beaver  Harbor,  in  7  to  8  fathoms  water.     Soft 
bottom. 

From   St.  Helena  Island  10  Poverty  Island   Entrance  to 
Green  Bay,  North  of  the  Beaver  Islands. 

From  St.  Helena  Island  Lighthouse,  bearing  north  i  yi  miles, 
steer  Wj^N  40  miles  to  abreast  of  Squaw  Island,  bearing  south  2 
miles;  thence  WSW  57  miles  to  Poverty  Island  Lighthouse,  bearing 
north  one  mile  off  Poverty  Island  Light,  on  the  south  end  of  Poverty 
Island;  is  a  flashing  red  light;  time  between  flashes,  fifteen  seconds  ; 
visible  16  miles;  stands  78  feet  above  lake  level,  on  a  circular  brick 
tower,  whitewashed.  Point  Peninsular  Light  NW  byW  18  miles; 
Pottawatomie  Light  SW3^W  ioi<  miles;  background,  trees.  This 
light  is  a  guide  between  the  Gull  Islands  and  Poverty  Island  into 
Green  Bay,  thence  NW>^W  to  Peninsular  Point  Lighthouse,  bearing 
north  2%  miles  The  lighthouse  is  on  the  point,  between  Little  and 
Big  Bay  dc  Noquet ;  flashes  white  ;  visible  12Y2  miles. 

Note  —This  light  can  be  seen  in  clear  weather  directly  after 
passing  Poverty  Island ;  it  stands  4'  feet  above  lake  level;  tower 
rises  from  keeper's  dwelling ;  buiU  of  yellow  brick  ;  marks  approach 
to  Little  and  Big  Bay  de  Noquet,  A  dangerous  shoal  extends  south 
from  the  light  i'^  miles.     There  is   ilso  a    11  fpot  spot  SbyW^W 


88 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


2%  miles  from  the  lights.  Sand  Point  Lighthouse  bears  NWbyW  6yi 
miles;  Boyer's  Bluff  S^E  17  miles;  south  point  of  Poverty  Island 
SE^E  17  miles. 

Escanaba  Light, 

At  the  extreme  end  of  Sand  Point,  in  Little  Bay  de  Noquet ;  is  a 
fixed  red  light,  visible  13  miles;  44  feet  above  lake  level,  and  marks 
the  turning  point  into  the  Harbor  of  Escanaba,  and  a  guide  up  Little 
Bay  de  Noquet.  To  the  eastward  of  the  light  is  a  sand  flat,  extend- 
ing a  half  mile  ,  two  black  buoys  are  generally  kept  on  the  point  of 
this  flat.  The  ten  foot  shoal  of  Point  Peninsular ;  has  a  third  class 
iron  can  buoy,  placed  on  the  north  side  of  the  shoal,  in  16  feet  water, 
painted  red  and  l)lack  horizontal  stripes.  There  is  a  passage  to  the 
northward,  with  hom  3  to  4  fathoms  water.  East  of  this  buoy,  three- 
eighths  of  a  mile,  is  a  small  16  foot  shoal. 

From  Beaver  Island  Light,  Bearing  North  One  and  a  Half 
Miles,  to  Rock  Island  Light. 

Steer  W^S  61^  miles  to  a  point  one-quarter  of  a  mile  north  of 
Rock  Island  Lighthouse,  keeping  a  look  out  for  the  10  foot  shoal  i  ^ 
miles  south  of  St.  Martin's  Island ;  thence  W  "^S  6  miles,  to  Boyer's 
Bluff"  bearing  E  byS  ^  of  a  mile. 

Rock  Island  Lighthouse, 

Or  Pottawatomie,  on  the  north  point  of  Rock  Island,  north  side  of 
the  entrance  to  Green  Bay,  Michigan ;  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible 
19  miles;  1,^7  feet  above  lake  level;  light  on  keeper's  dwelling, 
built  of  stone ;  a  guide  to  Green  Bay  through  the  passage  between 
Rock  Island  and  St.  Martin's  Island.  A  ten  foot  shoal  in  the  chan- 
nel bears  NEbyE^E  3^  miles  from  the  light.  From  the  southeast 
point  of  Rock  Island  there  are  two  dangerous  reefs  with  only  four 
feet  water,  bearing  S  byEi^E  2}4  miles  and  SSE  3^  miles.  There 
is  a  good  passage  between  these  reefs  and  the  island,  in  deep  water, 
and  good  anchorage  can  be  found  in  5  to  6  fathoms  in  the  bight,  a 
little  north  of  the  false  channel  between  Rock  Island  and  Washington 
Island.     Vessels  from   Lake   Michigan  ports  for  Green  Bay  by  this 


rw^  f 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


89 


rs  NWbyW  6J^ 
Poverty  Island 


e  Noquet ;  is  a 
;vel,  and  marks 
guide  up  Little 
id  flat,  extend- 
n  the  point  of 
as  a  third  class 
in  16  feet  water, 
passage  to  the 
this  buoy,  three- 

ne  and  a  Half 

a  mile  north  of 
o  foot  shoal  I  ^ 
liles,  to  Boyer's 


d,  north  side  of 
ite  light,  visible 
;eper's  dwelling, 
•assage  between 
loal  in  the  chan- 
3m  the  southeast 
s  with  only  four 
miles.  There 
I,  in  deep  water, 
is  in  the  bight,  a 
and  Washington 
reen  Bay  by  this 


passage  can  bring  the  light  to  bear  WbyN  to  WbyS  in  18  fathoms 
water,  and  stand  in,  hauling  half  a  mile  to  the  northward  as  they  ap- 
proach the  light,  going  to  the  westward.  Boyer's  Bluff,  the  northwest 
point  of  Washington  Island, is  one  of  the  mo.st  prominent  head  lands 
in  Green  Bay,  and  is  the  turning  point  for  Green  Bay  City  in  this 
passage. 

From  the  North  Manitou  Island  to  Milwaukee. 

With  the  NW  end  of  the  North  Manitou,  bear.ng  south  4>^ 
miles,  steer  SWbySj^S,  186  miles  to  Milwaukee  Lighthouse,  on 
north  point  of  Milwaukee  Bay,  Wisconsm.  Is  fixed,  varied  by  white 
flashes,  time  between  flashes  two  minutes,  visible  i^yi  miles,  stands 
102  feet  above  lake  level,  and  is  a  coast  light,  yellow  brick  tower  and 
dwelling  attached,  a  guide  to  Milwaukee  Bay. 

Milwaukee  Pier-head  Light,  on  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier 
of  Milwaukee  harbor,  fixed  red,  visible  12  miles,  40  feet  above  lake 
level,  on  a  wooden  frame  work  tower  painted  white,  a  guide  into  the 
harbor.  The  piers  rui  out  Ej'^N  and  W^^S.  A  life  saving  station  is 
in  the  harbor.  A  fog  whistle  will  be  placed  on  the  north  pier  end  at 
Milwaukee  this  Spring.  Length  of  blast  5  seconds,  interval  55 
seconds,  alternate  every  minute. 

From  Point  Betsey  Bearing  East  Five  Miles  to  Chicago. 

Steer  SbyW^W  209  miles.  Chicago  Lighthouse  is  on  the  north 
pier  of  Chicago  harbor  ;  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  16  miles,  stands 
83  feet  above  lake  level,  iron  tower,  connected  by  a  covered  way, 
with  a  wooden  dwelling  painted  brown.  Pier  head  light,  on  the  end 
of  the  north  pier,  and  a  guide  to  the  entrance  of  Chicago  harbor  j 
fixed  white  lighc,  visible  12  miles,  35]^  feet  above  lake  level.  A 
wooden  tower,  marks  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier,  and  guides  into 
the  harbor.  Calumet,  from  inner  light,  SbyEi^E  12  miles;  Water 
Works  Crib,  NE^^iE  two  miles,  shows  a  white  light.  From  the  Water 
Works  on  shore  to  the  dummy,  N  68°  28'  E,  2  miles,  Chicago  piers 
run  out  nearly  east  and  west.  The  breakwater  pier  runs  north  and 
south. 


i;;i 


,  van^-fKj^QQi^lKllHBNKIW^^ 


90 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 
Lights  on  Breakwater. 


%  ■ 


The  light  on  the  north  end  is  a  fixed  white  light,  24  teet  abov 
lake  level,  on  a  post  12  inches  square,  18  feet  high,  1  ainted  white, 
visible  loYi  miles.  The  light  on  the  south  end  of  breakwater,  is  a 
fixed  red  light  35  feet  above  lake  level,  shown  from  an  open  tower 
and  visible  12  miles,  each  light  illuminates  the  entire  horizon,  and 
they  are  4,000  feet  apart.  There  is  a  life  saving  station  in  the  harbor. 
Depth  of  water  going  in  from  14^  to  15  feet;  behind  breakwater, 
from  14  to  16  feet  water.     Dredging  going  on  every  season. 

Frankfort 

Five  miles  from  Point  Betsey  Lighthouse,  on  'le  outer  end  of  the 
south  pier.  A  fixed  red  light,  visible  i  x  }i  mile  „  33)^  feet  above  lake 
level,  on  an  open  frame  work  structure  near  tlie  outer  end  of  the 
south  harbor  pier,  a  guide  to  vessels  entering  ,  best  water  dose  to  the 
south  pier.  This  is  a  good  harbor  for  small  vess-ls.  To  run  in,  range 
the  south  pier,  and  follow  it  up,  until  into  the  bay.  You  can  go  as  far 
as  the  iron  dock  on  the  starboard  side  of  the  bay,  with  as  much  water 
as  you  can  carry  in  9  to  9>^  feet,  come  to  anchor  or  run  to  the  docks 
on  the  port  hand,  the  bar  outside  changes  from  time  to  time,  10  feet 
has  been  carried  in. 

Manistee  Pier  Lights. 

Near  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier,  entrance  to  Manistee  River, 
16  miles  north  of  Grand  Point  Au  Sable;  fixed  red,  visible  12  miles, 
35  feet  above  lake  level,  on  an  open  frame  structure,  with  an  elevated 
walk  leading  from  it  to  the  shore.  Tower  and  walk  painted  white, 
the  light  serves  as  a  guide  into  the  river.  This  harbor  is  generally 
safe  for  vessels  drawing  less  than  10  feet  water.  Manitowoc  Light- 
hour  c  l.ears  WbyS  67  miles. 

Grand  Point  Au  Sauble. 

Is  48  miles  from  Point  Betsey  on  the  east  shore  of  Lake  Michi- 
gan, has  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  17^3  miles,  stands  106  feet  above 
lake  level,  tower  and  dwelling  of  yellow  brick ;  top  of  lantern  black. 
'    A  coast  light    This  is  the  most  western  lighthouse  on  the  east  coast 


of  Lak 
towoc 
the  P( 


0 

All  Sa 
lake  le 
the  ha 
centre, 
plenty 
end  ot 
depth 
blowir 
erly  ai 
mine  i 
being 
went  ( 

E 
visible 
of  Pel 
on  an 
in  mil 


C 

Saubh 

flashe 

Towe 

and  a 

sand 

Saubl 

1 

Musk 


Thompson* s  Coast  IHlot 


91 


t,  24  lect  abov 
painted  white, 
breakwater,  is  a 
1  an  open  tower 
re  horizon,  and 
•n  in  the  harbor, 
ind  breakwater, 
ieason. 


outer  end  of  the 
^  feet  above  lake 
liter  end  of  the 
rater  close  to  the 
To  run  in,  range 
^ou  can  go  as  far 
;h  as  much  water 
run  to  the  docks 
5  to  time,  10  feet 


)  Manistee  River, 
visible  12  miles, 
with  an  elevated 
ilk  painted  white, 
rbor  is  generally 
lanitowoc   Light- 


re  of  Lake  Michi- 

ids  106  feet  above 

)  of  lantern  black. 

on  the  east  coast 


of  Lake  Michigan.  Petite  Point  Au  Sauble,  S^^W  29  mile?.  Mani- 
towoc light  W»^N  57  miles.  A  life  saving  station  is  located  between 
the  Point  and  Sauble  River,  about  i^^  miles  from  the  point. 

Pere  Marquette  or  Ludington. 

On  the  east  side  of  Lake  Michigan,  8  miles  south  of  Grand  Point 
All  Sauble.     A  fixed  red  light,  visible'  12  miles,  stands  36  feet  above 

of  the  south  pier,  a  guide  into 

I  feet,  a  little  north  of  the 

N  and  E'^S.    There  is 

ler  getting  past  the  inner 

piuin  .0  be  seen.    The  average 


lake  level,  on  wooden  tower,  on  th 
the  harbor.     The  best  water,  ^ 
centre,  between  the  piers,  which 
plenty  of  water  up  to  the  mills  in 
end  ot  the  piers,'and  the  channel 


depth  of  water  is  about  12  feet,  according  to  what  point  the  wind  is 
blowing  from,  &c.  A  strong  current  sets  along  this  shore  with  south- 
erly £ind  SW  winds,  past  Point  Betsey  and  the  Manitous.  A  friend  of 
mine  at  Frankfort,  lost  14  nets  in  a  blow  from  theSW  by  the  buoys 
being  swept  away.  He  says  that  the  current  was  running,  when  he 
went  out  for  the  ne    ,  at  the  rate  of  3  to  4  miles  per  hour. 

Pent  water. 
Eleven  and  one-half  miles  from  Ludington.  Light  fixed  red, 
visible  11^  miles,  on  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier  at  the  harbor 
of  Pentwater,  east  shore  of  Lake  Michigan,  33  feet  above  lake  level, 
on  an  open  frame  work  structure,  a  guide  into  the  harbo'-.  Best  water 
in  mid-channel  9>^  to  10  feet  Piers  run  ont  WbyN»^Nand  EbyS^^S. 

Petite  Point  Au  Sauble 
On  Little  Point  Au  Sauble,  30  miles  south  of  Grand  Point  Au 
Sauble,  east  shore.  Light  fixed,  varied  by  white  flashes,  time  between 
flashes  30  seconds,  ro8  feet  above  lake  level,  is  a  lake  coast  light, 
Tower  and  dwelling  are  of  red  brick,  connected  by  a  covered  way 
and  as  seen  from  the  lake,  are  projected  against  a  back  ground  of 
sand  hills,  partially  covered  with  light  timber.  Grand  Point  Au 
Sauble  N>^E  29  miles. 

White  River. 

Light  at  the  mouth  of  White  River,  east  shore,  12  miles  north  of 
Muskegon  light.    Fixed,  varied  by  red  flashes,  time  between  flashes 


:^iSi 


I   1 
■  1 


-n 


ThompsofCs  Coait  Pilot. 


\..X: 


9« 

one  minute,  visible  14  miles,  stands  57  feet  above  lake  level,  lake 
coast  and  harbor  light,  A  brick  dwelling,  with  square  tower  rising  from 
its  NW  corner,  stands  on  south  bank  of  White  River,  a  guide  into  the 

harbor. 

White  River  Pier-head  Light,  fixed  red,  visible  11^  miles,  33 
feet  above  lake  level,  on  a  wooden  tower  on  the  outer  end  of  the 
south  harbor  pier,  a  guide  into  the  harbor. 

Muskegon  Light 

At  the  mouth  of  Muskegon  River.  Fixed  white,  visible  13 
miles,  45  feet  above  lake  level,  and  has  a  bell,  struck  by  hend,  a  pri- 
vate enterprise,  on  keeper's  dwelling,  on  the  south  side  of  Muskegon 
River.  Pierhead  light,  on  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier  (Port  Shel- 
don) Muskegon  Lake,  Michigan,  on  a  wooden  tower,  a  guide  into  the 
harbor.  On  entering  between  the  piers,  the  best  water,  from  10  to  1  a 
feet,  will  be  found  a  little  to  the  south  of  the  centre  of  the  river.  Piers 
runout  NEbyE>^E  and  SWbyW^^W.  In  1876  the  water  was  la  to 
14  feet 

Buoys  in  Muskegon  Lake. 

No  I,  14  foot  spar  buoy,  black.  Entrance  to  Muskegon  Lake, 
west  3  miles ;  Bank  Point,  north  ^  mile.  This  buoy  is  placed  on 
the  extreme  end  of  a  large  flat,  setting  off  the  first  point  on  the  port 
side  after  passing  through  the  entrance  from  Lake  Michigan  into 
Muskegoii  Lake,  called  Bank  Point,  and  is  nearly  in  the  centre  of 

the  lake. 

Buoy  No.  2,  red,  14  foot  spar  buoy,  L.  G.  Mason's  saw  mill, 
south  833  yards.  This  buoy  marks  a  grassy  point  near  the  head  of 
Muskegon  Lake,  on  the  south  side,  known  as  the  Old  Foss  Point. 
The  dock  at  the  tower  of  Muskegon,  SbyEj^E,  733  yards. 

Grand  Haven. 

Light  at  the  south  side  of  the  mouth  of  Grand  River,  30  miles 
north  of  Kalamazoo  River,  Mich.  Fixed,  varied  by  white  flashes, 
time  between  flashes  i  minute  and  30  seconds,  visible  15  miles,  70 
feet  above  lake  level.     Has  a  first-class  steam  syren,  giving  blasts  of 


t< 
li 
s< 

aj 
kl 
B 

t< 


s 

li 

I 

o 


1 

3 


lake  level,  lake 
ower  rising  from 
a  guide  into  the 

11^   miles,  33 
jutcr  end  of  the 


li' 

S( 

a' 


t< 


hite,  visible  13 
c  by  hand,  a  pri- 
ide  of  Muskegon 
pier  (Port  Shel- 
a  guide  into  the 
Br,  from  10  to  1  a 
if  the  river.  Piers 
I  water  was  la  to 


Muskegon  Lake, 
uoy  is  placed  on 
point  on  the  port 
e  Michigan  into 
r  in  the  centre  of 


8 


[ason's  saw  mill, 
;  near  the  head  of 
I  Old  Foss  Point, 
yards. 


i  River,  30  miles 

by  white  flashes, 

nsible  15  miles,  70 

1,  giving  blasts  of 


l^^u*^ 


•Mm 


^'*U 


^. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


t. 
^ 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  US80 

(716)872-4503 


'■^2^' 
^ 


u 


""¥ 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


slw.i!^£a^vo->^\«;^^SBSS»«»,^raSlMW!a^-ea•^l<^*S'i»SW5'^^ 


«»B&Mfe»»'- 


■^ 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


93 


five  seconds,  at  intervals  of  thirty  seconds.  Light  on  stone  and  brick 
tower,  which  is  connected  witli  keeper's  dwelling  ;  a  coast  and  harbor 
light,  marking  entrance  to  Grand  Haven.  Pier-head  light,  on  the 
south  pier  of  Grand  Haven.  Fixed  white,  visible  is  miles,  37  feet 
above  lake  level,  on  a  wooden  tower,  a  guide  into  the  river.  Mus- 
kegon light,  NbyWj^W  14  miles;  Kalamazoo  light  S^E  27^  miles. 
Buoy  off  Grand  River,  black  12  foot  spar  buoy.  This  buoy  is  a  guide 
to  the  entrance  of  the  piers,  and  is  in  12  feet  water,  the  end  of  the 
pier  SE  700  feet.  Pier  runs  out  E^N  and  Wj^S,  14  to  16  feet  water 
going  in.  A  life  saving  station  is  located  in  the  harbor.  Railroad 
dock  on  the  starboard  side  of  the  river. 

Holland,  Black  Lake. 

Lighthouse  on  the  south  pier,  at  the  harbor  of  Holland,  east 
shore.  Is  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  11^  miles;  stands  32  feet  above 
lake  level ;  built  on  a  wooden  tower  on  the  end  of  the  south  pier ;  a 
guide  into  the  harbor.  Holland  piers  run  out  east  and  west ;  depth 
of  water,  9^  to  10  feet 

Kalamazoo  River. 

Pier  light  near  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier,  mouth  of  Kala- 
mazoo River ;  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  11^  miles;  34  feet  above  lake 
level,  on  an  open  frame  tower,  with  an  elevated  walk  leading  from  it 
to  the  shore ;  painted  white  ;  a  guide  into  Kalamazoo  River ;  about 
40  miles  NbyE^E  of  St.  Joseph,  Michigan.  Vessels  on  entering 
the  piers  will  find  the  best  water  in  mid-channel  until  abreast  the  slab 
pier,  from  8  to  i\}4  feet  water  oii  the  port  hand,  when  the  channel  is 
close  to  south  pier,  until  abrenst  the  light  keeper's  dwelling,  on  the 
north  side,  when  the  best  water  will  be  found  midway  between  the 
piers.  Port  Sheldon,  north  17  miles;  South  Haven,  S^W  16  miles; 
Chicago  Light,  SW^W  90  miles.  The  piers  run  out  east  one-half, 
and  one-eighth  north.  Saugatuck  is  about  five  miles  up  river.  The 
river  is  crooked  and  narrow ;  8^  to  9  feet  water  can  be  carried  up  to 
Saugatuck.  ,      ^ 

South  Haven. 

Light  on  the  outer  end  of  the  south  harbor  pier ;  fixed  red,  visi- 
ble 11^  miles;  32  feet  above  lake  level,  on  a  wooden  tower,  at  the 


^^1 

K    '1 


:;;«*'- 


^  Thompsoris  Coast  Pilot. 

mouth  of  South  Black  River.  South  Haven  piers  run  out  E  byN  and 
W  byS ;  8>^  to  9  and  lo  feet  water  up  to  the  docks,  Kalamazoo 
Light  N^E  16  miles  ;  Chicago  Light  SWbyWj^W  82  miles.  Keep 
the  south  pier  best  aboard  going  in. 

St.  Joseph, 

On  the  south  side  of  the  mouth  of  St.  Joseph  River,  Michigan;  light 
fixed,  varied  by  white  flashes;  time  between  flsshec,  owe  minute  and 
thirty  seconds;  stands  loi  feet  above  lake  level,  on  keeper's  wooden 
dwelling,  m  the  town  of  St.  Joseph.  A  sand  bar  forms  from  the 
north  pier  well  across  the  entrance  to  the  harbor.  Vessels  entering 
have  to  keep  well  to  the  southward,  keeping  the  beacon  light  on  the 
end  of  the  south  pier  open  on  the  port  hand,  until  within  100  feet  of 
it,  when  the  channel  is  in  the  middle  of  the  river.  Pier  head  light  is 
on  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier ;  fixed  white,  visible  12  miles;  34 
feet  above  lake  level,  and  is  built  on  a  wooden  tower,  painted  white. 
Michigan  City  Light  SW^S  36  miles;  Kalamazoo  Light  NbyEj^E 
41  miles  ;  Chicago  Light  W  bySj^S  62  miles  ;  Milwaukee  Light  NW 
>^  W  97  miles.  Piers  run  out  NW  byW^W  and  SE  byE>^E.  Depth 
of  water,  17  and  18  to  inner  end  of  piers,  then  12  to  14  to  bridge, 
thence  11  feet  along  by  the  docks.  A  channel  has  been  dredged 
through  to  Benton  Harbor,  10  to  11  feet  water. 

Michigan  City. 

At  the  south  end  of  Lake  Michigan,  Indiana.  Light  fixed  white,  vis- 
ible \i%  miles;  stands  52  feet  above  lake  level.  This  is  the  most 
southern  light  on  Lake  Michigan.  New  Buffalo  NE  byE  8^  miles ; 
Chicago  Light  WbyN^N  38  miles;  Pier  head  Light,  on  the  outer 
end  of  the  west  pier;  fixed  red,  visible  ii>^  miles;  32  feet  above 
lake  level,  on  a  wooden  tower ;  a  guide  into  the  harbor.  Piers  run 
out  NbyWj^  and  ^W.  A  breakwater  is  being  constructed  at  this 
Harbor.  It  commences  220  feet  from  the  lighthouse  on  the  west  pier 
head,  running  E  '-yN^N  ;  600  feet  was  finished  last  fall.  The  whole 
length  of  the  breakwater  when  completed  will  be  1417  feet,  connected 
at  its  eastern  end  by  a  pile  work  pier  504  feet,  and  a  bridge  pier  72a 
feet  north  and  south.    This  work,  when  finished,  will  make  an  excel- 


un  out  E  byN  and 
ocks.  Kalamazoo 
V  82  miles.     Keep 


!r,  Michigan;  light 
:,  Giie  minute  and 
n  keeper's  wooden 
)ar  forms  from  the 

Vessels  entering 
}eacon  light  on  the 
[  within  100  feet  of 

Pier  head  light  is 
isible  1 2  miles ;  34 
wer,  painted  white. 
)  Light  NbyE54:E 
Iwaukee  Light  NW 
EbyE>^E.  Depth 
12  to  14  to  bridge, 
has  been  dredged 


ght  fixed  white,  vis- 
This  is  the  most 
NEbyES^  miles; 
Light,  on  the  outer 
liles ;  32  feet  above 
harbor.  Piers  run 
constructed  at  this 
use  on  the  west  pier 
ast  fall.  The  whole 
1417  feet,  connected 
id  a  bridge  pier  72a 
will  make  an  excel- 


Thompsoris  Coast  Pilot. 

lent  outer  harbor  and  be  a  protection  to  the  main  channel, 
feet  water  going  in.     Width  of  channel,  220  feet. 


95 

Fourteen 


SAILING  DIRECTIONS  FOR  LAKE  MICHIGAN. 

(According  to  the  U.  S.  Survey.) 

From  Point  Betsey  to  Chicago. 

When  4j^  miles  west  of  said  point  steer  Sby  W^W  202^  miles, 
to  a  point  2jt^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light. 

From  Manistee  to  Green  Bay. 

When  2  miles  west  of  Manistee  light  steer  N  by  W^W  73  miles, 
to  a  point  2  miles  SSE  from  Pilot  Island  lighthouse. 

From  Manistee  to  Manitowoc. 

When  2  miles  west  of  Manistee  light,  steer  W  by  S  6i  miles,  to  a 
point  3  miles  east  of  Manitowoc  pier  light. 

From  Grand  Haven  to  Green  Bay. 

When  in  range  of  the  two  lights  and  2^  miles  off,  steer  NNW 
40  miles,  till  Little  Point  Sauble  light  bears  NE ;  when  steer  N^W 
116^  miles  to  a  point  2  miles  SSE  from  Pilot  Island  Light. 

From  Grand  Haven  to  Milwaukee. 

When  in  range  of  the  lights  at  Grand  Haven  and  2]/^  miles  off, 
steer  Wi^S  77^  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  east  of  Pierhead  Light,  at 
Milwaukee. 

Note.— I  have  never  yet,  by  any  compass,  been  able  to  run  this 
course  to  the  westward,  E^N  will  take  you  from  Milwaukee  to  Grand 
Haven.  Most  compasses  will  deviate  on  the  return  course,  from  half 
to  three-quarters  of  a  point,  consequently  you  will  have  to  keep  to  the 
southward  of  the  course,  W^S. 

From  Grand  Haven  to  Chicago. 

When  in  range  of  the  two  lights  at  Grand  Haven  and  aj^  miles 
off,  steer  SW^S  103^  miles  to  a  point  2%  miles  east  of  Chicago 
light. 

Note. — This  course  is  also  affected  the  same  way. 


_,^pi»i^"rm»v 


S*?f 


If?*™'^"  ' 


96 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


From  South  Haven  to  Chicago. 

When  1%  miles  W^N  from  South  Haven  light,  steer  SW  by 
W^W  73^  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light. 

From  St.  Joseph  to  Chicago. 

When  lyi  miles  NWby  W  from  St.  Joseph  beacon,  steer  Wby 
S/^S  56^  miles,  to  a  point  2j^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light. 

From  St.  Joseph  to  Green  Bay. 

When  lYi  miles  NWby  W  from  St,  Joseph's  beacon,  steer  N^W 
215^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  SSE  from  Pilot  Island  light. 

From  Michigan  City  to  Chicago. 

When  1%  miles  from  Michigan  City,  and  in  a  range  of  the  two 
lights,steer  W  by  N^N  for  341^  miles,  to  a  point  2%  miles  east  of 
Chicago  light. 

From  Chicago  to  Green  Bay. 

When  2%  miles  east  of  Chicago  light  steer  N^E  233^  miles, 
to  a  point  2  miles  SSE  from  Pilot  Island  light. 

From  Milwaukee  to  St.  Joseph. 

When  3  miles  east  from  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light,  steer  SEij^E 
for  91^  miles,  to  a  point  NVi^  by  W  1%  miles  from  St.  Joseph's  beacon. 

From  Milwaukee  to  Green  Bay. 

When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light,  steer  N  by  E^E 
for  159^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  SSE  from  Pilot  Island  light. 

From  Milwaukee  to  the  North  Manitou  Islands. 

When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light,  steer  NE  by 
N^N  for  174  miles,  to  a  point  4  miles  from  the  most  northern  point 
of  North  Manitou  Island,  and  in  range  with  its  west  side. 

From  Milwaukee  to  Manistee. 

When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light,  steer  NE^N  for 
II I ^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west  of  Manistee  light 


»*«&1M— I* 


ght,  steer  SW  by 
igo  light. 


con,  steer  Wby 
;o  light. 


icon,  steer  N^ W 
1  light. 


range  of  the  two 
%   miles  east  of 


J.E  2331^   miles, 


ght,  steer  SEij^E 
.  Joseph's  beacon. 


,  steer  N  by  E>^E 
iland  light. 

u  Islands. 

ght,  steer  NEby 
)st  northern  point 
side. 


,  steer  NE^N  for 
hL 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot,  97 

From  Sheboygan  to  Grand  Haven 

When  \^^  miles  east  from  light  on  pier,  steer  SEby  E  for  831^ 
miles,  to  a  point  a  i^  miles  off,  and  in  range  of  the  two  lights  of  Grand 
Haven. 

From  Cheboygan  to  Manistee. 

When  i^  miles  east  from  light  on  pier,  steer  NE  by  E^E  for 
73  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west  of  Manistee  light. 

From  Cheboygan  to  the  North  Manitou  Islands. 

When  i^  miles  east  from  light  on  pier,  steer  NE>^N  for  128 
miles  to  a  point  4  miles  from  the  most  northern  point  of  North  Man- 
itou Island,  in  range  with  west  side.  These  courses  to  the  North 
Manitou  meet  the  courses  from  Waugoshance,  as  explained  in  another 
part  of  directions  for  Lighthouses  on  Lake  Michigan. 

From  Manitowoc  to  Grand  Haven. 

When  3  miles  east  from  Manitowoc  pierhead  light,  steer  SE^^^S 
for  96  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  from,  and  in  range  of  the  two  lights 
at  Grand  Haven. 

From  Manitowoc  to  Chicago. 

When  3  miles  east  from  Manitowoc  pierhead  light,  steer  due 
south  1 53  miles  for  Chicago. 

From  Chicago  to  Grosse  Point NNW       1" 

Chicago  to  Racine N^W      57 

Chicago  to  South  Manitou  Island NbyEj^E  221^ 

Chicago  to  Grand  River NE^^N  109 

Chicago  to  Kalamazoo  River NE^E      90 

Chicago  to  St.  Joseph -....EbyN^N      61 

Chicago  to  New  Buffalo E^S      45 

Chicago  to  Michigan  City EbyS      38 

Racine  to  Michigan  City. SEbyS^S      82 

Milwaukee  to  Michigan  City SEbyS^S  loi 

Manitowoc  to  Michigan  City. SbyE  168 

Port  Washington  to  St.  Joseph  River SE^S  109 


,s^.'  !  ' 


98  Tliompson's  Coast  Pilot. 

Couraes.  Milei. 

From  Sheboygan  to  St.  Joseph  River SEbySj^S  127 

Manitowoc  to  St.  Joseph  River .\....SSE  148 

Kewaunee  to  St.  Joseph    River SSE}^S  169 

Port  Washington  to  Grand  River EbyS^S  83 

Sheboygan  to  Grand  River...  SEbyE«^E  87'^ 

Manitowoc  to  Grand  River SE^E  100 

Kewaunee  to  Grand  River. SEbyS^S  119 

Sheboygan  to  the  South  Manitou  Island NE^^N  123 

Mjnilowoc  to  the  South  Manitou  Island NEj^E  97^^ 

Manitowoc  to  Grand  Point  au  Sauble E^S  55 

Death's  Door  to  Grand  Point  au  Sauble SbyEj^E  90 

Death's  Door  to  Manitou  Islands SEbyE  Ey  48 

Bailey's  Harbor  to  South  Manitou  Island E^S  45 

Twin  Rivers  to  abreast  of  Beaver  Island,  leav- 
ing the  Ma;iitou  Islands  to  the    eastward, 

and  the  Fox  Islands  to  the  westward NEj!^E  140 

Big  Taverse  Lighthouse  to  Rock  Island  (en- 
trance to  Green   Bay,   North    Channel), 

leaving  the  Fox  Islands  to  the  northward..WbyNi^  N  65 

Big  Traverse  to  Port  Waugoshance NEbyNi4;N  44 

Skilltgalee  to  Pine  River S^W  20 

Skillegalee  to  Point  Waugoshance  Lighthouse... .S27°W  8j4 

Hog  Island  Reef. 

The  range  line  of  the  NW  and  NE  points  of  the  Big  Beaver 
Island,  runs  EbyS,  and  passes  i  mile  to  the  northward  of  Hog  Island 
Reef,  and  about  J^  mile  to  the  southward  of  a  small  shoal  of  6  feet  of 
water,  lying  i^  miles  south  of  the  SW  point  of  Hog  Island,  where 
Hat  Island  is  just  shut  in  by  the  SE  point  of  Hog  Island. 

In  going  from  point  Waugoshance  to  Beaver  Harbor,  the  range 
of  the  NW  and  NE  points  of  Big  Beaver  Island  should  not  be  crossed 
until  Hog  Island  bears  north. 
From  Waugoshance    Lighthouse   to    Sheboygan,  Passing 

North  of  the  Fox  Islands,  186^  miles,  as  follows  : 

Steer  SW^W  25  miles,  then  around  Beaver  Island  for  2  miles, 
till  the  Lighthouse  bears  NW;  thence  steer  WbyS^S  for  1^^  miles, 


] 
cago 
Isaf 
open 
Calui 


.._ %...-. 


""^ 


Courses. 

EbyS^S 
'..... SSE 
.SSE>^S 
EbyS>^S 
;byE>^E 
..SEi^E 
EbyS^S 
.NE^N 
.  NEj^E 

E>^S 

SbyEj^E 
EbyE  Ey 


Mites. 
127 

148 

169 

83 

100 

119 
123 

55 
90 

48 
45 


..NEj!^E     140 


rhytij^N  6s 
5byNi4:N  44 
....  Sji^f       20 

,...S27°w     sy2 

the  Big  Beaver 
ird  of  Hog  Island 

shoal  of  6  feet  of 
og  Island,  where 
sland. 

Harbor,  the  range 
uld  not  be  crossed 

Dygan,  Passing 
as  follows : 

sland  for  2  miles, 
^S  for  t9^  miles, 


Thompson* 5  Coast  Pilot  ^ 

till  the  north  point  of  South  Fox  bears  SE  2  miles  distant,  when  steer 
SVV^S  150  miles  for  Sheboygan. 

Dangers  to  be  Avoided. 

There  are  comparatively  few  shoals  and  spits  in  the  south  end  of 
Lake  Michigan,  (they  are  all  accurately  located  on  the  full  U.S.  Chart, 
the  south  part  of  which  was  issued  last  year),  and  can  easily  be 
avoided  by  keeping  one  mile  fiom  the  shore,  with  the  exception  of 
Racine  reef,  which  is  fully  explained  in  the  description  of  that  light 
and  harbor.  There  is  an  8  foot  shoal  half  a  mile  SE  from  Cheboygan 
light,  near  Ulio;  there  are  two  12  feet  spots,  half  a  mile  distant,  in  a 
southerly  direction.,  and  a  10  foot  spot  500  feet  east  from  the  dock  ;  a 
10  foot  spot  lies  half  a  mile  east  from  Fox  Point.  Half  way  between 
Chicago  and  Calumet  lights,  are  two  shoals,  i^  miles  from  the  shore* 
with  14  and  16  feet  water  on  them,  and  a  10  foot  shoal  exists  2  miles 
north  from  Calumet  light,  ^  mile  from  shore,  see  buoys. 

Magnetic  Variation  on  Lake  Michigan. 

Frankfort 4"  17'  E. 

Big  Point  au  Sauble 4°  la'  E. 

Muskegon 4°  n'  E. 

Grand  Haven 3°  28'  E. 

South  Haven 3°  33'  E. 

St.  Joreph 3°  53'  E. 

Michigan  City 3°  59'  E.  . 

Grosse  Point  Lighthouse 4°  59'  E. 

Kenosha 4°  59'  E. 

Milwaukee 6°  22'  E. 

Sheboygan 5°  15'  E. 

Manitowoc 50    3'  E. 

Calumet  River 

Light  on  the  north  side  of  Calumet  River,  12  miles  SSE  of  Chi- 
cago  light,  west  shore  of  Lake  Michigan,  a  guide  into  Calumet  River. 
Is  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  1 2  miles,  33  feet  above  lake  level,  on  an 
open  frame  tower,  with  an  elevated  walk  to  the  shore.  Reef  off 
Calumet  has  a  red  third-class  iron  can  buoy  on  it,  and  bears  as  fol- 


'$'^'. 


lOO 


Thompson's  Coast  IHtot 


lows:  Calumet  Point  bears  S  14"  W,  distant  a.iia  yards.  Clark's 
Point  bears  WbyN  l^N,  distant  1,230  yards.  Piers  run  out  NEbyE 
i^E,  and  SVVbyW^^  W;  depth  of  water  going  in  1 1  feet.  The  inside 
of  the  harbor  is  well  piered,  and  there  is  a  large  slip  on  the  port  side. 
To  run  in  open  the  piers  and  keep  a  little  nearest  the  north  pier. 
Depth  of  water  under  the  breakwater  at  Chicago,  1 2  feet  all  along  the 
inside  of  breakwater ;  100  feet  inside  of  the  line  of  breakwater,  from 
15^  to  19  feet  water.  Inside  that,  and  near  the  center,  in  line  with 
breakwater,  11,  9,  8^  and  7^  feet. 

Grosse  Point. 

Lake  coast  light,  is  fixed  white,  varied  by  red  flashes,  at  intervals 
of  three  minutes,  visible  18^  miles,  stands  ii9>^  feet  above  lake 
level,  on  a  round  tower  and  dwelling  of  yellow  brick,  connected  by  a 
covered  way,  is  12  miles  north  of  Chicago.  There  are  two  pile  piers 
at  this  point,  called  Evanston,  the  town  of  which  is  a  very  pretty  place. 
The  water  alongside  the  piers  10  to  11  feet.  Grand  Point  Au  Sauble 
NNE  153  miles. 

Waukegan  or  Little  Fort. 

Light  on  south  side  of  Little  Fort  River,  about  15  miles  south  of 
Southport  light,  Illinois.  Is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  15  miles,  stands 
75  feet  above  lake  level,  and  is  on  keeper's  dwelling.  Grosse  Point, 
SbyEj^E  22  miles  ;  Kenosha  light  NE^E  155^  miles. 

Kenosha  or  South  Port.  .  . 

Light  on  Warrington  Island,  in  Kenosha,  Wis.,  and  on  the  north 
side  of  the  entrance  to  the  pier  harbor.  Fixed,  varied  by  white 
flashes,  time  between  flashes  i  minute  30  seconds;  visible  15^  miles, 
is  76  feet  above  lake  level,  tower  and  dwelling  of  yellow  brick,  de- 
tached. Kenosha  pier-head  light,  on  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier, 
fixed  red,  visible  12  miles,  is  39  feet  above  lake  level,  on  a  wooden 
tower,  a  guide  into  the  harbor.  On  entering  between  the  piers,  the 
best  water,  from  10  to  12  feet,  will  be  found  a  little  to  the  south  of  the 
centre.  Racine  Light  from  main  light  N^E  12  miles.  Piers  run  out 
E^^Nand  W>^S.  >« .:       . 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


lOI 


yards,  Clark's 
run  out  NEbyE 
:et.  The  inside 
on  the  port  side, 
the  north  pier. 
;et  all  along  the 
)reakwater,  from 
Iter,  in  line  with 


.shes,  at  intervals 
feet  above  lake 
,  connected  by  a 
ire  two  pile  piers 
-ery  pretty  place. 
Point  Au  Sauble 


1 5  miles  south  of 
e  15  miles,  stands 
Grosse  Point, 
;s. 


and  on  the  north 
varied  by  white 
sible  15^  miles, 
yellow  brick,  de- 
af the  north  pier, 
krel,  on  a  wooden 
en  the  piers,  the 
the  south  of  the 
s.     Piers  run  out 


Racine  (Root  River). 
Lighthouse  on  the  north  pier,  at  the  harbor  of  Racine,  Wis. 
Fixed  white,  visible  13  miles,  48  feet  above  lake  level,  is  a  coast  and 
harbor  light,  yellow  brick  rises  from  back  of  dwelling.  One  and  three 
fourths  miles  E>gS  of  this  light,  is  a  shoal  extending  south  one  mile; 
least  water  8  feet.     Milwaukee  light  NbyW;^  \V,  aa  miles. 

Racine  Pier- head  Light,  on  the  outer  end  of  north  pier,  at  the 
harbor  of  Racine.     Fixed  red,  visible  la  miles,  1^^%  feet  above  lake 
level,  on  a  wooden  tower  painted  white  ;  forms  with    the  preceding 
light  on  the  inner  part  of  the  pier  a  range  and  guide  into  the  harbor.  A 
life  saving  station  is  situated  on  the  pier,  where  the  beach  outside  begins. 
Buoy  off  Racine,  a  first-class  iron  can  buoy,  painted  red,  on  the  reef  out- 
side Racine  harbor.    This  is  a  rocky  rhoal.  East  of  Racine  least  water 
8  feet.     Theshoalest  spot  on  this  reef  is  E^^N  from  the  old  light- 
house if  miles.     Vessels  bound  into  the  port  of  Racine  should  bring 
the  pierhead  light  to  bear  west,  and  not  cross  the  reef  to  the  south- 
ward of  that  bearing,  and  in  passing  to  the  eastward  of  the  buoy 
should  give  it  a  berth  of  i^  to  ^  of  a  mile.    The  channel  between  the 
shoal  and  the  city  has  from  3  to  6  fathoms  water,  sand  and  clay  bot- 
tom.    The  buoy  is  placed  in  17  feet  water,  and  1,000  feet  to  the  west 
of  the  shoalest  spot.    This  reef  extends  about  one  mile  N  and  S,  and 
the  same  distance  east  and  west.     Due  east  and  from  the  middle  of  the 
channel  between  the  piers,  will  take  you  clear  of  this  shoal.     Light 
on  the  north  pier,  from  the  buoy  WbyN^^N  \\  of  a  mile.     Wind 
point,  Nf^W,  3|^  miles.     Piers  run  out  EbyN  and  WbyS. 

Note.— Milwaukee  Lights  are  described  at  the  end  of  the  course 
from  the  Manitous,  also  Chicago  from  Point  Betsey.  Course  from 
Milwaukee  to  Grand  Haven  EX N  85  miles.  ^     . 

Port  Washington. 

Twenty-five  miles  south  of  Sheboygan,  Wisconsin ;  is  a  fixed 
white  light,  visible  18  miles,  stands  113  feet  above  lake  level,  is  on 
keeper's  dwelling,  of  yellow  brick.  This  harbor  is  under  improve- 
ment, by  building  out  piers  and  dredging  inside.  Seven  feet  is  all 
that  can  at  present  be  carried  in.  When  the  improvements  contem- 
plated are  finished,  it  will  be  a  good  harbor  for  small  vessels.    Blake's 


■k 


F  JitX^'r-^^^*'  ^  • 


IM 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


bridge  pier  is  to  the  northward  of  the  harbor,  where  all  steamers  stop. 
T-.velvetoi4  feet  water.  Sheboygan  NbyEj^E  25^  miles;  Point 
Betsey  NE^N  123  miles. 

Sheboygan  Pier-head  Light. 

On  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier,  at  the  entrance  to  Sheboygan 
River..  Fixed  red,  visible  la  miles,  32  feet  above  lake  level,  on  a 
wooden  frame  work  tower,  a  guide  to  vessels  entering  the  harbor. 
NEbyN,  distant  a^  miles;  from  the  end  of  the  harbor  piers,  there  is 
a  rocky  reef  with  8  feet  water  on  it,  the  north  and  south  ends  of  which 
are  marked  by  third  class  can  buoys,  painted  red,  one  on  each  end, 
aoo  feet  apart.  There  is  a  passage  inside  the  reef  which  should  not 
be  attempted  by  strangers.  Sheboygan  light  bears  from  center  of 
reef  WNW^W  about  2  miles. 

Sheboygan  Main  Light. 

On  a  point  2%  miles  north  of  the  mouth  of  Sheboygan  River. 

Fixed  white,  visible  16  miles,  80  feet  above  lake  level,  on  keeper's 

dwelling.     Twin  River  Point,  NbyEjj^E,  33  miles  ;  Grand  Point  Au 

Sauble  light  EbyNj^N,  64  miles.     Sheboygan  harbor  piers  run  out 

east  and  west,  due  east  clears  the  shoal  off  the  north  point.    Depth  of 

water  going  in  la  to  14  feet.     A  life  saving  station  is  located  in  the 

harbor. 

Manitowoc  Harbor  Lights. 

Pier  head  light  on  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier  at  the  harbor 

entrance.     Fixed  red,  visible  12  miles,  34  feet  above  lake  level,  on  a 

wooden  frame  structure,  a  guide  to  vessels  entering  the  harbor.    Main 

light  near  the  inner  end  of  the  north  pier.     Fixed,  varied  by  white 

flashes,  time  between  flashes  i  minute  30  seconds ;  63  feet  above  lake 

level ,  a  stone  tower,  whitewashed,  connected  with  keeper's  dwelling 

by  a  covered  way.     Twin  River  Point,  NE^E  9  miles:  Point  Betsey 

light  NEbyE^E,  83  miles  ;  Chicago  due  south.     Piers  run  out  E^N 

and  W^S.     Good  holding  ground  outside.     Depth  of  water  going  in 

10  to  13  feet. 

Twin  River  Harbor. 

Six  and  one  half  miles  to  the  northward  and  eastward  of  Mani- 
towoc, has  two  harbor  piers,  and  is  under  improvement.     There  are 


Thciyipson*s  Coast  Pilot. 


103 


!  all  steamers  stop. 
15J4   miles;  Point 


ince  to  Sheboygan 
e  lake  level,  on  a 
tering  the  harbor, 
rbor  piers,  there  is 
)uth  ends  of  which 
one  on  each  end, 
which  should  not 
•8  from  center  of 


Sheboygan  River. 

level,  on  keeper's 
;  Grand  Point  Au 
bor  piers  run  out 
1  point.  Depth  of 
1  is  located  in  the 


pier  at  the  harbor 
ire  lake  level,  on  a 
the  harbor.  Main 
J,  varied  by  white 
63  feet  above  lake 

keeper's  dwelling 
iles :  Point  Betsey 
'iers  run  out  E^N 
I  of  water  going  in 


eastward  of  Mani- 
iment.     There  are 


only  7  feet  water  at  present,  but  it  will  be  dredged  to  la  feet  this  sea- 
son. The  corner  on  the  inner  end  of  the  west  pier  is  to  be  taken 
away  so  that  boats  can  wind  round,  and  eventually  will  be  a  good 
harbor.  There  are  two  bridge  pier  docks  outside  to  the  west  of  the 
harbor,  with  la  to  14  feet  water  alongside.  A  life  saving  station  is 
in  the  harbor. 

Twin  River  Point  Light. 

About  5  miles  north  from  Twin  River  harbor  is  fixed,  varied  by 
white  fl.ishes,  time  between  flashes  thirty  seconds;  stands  no  feet 
above  lake  level,  visible  18  miles,  on  a  brick  tower,  connected  with 
keeper's  dwelling  by  a  covered  way  also  of  brick,  on  a  low  sandy 
point;  pine  barrens  to  the  north,  south,  and  west.  Manitowoc  Light 
845°  W,  13  miles.  Grand  Point  au  Saiilile  Light  EbySj^Sso 
miles,  both  structures  are  whitewashed,  dome  of  lantern  painted 
black.  Look  out  for  trap-nets  all  around  this  point  and  in  the  neigh- 
borhood of  Twin  Rivers,  in  3^  fathoms  water. 

Bailey's  Harbor 

Range  lights,  both  fixed  white,  visible  8  and  12  miles,  rear  light 
on  keeper's  frame  dwelling,  front  light  on  wooden  tower;  these  lights 
arc  1,000  feet  apart,  a  guide  to  the  anchorage  in  Bailey's  harbor,  10 
miles  NbyEj^E  from  Cave  point.  Sleeping  Bear  Point  E by S  53 
miles.  To  run  in  bring  the  lights  in  range,  bearing  NNW^W,  and 
stand  into  the  bay.  The  old  white  tower  of  the  former  light  on  the 
point  on  the  starboard  side  of  the  'lUrance,  is  still  standing  and 
serves  as  a  good  day  mark  for  approaching  the  harbor ;  good  holding 
ground  two  cables  lengths  west  of  the  old  tower,  in  6  fathoms  water. 
When  past  the  reef  or  middle  ground,  on  the  port  hand,  you  can  run 
to  the  lime  dock  or  to  the  upper  wood  dock  or  come  to  anchor  in  the 
bay  on  the  east  side. 

Mud  Bay. 

Two  miles  north  cf  Bailey's  harbor  is  a  good  shelter  from  SE 
and  NW  winds.  The  soundings  are  gradual,  from  7  to  2  fathoms ;  to 
run  in,  open  the  bay  when  in  6  or  7  fathoms  water,  steer  up  the 
middle  of  the  Bay,  and  come  to  anchor  on  the  south  side. 


I04 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


Cana  Island  Light. 

On  Cana  Island  15  miles  SSW  of  the  south  entrarce  to  Green 
Bay,  and  4  miles  to  the  northward  of  Bailey's  harbor ;  fixed  white 
light,  visible  16  miles,  88  feet  above  lake  level,  tower  and  dwelling  of 
yellow  brick  connected  by  a  covered  way,  and  is  a  coast  light.  South 
Fox  Island  light  E  by  N^N,  62  miles.  South  point  of  South  Mani- 
tou  Island  E^S,  45  miles. 

North  Bay  Buoys. 

Two  buoys.  No.  i  black.  No.  2  red,  20  foot  spar  buoys.  These 
buoys  mark  the  entrance  into  North  Bay,  Lake  Michigan.  On 
entering  the  bay  keep  midway  between  the  buoys,  and  double 
around  under  either  point,  according  to  the  direction  of  the  wind. 
There  is  a  sandy  flat  setting  to  the  eastward  from  the  centre  of  the 
bay,  which  must  be  avoided  by  coming  to  under  either  of  the  above 
points  in  3  fathoms  water,  or  run  in  for  the  centre  and  come  to. 
From  No.  i  buoy,  Cana  Island  Lighthouse  bears  S^E,  distant  3 
miles.  The  wood  dock  on  north  side  of  bay  N  by  Wj^  W  ;  northeast 
point  of  North  Bay,  NE  by  N^N.  Buoy  No.  2,  Cana  Island  Light- 
house bears  S^E  three  miles.  Fish  house  and  dock  on  south  side  of 
bay,  SWi^S;  northeast  point  of  North  Bay,  NE)^N. 

Rowley's  Bay  or  False  Door. 

From  Cana  Island,  bearing  west  i|^  miles,  steer  N^W,  leaving 
North  Bay  to  port,  after  passing  which  the  depth  of  water  is  from 
8  to  5  fathoms.  Keep  on  up  the  bay  on  the  same  course  till  Spider 
Island  bears  east,  when  you  will  drop  into  4  fathoms ;  thence  to  the 
dock  by  the  lead.  , 

Outer  Shoal  between  Gravel  and  Spider  Islands. 

Has  a  red  third  class  iron  can  buoy.  This  buoy  marks  the  outer 
shoal,  on  which  there  is  15  feet  water.  Vessels  bound  into  Green 
Bay,  through  Death's  door,  by  bringing  this  buoy  to  bear  w:st, 
distant  one  half  mile,  the  course  will  be  NNW,  until  the  black  buoy 
on  the  9  foot  shoal  is  abeam ;  thence  NW^N  will  carry  you  through 
the  passage  and  into  the  bay.     Port  DuMort  Lighthouse  N^E,  3^ 


miles 


time 

abovi 

at  inl 

DuM 

in  19 

steer 

>^W 

Islani 

Islani 

not  ! 

Gree 

requi 

after 


] 
buoy 
the  p 
this  [ 
Beari 
point 
betw< 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


105 


entrarce  to  Green 
arbor ;  fixed  white 
er  and  dwelling  of 
coast  light.  South 
It  of  South  Mani- 


par  buoys.  These 
ke  Michigan.  On 
uoys,  and  double 
ction  of  the  wind. 

the  centre  of  the 
sither  of  the  above 
itre  and  come  to. 
rs  S^E,  distant  3 

Wi^W;  northeast 
Cana  Island  Light- 
ck  on  south  side  of 
N. 

>r. 

teer  N^W,  leaving 
th  of  water  is  from 
e  course  till  Spider 
}ms  ;  thence  to  the 


miles.     Spider  Island  SW^W,  2^   miles. 
\'i/i  of  a  mile  from  buoy. 


Gravel  Island  NWi^W, 


Pert  DuMort,  Pilot  Island. 

Lighthouse  in  the  southern  entrance  to  Green  Bay,  flashes  white, 
time  between  flashes  one  minute;  visible  12  miles,  stands  38  feet 
above  lake  level ;  has  a  first  class  syren,  giving  blasts  of  five  seconds, 
ai  intervals  of  thirty  seconds ;  yellow  brick  building.  To  enter  Port 
DuMort  from  Lake  Michigan,  bring  the  light  at  five  miles  distance, 
in  19  or  20  fathom  water,  to  bear  from  NW  by  W  to  NNWi^VV,  and 
steer  for  it  till  the  light  bears  north,  i^  miles  distant;  thence  NW 
>^W  5  miles  into  Green  Bay.  This  course  will  pass  south  of  Plum 
Island.  There  is  a  good  channel  between  Pilot  Island  and  Detroit 
Island ;  also  a  good  channel  between  Plum  Island  and  Detroit  Island, 
not  safe  for  strangers.  The  northeast  shores  of  the  Peninsular  of 
Green  Bay  and  Washington  Island  are  fringed  with  rocky  shoals, 
requiring  a  vigilant  look-out  and  use  of  the  lead.  From  Pilot  Island 
after  clearing  the  channel  to  Chicago,  the  course  is  S i;^  W  245  miles. 

Port  DuMort  Passage 

Nine  foot  shoal,  has  a  third  class  iron  can  buoy,  black.  This 
buoy  is  on  the  southeast  end  of  the  9  foot  shoal,  near  the  middle  of 
the  passage  of  Port  DuMort ;  vessels  from  the  eastward  bound  through 
this  passage,  when  the  buoy  is  abeam,  can  steer  NW^N  into  the  bay. 
Bearings  of  buoy.  Pilot  Island  Lighthouse  NE  by  E,  1  ^  miles ;  west 
point  of  Plum  Island,  N^^W  2  miles;  red  can  buoy  on  outer  shoal 
between  Gravel  and  Spider  Island,  SSE  25^  miles. 


der  Islands. 

loy  marks  the  outer 
bound  into  Green 
uoy  to  bear  w:st, 
intil  the  black  buoy 
I  carry  you  through 
^thouse  Ni^E,  31^ 


Green   Bay. 


From  Boyer's  Bluff  to  Eagle  Bluff. 

SWi^  S,  22i^  miles.  This  course  leaves  the  door  passage  to 
the  southward,  5  miles.  The  Sister  Islands  to  port  and  also  the  Sister 
Shoals,  ii^  miles  off,  and  the  Horseshoe  reef  to  starboard  Yz  miles. 
Horseshoe  reef  has  a  second  class  iron  can  buoy  on  it,  painted  black. 
This  buoy  is  placed  on  the  south  side  of  the  reef,  in  3  tathoms  water. 
Vessels  should  not  approach  this  buoy  from  the  northward,  nearer 
than  i>^  miles,  as  there  is  a  rock  with  6  feet  water  NEbyE,  off 
northern  end  of  the  shoal.  Bearings  of  buoy,  north  point  of  Chambers 
Island  VV^S,  6  miles;  west  side  of  Horseshoe  Island,  south,  2S^  of 
a  mile  ;  Eagle  Bluff  Light  Sby  Wj^W,  3^  miles;  centre  of  Whales 
Back  reef,  Ni^E,  9^^  miles;  Sister  Islands  E>^N,  3  miles. 

Eagle  Bluff  Lighthouse. 
Two  miles  north  of  Fish  Creek,  in  Green  Bay.  A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  15  miles;  76  feet  above  lake  level,  and  is  a  guide  through 
the  Strawberry  Island  passage,  between  the  islands  and  the  main 
shore.  Tower  rises  from  the  corner  of  keeper's  dwelling,  built  of 
yellow  brick.  There  is  a  good  passage  between  the  Strawberry 
Islands  and  Chambers  Island,  not  safe  for  strangers.  Horseshoe  reef 
bears  N  byE^E  3^  miles.  Eagle  Harbor,  to  the  northward  of  the 
bluff,  is  a  good  harbor  of  refuge  between  the  island  and  the  main 
land,  in  5  to  7  fathoms  water. 

From  Eagle  Bluff  to  Entrance  of  Fox  River,  or  Tail  Point. 

From  Eagle  Bluff  follow  the  main  shore  close  along,  steering  S 
byVVi4;\V  for  5>^  miles,  till  Hat  Island  bears  west,  when  steer  SW  49 
miles  to  Tail  Point  Lighthouse,  bearing  NWbyN  in  3^  fathoms 
water. 


whi 
bull 


Thi 
bou 
star 


you 
enti 
and 

visi 
fixe 
piei 
goir 
the 


Sec 
Thi 
Fou 
Fift 
Cha 
Cha 
Rec 

the 
Nb 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 
Long  Tail  Point  Light, 


107 


31uff. 

e  door  passage  to 
and  also  the  Sister 
starboard  ^  miles. 
n  it,  painted  black, 
n  3  fathoms  water, 
northward,  nearer 
vater  NEby  E,  off 
point  of  Chambers 
iland,  south,  25^  of 
;  centre  of  Whales 
,  3  miles. 


y.  A  fixed  white 
d  is  a  guide  through 
inds  and  the  main 
s  dwelling,  built  of 
;en  the  Strawberry 
rs.  Horseshoe  reef 
I  northward  of  the 
sland  and  the  main 

er,  or  Tail  Point. 

se  along,  steering  S 
,  when  steer  SW  49 
yN  in  3^  fathoms 


Near  tlie  mouth  of  Fox  River,  at  the  head  of  Green  Bay.  Fixed 
white,  visible  14  miles;  56  feet  above  lake  level,  on  keeper's  dwelling, 
built  of  wood;  a  guide  to  the  entrance  of  Fox  River,  Green  Bay  City. 

Buoys  to  Mark  the  Channel  into  Green  Bay. 

Long  Tail  Point  Buoy  No.  a,  red,  second  class  iron  can  buoy. 
This  buoy  marks  the  end  of  the  shoal  off  Long  Tail  Point.  Vessels 
bound  to  Green  Bay  City  can  steer  for  it,  passing  it  close  to  on  the 
starboard  hand,  it  being  in  16  feet  water. 

Point  Au  Sable  Buoy. 

No.  I,  black,  a  spar  buoy.  After  hauling  round  the  black  buoy, 
you  make  the  first  red  buoy.  No.  4,  a  1 2  foot  spar  buoy,  marks  the 
entrance  into  the  new  cut.  Point  Au  Sable,  bearing  E^N  4  miles, 
and  Tail  Point  Lighthouse  NbyE  2^  miles. 

The  New  Cut  range  lights.  Grassy  Island  upper  light  fixed  white, 
visible  13  miles ;  37  feet  above  lake  level.  Grassy  Island  lower  light, 
fixed  white,  visible  1 1  miles ;  30  feet  above  lake  level.  This  cut  is 
piered,  and  the  lights  are  at  each  end  of  the  pier,  on  the  port  side 
going  in.  Wooden  towers,  676  feet  apart;  keeper's  dwelling  between 
the  two  towers ;  lights  the  artificial  cut  into  Fox  River,  Wisconsin. 

Buoys  from  Range  Lights  into  Fox  River. 

Second  buoy,  red,  12  foot  spar  buoy,  No.  6,  in  12  feet  water.  , 
Third  buoy,  red.  12  foot  spar  buoy.  No.  ?   va  \2  feet  water. 
Fourth  buoy,  red,  12  foot  spar  buoy,  No.  lo,  in  12  feet  water. 
Fifth  buoy,  red,  12  foot  spar  buoy.  No.  12,  in  la  feet  water. 
Channel  Bank,  red,  12  foot  spar  buoy,  No.  14,  in  12  f6et  water. 
Channel  Bank,  red,  12  foot  spar  buoy.  No.  16,  in  10^  feet  water. 
Red  to  starboard  and  black  to  port  going  in. 

Note. — The  directions  for  this  and  other  harbors  will  follow  after 
the  lighthouses  in  Green  Bay. 

From  Long  Tail  Point  Lighthouse,  bearing  NW  one  mile,  steer  NE 
/^N39^  miles  till  Green  Island  Lighthouse  bears  NWa^  miles;  thence 
NbyE  iij^  miles  till  theNW  point  of  Chambers  Island  bears  east 


'■m'- 


* 


l^tl^H     J-      J  i     . 


io8 


ThotnpsorCs  Coast  Pilot. 


I  ^  miles ;  thence  NEbyNj^N  for  37^^  miles  to  Peninsular  Point  Light- 
house, distant  2^  miles;  thence  north  lY^  miles  in  middle  of  bay,  to 
^  mile  east  of  Escanaba. 

Green  Island  Light  on  Green  Island. 

On  the  Southeast  point  of  the  same,  off  Menomonee  River, 
Green  Bay;  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  14  miles;  55  feet  above  lake 
level;  on  keeper's  dwelling;  built  of  brick.  Reefs  extend  ofl  from 
the  SE  and  NW  points  of  this  island  a  half  and  one  mile  respectively. 
The  best  channel,  six  miles  wide,  is  to  the  eastward  of  this  island. 
The  northwest  end  of  Chambers  Island  bears  NEbyNj^N  11  miles. 
The  southeast  point  of  Peshtigo  Shoal,  SW  byS  8  miles,  and  when 
these  two  islands  are  just  open  with  each  other,  you  are  clear  of  Pesh- 
tigo Shoal.  Sturgeon  Bay  SbyE^E  11  miles;  Egg  Harbor  E>^S  9^ 
miles.     Eagle  Bluflf  Lighthouse  NEbyE^E,  14^  miles. 

Menomonee  River  Lighthouse. 

Near  the  outer  end  of  North  Pier,  at  Menomonee  River,  being 
builL     The  piers  run  out  NEbyE^E. 

Chambers'  Island  Light. 

On  the  NW  end  of  Chambers'  Island,  Green  Bay.  Is  fixed, 
varied  by  white  flashes;  time  between  flashes  one  minute,  visible  15 
miles,  68  feet  above  lake  level.  Tower  rises  from  the  corner  of 
keeper's  dwelling,  built  of  yellow  brick.  A  guide  through  the  west- 
ern passage  5^  miles  wide  between  the  island  and  the  main  land. 
A  reef  extends  off  the  north  point  of  the  island,  1  ^  miles  ;  strangers 
should  not  pass  to  the  eastward  of  this  island,  or  between  it  and  the 
Strawberries;  Whale's  Back  Shoal  bears  NE>^N,  14  miles;  Point 
Rochereau,  NNW^W,  7  miles;  Menomonee  SWby  W,  13  miles. 

Whale's  Back  Shoal. 

The  Whale's  Back  Shoal  is  indicated  by  piles  with  brush  on  top. 
It  bears  from  Boyer's  Bluff  EbyN^N  121^  miles.  Little  Door  Bluff 
SE^E  7^  miles. 

Mouth  of  Cedar  River,  west  shore  of  Green  Bay,  WNW  8^ 
miles.  Off  from  the  west  end  of  Whale's  Back  Shoal,  bearing  NE  500 


Thompsoiis  Coast  Pilot. 


109 


nsular  Point  Light- 
middle  of  bay,  to 

land. 

lenomonee  River, 
55  feet  above  lake 

fs  extend  ofi  from 

a  mile  respectively. 

irard  of  this  island. 

IbyN^N  II  wiles, 
miles,   and  when 

u  are  clear  of  Pesh- 

l  Harbor  E>^S  9^ 

\  miles. 

ie. 

nonee  River,  being 


en  Bay.  Is  fixed, 
minute,  visible  15 
rom  the  corner  of 
through  the  west- 
nd  the  main  land. 
Yi  miles ;  strangers 
between  it  and  the 
r,  14  miles;  Point 
by  W,  13  miles. 


i  with  brush  on  top. 
,     Little  Door  Bluff 

n  Bay,   WNW  8^ 
)al,  bearing  NE  500 


yards,  there  is  a  spot  of  boulders,  with  10  feet  water.  The  soundings 
in  proximity  to  tlie  Whale's  Back  Shoal,  are  irregular,  the  bottom 
stone,  sand  and  gravel.  Within  700  feet  of  the  main  shoal  there  is 
from  6  to  21  fathoms  water.  Whale's  Back  is  composed  of  two  shoals 
1400  yards  in  extent  east  and  west,  and  400  feet  north  and  south ;  the 
least  water  4  feet. 

Peshtigo  Point  Shoal 

li  indicated  by  piles  with  brush  on  top,  on  the  south  end  of  the  sand 
flat,  extending  SE  3)^  miles  from  Peshtigo  Point.  Least  water,  six 
feet.  Bearings,  entrance  to  Peshtigo  River  NWbyWi^W  4  miles ; 
Oconto  Shoal  SWbyW  12  miles;  entrance  of  Little  Sturgeon  Bay 
SbyE  15  miles. 

Pensaukee  ShoaL 

A  12  foot  spar  buoy,  red.  This  buoy  is  placed  on  the  south  end 
of  the  shoal,  which  extends  ESE  35^  miles,  to  the  mouth  of  the  river. 
Least  water,  5  feet.  Bearings :  The  Oconto  Shoal  NEbyN  3  miles ; 
village  of  Pensaukee  WNW  4^  miles;  Long  Tail  Point  Lighthouse 
SWbyS^^S  16  miles ;  entrance  to  Red  River  on  the  east  side  of  Green 
Bay,  SE>^S  8  miles. 

Sturgeon  Bay  Buoys, 

On  the  east  side  of  Green  Bay.  Two  black  buoys  off  Hill's 
Pomt.  These  buoys  mark  the  shoal  off  Hill's  Point,  12  foot  spar  buoys, 
in  10  feet  water. 

NW  end  of  middle  ground,  black  buoy,  in  9  feet  water.  This  buoy 
is  on  the  north  end  of  middle  ground ;  12  foot  spar  buoy,  south  end  of 
north  middle  ground,  black  buoy,  in  9  feet  water.  This  buoy  marks 
the  south  end  of  middle  ground,  in  9  feet  water.  North  end  of  south 
middle  ground,  black  buoy.  This  buoy  marks  the  south  middle 
ground.  East  end  of  south  middle  ground,  red  buoy,  a  12  foot  spar 
buoy.  This  buoy  is  on  the  east  end  of  middle  ground.  From  ENE 
shore  to  channel  bank,  r6o  yards.  Width  of  channel  to  red  buoy, 
300  yards.  .. 

From  Washington  Harbor  to  Long  Tail  Point  Lighthouse, 
by  the  Strawberry  Island  Channel. 

Run  out  of  the  harcor  close  round  Boyer's  Bluff,  which  is  very 
bold,  and  at  a  distance  of  5^  of  a  mile ;  steer  SWbyS  29  miles  to 


1|!;r- 


,  mi: 


no 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


%\ 


abreast  of  the  point  beyond  Horse  Shoe  Island,  called  Eagle  Bluff 
Point,  where  a  lighthouse  has  been  erected,  and  shows  a  bright  whi.e 
light,  leaving  Plum  Island  to  port  in  the  distance,  and  the  Door 
Bluff  (which  is  high  and  deep  close  to)  on  the  peninsula  to  port ;  and 
as  you  approach  the  next  high  bluff,  called  the  Sister  Bluff,  you  will 
make  two  small  islands  called  the  Sisters,  which  you  also  leave  to 
port,  at  a  distance  of  i^  miles,  and  notice  that  there  is  a  reef, 
with  two  detached  shoals,  ^  of  a  mile  apart,  on  the  same  range, 
which  bears  from  these  islands  SWbyS^S  21^  miles,  with  6^  feet 
water  on  them.  You  can  run  all  round  them  in  from  ^o  to  50  feet 
water.  After  passing  these  islands,  keep  Horse  Shoe  Island  just  open 
with  the  next  bluff  point  above  it,  Fish  Creek  Bluff,  which  is  3  miles 
beyond  Eagle  Bluff;  or  in  the  night,  run  for  the  light,  keeping  it  a 
little  on  the  port  bow,  leaving  a  patch  of  rocks  called  the  Pancake 
Shoal  to  starboard,  which  shoal  bears  from  Horse  Shoe  Island  N^W 
about  2^  miles.  After  passing  Horse  Shoe  Island,  keep  the  east 
shore  well  aboard,  until  past  the  Strawberry  Islands  and  abreast  of 
Hat  Island  ;  then  shape  your  course  SW  55  miles,  to  Long  Tail 
Point,  or  run  the  shore  along  from  point  to  point,  at  a  distance  of  a 
miles,  and  note  that  there  is  a  patch  of  rocks  about  7  or  8  miles  from 
Hat  Island,  and  i  ^  miles  from  the  shore,  called  Horse  Shoe  Bay 
Reef,  and  s>^  miles  from  Egg  Harbor. 

Horse  Shoe  Island  and  Eagle  Harbor. 

To  go  into  this  harbor,  follow  the  island  close  round,  and  haul  in 
and  make  fast  to  the  trees,  as  the  water  is  very  deep  close  in.  When 
in  this  harbor  you  are  perfectly  land-locked.  There  is  a  good  wood 
dock  to  the  southward  and  eastward  of  Horse  Shoe  Island  in  the  bay, 
and  is  always  supplied  with  wood  of  the  best  quality.  The  depth  of 
water  between  Horse  Shoe  Island  and  the  mainland  is  from  6  to  10 
fathoms,  sandy  clay  bottom. 

Fish  Creek  is  3  miles  from  the  first  point  above  Horse  Shoe  Is- 
land, and  is  a  good  harbor.  You  can  carry  froni  2  to  3  fathoms  water, 
clay  bottom ;  about  one  cable's  length  beyond  the  dock,  there  is  a 
spit  that  sets  off  from  the  point  on  the  same  side  as  the  dock  in  going 
in,  which  is  plainly  shown  in  clear  weather. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


Ill 


called  Eagle  Bluff 
ows  a  bright  whi.e 
:e,  and  the  Door 
nsula  to  port ;  and 
ster  Bluff,  you  will 

you  also  leave  to 
t  there  is  a  reef, 
n  the  same  range, 
liles,  with  6^  feet 

from  ^o  to  50  feet 
oe  Island  just  open 
fif,  which  is  3  miles 

light,  keeping  it  a 
lalled  the  Pancake 
Shoe  Island  N^W 
nd,  keep  the  east 
nds  and  abreast  of 
lies,  to  Long  Tail 
,  at  a  distance  of  3 
t  7  or  8  miles  from 
1  Horse  Shoe  Bay 

arbor. 

round,  and  haul  in 
ip  close  in.  When 
ere  is  a  good  wood 
:  Island  in  the  bay, 
lily.  The  depth  of 
and  is  from  6  to  10 

ave  Horse  Shoe  Is- 
to  3  fathoms  water, 
le  dock,  there  is  a 
s  the  dock  in  going 


Egg  Harbor  has  a  good  wood  dock,  with  14  feet  water  alongside ; 
is  on  the  east  side  of  the  bay,  and  rum  out  west,  with  an  angle  north 
and  south  from  it,  to  the  southward.  Wood  of  the  best  quality.  Thia 
bay  is  large  and  commodious,  with  good  holding  ground  in  from  3  to 
7  and  8  fathoms,  clay  bottom. 

Hat  Island  is  directly  opposite  Egg  Harbor,  and  bears  from  the 
dock  NWbyN^^N,  and  is  just  open  with  the  SW  end  of  Chamber's 
Island. 

Big  Sturgeon  Bay. 

In  running  up  Green  Bay,  after  leaving  Hat  Island,  east  channel, 
run  the  shore  along  at  a  distance  of  2  miles ;  cross  Sturgeon  Bay, 
keeping  the  south  shore  well  ab')ard,  or  when  Green  Island  bears  NW 
byN^N,  run  in  SEbyS_{^S,  until  Bradley's  Dock  is  abeam ;  then 
haul  over  for  the  dock.  From  Bradley's  Dock  to  Graham's  Dock, 
run  the  shore  along  in  from  1 2  to  i  j  feet  water. 

To  Enter  Little  Sturgeon  Bay. 

Run  for  the  south  bluff  at  the  entrance  to  the  bay,  keeping  it 
well  aboard,  in  3  to  4  fathoms  water ;  you  will  carry  that  water  until 
well  up  to  the  saw  mill. 

The  new  channel  across  Grassy  Island,  leading  to  Fox  River  is 
200  feet  wide,  and  14  feet  deep;  from  end  to  end,  about  a  mile  and  a 
half.  It  will  save  from  3  to  4  miles  of  sailing  over  the  old  route, 
round  the  east  end  of  Grassy  Island,  besides  the  great  advantage  of 
permitting  vessels  to  come  in  with  a  wind  that  would  allow  them  to 
head  up  SSW  or  NNE 

The  new  channel  leaves  the  old  one  near  the  second  stake  below 
the  mouth  of  the  river,  and  runs  straight  in  a  line  about  NNE,  point- 
ing to  the  black  stake  on  Bauble  Point.  Steamers  and  vessels  will  be 
able  to  run  up  or  down  in  the  night. 

Big  Bay  de  Noc. 

From  Louse  or  Rock  Island  Lighthouse  to  Big  Bluff  Nby£>^E 
20  miles;  thence  NEbyN^N  8;^  miles  to  Garden  Bluff;  thence 
NNVVi^W  4  miles,  to  Holbrook  &  Elkin's  mills ;  come  to  in  12  to  13 
feet  water.  There  is  excellent  holding  ground  in  the  bay  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  Big  Bluff,  in  from  6  to  7  fathoms  water,  mud  bottom. 


M' 


lli'l  1 


t' .  t 


i 


i- .  -.- 


112 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


hi 


From  Death's  Door,  after  entering  this  channel,  and  past  Plum 
Island,  run  the  shore  of  Washington  Island  along  at  about  i  mile  dis- 
tant, or  N^E  8  miles  to  abreast  of  Boyer's  Bluff;  thence  NEbyN  24 
miles,  to  Big  Bluff;  thence  NEJ^N  8  miles,  to  Garden  Bluff;  thence 
NNW>^W4  miles,  to  the  mill  at  Sturgeon  River.  There  is  a  buoy 
kept  off  the  mouth  of  the  river  as  a  mark  for  vessels  to  load  by. 

From  the  NW  end  of  St.  Martin's,  after  passing  through  the  chan- 
nel, steer  NbyE^E  to  Big  Bluff,  12  miles.  There  is  a  good  harbor 
on  the  NE  end  of  Big  Summer's  Island,  with  a  good  protection  from 
all  winds  except  NE.  Come  to  in  the  centre  of  the  harbor  in  5  to  7 
fathoms  water,  opposite  the  fishing  houses. 

Sag  Harbor. 

Sag  Harbor  is  a  small  bay  on  the  south  side  of  Big  or  Burnt  Bluff* 
about  3  miles  from  it.  It  is  formed  by  a  sand  bar  running  in  a  line 
with  the  shore.  To  run  in,  haul  round  the  bar  by  the  lead  and  come 
to  in  the  bay  ;  there  is  only  6  feet  water  going  in. 

Ogontz  Bay. 

This  bay  is  formed  by  Round  Island,  Isle  St.  Videl,  and  a  long 
shoal  which  sets  down  from  Indian  Point,  and  Sturgeon  River,  and 
terminates  with  three  patches  of  rock,  which  bear  from  Middle  Bluff 
NWbyW^W  y^  miles,  with  6  to  7  feet  water  on  them.  This  shoal 
can  be  followed  close  round,  in  4  fathoms,  from  Sturgeon  River  to  the 
head  of  Ogontz  Bay,  and  when  abreast  o(  Isle  St.  Videl  the  soundings 
will  decrease  gradually  from  3  to  2  fathoms.  In  returning  from 
Ogontz  Bay  bound  to  Point  Peninsular,  run  down  the  bay  SbyW^^VV 
until  past  Round  Island  ;  then  haul  up  SVVbyWi^W  13  miles,  giving 
Round  Island  a  berth  of  ^  of  a  mile.  Pass  round  Point  Peninsular 
at  a  distance  of  i  ^  miles  to  clear  the  shoals  off  from  it.  The  sound- 
ings are  very  gradual  from  Round  Island  to  the  Point  in  31^  to  4 
fathoms  water,  and  at  the  head  of  Big  Bay  de  Noc  and  Garden  Bay 
soundings  are  very  gradual  from  4^^  fathoms  to  within  ^  of  a  mile  of 
the  beach. 

There  is  a  shoal  sets  off  from  Stony  Point,  which  is  a  point  of 
low  land,  east  of  Sturgeon  River  i  y^  miles,  and  also  a  shoal  off  the 
next  low  point  north  of  it  ^  of  a  mile. 


ThompsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


"3 


;1,  and  past  Plum 
about;  i  mile  dis- 
thence  NEbyN  24 
■den  Bluff;  thence 
There  is  a  buoy 
i  to  load  by. 
[  through  the  chan- 
e  is  a  good  harbor 
od  protection  from 
le  harbor  in  5  to  7 


Big  or  Burnt  Bluff* 
r  running  in  a  line 
the  lead  and  come 


,  Videl,  and  a  long 
urgeon  River,  and 
from  Middle  Bluff 
them.  This  shoal 
irgeon  River  to  the 
^idel  the  soundings 
[n  returning  from 
thebay  SbyWJ^VV 
W  13  miles,  giving 
.  Point  Peninsular 
3m  it.  The  sound- 
!  Point  in  3^  to  4 
)c  and  Garden  Bay 
thin  ^  of  a  mile  of 

which  is  a  point  of 
also  a  shoal  off  the 


There  is  a  remarkable  sand  bluff  called  Jack's  Bluff  on  the  east 
side,  at  the  head  of  the  bay.  It  can  be  seen  from  Big  Bluff,  and  is  a 
good  leading  mark  for  the  head  of  the  bay. 

There  is  excellent  holding  ground  under  Garden  Bluff,  and  a  good 
harbor  can  be  made  under  Middle  Bluff,  and  the  island  north  of  it,  in 
4'^^  fathoms,  soft  bottom.  You  can  run  into  this  harbor  from  the 
northward,  leaving  the  island  to  starboard,  in  3  fathoms  (sandy)  until 
you  drop  into  soft  bottom. 

To  go  in  from  the  southward,  haul  in  close  around  the  bluff  and 
into  the  bay,  leaving  the  island  to  port. 

Snail  Shell  Harbor. 

This  harbor  lays  to  the  southward  of  Middle  Bluff,  and  is  per- 
fectly landlocked.  The  water  is  very  deep.  Vessels  or  boats  make 
fast  to  the  trees,  or  lay  alongside  the  beach,  which  is  steep.  It  is  not 
so  good  a  harbor  for  vessels  as  steamers,  as  the  entrance  is  open  to 
the  northward.  Big  or  Burnt  Bluff  has  good  anchorage  in  5  to  7 
fathoms,  soft  bottom,  on  the  north  side,  in  the  bay.  Vessels  can  ride 
out  any  gale  here  Height  of  Big  Bluff,  227  feet  from  water  level. 
Course  from  Big  Bluff  to  Isle  St.  Videl,  NbyW^^W  4  miles;  from 
Point  Peninsular  to  Boyer's  Bluff,  Sj^E  18  rr.iles ;  from  the  station 
on  Big  Bluff  to  Boyer's  Bluff,  S  26"  W.  The  Door  Bluff  shows  out 
a  little  to  the  westward  of  Boyer's  Bluff  on  the  range. 

Note. — There  is  a  lighthouse  on  Point  Peninsular,  and  a  beacon 
light  on  Sand  Point,  in  Little  Bay  de  Noc. 

As  the  railroad  to  Marquette  is  now  in  operation,  masters  of 
vessels  will  find  it  to  their  advantage  to  run  through  the  north  pas- 
sages, especially  coming  from  the  lower  lakes.  The  passage  north  of 
the  Beaver  Islands,  in  connection  with  them,  will  shorten  the  route 
materially,  and  is  preferable  to  the  south  passage.  High  Island  gives 
a  good  lea  with  a  southerly  wind  in  the  north  passage.  A  lea  can  be 
made  from  a  south  wind  under  Gull  Island,  Front  Island  and  Whisky 
Island,  but  the  ground  is  not  so  good  as  under  High  Island.  The  best 
best  anchorage  is  under  the  east  point  of  the  island,  in  5  to  7  fathoms, 
sandy  clay.  When  laying  here,  should  the  wind  chop  round  to  the 
NW,  you  can  run  out,  round  the  east  end. of  the  island,  giving  the 


Sil'' 


M*' 


'i\M:'- 


.fiifiJrv 


■i 


114 


Thompson's  Coast  IHlot. 


point  a  good  berth,  and  follow  the  island  close  round  and  come  out  to 
the  westward,  leaving  Gull  Island  to  port  or  to  starboard  pretty  close 
to.  The  course  from  the  south  side  of  Gull  Island  to  Rock  Island 
Lighthouse  is  WSW,  but  if  the  wind  should  be  southerly  you  will  have 
to  haul  up  a  point  higher,  as  a  southerly  wind  always  sets  a  stiff  cur- 
rent through  the  passages  and  along  the  islands  leading  into  Green 
Bay. 

St.  Martin's  Island  Channel. 


if 


In  going  through  this  channel,  leave  the  Gull  Islands  to  starboard 
and  St.  Martin's  Island  to  port ;  run  through  about  mid-channel,  and 
when  abreast  of  the  west  end  of  St.  Martin's,  steer  NWl^W  15  miles 
for  Point  Peninsular  j  thence  NNVV  6  miles  to  Sand  Point,  Little  Bay 
de  Noc,  giving  the  point  a  berth  of  ^  a  mile,  and  haul  round  to  the 
docks  or  come  to  anchor  in  7  fathoms.  In  passing  Peninsular  Point, 
give  it  a  berth  of  i^  miles,  to  clear  the  shoal  that  sets  down  from  it 
S^E.  There  is  a  detached  shoal  to  the  eastward  of  the  point  about 
^  of  a  mile,  with  8  feet  water  on  it.  A  very  good  harbor  can  be 
made  from  S  to  E  and  NE  winds  on  the  west  side  of  Point  Peninsular, 
in  5  to  6  fathoms  water,  soft  bottom,  with  the  point  bearing  ESE. 

Note. — The  shore  is  bold  on  the  north  and  west  sides  of  St. 
Martin's  Island,  and  the  channel  is  deep;  from  13  to  20  fathoms. 
From  the  SE  point  of  the  island  for  2  miles,  you  will  find  6  to  7  fath- 
oms water,  hard  bottom. 

There  is  a  detached  shoal  off  the  SE  end  of  St.  Martin's  Island 
bearing  SbyW  2^  miles  distant,  which  has  8  to  12  feet  water  on  it. 

One  cable's  length  from  this  shoal  you  will  find  from  5  to  7  fath- 
oms water,  and  will  carry  that  water  a  long  distance  to  the  northward. 


If 


I 
f 


From  Plum  Island  to  Sand  Point,  Little  Bay  de  Noc. 

From  Plum  Island  to  a  point  3  miles  west  of  Point  Peninsular, 
and  in  mid-channel,  steer  N^W  27  miles;  thence  same  course  6 
miles  to  Sand  Point. 

From  Boyer's  Bluff  to  Sand  Point  N^VV  24  miles.  From  Rock 
Island  Lighthouse  to  Sand  Point  NNVV  25  miles. 


^.i^vtiKvagtKta-'^mi^xm-i;^*^ 


id  and  come  out  to 
rboard  pretty  close 
nd  to  Rock  Island 
lerly  you  will  have 
lys  sets  a  stifT  cur- 
leading  into  Green 


slands  to  starboard 

mid-channel,  and 

NW'^W  15  miles 

i  Point,  Little  Bay 

haul  round  to  the 

Peninsular  Point, 

:  sets  down  from  it 

of  the  point  about 

>od  harbor  can  be 

f  Point  Peninsular, 

bearing  ESE. 

1  west  sides  of  St. 
13  to  20  fathoms, 
ill  find  6  to  7  fath- 

>t.  Martin's  Island 
feet  water  on  it. 
d  from  5  to  7  fath- 
:  to  the  northward. 

Bay  de  Noc. 

'  Point  Peninsular, 
ce  same  course  6 

niles.     From  Rock 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


m 


From  Green  Island  to  a  point  3  miles  west  of  Point  Peninsular 
NNE^^E  49  miles;  thence  N>^W  6  miles  to  Sand  Point.  Thii 
course  brings  you  close  to  Chamber's  Island. 

From  the  anchorage  off  Menomonee  River  to  «  point  3  miles 
west  of  Point  Peninsular,  NE^N  49^  miles. 

Poverty  Island  Channel. 

There  is  a  good  deep  channel  on  both  sides  of  Poverty  Island. 
To  enter  the  south  channel  keep  midway  between  Poverty  and  Gull 
Islands,  and  after  passing  Poverty  Island  haul  up  for  Little  Rock 
Island,  keeping  Big  or  Burnt  Bluff  closed  in  behind  Little  Rock 
Island.  On  this  route  you  will  pass  over  a  shoal  with  4  to  5  fathoms 
water  on  it.  There  are  several  patches  of  shoal  water  lying  between 
this  shoal  and  the  North  Gull  or  Gravelly  Island,  so  that  by  keeping 
well  to  the  northward  you  avoid  all  danger. 

A  lighthouse  is  erected  on  Poverty  Island  as  a  guide  for  these 
channels. 

To  enter  Green  Bay  by  the  north  channel,  open  Poverty  with  Big 
Summer's  Island,  and  run  straight  in,  keeping  Poverty  best  aboard ; 
thence  for  Little  Rock  Island,  giving  it  a  berth  of  J^  of  a  mile  to 
starboard. 

The  channel  between  Point  Detour  and  Big  Summer's  Island  is 
difficult  to  run,  being  crooked  and  shallow,  and  requires  a  good  pilot, 
the  depth  of  water  being  only  10  to  12  feet,  and  rocky. 

From  Bailey's  Harbor  to  Pilot  Island  Lighthouse,  18  miles  NNE. 

Note.-  At  the  commencement  of  a  SE  wind  blowing  fresh,  there 
is  always  a  strong  current  setting  into  Green  Bay,  down  along  the  west 
shore  and  among  the  Beaver  Islands. 

Good  anchorage  under  the  south  side  of  Chamber's  Island,  in  4 
to  5  fathoms  water,  sandy  clay  bottom. 

From  Waugoshance  Lighthouse  to  Chicago. 

Steer  SWj^S  for  97^  miles,  till  Point  Betsey  Lighthouse  bears 
east;  thence  for  Chicago,  SbyW^W  209  miles. 

The  lighthouses  at  Waugoshance  and  Skillegalee  are  8^  miles 
apart ;  and  the  range  line  of  the  two,  as  referred  to  the  true  meridian 


ii6 


Thompson:  %  Coast  Pilot. 


i 

a 


at  Waugoshance,  being  ;ust  S  a;"  W,  a  good  opportunity  is  afforded 
to  masters  of  vessels  to  test  the  working  of  their  compasses  by  drop- 
ping upon  this  range,  either  to  the  S\VbyS>4S  of  Slcillegalee  about  a 
miles,  or  to  the  NEbyN^^N  of  Waugoshance  Lighthouse  about  the 
same  distance,  and  sailing  upon  the  range  y^  a  mile  or  so,  keeping 
the  lighthouses  covered  in  both  cases. 

The  White  Shoals  bear  from  Point  Wiiti(o,hj»nce  Lighthouse 
NW^W  4^  miles.  You  can  pass  al'  .nuiid  thn>i  m  ao  to  30  feet 
water.    They  can  be  plainly  seen  in  cle; '  wci»her. 

Simmon's  Reefbearsfrom  P< '  M  Waugosii.uice  Lighthouse  NWby 
N  10^  miles ;  is  1^  miles  ion  '  and  west.     You  can  pass  round 

it,  from  18  to  34  feet  water,  anci  can  be  seen  quite  plain  in  clear 
weather.  It  bears  from  the  White  Shoals  NWbyN^^N  5^  miles,  and 
from  the  NW  end  of  St.  Helena  WbyN  17^  miles. 

The  Indian  Payment  Shoal  bears  from  Simmon's  Reef  NEbyE}4 
E  7^  miles,  and  from  the  NW  end  of  St.  Helena  NW3^W  1 1  ^  miles. 
It  has  from  5  to  11  feet  water  upon  it,  and  can  be  passed  all  round  in 
from  31  to  40  feet  water. 

The  shoal  off  the  NW  end  of  St.  Helena  bears  due  west  from  the 
island  3  miles,  and  can  be  passed  on  either  side  in  from  35  to  30  feet 
of  water.     This  shoal  has  from  8  to  15  feet  of  water  on  it. 

Gray's  Reefs  bear  from  Point  Waugoshance  Lighthouse  west  6 
miles.  There  are  13  patches  in  all,  only  one  of  which  has  less  than  16 
feet  of  water,  and  that  one  is  near  the  centre 


DIRECTIONS 


FOR     SAILING     NORTH 
BEAVER   ISLANDS. 


OF     THE 


I 


From  Mackinaw  to  Seul  Choix  Point. 

Fror.i  the  :uiu  :-:  of  Mackinaw  Harbor  WSW  4»^  miles,  or  until 
you  range  the  Rabbit's  Back  Point  with  Point  St.  Ignace ;  thence 
W^N  to  Seul  Choix  Point. 

This  route  passes  i  ^  miles  to  the  northward  ol  Point  Waugo- 
shance Lighthouse,  and  i^  miles  to  the  north  of  the  White  S>ioals. 


-*aaBiaB?twnii<fiBM6rti 


teHJMagWjIi^ll  M«r*IW*iM  »i«iiWCTrfiBf[TfgfflWWai  JltW  'i  • 


Wlil^tfmpson* s  Coast  Pilot, 


117 


tunity  is  afTorded 
IT) passes  by  drop- 
:illegalee  about  2 
thouse  about  the 
ile  or  so,  keeping 

mice  Lighthouse 
)  ill  ao  to  30  feet 

lighthouse  NWby 
>u  can  pass  round 
te  plain  in  clear 
;N  5^  miles,  and 

s  Reef  NEbyEj4 
i^3^W  11^  miles, 
issed  all  round  in 

iue  west  from  the 
rom  35  to  30  feet 
on  it. 

^lighthouse  west  6 
h  has  less  than  16 


H     OF     THE 


3int. 

|i^  miles,  or  until 
:.  Ignace;  thence 

01   Point  Waugo- 
e  White  Skoals. 


Seul  Chcis  Pnint  bears  from  Gull  Island,  hich  is  the  westcrmost 
island  of  the  Beaver  groiij  NbyW«^\V  16  miks.  The  water  is  deep 
close  to  this  point.  You  can  t  foach  the  po  in  from  30  to  55 
feet  water.     Rocky  bottom. 

From  Seul  Cholx  Point  t«  Hat  Island,  Thirty  M'les,   as 

Follows. 

From  Seul  Choix  Poii.t  EbySj^S  30  miles  ;  thencf'  on  the  same 
course  10  miles,  to  Point  Waugoshaiu-e  ^  ighthouse. 

This  route  passes  2j^  miles  outh  the  White  Sho.is,  and  ;^ 
miles  noith  of  Gray's  Reefs. 


From  St.  Helena  Island  to  Abi    ast  of  the  Manitous,  Nort   * 
About,  and  to  Chi   ago,  333  Miles. 

From  St.  Helena,  after  clearing  e  shoal  which  is  due  west  from 
the  island  2  miles,  steer  due  west  40  nnles ,  thence  SWJ^  W  16  miles ; 
thence  SbyWj^W,  for  Chicago,  2,3  mil"S. 

This  route  is  only  9  miles  further  t  an  the  Sheboygan  route,  and 
is  far  more  preferable  in  the  fall  of  the  ear.  A  vessel  or  propeller, 
by  keeping  the  west  shore  aboard,  can  ;  >  with  a  NW  and  westerly 
wind  in  smooth  water,  and  make  her  past  ge  with  ease ;  and  in  case 
of  being  driven  down  in  thick  weather  to  tl  e  northward  and  westward 
of  the  Beaver  Island  group,  this  route  wii  be  found  convenient  for 
making  the  Straits,  by  keeping  to  the  north  -ard  of  them  all,  and  come 
in  to  the  eastward. 

Gull  Island  Shoal  bears  from  Gull  Island  SbyEi^E,  from  High 
Island  SWbyW,  and  from  the  SW  point  of  Leaver  Island  WNW. 

There  are  two  patches  of  shoal  water  a  little  to  the  southward  and 
eastward  of  Gull  Island  Shoal,  with  16  and  17  feet  water  on  them. 
This  reef  is  about  4>4  to  5  miles  from  Gull  Island.  Between  Gull 
Island  and  High  Island  the  water  is  deep,  being  from  22  to  168  feet, 
from  shore  to  shore,  and  is  nearly  6  miles  wide.  Due  north  carries 
you  through  midway.  The  water  between  High  Island  and  the  Big 
Beaver  is  deep,  being  from  36  to  138  feet.  To  run  through  this  chan- 
nel, keep  about  midway  until  you  are  abreast  of  Trout  Island,  steer- 
ing NNE.     This  course  will  carry  you  clear  through,  leaving  Whisky 


* 


ii8 


Thompson* s  Coast  Pilot. 


t 

4 
•» 

-« 


* 


6- 


» 


Island  and  the  shoal  which  sets  off  from  it  SVV  to  port,  best  aboard, 
but  is  only  safe  for  small  vessels,  as  there  are  a  number  of  patches  of 
rock  and  sand  with  from  7  to  13  and  17  feet  of  water  on  them  ;  but  in 
case  a  vessel  should  get  in  here  in  foggy  weather,  when  you  are 
abreast  of  the  NW  point  of  the  Big  Beaver,  haul  out  NW  until  Trout 
Island  bears  SSW,  then  haul  up  NNE,  leaving  Whisky  Island  and 
Squaw  Island  1  miles  to  starboard,  until  Seul  Choix  Point  bears  W^ 
N ;  thence  as  above  to  Mackinaw. 

Potter's  Reef  bears  from  Point  Patterson  EbyN^N  6^  miles, 
and  is  nearly  in  range  with  point  Patterson  and  Seul  Choix  Point. 

The  distance  from  Squaw  Island  (which  is  the  most  northern  is- 
land of  the  Beaver  group)  to  Point  Patterson  is  9^  miles,  and  Seul 
Choix  Point  is  14^  miles  from  Trout  Island,  and  16  miles  from  Gull 
Island,  leaving  a  deep  channel  of  from  30  to  180  feet  water. 

From  Beaver  Harbor  to  Point  Waugoshance  Lighthouse, 
Twenty  Miles  and  a  Half. 

From  the  south  dock  at  the  entrance  of  Beaver  Harbor  east  8 
iriles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  north  of  Hog  Island  Reef;  thence  EbyN^ 
N  12^  miles,  to  the  passage  ^  mile  south  of  Waugoshance  Light- 
house, observing  that  Hog  Island  Reef  lies  in  the  range  of  Whisky 
Island  and  the  south  point  of  Garden  Island ;  a  range  easily  recog- 
nized, and  which  will  serve  to  indicate  the  vicinity  of  this  dangerous 
reef. 

From  Waugoshance  Lighthouse  to  Northport  and  Traverse 
City,  in  Traverse  Bay. 

Steer  SW^S  9^  miles  till  Skillegalee  Lighthouse  bears  east; 
thence  SSW  411^  miles,  till  Northport  Point  bears  NW,  when  run  for 
the  dock.  In  going  in  and  going  out,  look  out  for  the  shoals  in  the 
northern  part  of  the  bay.  To  make  Traverse  City  when  SE  of  North- 
port  Point,  as  above,  steer  Sby  W  24^  miles,  to  the  dock  at  Traverse 
City. 

From  Waugoshance   Lighthouse  to  the  Village  of  Little 

Traverse. 

Steer  SW^S  for  2  miles,  thence  Sj^  W  14  miles,  till  Middle  Vil- 
lage bears  east,  giving  Skillegalee  or  Isle  Aux  Gallets  Lighthouse,  a 


statu 


Affoi 
uude 
wind 


Can 
grou 

Is  V( 
the! 

You 
roun 
Off  I 
fath( 
near 
the! 


g» 


"  "^tr'^^stsi^^im^  ;:i^&i;-aKfiiaMB^%8K»agda^JM4»«tfga^wafti.tt«^-^.;.Mag*<«tst^«^^ 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


119 


I  port,  best  aboard, 
Kiber  of  patches  of 
;r  on  them  ;  but  in 
er,  when  you  are 
ut  NW  until  Trout 
i^hisky  Island  and 
I  Point  bears  W?^ 

^rN^N  6^  miles, 
il  Choix  Point, 
e  most  northern  is- 
^  miles,  and  Seul 
[6  miles  from  Gull 
;et  water. 

ice  Lighthouse, 

iver  Harbor  east  8 
f ;  thence  EbyN;^ 
augoshance  Light- 
range  of  Whisky 
range  easily  recog- 
j  of  this  dangerous 

jrt  and  Traverse 

thouse  bears  east; 
NW,  when  run  for 
or  the  shoals  in  the 
when  SE  of  North- 
e  dock  at  Traverse 

tillage  of  Little 

les,  till  Middle  Vil- 
llets  Lighthouse,  a 


good  berth,  then  follow  the  coast  at  the  distance  of  5^  mile  off  for  15 
miles,  till  the  harbor  of  Little  Traverse  is  made. 

Note. — The  above  courses  are  true,  and  the  distances  are  in 
statute  miles. 


HARBORS  AND  ANCHORAGES. 


Little  Traverse 

Is  an  excellent  harbor,  affording  protection  in  all  winds,  with  good 
holding  ground.  In  Traverse  Bay,  the  harbors  of  Northport,  New 
Mission  Point,  Sutton's  Bay,  Bower's  Harbor,  and  Old  Mission  Bay, 
are  all  good  harbors. 

Cat-Head  Point  and  Bay 

Afford  shelter  in  southerly  winds.  Very  good  holding  ground  is  found 
uuder  Pyramid  Point.  Also,  Unity  Dock  affords  protection  in  all 
winds  except  N  and  NE. 

Glen  Harbor 

In  the  Bay,  between  Sleeping  Bear  Point  and  Pyramid  Point,  has 

good  shelter  from  all  winds  from  the  west,  round  by  the  south  to 

northeast. 

A  Lee 

Can  be  made  under  the  North  Manitou,  with  generally  good  holdmg 

ground. 

The  Holding  Ground  Around  the  Foxes 

Is  very  good,  and  they  afford  shelter  from  all  winds,  except  those  from 

theNWandSE.' 

In  Going  Into  Little  Traverse  Bay, 

You  will  make  a  sandy  point  which  forms  the  harbor ,  haul  close 
round  it  and  into  the  bay,  and  come  to  in  from  2  to  9  fathoms  water. 
Off  the  point  which  forms  the  harbor,  you  will  have  from  10  to  17 
fathoms  water  close  to.  The  village  cannot  be  seen  until  you  are 
nearly  up  to  the  point.  This  bay  is  one  of  the  prettiest  harbors  on  all 
the  lakes. 


'IK.: 

ii 


I20 


Thompson's  Coast  Hlot. 


it 


I 


Petosky 

Is  directly  opposite  Little  Traverse  Bay.     Is  a  railroad  terminus,  and 
has  good  dock,  with  12  to  14  feet  water. 

North  Manitou  Island 
Has  two  wood  docks,  one  on  each  side  of  the  island ;  and  good  hold- 
ing ground  can  be  found  on  the  east  side  of  the  island,  near  the  dock, 
in  from  6  to  10  fathoms.    Pickard  &  Co.  have  a  saw  mill  here- 
South  Manitou  Island 
Has  a  wood  dock  in  the  bay.     Good  holding  ground  in  the  bay,  with 
the  dock  bearing  NWbyW,  in  from  7  to  12  fathoms.     The  dock  runs 
out  EbyS^S.    The  SE  point  of  the  North  Manitou  Island  bears 
from  the  dock  E;^N  6^   miles,  and  the  lighthouse  bears  from  the 
dock  SEbyS^S  2  miles. 

There  is  also  a  dock  at  the  North  Unity  Bay,  opposite  the  Mani- 
tou Islands. 


DANGERS. 

From  Middle  Village  to  the  Foot  of  tlie  East  Arm  of  Grand 

Traverse   Bay. 

The  coast,  as  far  as  Little  Traverse,  can  be  approached  within  >^ 
a  mile.  There  are  detached  rocks  and  rocky  spots  within  yi  of  & 
mile  from  the  shore.  A  12  feet  spit  extends  600  feet  SbyE  from  the 
dock  at  Little  Traverse.  There  is  also  a  9  feet  spot  1,000  feet  south 
of  the  most  eastern  house  of  this  village. 

From  Little  Traverse  to  Big  Rock  Point. 

The  coast  can  be  approached  safely  within  J^  of  a  mile,  the 
shallow  water  being  in  the  indentations  of  the  shore.  From  Pine 
River  Point,  a  rocky  flat  extends  ^  of  a  mile  to  the  west  and  north. 

Dangerous  Reefs 
extend  to  NE  and  NW  for  almost  a  mile  from  Fisherman's  Island. 
From  this  island  to  the  foot  of  the   east  arm  of  the  bay  are  many 
detached  rocky  spots  and  ledges,  and  numerous  spits,  extending  from 


nmmmiti 


MiiBWtt>iiiiMi|iii»ii/iiiriiiiiiiBiiiii()itMi"iniwnirw 


Thompsoris  Coast  Pilot. 


lai 


road  terminus,  and 


id ;  and  good  hold- 
and,  near  the  dock, 
iw  mill  here- 

md  in  the  bay,  with 
ns.  The  dock  runs 
Lnitou  Island  bears 
}use  bears  from  the 

,  opposite  the  Mani- 


ast  Arm  of  Grand 

pproached  within  Yz 
spots  within  ^  of  a 
0  fett  SbyE  from  the 
spot  1 ,000  feet  south 

ck  Point. 

in  J^  of  a  mile,  the 

shore.     From  Pine 

)  the  west  and  north. 

\  Fisherman's  Island. 
)f  the  bay  are  many 
spits,  extending  from 


the  shore,  but  not  less  than  12  feet  water  will  be  found  on  any  part 
within  %  a  mile  from  the  general  direction  of  the  shore,  except  at 
the  foot  of  the  bay,  where  1 2  feet  are  found  in  spots  5^  of  a  mile 
from  shore. 

From  the  Foot  of  the  East  Arm  to  Traverse  City. 

From  the  foot  of  the  bay  to  the  village  of  Old  Mission,  the  coast 
can  be  approached  within  1,000  feet  everywhere ;  but  ^2  a  mile  south 
of  the  village,  a  flat  extends  1,500  feet  into  the  bay.  From  the  point 
opposite  and  east  cf  the  village,  a  spit  runs  out  in  a  SE  direction.  A 
dangerous  rocky  flat  extends  from  Old  Mission  Point,  north  and  west, 
for  i^  miles  from  the  shore.  From  Old  Mission  Point  to  Tucker's 
Point,  several  spits  extend  from  the  shore,  making  navigation  unsafe 
within  %  a  mile  from  the  coast.  From  Tucker's  Point,  a  rocky  spit 
runs  out  south  for  y^  a  mile.  A  rocky  spit  extends  from  the  south 
point  of  Hog  Island,  for  more  than  ^  a  mile  to  the  SW,  and  a 
smaller  one  in  a  NE  direction  from  its  rorthern  point.  From  Bower's 
Harbor  to  Traverse  City,  the  shore  can  be  approached  within  ^  of  a 
mile.  4, 

From  Traverse  City  to  Lighthouse  Point. 

Two  miles  north  of  the  dock  at  Traverse  City,  a  dangerous  9  foot 
spit  extends  ]^  a  mile  from  the  shore.  The  coast  from  here  to  Lee's 
Point,  is  safe  within  ^  a  mile.  From  Lee's  Point,  a  spit  extends 
to  the  south  for  ^  of  a  mile.  North  of  Lee's  Point,  a  flat  runs, 
almost  %  mile  from  the  shore,  half  way  to  Sutton's  Point.  From  this 
point,  a  rocky  spit  extends  ^  of  a  mile  to  northward.  The  western 
shore  of  Sutton's  Bay  is  shallow  within  %  a  mile.  The  coast  from 
Pishaube's  Village  to  Northport  is  generally  good,  but  a  lookout  should 
be  kept  for  a  rocky  spit,  extending  ibr  almost  a  mile  NbyE  from  the 
northern  end  of  New  Mission  Point.  There  is  shoal  water  for  J^  of 
a  mile  to  north  and  east  of  Bellows  Island.  Two  dangerous  shoals, 
with  6  and  8  feet  water  on  them,  lie  between  Northport  Point  and 
Northport  A  rocky  spit  runs  out  in  a  SE  direction  for  ^  a  mile, 
from  a  point  5^  of  a  mile  north  of  Northport  Point ;  from  thence  to 
Lighthouse  Point  the  shore  can  be  safely  approached  within  }^  a  mile, 


122 


ThompsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


^ 

M 


but  at  the  Lighthouse   Point  %  rocky  spit  extends  yi  a  mile  to  the 
northward. 

From  the  Lighthouse  Point  to  Point  Betsey. 

Between  the  lighthouse  and  Cat-Head  Point,  two  spit^  extend 
over  Yi  a  mile  from  shore.  From  Cat-Head  to  Carp  River,  the  coast 
can  be  approached  within  ^  a  mile,  but  there  are  two  detached  12  feet 
rocky  spots,  4  miles  NEi^N  from  the  dock  at  Carp  River,  and  i^ 
miles  from  the  shore.  In  Good  Harbor  Bay  are  several  shoals,  with 
only  eight  feet  water  on  them.  One  of  these  will  be  found  bearing 
NEi^N  from  the  dock  at  Unity,  and  distant  4  miles.  This  shoal  is 
directly  on  the  line  joining  Carp  River  and  Pyramid  Point. 

Another  8  feet  spot  bears  from  Unity  Dock  NE^E,  distance  3^ 
miles,  and  is  a  little  inside  the  line  joining  Unity  Dock  and  Carp 
River  Point.  Southeast  from  this  last  spot,  and  %  a  mile  distant,  is  a 
10  feet  spot.  Three  miles  south  of  Pyramid  Point,  a  rocky  spit  runs 
yi  a  mile  from  shore,  and  shoal  water  extends  for  a  mile  toward 
Sleeping  Bear.  From  thence  to  Point  Betsey  the  shore  is  bold,  and 
can  be  approached  within  j!^  of  a  mile,  except  at  Piatt  River  Point, 
where  a  spit  extends  to  the  north  having  only  6  feet  water  on  it  %  of 
a  mile  from  shore. 

Fox  and  Manitou  Islands. 

South  Manitou  Island  can  be  approached  within  ^  of  a  mile 
everywhere  except  on  the  south  and  southwest  sides,  where  shoal 
water  extends  ]4  a  mile  from  the  shore.  There  is  also  a  rock  with 
only  3  fathoms  water  on  it,  SSW^W  from  the  SW  point  of  Manitou 
Island,  distance  2^  miles. 


buo 
Cha 

Buo 
chai 
Foil 


ads  yi  a  mile  to  the 


int  Betsey. 

It,  two  spits  extend 
!arp  River,  the  coast 
two  detached  1 2  feet 
Zbx^  River,  and  i^ 
several  shoals,  with 
ill  be  found  bearing 
liles.  This  shoal  is 
lid  Point. 

■lE^E,  distance  3^ 
nity  Dock  and  Carp 
^  a  mile  distant,  is  a 
It,  a  rocky  spit  runs 
3  for  a  mile  toward 
e  shore  is  bold,  and 
It  Piatt  River  Point, 
set  water  on  it  ^  of 


within  }i  o{  &  mile 
t  sides,  where  shoal 
!  is  also  a  rock  with 
V^  point  of  Manitou 


Lake   Superior,  South  Shore. 


From  Detour  Light  to  Sault  Ste.  Mary's  and  White  Fish 

Point. 

The  channel  between  Detour  passage  and  Drummond  Island  is 
one  mile  wide,  clear  of  shoal  water  on  either  side.  The  depth  of 
water  is  from  20  feet  to  no  feet,  near  the  centre.  The  description  of 
Detour  Light  is  given  on  the  course  from  Thunder  Bay  to  Detour. 

Buoys  in  St.  Mary's  River :     The  first  buoy  in  the  river  is  a  black 

buoy  on  a  small  reef  of  rock  500  yards  from  the  shore,  and  one  mile 

from  the  dock,  just  beyond  and  inside  of  Frying-pan  Island,  and 

three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  Pipe  Island.     Second  buoy,  off  Point 

aux  Chene,  at  the  entrance  to  Mud  Lake,  12  foot  spar  buoy,  black. 

This  is  the  southern  buoy  in  Mud  Lake,  and  the  turning  point  into  the 

lake.    The  third  buoy  is  at  the  turning  point  from  Mud  Lake  into  St. 

Mary's  River ;  has  black  and  white  perpendicular  stripes,  and  can  be 

seen  by  a  glass  from  the  black  buoy  of  Point  aux  Chene.     First-class 

iron  can  buoy. 

Rain's  Island. 

Buoy,  black ;  22  foot  spar  buoy.  This  buoy  marks  an  8  foot 
shoal,  166  yards  off  the  southeast  end  of  Rain's  Island.  The  buoy  is 
placed  on  the  east  side  of  the  shoal,  in  18  feet  water,  channel  on  both 
sides.  .  - 

Red  l)uoy,  St.  Marie,  24  foot  spar  buoy,  in  15  feet  water.  This 
buoy  marks  a  small  rock  in  mid-channel,  with  10  feet  water  on  it. 
Channel  east  of  this  buoy  not  safe  for  vessels  drawing  over  10  feet. 

Mirr's  Point 

Buoy,  black;  16  foot  spar  buoy.  This  buoy  is  placed  on  the  west 
channel  bank,  going  into  Little  Mud  Lake,  500  feet  east  of  Mirr's 
Point  -  ■     ■  -- 


124 


ThontpsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


Reid's  Point 

Buoy,  red;  i6  foot  spar  buoy,  in  \o  feet  water. 

Point  of  Woods 

Buoy,  red;  1 6  foot  spar  buoy,  in  lo  feet  water.     Point  of  Woods 

black  buoy ;  i6  foot  spar,  in  lo  feet  water.    This  buoy  marks  the  end 

of  Point  of  Woods  Shoal.    The  upper  red  buoy  should  be  left  25 

yards  to  starboard. 

Stribling's  Point 

Buoy,  red  16  foot  spar  buoy.  This  buoy  is  placed  on  the  end  of  the 
shoal,  extending  west  330  yards  from  Striblings  Point,  at  the  head  of 
Little  Mud  Lake,  and  is  the  turning  point  to  each  branch  of  the  river, 
to  Bruce  mines,  and  to  the  East  Nebish,  in  10  feet  water. 

South  entrance  to  Collingwood  or  Bruce  Channel.  Red  buoy; 
16  foot  spar  buoy,  in  11  feet  water.  This  buoy  marks  the  end  of  the 
shoal,  extending  900  yards  NE  from  Stribling's  Point. 

Harwood  Point  Buoy, 

Black;  16  foot  spar  buoy.  This  buoy  marks  the  end  of  the  shoal, 
extending  300  yards  east  from  Harwood's  Point.  Between  the  two 
buoys,  Nos.  14  and  15,  the  channel  is  300  yards  wide,  and  is  the 
turning  point  for  the  East  Nebish  Channel. 

East  Nebish  Rapids. 

The  East  Nebish  Rapids  are  650  yards  in  length  north  and  south, 
and  in  the  narrowest  part  30  yards  wide,  marked  by  three  pairs  of 
spar  buoys,  placed  nearly  opposite  to  each  other,  in  13  feet  water; 
black  and  red.  The  East  Nebish  is  under  improvement  by  the 
Dominion  Government,  by  blasting  rock,  widening  and  deepening  the 
channel,  and,  I  believe,  the  intention  is  to  pier  the  starboard  side 
along  the  island,  the  whole  length  of  the  channel. 

Buoys  entering  Lake  George. 

First  red  buoy,  to  starboard,  t  S  foot  spar  buoy,  bushy  top.  This 
is  the  southern  red  buoy,  in  the  cut  in  Lake  George.  The  cut  or 
artificial  channel  in  Lake  Geoige,  is  2f^  miles  in  length,  NbyW^W, 
and  SbyEi^E,  and  195  to  220  fee*  in  width.  The  banks  are  marked 
by  II  pairs  of  buoys  435  yards  apart,  14  feet  water  between  buoys. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


125 


Point  of  Woods 

>uoy  marks  the  end 

should  be  left  25 


on  the  end  of  the 
oint,  at  the  head  of 
branch  of  the  river, 

water. 

annel.  Red  buoy ; 
irks  the  end  of  the 
lint. 


end  of  the  shoal, 

Between  the  two 

t  wide,  and  is  the 


;th  north  and  south, 
i  by  three  pairs  of 

in  13  feet  water; 
provement  by  the 

and  deepening  the 
the  starboard  side 

:e. 

y,  bushy  top.  This 
eorge.  The  cut  or 
ength,  NbyW^^W, 
banks  are  marked 
:  between  buoys. 


First  black  buoy  going  up,  to  port,  is  an  18  foot  spar  buoy,  bushy 
top ;  is  in  10  feet  water.  This  is  the  southern  black  buoy  in  the  cut 
in  Lake  George,  with  a  bushy  top.  To  mark  the  southern  entrance  to 
the  cut :  The  two  buoys  at  the  upper  end  of  the  cut  into  Lake 
George  are  in  9  feet  water  close  to  the  edge  of  the  cut.  The  black 
buoy  has  a  bushy  top,  to  be  left  to  port. 

Churchville  Point. 

Black  buoy,  16  foot  spar  buoy,  bushy  top,  in  10  feet  water.  This 
buoy  is  placed  on  the  south  end  of  a  shoal  extending  south,  three 
fourths  of  a  mile  from  Churchville  point. 

South  Point  of  Squirrel  Island. 

Buoy,  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  16  foot  spar  buoy.  This 
buoy  is  on  the  end  of  the  shoal,  extending  south  from  the  south  point 
of  the  Island  300  yards,  and  marks  the  southern  entrance  to  the  chan- 
nels on  each  side  of  Squirrel  Island. 

Buoy  of  NW  end  of  Squirrel,  black,  16  foot  spar  buoy,  in  10  feet 
water.  This  buoy  is  placed  on  the  west  channel  bank,  400  yards 
northwest  from  the  north  point  of  Squirrel  Island. 

Church's  Mill,  SbyW  550  yards,  is  on  a  rocky  bottom  ;  there  is 
a  good  channel  of  14  feet  between  it  and  the  bank  of  the  mill  site, 
and  it  has  always  been  called  a  middle  ground,  and  in  old  times  we 
always  left  this  middle  ground  to  starboard. 

Red  Buoy 
Of  north  point  of  Squirrel  Island,  16  foot  spar  buoy.     Church's  Mill 

SbyW  550  yards. 

Red  Buoy 

On  middle  ground  in  Little  Lake  George,  16  foot  spar  buoy,  in  ii 
feet  water.  This  buoy  is  placed  on  the  southeast  end  of  middle 
ground.  There  is  a  narrow  channel  to  the  northward  of  it,  which 
was  used  in  old  times. 

Black  Buoy 

In  Little  Lake  George,  16  foot  spar,  is  on  the  southeast  end  of  a 
shoal,  extending  SE  from  Palmer's  Point  seven  eighths  of  a  mile. 
Point  Charles  bearing  NE^E,  1050  yards. 


?M- 


126 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


I 

•s 


^ 


Middle  Ground, 

Little  Lake  George.  Red  buoy,  i6  foot  spar  buoy.  This  buoy  is  placed 
on  the  head  of  middle  ground.  Point  Charles  bearing  EbyN  750 
yards,  in  10  feet  water. 

Palmer's  Point  Buoy, 

Black,  16  foot  spar,  in  10  feet  water.  This  buoy  is  placed  on  the 
south  channel  bank,  250  yards  east  of  Palmer's  Point. 

Buoy  Opposite  Partridge  Point. 

Black,  16  foot  spar.  This  buoy  marks  the  north  end  of  a  rocky  shoal 
extendirg  400  yards  west  from  the  shore,  in  1 2  feet  water. 

Point  Lewis. 

Black  buoy,  16  foot  spar.  This  buoy  marks  a  shoal  extending  west 
from  Point  Lewis,  is  in  10  feet  water. 

Red  Buoy 

On  the  southwest  end  of  Farmer's  Ridge  Shoal,  16  foot  spar.  This 
buoy  marks  the  southwest  end  of  the  Farmer's  Ridge,  in  10  feet  wa- 
ter. 

Black  Buoy 

Opposite  the  southwest  end  of  Farmer's  Ridge,   16  foot  spar.    This 

buoys  marks  the  end  of  a  rocky  shoal  extending  north  450  yards  from 

the  shore  in  10  feet  water. 

Jenkin's  Rock, 

Black  buoy,  i6  foot  spar.    This  buoy  is  placed  near  the  rock;  least 

water  7  feet. 

Marchand's  Rock. 

Black  buoy,  16  foot  spar.    This  buoy  is  placed  near  the  rock ;  least 

water  ;  feet. 

Topsail   Island, 

Red  buoy,  18  foot  spar,  in  16  feet  water.  This  buoy  is  placed  on  the 
north  side  of  the  rocks.  To  the  northward  and  eastward  of  the  Bay- 
field rocks,  there  are  shoals  with  9  and  1 1  feet  water.  This  is  the 
turning  point  for  the  Soo  Canal.  There  is  another  red  buoy  beyond 
this  near  the  Canada  side ;  after  passing  it  you  can  run  to  any  of  the 
Canada  docks,  or  to  the  docks  before  you  enter  the  canal. 


lis  buoy  is  placed 
iring  EbyN  750 


I  placed  on  the 

I* 

of  a  rocky  shoal 
'ater. 

,  extending  west 


foot  spar.     This 
,    in  10  feet  wa- 


foot  spar.    This 
b  450  yards  from 


r  the  rock ;  least 
'  the  rock  ;  least 


is  placed  on  the 
rard  of  the  Bay- 
ter.  This  is  the 
ed  buoy  beyond 
in  to  any  of  the 
anal. 


Thompsoris  Coast  Pilot. 


127 


Sautt  St.  Mary's  Canal, 

New  locks  and  a  new  canal,  leading  into  the  old  canal  over  half  way 
up,  are  being  built,  to  carry  15  or  16  feet  water  through. 


SAULT  STE.  MARIE  RIVER. 


From  the  Entrance  of  Sault  Ste.  Marie  River  to  Sailors' 

Encampment. 

From  a  point  i  mile  east  of  Detour  Lighthouse  run  N^E  2 
miles,  to  a  point  ^  of  a  mile  east  of  Frying  Pan  Island ;  thence  Nby 
VV^W,  toward  the  west  side  of  Pipe  Island,  until  within  ^  of  a  mile 
of  it  (and  observe  there  is  a  rocky  reef  i^  miles  above  Frying  Pan 
Island,  ^  of  a  mile  below  Pipe  Island,  and  J^  of  a  mile  from  the 
mainland  on  the  west,  and  lying  to  the  west  of,  and  very  near  to  the 
range  line  from  the  west  side  of  Frying  Pan  to  west  side  of  Pipe  Is- 
land ;  a  black  spar  buoy  is  kept  on  this  reef  of  rock) ;  thence  NW^^N 
toward  the  opening  between  Lime  Island  and  St.  Joseph  Island,  for 
2^  miles,  to  abreast  of  a  spit  putting  out  from  some  small  islands  near 
the  mainland  to  the  SW;  thence  NWbyWj^W  3  miles  to  abreast  of 
and  to  the  west  of  the  small  island  near  the  foot  of  Lime  Island ;  and 
note  that  whilst  this  small  island  is  kept  open  from  Lime  Island,  it  is 
not  safe  to  approach  these  islands  nearer  than  from  ys  to  }4  &  mile,  on 
account  of  a  sandy  shoal  of  6  feet  water  at  about  700  yards  west  of 
the  small  island,  and  ^  of  a  mile  SW  of  the  lower  end  of  Lime  Is- 
land. Above  this  the  shore  of  Lime  Island  is  bold,  and  may  be  ap- 
proached within  less  than  ^  of  a  mile  in  safety.  Having  passed 
Lime  Island,  get  upon  the  north  and  south  line,  which  will  just  cleaj 
the  west  side  of  it,  and  run  north,  leaving  Round  Island  to  port,  and 
pass  about  2  miles  beyond  it  and  abreast  of  Grosse  Point ;  then  change 
your  course  NW^W  for  about  6^  miles,  through  Mud  Lake,  to  the 
mouth  of  the  channel  between  Sailor's  Encampment  Island  and  St. 
Joseph's  Island.    These  courses  are  true ;  distances  statute  mile. 

Just  north  of  Frying  Pan  Island  there  is  a  good  dock,  with  wood 
and  coal,  and  plenty  of  water  alongside.  ,. 


i     '    I 


^ 
J 


i?8 


Thompson's  Coast  Piioi. 


!*i 


When  up  to  the  turninjj  point,  to  enter  the  channel  to  the  Sailors' 
Encampment,  observe  that  the  dock  at  St.  Joseph's  Island  should  be 
just  open  with  the  bluff  below  it  on  the  starboard  side;  then  steer  over 
NbyE,  keeping  on  the  range  until  up  to  the  dock.  There  is  a  middle 
ground  opposite  this  dock  with  lo  feet  water  on  it.  You  can  pass  it 
on  either  side. 

After  passing  the  Sailor's  Encampment,  keep  the  port  side  of  the 
river  well  aboard  until  you  enter  Little  Mud  Lake ;  run  across  it  N^ 
W.  The  soundings  over  this  lake  are  very  regular,  from  2}^  to  3^ 
fathoms  ;  and  when  up  to  the  head,  run  out  N£>^E,  pass  round  the 
black  buoy  to  port,  50  yards  off,  and  haul  up  river  in  mid-channel  till 
you  make  the  buoys  i  1  the  Nebish  Rapids,  open  them  and  run  up, 
leaving  black  buoys  to  port,  and  red  buoys  to  starboard,  until  up  to 
the  last  red  buoy  at  the  head  of  the  rapids ;  thence  NNW,  keeping 
the  middle  of  the  river  until  up  to  North  Rock  Island,  above  Duck 
Island ;  thence  Nby  W  for  the  red  buoy  with  bush  on  it,  at  the  entrance 
of  the  cut  across  Lake  George.  Run  through,  leaving  black  buoys  to 
port  and  red  buoys  to  starboard,  and  when  up  to  the  head  of  the  cut, 
and  clear  of  the  buoys  100  yards,  haul  up  NNE  5  miles  for  the  buoy 
off  Ch.;»-ch's  Point — black  buoy  with  bush  on  it — haul  up  round  this 
buoy,  heading  for  Church's  Point,  passing  the  red  striped  buoy  at  the 
foo*:  of  Squirrel  Island,  which  indicates  both  channels,  to  starboard,  run 
up  along  close  to  Church's  Point  and  dock,  or  in  mid-channel,  until 
you  pass  the  first  point  off  Squirrel  Island,  when  you  will  see  the  black 
buoy  nearly  midway  from  Church's  Mill  to  the  north  point  of  the  is- 
land ;  haul  up,  leaving  the  black  buoy  to  port,  and  the  red  buoys  off 
the  north  end  of  Squirrel  Island  to  starboard,  then  run  well  over  to 
the  Canada  side  of  the  river,  and  follow  that  shore  close  along  until 
you  get  abreast  of  Garden  River  Church ;  then  take  the  centre  and 
follow  the  curve  of  the  river,  steering  W^S  until  you  make  the  first 
red  buoy  to  starboard,  give  the  red  buoy  a  good  berth,  say  100  feet, 
and  make  for  the  first  black  buoy  to  port.  As  you  proceed  you  will 
make  the  second  red  buoy  to  starboard,  and  the  second  black  buoy  to 
port,  which  is  250  yards  east  of  Palmer's  Point,  the  course  is  NNW^ 
N  in  channel.  When  pajt  this  buoy  steer  well  up  into  Clark's  Bay,  past 
the  point,  called  Point  Aux  Pins,  on  the  starboard  hand,  where  there 


are 
bla 
ian 
On 
,in( 
bla 
kee 
bla 
boj 
roc 
tan 
Ma 
rivi 

is) 
Cai 
bu< 


rivi 
cal 
NV 
fro 
Cla 
\Vj 
tan 
thii 
the 

to 
Pai 
riv 
bol 

Afi 
bu( 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


r29 


inel  to  the  Sailors' 
Island  should  be 

e ;  then  steer  over 

There  is  a  middle 

You  can  pass  it 

lie  port  side  of  the 

run  across  it  N^ 
r,  from  2ji(  to  3^ 
|E,  pass  round  the 
in  mid-channel  till 
them  and  run  up, 
board,  until  up  to 
ce  NNW,  keeping 
iland,  above  Duck 

it,  at  the  entrance 
ing  black  buoys  to 
le  head  of  the  cut, 
miles  for  the  buoy 
laul  up  round  this 
itriped  buoy  at  the 
3,  to  starboard,  run 
nid-channel,  until 

will  see  the  black 
rth  point  of  the  is- 
1  the  red  buoys  off 

run  well  over  to 
e  close  along  until 
ike  the  centre  and 
you  make  the  first 
lerth,  say  100  feet, 
1  proceed  you  will 
:ond  black  buoy  to 

course  is  NNW^ 
0  Clark's  Bay,  past 

hand,  where  there 


are  two  or  three  small  houses,  until  you  open  the  river  and  bring  the 
black  buoy  or  buoys  in  line,  then  haul  up  river,  passing  a  low  point  of 
land  that  makes  out  a  short  distance  into  the  river  from  the  main  land, 
Ont.,  I  Ja  miles  from  Clark's  Bay.  The  water  is  deep  close  to  this  point, 
and  from  here  you  can  see  the  red  buoy  off  Farmer's  Ridge,  and  the 
black  buoy  on  the  point  to  port.  Give  them  a  berth  of  100  feet,  and 
keep  on  up  river,  hauling  gradually  round,  until  you  make  the  three 
black  buoys  on  the  port  side,  and  Topsail  Island  red  buoy  to  star- 
board. Along  by  these  last  black  buoys,  the  channel  is  narrow  and 
rocky ;  when  up  and  past  Topsail  Island  red  buoy,  at  50  yards  dis- 
tance, steer  straight  for  the  outside  end  of  the  pier  at  the  Soo  Ste. 
Marie's  entrance  to  canal,  run  through  the  canal  and  proceed  up 
river  above  the  rapids. 

Note. — The  course  from  Topsail  Island  after  clearing  the  buoy 
is  WNW,  and  there  is  generally  one  more  red  buoy  nearest  to  the 
Canada  side,  about  half  way  to  canal.  Bayfield's  red  buoy  the  first 
buoy  east  of  the  canal. 

Ste.  Marie  River,  Above  the  Rapids. 

After  leaving  the  canal,  at  the  distance  of  300  yards,  haul  up  the 
river,  steering  WbyS  a^  miles,  or  until  the  first  prominent  point, 
called  Big  Point,  bears  south  ;  thence  SWbyW,  till  Point  au  Par  bears 
NW;  then  SVVJ^S,  to  a  point  about  500  feet  off  shore,  and  due  south 
from  the  houses  above  Point  au  Par,  and  in  the  little  bay,  called 
Clark's  Bay ;  then  haul  up  for  the  woody  point  below  the  Mission,  at 
Waiska  Bay,  leaving  Round  Island  and  light  to  port,  ^  a  mile  dis- 
tant, until  Point  Iroquois  Lighthouse  bears  NWbyWj^Wj  haul  up  on 
this  course  till  the  Mission  House  bears  SW  (the  dock  being  gone) ; 
thence  NW^N  25  miles,  to  White  Fish  Point. 

Note. — The  course  from  the  low  sandy  point  beyond  Clark's  Bay 

to  the  woody  point  below  the  Mission,  is  WSW.     Opposite  Point  au 

Par  a  shoal  makes  off  from  the  U.  S.  side,  about  two-thirds  across  the 

river,  under  which  will  be  found  good  anchorage  in  5^  fathoms,  soft 

bottom. 

First  Red  Buoy, 

After  leaving  the  canal,  in  St.  Mary  river  Vide!  Shoal,  16  foot  spar 

buoy  in  1 1  feet  water.     North  of  the  Videl  shoal  are  rocks  with  5  feet 


>   — 


»^^- 


130 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


4 


water  on  them.  Farraf?ut  bliift  SbyE,  laoo  yards.  The  wcstcn  en- 
trance to  the  ranal  Ei/(N,  aioo  yards.  Light  at  the  canal  on  the  port 
pier,  a  white  light  on  a  white  lower  about  ao  feet  high. 

Point  Au  Par 

Lighthouse,  Ontario,  St.  Mary's  river,  5^  miles  above  the  Soo  Canal 
Fixed  white,  visible  8  miles,  a  white  square  wooden  tower,  30  feet 
above  water  level ;  is  on  a  low  sandy  point,  called  by  U.  S.  Survey 
Point  Louisa;  a  red  buoy,  16  foot  spar,  in  12  feet  water.  This  buoy 
is  placed  on  the  Norlh  Channel  bank,  SWbyW^^W,  900  yards  from 
Point  Louisa.  South  extreme  of  Shoal  Bay,  SJ^E,  iji  miles,  and  is 
second  red  buoy  above  the  Soo  Canal. 

Round  Island  Lighthouse, 

In  White  Fish  Bay,  near  the  entrance  to  Soo  river.  A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  13^^  miles,  50  feet  above  lake  level.  Light  on  square 
stone  tower,  rising  from  the  corner  of  the  keeper's  dwelling.  A  guide 
to  and  trom  the  entrance  to  Lake  Superior,  a>^  miles  from  Point  Au 
Par  and  3  miles  to  Waiskar  Bay. 

Round  Island  Point 
Buoy,  black,  16  foot  spar,  in  la  feet  water.     This  buoy  is  placed  on 
the  South  Channel  bank.     Bearings,    Round  Island  Point,  SWbyS, 
1300  yards.     Bearings  Point  Louisa,  NNE  i^  miles. 

Middle  Ground,  off  Round  Island  Lighthouse, 

Red,  16  foot  spar,  in  12  feet  water.    This  buoy  is  placed  on  the  south 
end  of  the  Middle  Ground.  r  _ 

Shoal  off  Round  Island  Lighthouse. 

Black  and  red  horizontal  stripes,  third  class  iron  can  buoy.  This 
buoy  is  placed  on  the  centre  of  three  small  shoals,  400  yards  south  of 
the  middle  ground.  The  channel  between  the  middle  ground  and 
small  shoals  is  350  yards  wide.  Bearings  :  Round  Island  Point  E^ 
S  a  miles.  Point  Extreme  SW^VV  2^  miles.  Waiskar  Bay  has  a 
saw  mill  and  wood  dock.  '    • 


Be 

sh( 

A 

Til 

ke^ 

Hg 

Fii 

tai 
la: 


'tS^M^MMW^MiMIHi.' 


.MilMlfti'.: 


The  westeri  en- 
c  canal  on  the  port 
igh. 

ove  the  Soo  Canal 
en  tower,  30  feet 
by  U.  S.  Survey 
water.  This  buoy 
V,  goo  yards  from 
iji  miles,  and  is 


'cr.     A  fixed  white 

Light  on  square 

dwelling.    A  guide 

les  from  Poitit  Au 


buoy  is  placed  on 
nd  Point,  SWbyS, 
les. 

ighthouse, 

placed  on  the  south 

1 

,    ! 

.ouse. 

jn  can  buoy.  This 
,  400  yards  south  of 
middle  ground  and 
id  Island  Point  E}i 
Waiskar  Bay  has  a 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 
Point  Iroquoii, 


131 


On  the  south  shore  of  White  Fish  Hay.     Light  flashes  white.      Time 
between  flashes,  thirty  seconds.     Visi'jlc  15  miles;  72  feet  above  lake 
level  ;  is  on  a  brick  tower,  connected  with  the  keeper's  dwelling  by  a 
covered  way,  all  whitewashed ;  a  guide  to  and   from  the  River  St. 
Marie.     Parisien  Island  NbyW^^W  12  miles. 

From  Point  Iroquois  Light,  bearing  SWbyW  \y^  miles^  to  White 
Fish  Point  NW^^N  25  miles.  White  Fish  Point  Light,  at  the  outlet 
of  Lake  Superior,  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  15^4  miles  ;  76  feet 
above  lake  level ;  is  an  iron  pile  structure,  connected  with  keeper's 
frame  dwelling ;  painted  white ;  a  guide  to  and  from  White  Fish  Bay. 
at  the  southeast  extremity  of  Lake  Superior;  has  a  ten  inch  .steam  fog 
whistle,  giving  a  blast  of  eight  seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  ten 
seconds ;  then  a  blast  of  two  seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  40 
seconds,  alternating  in  this  manner  every  minute.  Bearings  :  south 
point  of  Michipicoten  Island,  Canada,  NW^^W  79)^  miles.  Ma- 
mainse  Point,  Canada,  NEbyN^N  17^  miles. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Sauble  Lighthouse, 

Bearing  south  2  miles,  steer  W>4S  56^  miles. 

Big  Sauble  Lighthouse,  at  Big  Point  au  Sauble,  on  the  south 
shore  of  Lake  Superior,  between  White  Fish  Point  and  Grand  Island. 
A  fixed  white  light,  visible  17^  miles;  107  feet  above  lake  level. 
This  light  is  on  a  whitewashed,  brick  tower,  connected  with  the 
keeper's  dwelling  by  a  covered  way ;  is  a  coast  light,  Grand  Island 
light  bearing  WbyS>4S  22^  miles. 

Note.— The  shore  can  be  followed  all  the  way  along  from  White 
Fish  Point  to  Big  Sauble,  and  also  to  the  Pictured  Rocks,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  two  miles,  with  safety,  and  at  the  Pictured  Rocks  you  can 
lay  alongside  of  them  in  many  places. 

From  Big  Sauble  to  Grand  Island  Harbor  Light. 

Steer  SWbyW  i8>^  miles  to  abreast  of  Grand  Portal,  when  steer 
SW  about  6  miles  to  a  point  Yi  of  a  mile  west  of  Castle  Point ;  thence 
same  course  4  miles  to  the  narrows  at  Sand  Point,  or  abreast  of  the 
lighthouse  opposite  the  spit  off  Sand  Point,  which  may  be  approached 


■'■^^"W^j. 


132 


ThompsorCs  Coast  Pilot. 


and  passed  within  200  yards;  and  thence  SWbySj^S  lY^  miles  to 
head  of  South  Bay,  passing  Minnising  iron  dock  to  port,  where 
anchor  in  6  fathoms  water.  A  14  foot  spar  buoy,  black,  will  be 
placed  on  the  extreme  end  of  the  shoal  off  Sand  Point,  in  15  feet 
water,  to  be  left  on  the  port  side  going  into  the  bay. 

From  Grand  Island  Harbor  Light, 

On  the  low  sand  point  projecting  from  Grand  Island,  into  the  east 
entrance  to  Grand  Island  Harbor.  Is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  13^^ 
miles ;  49  feet  above  lake  level ;  on  keepers  wooden  dwelling ;  to 
guide  through  the  eastern  passage  to  the  anchorage  at  Grand  Island 
Harbor.  A  flat  sets  off  from  the  mainlana  towards  this  lighthouse 
two  thirds  across  the  Entrance  to  Grand  Island  Harbor,  and  is  called 
Sand  Point.  Very  shallow  water  on  it.  Bearings  from  light :  Sand 
Point  EbyS^^S  one  mile;  Powell's  Point  SWbyWi4:W  \}i  miles. 
There  is  a  good  dock  at  the  furnace,  on  port  side  as  you  pass  into  the 
bay.    Fourteen  to  sixteen  feet  water  alongside. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Grand  Island  Main  Light, 

Wby3  73  miles,  bearing  south  3  miles;  is  on  the  north  point  of  Grand 
Island,  on  a  high  bluff;  fiied,  varied  by  white  flashes.  Time  between 
flashes,  one  minute  and  30  seconds;  visible  20  miles;  sunds  205  feet 
above  lake  level ;  tower  rising  from  keeper's  dwelling,  built  of  yellow 
brick.  Bearings  from  light:  Southwest  Point  Shoal,  off  Caribou 
Island,  Canada,  NEJ^N  66  miles;  south  point  of  Montreal  Island, 
Canada,  NEbyE>^E  105  miles.  A  good  lee  can  be  made  on  the  east 
side  of  Caribou  Island,  in  5  to  7  fathoms  water,  good  holding  ground. 

Grand  Island  Harbor  Ranges, 

Front  light,  on  the  mainland,  at  west  entrance  to  Grand  Island 
Harbor;  fixed  white,  visible  10  miles;  23  feet  above  lake  level. 
Rear  light;  fixed  white,  visible  i2j^  miles;  41  feet  above  lake  level. 
Bearings:  Southeast  point  of  Williams'  Island  NWbyN^f^,  2^ 
miles;  Williams' Landing,  Grand  Island,  NE^E  \)i  miles.  Front 
light  in  wooden  tower;  rear  light  on  keeper's  frame  dwelling.  These 
lights  are  500  feet  apart ;  a  guide  for  entering  the  west  channel  to  the 
anchorage  of  Grand  Island  Harbor.     From  Grand  Island  main  light 


to  e 

foll( 

brii 

the 

At 

ran 

the 

kee 

liar 

sou 

ing 
she 
La: 
fro 
Po 
chi 
qu; 
a  r 
the 


Si 


nc 
Ci 
P( 
ar 


P. 
fa 


•'S-ii^as^Sise.. 


ThompsorCs  Coast  Pilot. 


m 


^S  3^  miles  to 

Ic  to    port,  where 

>y,   black,  will  be 

Point,  in  15  feet 

;ht. 

[and,  into  the  east 
light,  visible  13^-^ 
aden  dwelling ;  to 
at  Grand  Island 
Is  this  lighthouse 
rbor,  and  is  called 
from  light :  Sand 
iVi4:W  i^  miles, 
s  you  pass  into  the 

I  Main  Light, 

rth  point  of  Grand 
;s.  Time  between 
•s ;  sunds  205  feet 
ng,  built  of  yellow 
Shoal,  off  Caribou 
f  Montreal  Island, 
le  made  on  the  east 
od  holding  ground. 

to  Grand   Island 

above  lake  level. 

et  above  lake  level. 

NWbyN^N,  a^ 

ij^   miles.    Front 

e  dwelling.     These 

west  channel  to  the 

i  Island  main  light 


to  enter  the  west  channel  from  the  light  bearing  south  three  miles, 
follow  the  island  round  to  the  southward  and  westward,  until  you 
bring  the  north  point  of  Wood  Island  to  bear  west  ^  of  a  mile,  and 
the  lights  in  range;  steer  SbyE^E  5  miles,  towards  the  range  lights. 
At  this  point  a  vessel  should  be  about  five-eighths  of  a  mile  north  of 
range  lights,  and  should  have  opened  the  two  extreme  south  points  of 
the  island;  then  haul  to  the  westward  for  the  respective  anchorages, 
keeping  Powell's  Point  close  aboard.  The  best  anchorage  is  off  Wil- 
liams' House,  or  a  little  beyond  his  dock,  at  the  landing,  with  the 
southeast  point  of  Grand  Island  to  port,  in  Williams'  Bay. 

The  bank  is  very  bold  on  the  east  of  the  point  at  Williams'  Land- 
ing; and  vessels  drawing  12  feet  can  approach  within  ico  feet  of  the 
shore.  Williams  has  a  wood  dock  at  the  landing.  From  Williams' 
Landing  to  Powell's  Point  SE  one-half  and  one-eighth  of  a  mile ;  and 
from  Williams'  Landing,  in  a  south  line  to  the  mainland  west  of 
Powell's  Point,  the  channel  is  y^  mile  wide.  The  breadth  of  the 
channel  between  the  lighthouse  and  the  spit  off  Sand  Point,  is  one- 
quarter  of  a  mile  to  12  feet,  water  curve.  Iron  Works  Dock  is  ^  of 
a  mile  from  the  range  stations  to  the  westward.  Good  water  alongside 
the  dock.    The  channel  leading  to  this  dock  is  buoyed  out. 


SAILING  DIRECTIONS  FOR  GRAND  ISLAND,  AC- 
CORDING  TO  THE  LAST  SURVEY. 


To  Enter  South  Bay  and  Williams'  Harbor  from  the  East. 

To  enter  South  Bay  when  abreast  of  Chapel  Rock,  and.  i  mile 
north  of  it,  steer  SW  about  6  miles,  to  a  point  ^  of  a  mile  west  ot 
Castle  Point ;  thence  same  course  4  miles  to  the  Narrows,  at  Sand 
Point ;  and  thence  SWbyS>^S  zyi  miles  to  the  head  of  South  Bay, 
and  come  to  in  6  fathoms  water. 

To  make  Williams' Landing. 

Steer  SW  as  above,  from  the  point  5^  of  a  mile  west  of  Castle 
Point,  i^Yt  miles;  thence  Wi4:N  2  miles,  and  anchor  in  7  to  10 
fathoms  water,  400  feet  from  the  shore.    The  bank  is  very  bold  on 


"'1**^; 


II! 


M' 


134 


ThompsotCs  Coast  Pilot. 


the  east  of  the  Point  at  Williams'  Landing,  and  vessels  drawing  12  feet 
can  approach  within  100  feet  of  the  shore. 

To  Enter  the  Bay  from  the  West. 

To  enter  South  Bay,  passing  to  the  north  of  Wood  Island,  from 
Marquette,  steer  E^S  about  32  miles  to  a  point  i  mile  north  of  Wood 
Island,  leaving  Point  au  Sauble  1  n  ile  to  the  south  ;  thence  SSE^E, 
heading  clear  of  the  SW  point  of  Grand  Island,  to  a  point  ^  a  mile 
NE  of  the  north  point  of  Williams'  Island  3^  miles,  or  until  the  north 
point  of  Williams'  Island  ranges  with  the  point  of  the  main  land  to  the 
SW ;  thence  SbyE^^E  3  miles,  or  until  the  two  lower  points  of  Grand 
Island  are  in  range ;  thence  EbyS  heading  for  Powell's  Point,  i  mile,  or 
until  SW  point  of  Grand  Island  and  south  point  of  Williams'  Island  are 
in  range,  and  thence  NEJ^N  ^  of  a  mile  to  Williams'  Landing. 

A  new  town  plat  has  been  laid  out  on  the  opposite  side  of 
Williams'  Bay,  on  the  mainland,  called  Grand  Island  City  and  Powell's 
Point. 

To  Enter  South  Bay,  Passing  South  of  Wood  Island  and 
North  of  Williams'  Island. 

When  abreast  of  Sauble  Point,  as  above,  steer  EbyS^^S  \\)^ 
miles,  passing  midway  between  Wood  Island  and  Williams'  Island,  to 
the  point  designated  above,  y^  a  mile  NE  of  Williams'  Island,  and 
thence  as  above  directed  to  William's  Landing. 

To  Leave  South  Bay  or  Williams'  Landing. 

Vessels  going  eastward  will  reverse  the  course  given  for  vessels 
coming  from  the  east,  and  those  going  west  will  reverse  the  courses 
given  for  vessels  coming  from  the  west.  In  South  Bay  the  anchorage 
is  good,  and  vessels  can  lie  in  3  fathoms  water  at  any  point  ^  of  a  mile 
from  the  &hore. 

To  Enter  Grand  Island  Harbor  From  the  East. 

A  lighthouse  has  been  erected  upon  the  low  sand  point  project- 
ing from  Grand  Island  into  the  east  entrance  to  Grand  Island  Harbor. 

Vessels  entering  the  harbor  from  the  east,  can  steer  straight  for 
the  Lighthouse,  leaving  it  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  pass  within  200 
yards  of  it. 


lis  drawing  1 2  feet 

St. 

/ood  Island,  from 

ile  north  of  Wood 

;  thence  SSE^E, 

a  point  ^  a  mile 

or  until  the  north 

i  main  land  to  the 

;r  points  of  Grand 

's  Point,  I  mile,  or 

'illiams'  Island  are 

'  Landing. 

opposite  side  of 

City  and  Powell's 

ood  Island  and 

er  EbySi^S  14^ 
Williams'  Island,  to 
[iams'  Island,  and 

^anding. 

e  given  for  vessels 
everse  the  courses 
Bay  the  anchorage 
■point  ^  of  a  mile 

the  East. 

■and  point  project- 
ed Island  Harbor, 
n  steer  straight  for 
id  pass  within  200 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


135 


The  lighthouse  is  built  of  wood,  and  painted  white,  and  from  its 
tower  a  fourth  order  fixed  white  light  will  be  exhibited  at  an  elevation 
of  34  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake. 

Western  Entrance. 
Range  lights  have  also  been  elected  on  the  mainland,  to 
vessels  into  this  harbor  through  the  west  channel.  The  rear  light  's 
white— exhibited  from  the  keeper's  dwelling— the  front  light  (white), 
and  is  exhibited  from  a  small  wooden  tower.  Both  structures  are 
painted  white,  the  distance  between  them  being  500  feet ;  steer  on  the 
range  until  the  harbor  is  well  open,  then  haul  up  for  it. 

Dangers  to  be  Avoided. 

In  passing  through  the  Narrows  at  Sand  Point,  give  the  point  a 
wide  berth,  and  avoid  the  sand  spit,  which  lies  to  the  north  and  NW 
of  it  ^  of  a  mile,  on  which  there  is  but  5  feet  water  ;  and  in  passing 
round  the  SW  point  of  Grand  Island,  beware  of  sand  spits  which  ex- 
tend nearly  ^  a  mile  from  shore,  and  on  which  there  are  but  5  feet 
water  also. 

There  are  numerous  rocks  and  sand  spits  between  the  south  point 
of  Williams'  Island  and  the  main  shore  to  the  south  of  it,  on  which 
there  are  but  8  and  10  feet  water,  making  it  dangerous  for  vessels 
drawing  over  8  feet  water,  to  attempt  to  pass  between  Williams'  Is- 
land and  the  main  shore. 

From  Grand  Island  to  Marquette. 

With  the  light  bearing  south,  steer  Wi^S  35  miles  to  Marquette 
Lighthouse,  bearing  WbyN  2  miles.  The  light  is  on  the  north  point 
of  Marquette  Harbor;  is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  15^^  miles;  77 
feet  above  lake  level ;  tower  rises  from  keeper's  dwelling,  built  of 
yellow  brick.  Bearings :  Grand  Island  Light  E>6N  35  miles ;  south- 
west point  of  Michipicoten  Island,  Canada,  NE^N  103  miles.  A  10 
inch  steam  fog  whistle,  giving  two  blasts  in  each  minute,  with  equal 
intervals  between  them;  duration  of  each  blast  alternately,  5  and  10 

seconds. 

Marquette  Breakwater. 

Light  84  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  breakwater.     Fixed  red 

light,  visible  la  miles;  40  feet  above  lake  level,  on  an  open,  frame 


'41  •. 


136 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


work  tower,  with  elevated  walk  leading  from  it  to  the  shore  ;  tower 
and  walk  painted  white ;  a  guide  into  Marquette  Harbor.  To  enter 
the  harbor,  run  in,  leaving  the  end  of  the  breakwater  pier  50  feet 
to  starboard  and  Ripley's  Island  to  port;  come  to  anchor  or  run  to 
any  of  the  docks;  12  to  14  feet  water  alongside,  and  lYt  fathoms 
anchorage. 

From  Marquette  to  Portage  Entry,  Sixty-five  Miles,  as  Fol- 
lows :  Inside  Passage. 

Run  out  from  the  dock  east-northerly  until  Granite  Island  is  open 
with  Presqu'ile  Bluff  (a  Lighthouse  has  been  erected  on  this  island, 
and  shows  a  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  red  flashes  of  the  fourth 
order  of  lens,  elevated  93  feet  above  the  lake  level) ;  then  haul  up 
for  the  bluff,  passing  it  close  to,  and  leaving  two  or  three  small  rocky 
islands  to  starboard,  which  are  nearly  abreast  of  Presqu'ile  Bluff; 
then  shape  your  course  for  Granite  Island  NWbyN,  leaving  it  2  miles 
to  the  northward ;  when  abreast  the  island,  which  is  12  miles  from 
Marquette,  keep  on  the  same  course  1 2  miles  farther ;  thence  NW  by 
W  17  miles,  to  abreast  the  Huron  Islands  where  a  lighthouse  has 
been  erected  on  the  West  Island;  thence  Wj^N  10  miles,  to  Point 
Abbaye,  leaving  the  Huron  Islands  to  port;  thence  Wj^S  14  miles, 
to  Portage  Entry.  Run  past  the  Lighthouse  point  and  into  the  bay, 
and  come  to  in  2^  fathoms  water,  with  the  houses  at  the  entry  bear- 
ing NNW.     Ranges  are  to  be  placed  for  running  into  Portage  Entry. 

Portage  Bay  is  not  a  safe  place  in  a  heavy  NE  or  E  wind;  but  a 
good  harbor  can  be  made  10  or  12  miles  up  LeAnse  Bay,  on  the  east 
side,  called  Kocknawaugon.    li  is  a  perfect  harbor,  and  safe  from  any 

winds. 

To  go  in,  haul  round  the  south  point  of  the  bay  or  harbor  and 
run  in,  giving  the  point  a  good  berth:  run  well  up  into  the  bay,  and 
come  to  in  3  to  5  fathoms  water,  soft  bottom. 

The  Missions  are  on  each  side  of  LeAnse  Bay,  2  miles  south  of 
this  harbor ;  the  Methodist  on  the  east,  and  the  Catholic  on  the  west. 
Excellent  fishing  all  over  LeAnse  Bay. 
From  Marquette  to  Portage  Entry— Outside  Passage. 

Run  out  from  the  dock  east-northerly  until  well  clear  of  the  light- 
house point,  and  the  rocks  which  lie  off  from  it,  about  i  mile ;  then 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


137 


the  shore ;  tower 
larbor.  To  enter 
; water  pier  50  feet 
>  anchor  or  run  to 
e,  and  ^yi  fathoms 

/e  Miles,  as  Fol- 

inite  Island  is  open 
cted  on  this  island, 
shes  of  the  fourth 
ivel)  ;  then  haul  up 
r  three  small  rocky 
if  Presqu'ile  Bluff  j 
r,  leaving  it  a  miles 
h  is  12  miles  from 
er ;  thence  NW  by 
re  a  lighthouse  has 
r  10  miles,  to  Point 
ice  WJ^S  14  miles, 
It  and  into  the  bay, 
;s  at  the  entry  bear- 
into  Portage  Entry. 
E  or  E  wind ;  but  a 
ise  Bay,  on  the  east 
•,  and  safe  from  any 

bay  or  harbor  and 
up  into  the  bay,  and 

lay,  2  miles  south  of 
:atholic  on  the  west. 

itside  Passage. 
ell  clear  of  thelight- 
,  about  I  mile ;  then 


haul  up  NNE  5  or  6  miles,  until  Granite  Island  bears  NW ;  thence 
NWi^N  9  miles,  to  abreast  of  the  island,  which  leave  to  port  close 
to;  thence  NW  to  abreast  the  Huron  Islands ;  and  thence  as  above. 
On  this  route  you  leave  the  rocky  islands  off  Presqu'ile  to  port. 

From  Portage  to  Manitou  Island  Lighthouse  NE^E  46  miles, 
leaving  Traverse  Island  to  port  8  miles  from  Portage  Lighthouse. 
Good  anchorage  under  Traverse  Island,  and  also  the  next  point  north 
of  it. 

Bete  Grise  Bay,  15  miles  WbyS  from  Manitou  Island,  has  good 
shelter  from  north  to  west  winds,  and  also  under  Point  Kenwawena. 

Lake  La  Belle  lies  at  the  SW  end  of  Bete  Grise  Bay,  and  is 
capable  of  being  made  into  an  excellent  harbor,  by  a  cut  across  a 
narrow  neck  of  land.  The  copper  mines  of  Eagle  Harbor  and  vicin- 
ity, are  but  a  short  distance  from  the  lake,  and  the  proprietors  are 
making  every  effort  to  dredge  a  channel  and  build  piers,  which,  when 
completed  would  be  of  incalcuable  advantage  to  them  for  shipping  their 
copper,  and  also  to  the  mariner  as  a  safe  harbor  of  refuge.  This 
improvement  is  now  going  on  and  piers  built.  A  lighthouse  is  to  be 
erected  at  the  entrance  of  this  harbor  when  completed. 

There  is  a  good  channel  between  Manitou  Island  and  Point 
Keweenaw.  To  run  through,  give  the  SE  point  a  good  berth,  and 
haul  up  to  the  northward  and  westward,  leaving  Manitou  Island  to 
the  eastward. 

Granite  Island 
Light;  on  Granite  Island,  12  miles  NW  of  Marquette.  Is  fixed, 
va:ied  by  red  (lashes.  Time  between  flashes,  one  minute  and  thirty 
seconds.  Visible  16^  miles,  93  feet  above  lake  level.  Tower  rises 
from  keeper's  dwelling,  built  of  granite.  Bearings,  Grand  Island  light 
EbyS^^S,  36  miles;  Manitou  Island  light,  N^W,  48)^  miles. 

Huron  Islands  Lighthouse  on  West  Huron  Island, 

Off  Huron  Bay,  fixed  white,  visible  22  miles,  197  feet  above  lake 
level.  Tower  rises  from  keeper's  dwelling,  built  of  granite.  The 
steam  fog  signal  is  located  on  the  northwest  corner  of  West  Huron 
Island,  a  10  inch  steam  fog  whistle,  giving  a  blast  8  seconds  long,  at 
intervals  of  52    seconds.     Bearings,  Keweenaw  Point  NEbyN^N, 


138 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


Point  Abbaye  Wj^S, 


I: 


34  miles;  Traverse  Point,  NW>^N  i6>4  miles; 

6^  miles. 

To  enter  Huron  Bay  north  of  Huron  Islands :  When  one  mile 
north  of  Huron  Island  hghthouse,  steer  SWbyW^^W  for  12  miles, 
then  follow  up  the  middle  of  the  bay,  where  good  anchorage  and  pro- 
tection from  all  winds  will  be  found. 

A  good  lee  can  be  made  on  the  southwest  side  of  West  Huron 
Island,  in  5>^  fathoms,  close  to  the  island,  with  the  middle  of  the 
island  bearing  NE,  and  three  small  islands,  detached  from  the  south 
end  of  Huron  Island  to  the  so-y.hward,  which  forms  a  bay.     The  wa- 
ter is  deep  from  Huron  Isla:,d  to  the  shoal  due  east  from   Point  Ab- 
baye, which  shoal  is  ^  of  'i  mile  from  the  Point  and  4^  miles  from 
the  north  end  of  Huron  I  iiand.     There  is  a  good  channel  between  the 
shoal  and  the  point,  with  nothing  less  than  18  feet  water.      The 
course  through  is  north  and  south.     The  least  water  on  shoal  is  6j4 
feet  near  the  centre  and  from  8  to  9  and  10  on  the  outer  parts  of  it. 
Mount  Huron  is  931  feet  high.     Little  Huron  river  lays  about  south 
from  the  lighthouse  4  miles  and  Huron  river  SSW  ^^2  miles.    The 
Government  has  a  wharf  la  miles  up  the  bay  on  the  south  side, 
where   it  is  getting  out  timber,  and  preparing  materials  for  Stan- 
ard's  Rock  lighthouse,  which  is  being  constructed. 

Stanard's  Rock. 
A  lighthouse  is  being  erected  on  this  rock.  Bearings,  Grand 
Island  light,  SSK^E,  49>^  miles  ;  Huron  Islands  light,  WSW  39^ 
miles ;  Manitou  Island  light,  NW,  23^^  miles.  To  the  northward  and 
westward  of  the  beacon  that  was,  and  where  the  lighthouse  is  being 
built,  a  rocky  reef  extends  430  by  320  yards ;  least  water  2  feet 
1,400  feet  west  of  the  beacon,  are  two  detached  rocks,  with  8  feet  wa- 
ter. The  soundings  in  proximity  to  the  beacon  and  reef,  are  from 
3^  to  10  fathoms.  Bottom,  rock  and  gravel.  Vessels  should  not  ap- 
proach the  beacon  to  the  northward  nearer  than  three  fourths  of  a  mile. 
L'Anse  lighthouse  to  be  built. 

Portage  River. 
The  lighthouse  is  on  the  Point  one  mile  east  of  the  entrance  of 
Portage  rver  ;  is  fixed,  varied  by  red  flashes ;  time  between  flashes 


'^ 


int  Abbaye  yf%S, 


When  one  mile 
^W  for  12  miles, 
nchorage  and  pro- 

•  of  West  Huron 
1  the  middle  of  the 
;d  from  the  south 
s  a  bay.  The  wa- 
st from  Point  Ab- 
id  4j^  miles  from 
hannel  between  the 
feet  water.  The 
;r  on  shoal  is  6^ 
;  outer  parts  of  it. 
ir  lays  about  south 
7  4^2  miles.  The 
on  the  south  side, 
materials  for  Stan- 


.  Bearings,  Grand 
light,  WSW  39^ 
0  the  northward  and 
lighthouse  is  being 
least  water  a  feet 
)cks,  with  8  feet  wa- 
and  reef,  are  from 
issels  should  not  ap- 
ee  fourths  of  a  mile. 


of  the  entrance  of 
time  between  flashes 


ThompsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


139 


two  minuses;  68  feet  above  lake  level,  visible  15  miles.  Stone  and 
brick  tower,  connected  with  dwelling  of  red  brick,  by  a  covered  way 
marks  approach  to  Portage  river ;  bearings.  Point  Abbaye  E>^S,  13 
miles;  Traverse  Island,  NE^E,  9  miles. 

Portage  Range  Lights, 

Front  and  rear,  are  both  white  lights  visible  10  and  10^  miles.  Front 
light  on  wooden  tower,  rear  light  on  keeper's  dwelling ;  guide  into 
Portage  river.  Lights  500  feet  apart,  North  9°  West,  and  South  9°  E, 
The  front  light  is  700  yards  inland,  or  north  from  the  shore. 

From  Portage  Entry  to  Catholic  Mission  :  run  out  from  Portage 
Entry  piers  until  the  lighthouse  outside  bears  NE.  Then  steer  due 
south  for  the  Methodist  Mission,  1 1  ^  miles,  or  Sby  W  for  Roman 
Catholic  Mission,  11  miles. 

Good  anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds  in  the  small  bay 
south  of  Catholic  Mission,  close  to  the  town  of  Baragua. 

From  Portage  inxxy  to  the  docks  at  L'Anse  :  Run  out  from  Por- 
tage piers  till  ihe  lighthouse  outside  bears  NE;  thence  S^W  14^ 
miles  to  the  docks  at  L'Anse. 

Manitou  Lighthouse. 

On  the  east  point  of  Manitou  Island.  The  light  is  fixed,  varied  by 
white  flashes ;  time  between  flashes  one  minute  thirty  seconds;  visible 
16  miles,  81  feet  above  lake  level.  Iron  pile  structure,  connected  by 
a  covered  way  with  keeper's  dwelling  of  wood,  painted  white.  A 
coast  light,  6  miles  EbyN  from  Keweenaw  point ;  has  a  10  inch  steam 
fog  whistle,  giving  alternate  blasts  of  3  and  5  seconds,  with  intervals 
of  26  seconds.  Bearings,  Slanard's  Rock  SE  23^  miles;  Grand 
Island  Light  SEbyS,  72^  miles.  This  last  mentioned  course  would 
pass  about  3^  miles  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  Stanard's 
Rock. 

GuU  Rock  Lighthouse, 

On  a  rocky  islet,  between  Keweenaw  Point  and  Manitou  Island ;  a 
fixed  red  light,  visible  13^  miles,  50  feet  above  lake  level.  Tower 
rises  from  keeper's  dwelling,  built  of  yellow  brick  ;  a  guide  through  the 
passage,  between  Gull  Rock,  which  lies  near  the  western  end  of  Man- 
itou Island,  and  Keweenaw  Point.     Bearings,   Huron  Island  light 


I40 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


% 


SVVbySj^S,  35  miles;  Granite  Island  light,  SbyE>^E,  49-miles;  Por- 
tage River  Point  light  S\V>^W,  461^  min-.^. 

Copper  Harbor  Liglithouse, 
On  the  eastern  point  of  the  entrance  to  Copper  Harbor,  Mich.  ;  light 
fixed  white,  visible  i4>^  miles,  65  feet  above  lake  level.     A  fog  horn 
is  used  in  foj^gy  weather;  tower  and  keeper's  dwelling  connected; 
built  of  Milwaukee  brick. 

Copper  Harbor  Ranges, 

Front  and  rear  white  lights,   visible  10  and  12  aiiles,  one  22  and  the 

other  30  feet  above  lake  level,  to  guide  vessels  into  Copper  Harbor. 

The  front  light  is  in  a  wooden  tower ;  rear  light  on  keeper's  frame 

dwelling,  500  feet  apart. 

Bearings:     Southwest  point  of  Michipicoten   Island  (Canada) 

EbyN,  89  miles ;  northeast  point  of  Isle  Royal  NWbyN^^N,  58  miles ; 

these  bearings  are  from  the  main  light. 

To  enter  Copper  Harbor :     Run  in  on  the  range  till  you  drop 

into  30  feet  water ;  then  steer  for   the  docks.    The  range  is  about 

SbyW.     From  the  small  rocks  on  the  starboard  hand  going  in  to  the 

main  shore  is  }{  and  >^  of  a  mile.     Course  of  the  bay  to  the  outei 

dock  W^N  I  >^  miles. 

From  Manitou  Island  to  Copper  Harbor,  West  by  North 

Fourteen  Miles. 
To  run  into  Copper  Harbor,  coming  from  the  eastward,  keep 
along  shore  until  past  the  point  were  the  lighthouse  stands,  keeping 
on  the  range  until  past  the  rocks  which  are  above  water,  and  plain  to 
be  seen  in  daylight;  then  haul  up  the  bay,  steering  W>^S,  until  past 
Potter's  Island,  and  come  to  anchor  or  run  alongside  the  dock.     The 
water  is  deep  close  round  the  lighthouse  point,  and  vessels  can  make 
a  good  harbor  from  easterly  winds  by  hauling  up  into  the  bay  to  the 
eastward,  closing  in  the  light  from  a  north  line,  and  come  to  in  3  to  4 
fathoms.     The  land  is  high  all  round  Point  Keweenaw.     In  coming 
from  the  eastward,  a  rocky  hill.  Mount  Houghton,  800  feet  high,  and 
and  12  miles  SVV  of  Point  Keweenaw,  can  be  seen  from  40  to  50 
miles,  and  is  a  good  leading  mark. 


S 
P 

tl 

n 
I 


fAix^sm^oi. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


141 


^E,  49" miles;  For- 


xrbor,  Mich.  ;  light 
level.  A  fog  horn 
welling  connected; 


es,  one  22  and  the 
ito  Copper  Harbor. 
lit  on  keeper's  frame 

;n  Island  (Canada) 
WbyN^^N,  58  miles; 

range  till  you  drop 
The  range  is  about 
land  going  in  to  the 
le  bay  to  the  outer 

,  West  by  North 

n  the  eastward,  keep 
ouse  stands,  keeping 
e  water,  and  plain  to 
ing  WJ^S,  until  past 
;side  the  dock.  The 
,nd  vessels  can  make 
I  into  the  bay  to  the 
ind  come  to  in  3  to  4 
iweenaw.  In  coming 
m,  800  feet  high,  and 
)e  seen  from  40  to  50 


The  harbor  is  formed  by  a  number  of  small  rocky  islands,  just 
above  water,  extending  from  Potter's  Island  towards  the  lighthouse, 
nearly  east  and  west.     Deep  water  going  in. 

From  Copper  Harbor  to  Agate  Harbor,  Eight  and  one -half 

miles. 

To  enter  the  north  harbor,  bring  the  target  or  beacon  on  the 
main  shore  (about  %  a  mile  east  of  the  large  warehouse)  to  bear 
SSE,  and  run  on  this  course  until  the  houses  on  the  south  shore  of 
the  south  harbor  come  m  range  with  Agate  Point;  then  haul  up  E^^N 
to  the  anchorage  in  the  middle  of  the  harbor,  in  4  to  5  fathoms, 
mud  bottom. 

To  enter  the  south  harbor,  bring  the  target  or  beacon  to  bear 
SSE,  and  run  for  it  until  the  small  rocky  island  to  the  west  of  Agate 
Point  is  just  opened  with  this  point ;  then  haul  up  for  the  houses  on 
the  north  side  of  the  south  harbor,  and  run  for  them  until  abreast  of 
Agate  Point ;  then  s>eer  for  the  wharf  or  dock,  or  come  to  in  the 
middle  of  the  harbor  in  3^^  to  4  fathoms  water,  mud  buttom. 

Eagle  Harbor,  Five  and  one-half  Miles  West  of  Agate  Har- 
bor. 

To  enter  the  harbor  by  the  east  channel,  bring  the  lighthouse  to 
bear  WSWi^^S,  and  run  for  it  until  the  eastern  point  of  the  harbor 
bears  due  south,  and  is  distant  ^  of  a  mile;  then  steer  SWi^S  to  a 
point  about  160  feet  east  of  the  most  eastern  point  of  Scnter's  dock. 

To  enter  the  harbor  by  the  west  channel,  bring  the  cleft  in  the 
rock  and  signal  target  in  rear  in  range,  when  the  compass  should  read 
SEbySJ^S,  and  run  on  this  course  and  range  until  the  bar  at  the 
mouth  of  the  harbor  is  passed ;  then  haul  up  for  the  dock,  or  come  to 
in  3^  fathoms  water,  sandy  bottom. 

The  reef  which  lies  outside  the  harbor  is  three-sixteenths  of  a 
mile  north  of  the  east  point  of  the  harbor  at  the  eastern  end,  and  the 
same  distance  from  the  lighthouse  to  the  western  end  of  it.  The 
least  water  is  3  and  4  feet  on  the  east  end  and  north  from  the  point ; 
the  least  water  on  the  west  end  is  5  and  6  feet,  due  north  from  the 
middle  of  the  bar;  and  on  the  extreme  ends  east  and  west,  16  and  18 
feet.    There  is  a  patch  with  1 2  feet  on  it,  north  of  the  lighthouse,  and 


„-_„  ? 


w 


142 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


west  of  the  middle  ground  or  shoal.  In  running  on  the  ranges  to  en- 
ter the  harbor,  you  will  have  from  11  to  16  feet  water  on  the  bar,  and 
18  to  34  feet  inside. 

Old  range  for  going  in  by  the  east  channel :  Range  the  south- 
eastern end  or  angle  of  Senter's  dock,  and  run  for  it,  bearing  SWJ^W, 
until  the  target  opens  in  the  cleft  in  the  rock ;  thence  SW  «^S,  until  in 
23  feet  water.  Vessels  not  drawing  over  8  feet,  can  run  in  on  this 
range  clear  up  to  the  dock. 

From  Eagle  Harbor  to  Eagle  River,  Southwest  by  We8» 
one-half  West  Seven  Miles. 

There  is  no  harbor  at  Eagle  River.  To  come  to  the  dock,  keep 
a  long,  low,  lead-colored  house,  with  a  chimney  on  the  north  end  of 
it,  in  a  line  with  the  second  window  of  the  hotel  just  behind  the 
house,  and  run  over  the  middle  ground  in  3  fathoms  water ;  when 
over,  you  drop  into  4  and  5  fathoms,  and  run  for  the  dock.  The  dock 
or  pier  runs  out  NVV.  Or,  bring  the  end  of  the  dock  to  bear  south  at 
the  distance  of  two  miles,  and  run  for  it.  In  approachii  g  the  dock, 
keep  well  to  the  westward,  and  go  in  at  an  angle  of  40°,  to  clear  the 
sand  bank  that  has  formed  off  the  end  of  the  pier.  There  was  only 
9  feet  water  at  the  pier  in  1877,  and  you  cannot  go  to  the  eastward 
of  the  pier  at  all.  In  running  in  at  night,  bring  the  lighthouse  to  bear 
SbyE>^E,  and  run  for  it  till  over  the  bar  and  near  the  dock ;  then  go 
in  as  above.  On  this  range  you  run  over  the  western  spit  in  three 
fathoms  water,  and  a  little  over  ^  a  mile  from  the  end  of  the  pier. 
In  going  out,  bound  to  the  westward,  run  the  shore  along  for  2  miles, 
and  shape  your  course  for  Ontonagon  River  SWbyVV^^W  13  miles; 
thence  SWj^S  45  miles. 

Eagle  Harbor  Lighthouse, 

On  the  west  point  of  the  entrance  of  Eagle  harbor,  Michigan.  Fixed, 
varied  by  white  flashes.  Time  between  flashes,  two  minutes;  visible 
14  miles  ;  58  feet  above  lake  leve..  Tower  rises  from  the  corner  of 
keeper's  dwelling,  built  of  re  i  brick.  Bearings :  Southwest  point  of 
Isle  Royal  NWbyWi^W  55  lailes;  south  point  of  the  Slate  Islands, 
Canada,  NEbyN  96  miles. 


ThompsorCs  Coast  Pitoi. 


M3 


1  the  ranges  to  en- 
:er  on  the  bar,  and 

Range  the  south- 
t,  bearing  SW3^\V, 
ce  SW>j(S,  until  in 
:an  run  in  on  this 


liwest  by  Wes* 

to  the  dock,  keep 
.  the  north  end  of 
;el  just  behind  the 
homs  water ;  when 
le  dock.  The  dock 
ick  to  bear  south  at 
roachii-g  the  dock, 
f  40°,  to  clear  the 
r.  There  was  only 
{o  to  the  eastward 
e  lighthouse  to  bear 
the  dock ;  then  go 
estern  spit  in  three 
le  end  of  the  pier. 
e  along  for  2  miles, 
•yVV^W   13  miles; 


Michigan.     Fixed, 

vo  minutes;  visible 

from  the  corner  of 

Southwest  point  of 

if  the  Slate  Islands, 


This  harbor  is  under  improvement  by  deepening  the  channel,  and 
it  is  contemplated  to  make  a  pier  breakwater  from  the  east  point  of 
the  harbor  to  the  east  edge  of  the  channel ;  and  also  another  from  the 
west  point  to  the  the  west  edge  of  the  channel.  The  bottom  across 
is  rock  and  boulders,  and  if  this  work  is  done,  it  will  make  a  safe 
harbor;  even  now  it  is  a  good  harbor,  but  there  is  not  much  room  inside 
for  a  number  of  vessels  to  swing  to  their  anchors.  The  docks  on  the 
west  side  are  good,  with  plenty  of  water.  Depth  of  water  going  in, 
14  feet. 

Eagle  Harbor. 

The  depth  of  water  over  bar  going  in  is  14  feet.  It  is  proposed 
by  the  Government  to  build  two  piers  of  protection,  one  on  the  east 
side  from  the  point  towards  the  channel,  in  a  WSVV  direction,  and 
the  other  from  the  west  side,  running  ENE.  This  pier  will  be  100 
feet  more  to  the  northward  than  the  east  one,  and  will  leave  a  chan- 
nel oi"  200  feet.  In  going  in  on  the  range,  when  over  the  bar  and  in 
18  to  20  feet  water,  haul  up  for  the  Senter's  dock,  or  come  to  anchor 
near  the  middle  of  the  bay. 

Eagle  River, 
Seven  miles  west  of  Eagle  Harbor.  Light  near  the  entrance  to  Eagle 
River,  south  shore  of  Lake  Superior.  Fixed  white,  visible  14  miles; 
61  feet  above  lake  level,  and  is  in  the  town  of  Eagle  River.  Light 
on  keeper's  dwelling ;  a  guide  to  the  pier ;  is  a  coast  light.  Bearings : 
Northeast  point  of  Isle  Royal,  north  59  miles  ;  Grand  Portage  Island 
NWJ^W  loyi  miles. 

Portage  Lake  Ship  Canal 

Lighthouse,  at  the  entrance  to  Portage  Ship  Canal,  on  the  west  side 
of  the  cut.  ,  Light  fixed  white,  visible  14  miles;  56  feet  above  lake 
level ;  a  coast  and  harbor  light  on  square  tower  forming  canal  front  of 
keeper's  dwelling,  built  of  red  brick ;  octagonal  iron  lantern,  painted 
black ;  building  is  red,  the  color  of  the  brick.  Depth  of  water  varies 
from  gyi  to  12  feet.    Is  being  dredged  at  present. 

Ontonagon  River  Lighthouse, 
At  the  mouth  of  the  Ontonagon  River.     Is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible 
13  miles ;  47  feet  above  lake  level,  on  the  west  side  of  the  river. 


1 


144 


Thompson^  Coast  Pilot 


Tower  rises  from  keeper's  dwelling,  built  of  yellow  brick. 

Pier-head  light,  on  the  west  pier,  about  aoo  feet  from  the  outer 
end.  Fixed  red  light,  visible  1 1  miles,  ^^  feet  above  lake  level ; 
built  on  a  wooden  hexagonal  tower,  with  open  frame  b.i8e,  painted 
white;  a  guide  into  Ontonagon  River.  Depth  of  water,  ii 
feet,  and  variable.  Bearings:  Northeast  point  of  Isle  Royal  NNE 
^E  100  miles;  north  point  of  the  outer  or  eastermost  of  the  Apostle 
groupof  islands  WbyN^N  53>4  miles.  The  water  at  the  entrance 
to  the  piers  can  not  be  trusted  to,  as  an  average.  Sand  washes  in 
and  across  the  channel  in  heavy  gales  from  the  SW. 

Outer  Island  Lighthouse, 

On  the  most  northerly  point  of  Outer  Island,  (Apostle  group.) 
This  light  flashes  white.  Time  between  flashes,  i  minute  and  30 
seconds;  visible  19^  miles;  130  feet  above  lake  level,  on  a  brick 
tower,  whitewashed,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with  keepers  dwell- 
ing, also  of  brick.  A  coast  light  and  guide  to  vessels  passing  up  or 
down,  outside  the  islands.  A  ten  inch  fog  whistle,  giving  a  blast  of 
8  seconds,  with  intervals  of  52  seconds. 

From  Ontonagon  to  La  Point. 

From  Ontonagon  piers  run  out  a  or  3  miles  NNW,  and  haul  up 
W>^S  2x  miles,  to  clear  the  land  under  the  Porcupine  Mountains  and 
lone  Rock;  thence  VVbyS^S  45  miles,  to  La  Point  Lighthouse  on 
Chrgwaumegon  Point. 

As  you  approach  the  lighthouse  you  leave  Madeline  am*  x)v. 
Apostle  Islands  to  starboard,  and  haul  up  for  the  sandy  point,  keepinig 
it  well  aboard  until  past  the  lighthouse  ;  thence  haul  up  NW  northerly 
for  the  town  of  Bayfield,  which  has  a  good  dock  and  a  saw  mill. 

La  Point  and  the  Mission  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  bay ;  has  a 
dock  and  good  holding  ground  in  from  3  to  5  fathoms,  mud  bottom. 

Off  the  SW  point  of  Madeline  Island  a  reef  sets  off  >^  to  ^  of  a 
mile  in  a  southerly  direction,  and  opposite  the  lighthouse. 

To  Run  through  the  Island  Passage  to  Fond  du  Lao. 

From  the  dock  or  Bayfield  run  the  main  land  along,  leaving 
Sugar  Island.Cap  Island,  Oak  Island  and  Raspberry  Islands  to  star- 


Thompson's  C^ast  Pilot. 


145 


brick. 

feet  from  the  outer 
ibove  lake  level; 
rame  base,  painted 
•pth  of  water,  11 
f  Isle  Royal  NNE 
tiost  of  the  Apostle 
er  at  the  entrance 
Sand  washes  in 
W. 


(Apostle  group.) 
8,  I  nninute  and  30 
ce  level,  on  a  brick 
with  keepers  dwell- 
essels  passing  up  or 
tie,  giving  a  blast  of 

It. 

NNW,  and  haul  up 
pine  Mountains  and 
'oint  Lighthouse  on 

e  Madeline  awm  ;k 
sandy  point,  keepinii; 
lul  up  NW  north<rly 
ind  a  saw  mill. 
e  of  the  bay ;  has  a 
thonns,  mud  bottom, 
sets  off  ^  to  ^  of  a 
;hthouse. 

)  Fond  du  Lac. 

land  along,  leaving 
)erry  Islands  to  star- 


board ;  keep  mid-channel,  and  when  abreast  of  Cap  Island  haul  ofT 
to  the  NW,  leaving  York  or  Sand  Islands  and  Little  Fishing  Island 
to  port;  run  out  NW  6  or  7  miles  from  York  Island,  and  3^^  miles 
from  Little  Fiseing  Island ;  thence  SWbyW^ W  57  miles,  to  Minnesota 
Point  Lighthouse,  at  the  entrance  to  Fond  du  Lac  Bay  or  Superior 
City. 

The  Apostle  Islands  are  a  group  lying  off  the  mainland  at  La 
Point.  The  water  is  deep  through  these  islands,  and  the  shoals  are 
plain  to  be  seen  in  clear  weather.  The  land  is  of  a  good  quality,  with 
plenty  of  timber  of  all  Kinds. 

To  run  through  this  passage  from  Ontonagon,  steer  W^S  51 
miles,  to  Passage  Island  Lighthouse  ;  thence  WbyN^N  10  miles,  to 
Oak  Island  Dock,  to  starboard,  leaving  Cap  Island  close  to,  to  port, 
and  run  out  NW,  leaving  Raspberry  Island  to  starboard,  and  York 
Island  to  port ;  then  steer  as  directed  for  Fond  du  Lac. 

From  Passage  Island  to  Chagwaumegon  Point  Lighthouse  SWby 
S  1 7  miles,  until  the  lighthouse  is  open  with  the  S W  point  of  Madeline 
Island ;  then  haul  up  for  it,  and  run  in  as  directed  for  Bayfield. 

From   Passage  Island   Lighthouse  to  Rock  Harbor,  Isle 

Royal. 

Run  out  from  the  lighthouse  EbyS  2  miles,  and  haul  up  NE^E 
118  miles,  to  Isle  Royal,  passing  Siskowit  Bay  close  to;  bring  the 
lighthouse  at  Rock  Harbor  to  bear  NW^  W,  and  run  for  it  until  well 
up  to  the  group  of  Islands  at  the  entrance  to  the  harbor ;  run  through 
leaving  the  first  small  patch  of  islands  to  port  which  lie  NE  from  the 
lighthouse,  and  haul  up  into  the  bay  to  the  SW,  and  come  to  in  i  a  to 
16  fathoms  water,  mud  bottom,  closing  in  the  lighthouse.  There  is  a 
good  channel  on  the  SW  side  of  this  first  group  of  islands  next  to  the 
lighthouse'  point,  but  is  not  so  straight  as  the  first  one  mentioned.  The 
group  is  called  Middle  Islands,  and  can  be  passed  on  either  side. 

From  Rock  Harbor  to  White  Fish  Point  SEbyEj^E  xt8  miles. 

Michigan  or  Passage  Island  Lighthouse. 

On  the  southwest  point  of  Michigan  Island,  the  most  southern 
and  eastern  of  the  Apostle  group,  Wisconsin.  Is  a  fixed  white  light, 
visible  19  miles,  139  feet  above  lake  level;  a  stone  tower,  connected 


1 


146 


Thompson's  Coast  Mlot. 


m 


with  a  stone  dwelling  by  a  covered  way,  a  guide  through  the  passage 
between  Madeline,  Stockton,  and  Michigan  Islands,  to  Bayfield  and 
LaPoint.  Bearings;  southwest  point  of  Stockton  Island,  NWby 
Wj'i^W,  6>^  miles.  Northeast  point  of  Madeline  Island,  SW  by  W, 
3  miles.     Ontonagon  light,  E>^S,  56  miles. 

La  Point  Lighthouse. 
On  Chagwaum'^gon  Point,  the  southeastern  entrance  to  La  Point 
Harbor,  and  to  the  southward  of  Bayfield.  A  fixed  red  light,  visible 
12^  miles,  42  feet  above  lake  level;  on  keeper's  frame  dwelling, 
painted  white ;  a  guide  to  Bayfield  and  La  Point.  Bearings,  Carp 
River,  Ej^N,  42  miles.  - 

Chagwaumegon  Bay. 
From  Bayfield  to  the  head  of  the  bay.     When  opposite  Bayfield 
and  clear  of  the  dock,  steer  south,  4^  miles  to  a  point  one  mile  NW 
of  LaPoint  Lighthouse,  when  steer  SWbySj^S,  for  seven  miles; 
thence  3}^  miles  south  to  Bay  City  dock,  or  Ashland. 

From  York  Island  to  Duluth  Canal. 

When  York  Island  bears  south  steer  WbyS>^S,  to  entrance  to 
Duluth  Harbor  60  miles. 

Raspberry  Island  Lighthouse. 

On  the  southwest  point  of  Raspberry  Island.  The  last  island  you 
leave  on  your  starboard  hand  going  through  the  passage.  Light  fixed, 
varied  by  white  flashes ;  time  between  flashes,  i  minute  30  seconds, 
visible  15^^  miles;  77  feet  above  lake  level ;  light  on  keeper's  frame 
dwelling,  painted  white ;  a  guide  between  the  Main  and  Raspberry 
Island  and  to  Bayfield  and  La  Point.  Bearings :  Two  Island  River, 
N  by  W,  37  miles;  Baptism  River  NW^i^W,  30^  miles. 

Courses  and  Distances  on  Lake  Superior. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Manitou  Island  WNW  34  miles; 
thence  WbyN>^N  100  miles,  to  Manitou  Island  Lighthouse.  SW  "^ 
of  a  mile  from  the  lighthouse  you  will  find  15  fathoms  water,  mud 
bottom,  close  in.  ^  ''"  '  '    ' 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  the  Carabou  Island  NW  55  miles. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


147 


ough  the  passage 
,  to  Bayfield  and 
1  Island,  NWby 
Island,  SW  by  W, 


irance  to  La  Point 
1  red  light,  visible 
1  frame  dwelling, 
,    Bearings,  Carp 


opposite  Bayfield 
oint  one  mile  NW 
for  seven  miles ; 
d. 

anal. 

-^S,  to  entrance  to 

e. 

The  last  island  you 
ssage.  Light  fixed, 
ninute  30  seconds, 
on  keeper's  frame 
ain  and  Raspberry 
Fwo  Island  River, 
niles. 

luperior. 

WNW  34  miles; 
lighthouse.  SW  ^ 
ithoms  water,  mud 

NW  55  miles. 


From  Carabou  Island  to  Small  Lake  Harbor,  Ont.,  NWi^N  117 
miles.    Good  holding  ground  under  Carabou  Island  in  5  to  6  fathoms, 

clay  and  sand. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  the  east  side  of  Michipocoten  Island 
NWbyNj^N  75  miles;  to  the  copper  mines  on  the  south  side  of  the 
island  NW^N  73  miles. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Michipicoten  River,  N  byW  60  miles, 
to  Cape  Gargantua;  thence  NbyE  20  miles;  thence  ENE  7  miles,  to 
the  river.    This  river  is  navigable  for  boats  15  miles,  to  the  falls. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Montreal  River,  Ont.,  NbyE>^E  35 
miles.    This  river  is  20  fathoms  wide,  with  5  to  6  feet  water  over  the 

bar. 

From  Michipicoten  to  the  Manitou  Island  Lighthouse  WSW  105 
miles  (from  the  north  side). 

From  Manitou  Island  to  Stanard's  Rock  SEJ^S  20  miles ; 
thence  same  course  to  Grand  Island,  5 1  miles. 

From  Point  Keweena  to  Granite  Island  S  by  E)^E  50  miles. 

From  Fond  du  Lac  or  Minnesota  Lighthouse  to  Isle  Royal 
NEbyE>^E  145  miles. 

From  Eagle  Harbor  to  the  outer  island  of  the  Apostles  W  by  S 
%S,  and  to  clear  all  the  islands  WbyS,  107  miles. 

From  Ontonagon  to  Grand  Portage  or  Pigeon  River  Nby  Wi^W 
73  miles. 

From  Eagle  Harbor  to  Rock  Harbor  NNWJ^W  40  miles.     • 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Point  Iroquois  Lighthouse  SE  25  miles. 
Note  the  difference  in  return  course. 

Minnesota  Point  Lighthouse. 

At  the  head  of  Lake  Superior,  mouth  of  St.  Louis  River,  three 
eighths  of  a  mile  northwest  of  the  piers,  A  fixed  white  light,  visible 
13^  miles,  50  feet  above  lake  level ;  brick  tower,  with  brick  dwelling 
attached;  a  guide  in  Superior  Bay.  Bearings:  Knife  River,  NEbyN, 
30  miles;  Poplar  River,  E by S>^S,  10  miles. 

From  Duluth  to  Silver  Island  Landing. 
When  off  Duluth  Lighthouse,  steer  NEbyE,  for  171  miles,  till 
the  highest  peak  on  west  end  of  Pie  Island  bears  NW  7  miles  distant; 


,K* 


1» 
■4. 


PI 


m 

f 
■i 


148 


Thompson's  Coasi  Pifof. 


when  steer  NE^<N  iij^  miles,  till  Thunder  Cape  Light  bears  NW 
I  yi  miles  distant ;  when  a  NE  by  E  course  leads  you  to  the  landing, 
5^  miles  distant.    Range  lights  on  dock. 

Duluth  Lighthouse. 

On  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier,  at  the  entrance  to  the  canal, 
at  Duluth,  Minn.  Fixed  red  light,  visible  12^  miles,  40  feet  above 
lake  level,  on  open  frame  structurs ;  a  guide  to  vessels  entering  the 
harbor ;  on  entering  the  harbor,  give  the  end  of  the  west  pier  a  berth 
of  at  least  20  feet  to  avoid  stone  ripping.  This  harbor  is  easy  of 
access.  To  go  in  range  the  piers  and  run  through  the  center  of  the 
channel,  keep  straight  on  to  the  railroad  dock  or  round  to  to  the  city 
docks,  or  come  to  anchor. 

Isle  Royal  Lighthouse  on  Menagerie  Island. 

Entrance  to  Siskiwit  Bay,  Isle  Royal.     FixiH  Mght  visible 

i5j^  miles,  75  feet  above  lake  level,  arc  illuminat  a.  -e  horizon; 
a  lake  light  on  an  octagonal  tower,  connected  by  a  crossway  with  a 
dwelling  house  one  and  one-half  stories  high;  tower  white,  the  dwell- 
ing dark  brown,  and  serves  to  guide  into  Siskiwit  Bay.  To  enter  this 
bay,  from  the  lighthouse  on  Menagerie  Island,  to  the  main  land,  the 
water  is  deep,  and  the  distance  is  2^  miles;  haul  round  the  light, 
at  the  distance  of  ^  to  ^  miles,  and  run  up  the  bay  about  SW.  The 
dock  is  on  the  starboard  side  of  the  bay.  The  distance  from  the 
light  to  the  extreme  end  of  the  bay  is  1 1  ^  miles. 

McCargose  Cove  is  36  miles  from  ths  Rock  of  Ages,  off  Wash- 
ington Harbor,  at  the  SW  end  of  Isle  Royal,  and  16  miles  from  Silver 
Island. 

Todd's  Harbor  is  8  miles  SW  of  McCargose  Cove,  NW  side  of 

Isle  Royal. 

Rock  Harbor,  Isle  RoyaL 

Lighthouse  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  to  Rock  Harbor,  about 
13  miles  to  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  island.  Fixed  light,  visible 
15  miles,  70  feet  above  lake  level ;  the  structure  is  a  tower  of  mixed 
stone  and  brick,  of  a  light  drab  color,  a  guide  into  the  harbor.  Bear- 
ings ;  Eagle  Harbor  light,  SEbySj^S,  48  miles ;  southwest  Point  of 
Michipicoten  Island  (Canada),  EbyS,   125  miles.    To  enter  Rock 


sc 


Light  bears  NW 
>u  to  the  landing, 


ranee  to  the  canal, 
ailes,  40  feet  above 
vessels  entering  the 
e  west  pier  a  berth 
s  harbor  is  easy  of 
h  the  center  of  the 
ound  to  to  the  city 

ie  Island. 

1  ■  .  .  Mght  visible 
t(:i.u  isiure  horizon; 

a  crossway  with  a 
sr  white,  the  dwell- 
3ay.  To  enter  this 
the  main  land,  the 
ul  round  the  light, 
ly  about  SW.    The 

distance  from  the 

of  Ages,  off  Wash- 
[6  miles  from  Silver 

Cove,  NW  side  of 


Rock  Harbor,  about 
Fixed  light,  visible 

is  a  tower  of  mixed 

)  the  harbor.  Bear- 
southwest  Point  of 

s.    To  enter  Rock 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


149 


Harbor:  Rock  Harbor  is  13  miles  from  Blake's  Point;  there  is  a 
deep  passage  from  the  harbor,  inside  a  number  of  small  islands,  with 
two  or  three  passages  into  the  lake,  besides  the  one  leading  into  Rock 
harbor.  Excellent  holding  ground  in  the  harbor,- SW  of  the  lighthouse, 
in  10  to  15  fathoms ;  to  run  in  you  leave  the  light  to  port  and  a  cluster 
of  islands  to  starboard ;  the  channel  is  plain  to  be  seen  in  daylight. 

Harbors  and  Anchorages. 

Rock  harbor  is  a  most  excellent  harbor,  affording  protection  in 
all  winds,  with  good  holding  ground. 

In  Siskiwit  Bay  protection  will  be  found  in  all  winds  except  from 
the  northeast,  with  good  holding  ground  i^  miles  south  of  Wright's 
Island. 

Washington  and  Grace  Harbors  are  good  giving  protection  in  all 
except  southwest  winds,  with  generally  good  holding  ground. 

Todd's  Harbor  .vill  afford  good  protection  except  in  northerly 
winds,  but  care  should  be  taken  to  avoid  the  i  foot  spit  i^  the  middle 
of  the  harbor. 

Tobin's  Harbor  gives  protection  in  all  winds,  with  good  holding 
ground,  but  will  admit  only  vessels  of  small  dimensions  on  account 
of  its  narrow  entrance. 

Good  lees  can  be  found  in  the  many  bays  and  channels  around 
the  northeast  end  of  Isle  Royal. 

Grand  Portage,  Waus-wau-go-ing  and  Pigeon  Bays  afford  good 

protection  in  northerly  and  westerly  winds  with  excellent  holding 

ground. 

Dangers  to  be  avoided. 

The  6  and  12  feet  shoals  ^  and  i  mile  to  the  southwest  and 
south  of  Rock  of  Ages  should  be  avoided ;  also  the  8  and  14  feet 
spits,  one  mile  northwest  of  Rock  of  Ages  should  not  be  approached 
without  due  caution. 

The  south  coast  of  Isle  Royal  from  3iskiwit  Bay  to  the  most 
southern  point  of  Isle  Royal  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than 
two  miles  from  shore,  as  it  abounds  in  ledges  and  rocky  spots,  render- 
ing  this  coast  very  dangerous. 

Three  foot  spit  ^  mile  SW  from  Washington  Island  near  the 
entrance  to  Grace  Harbor.  >   -  ,- 


:^^-^"'  "* 


! 


L    * 

m 


150  ThompsorCs  Coast  Pilot. 

The  coast  from  Washington  Harbor  to  McCargoe's  Cove  shows 
some  detached  rocks  from  %  to  }4  Si  mile  from  shore. 

Three  foot  spit  ^  of  a  mile  WSW  of  Canoe  Rocks. 

Five  foot  shoal  one  mile  east  of  Blake's  Point. 

The  9  feet  reef  2^^  miles  WNW  of  Gull  Islands  should  be 
avoided,  also  the  i  and  3  feet  spits,  }4  a  mile  south  of  Gull  Islands. 

Three  foot  spot  yi  of  a  mile  east  of  Batteau  Rock. 

Foul  ground  within  j/i  a  mile  around  Vright's  Id.  in  Siskiwit  Bay. 

From  Fourteen  Mile  Point  to  La  Poii.t  Lighthouse,  a  spit  extends 
from  Fourteen  Mile  Point  over  half  mile  to  the  northward,  but 
the  rest  of  the  coast  may  be  approached  with  safety  within  half  a  mile. 

Chagwaumegon  Bay. 
In  the  bay  the  12  feet  water  curve  extends  two  miles  westward 
of  Oak  point ;  Bay  City  can  be  approached  within  ys  of  a  mile,  and 
Ashland  within  half  a  mile.    From  Bayfield  to  Point  Detour,  opposite 
Raspberry  Island  light,  the  water  is  deep  close  in. 

From  the  SW  point  of  Mageline  Island. 
/>  4  foot  spit  extends  in  a  southeasterly  direction  for  half  a  mile, 
and  frum  the  NE  point  of  the  same  island,  a  spit  extends  half  a  mile 
towards  the  east.  T'vo  dangerous  spots  lie  J/^  of  a  mile  south  of 
Michigan  Island  Light;  shallow  spots  are  one  mile  north  of  Outer 
Island.  Rocky  Island  and  South  Twin  Island  are  -onnected  by 
shoal  water ;  north  Twin  Island  has  a  spit  extending  half  a  mile  in  a 
southwesterly  direction.  York  Island  has  a  spit  extending  half  a  mile 
to  the  south,  and  the  passage  between  Sand  Island  and  the  Main 
shore  ought  not  to  be  attempted  by  vessels  drawing  more  than  6  feet 
water. 

From  Detour  Station  to  Duluth  Lighthouse,  Pigeon  Point 

and  Isle  Royal. 
The  whole  coast  of  main  shore  can  be  approached  with  safety 
within  one  third  of  a  mile.  At  Isle  Royal  are  many  detached  rocky 
shoals  lying  SSW  and  NW  from  Rock  of  Ages,  1%  miles  distant; 
there  are  also  detached  rocky  shoals  SW  and  north  of  Washington 
Island,  which  must  be  carefully  avoided,  going  in  and  out  of  Wash- 
ington Harbor.  '  ,  ;.,.'v-      ^^ 


irgoe's  Cove  shows 

re. 

Locks. 

Islands  should  be 
h  of  Gull  Islands, 
lock. 

Id.  in  Siskiwit  Bay. 

ouse,  a  spit  extends 

ne  northward,   but 

within  half  a  mile. 


fo  miles  westward 
n  j-i  of  a  mile,  and 
,nt  Detour,  opposite 

Island. 

ion  for  half  a  mile, 

extends  half  a  mile 

of  a  mile  south  of 
lile  north  of  Outer 

are  "onnected  by 
ling  half  a  mile  in  a 
xtending  half  a  mile 
land  and  the  Main 
ng  more  than  6  feet 

ise,  Pigeon  Point 

proached  with  safety 
nany  detached  rocky 
,  i}^  miles  distant; 
orth  of  Washington 
n  and  out  of  Wash- 


ThompsorCs  Coast  Pilot. 


151 


From  White  Fish  Point  to  Grand  Island  Harbor. 

When  I  Yi  miles  north  of  White  Fish  Point  Lighthouse,  steer  W 
^S  for  56  %  miles,  until  Point  au  Sable  bears  south  a  miles ;  thence 
SWbyW  \%yi  miles  to  abreast  of  Grand  Portal,  when  steer  SW  for  the 
harbor,  leaving  the  beacon  light  on  Grand  Portal  300  yards  to  star- 
board, until  the  southeastern  point  of  the  island  is  passed ;  thence 
into  the  bay. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Marquette. 

When  xYz  miles  north  of  White  Fish  Point  Lighthouse,  steer  W 
^S  56^  miles,  to  abreast  of  Point  au  Sable  Lighthouse,  bearing  south 
2  miles;  thence  WbyS  60  miles,  passing  5  miles  north  of  Grand 
Island  Lighthouse. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Portage  Entry. 

When  I  ^  miles  north  of  White  Fish  Point  Lighthouse,  steer  W 
i^N  145  miles,  until  West  Huron  Island  Lighthouse  bears  south  ii^ 
miles ;  thence  W^S  20  miles,  to  abreast  of  Portage  River  Lighthouse, 
^  of  a  mile  from  the  entrance  to  Portage  River  and  Lake.  Range 
the  light  at  entry  and  run  in. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Mendota  or  Lac  La  Belle. 

When  1^  miles  north  of  White  Fish  Point  Lighthouse,  steer WbyN 
^N  146  miles,  passing  four  miles  to  the  north  of  the  day  beacon  on 
Stanard's  Rock,  where  a  lighthouse  is  now  building.  Noting  that 
Mt.  Bohemia  la;  s  on  the  range  until  Mendota  Light  bears  west,  when 
you  run  for  the  cut,  3  miles  distant  ' 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Copper  Harbor. 

When  ij4  miles  north  of  White  Fish  Point  Lighthouse,  steer  W 
byN^N  145  miles,  passing  i^  miles  north  of  Manitou  Island  Light* 
house,  until  abreast  of  Copper  Harbor  Light,  and  on  line  of  range 
lights  for  entering  the  harbor  ;  when  run  in  by  them,  until  you  pass 
the  rocks  which  make  down  from  the  westward ;  then  haul  up  the  bay 
midway  between  the  said  rocks  and  the  mainland ;  when  past  the 
first  point  on  your  port  hand,  run  straight  up  the  bay  to  the  docks. 
The  channel  at  the  turning  point  is  3  to  4  fathoms.        -        .. 


■"""'^^t, 


,^89*"" 


i'^-ii 


¥1 
I' I 

I  i 


Thompsons  Coast  Pilot. 


152 
From  White  Fish  Point  to  Rock  Harbor,  Isle  Royal. 

When  I  Indies  north  of  White  Fish  Point  Lighthouse,  steer 
NWbyW>^W  192  J<  miles,  for  the  old  lighthouse  building,  to  a  point 
/3  of  a  mile  SEbyE>4E  from  the  same,  and  i  mile  north  from  the 
shore,  extending  from  the  west:  thence  NW,  keeping  the  eastern 
point  of  the  small  island,  laying  to  the  SE  from  the  lighthouse,  about 

100  yards  off. 

From  Grand  Island  to  Marquette. 

When  in  line  of  the  range  lights  SbyEj^E,  and  due  west  of 
Grand  Island  Lighthouse,  (or  the  northwestern  point  of  the  island), 
steer  Wi^S  30  miles  to  Marquette. 

From  Marquette  to  Portage  Entry. 

When  one  mile  east  of  Marquette  Lighthouse,  steer  north  4>4 
miles,  until  the  northern  point  of  Presqu'ile  bears  SW  a  miles,  keep- 
ing a  lookout  for  the  rocks  extending  fi  of  a  mile  east  from  the 
north  end  of  Presqu'ile;  when  steer  NW>^N  2a  miles,  until  Big  Bay 
Point  bears  SW  2  miles ;  thence  NWbyW^W  18  miles,  until  Huron 
Island  Lighthouse  bears  south  i^  miles ;  thence  WJ^S  ao  miles  to 
Portage  Entry  Lighthouse,  ^  mile  distant. 

From  Marquette  to  Manitou  Island  Passage. 
When  one  mile  east  of  Marquette  lighthouse  steer  north  4>^ 
miles  until  the  north  point  of  Prcsque  Isle  bears  SW  2  miles;  thence 
NbyW>4W  s^yi  miles,  leaving  Granite  Island  lighthouse  half  a 
mile  west,  until  Gull  Rock  lighthouse  bears  NE  i  j4  miles  distant ;  then 
shape  your  course  along  shore  for  Copper  Harbor. 

From  Portage  River  to  Manitou  Passage. 
When  a  miles  ESE  from  Portege  Point  lighthr'se  steer  NE>iC E  45 
miles  to  a  point  in  midchannel  ij4  miles  from  Gull  Rock  Island 
lighthouse,  and  run  through  the  passage. 

From  Manitou  Passage  to  Ontonagon   and  Intermediate 

Points. 

When  1  yi  miles  SW  from  Gull  Rock  lighthouse  follow  around  the 
coast,  at  a  distance  of  one  mile,  for  33  miles,  to  a  point  bearing  NW 


di«P"»'^- 


r,  Isle  Royal. 

Lighthouse,  steer 
iiilding,  to  a  point 
lile  north  from  the 
seping  the  eastern 
le  lighthouse,  about 

ette. 

E,  and  due  west  of 

}int  of  the  island), 

intry. 

e,  steer  north  4)4 
s  SW  a  miles,  keep- 
mile  east  from  the 
niles,  until  Big  Bay 
{  miles,  until  Huron 
ce  WJ^S  ao  miles  to 

d  Passage. 
use  steer  north  4)^ 
SW  3  miles;  thence 
d  lighthouse   half  a 
Smiles  distant;  then 

,  Passage. 

o-'se  steer  NE>i(E  4S 
1  Gull  Rock  Island 

and  Intermediate 

•use  follow  around  the 
I  a  point  bearing  NW 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


153 


from  Eagle  River  lighthouse,  distant  2  miles;  thence  SWj^W  to 
abreast  of  Ontonagon  harbor.  Range  the  piers  and  run  in  depth  of 
water  1 1  feet  and  variable. 

From  Copper  Harbor  to  Rock  Harbor,  Isle  Royal. 
When  one  mile  north  of  Copper  Harbor  lighthouse,  and  on  the 
line  of  the  range  lights,  steer  NWj^N  53  miles,  to  a  point  SEbyE^ 
E,  J^  of  a  mile  from  the  old  lighthouse  building  on  Isle  Royal,  and 
I  mile  north  from  the  shore  extending  west,  when  steer  NW,  keeping 
the  eastern  end  of  the  small  island  laying  SE  from  the  old  lighthouse 
building  about  100  yards  off. 

V   From  Eagle  Harbor  to  Rock  Harbor. 

When  north  of  Eagle  Harbor  lighthouse,  and  in  line  of  the  tar- 
get and  the  cleft  in  rock,  steer  NNW  47  miles  to  the  point  as  above. 
From  Eagle  River  to  Rock  Harbor,  Isle  Royal. 

When  tiiles  north  of  the  dock  at  Eagle  River,  steer  N  by W  «4 
W  46  miles,  . .  a  point  as  above. 

From  Ontonagon  Round  Isle  Royal  to  Rock  Harbor. 

When  clear  of  Ontonagon  Harbor  steer  N^W  67;^  miles,  until 
Rock  of  Ages  bears  due  east  j  miles ;  thence  NE  by  E  48  miles,  until 
the  southern  point  of  Passage  Island  bears  east,  when  steer  due  east  3 
miles,  until  Blake's  Point  bears  S  by  W,  then  steer  due  south  3  miles, 
keeping  sharp  lookout  for  the  spot  with  five  feet  water  on  it.  laying  ^ 
mile  east  from  Blake's  Point,  until  Rock  H  rbor  Is  fairly  opened  ; 
thence  run  up  and  into  the  harbor  as  above  described. 

Dangers. 

Near  Grand  Island,  opposite  the  Beacon  Light,  of  Grand  Island, 
a  sandy  spit,  from  Sand  Point  to  the  north,  and  ^  of  a  mile  to  the 
NW,  with  but  5  feet  water.  ^    ' 

From  the  southwest  point  of  Grand  Island  there  extends  a  sand 
sp't  in  a  SW  direction,  for  almost  half  a  mile,  with  5  feet  water.  There 
are  numerous  rocks  and  sand  spits  between  the  south  point  of  Wil- 
liams' Island  and  the  main  shore  to  the  south  of  it,  on  which  there 
are  but  8  and  10  feet  water,  making  it  dangerous  for  vessels  drawing 
over  8  feet  to  attempt  to  pass  between  Williams'  Island  and  the  main 
.shore. 


t'-i-,.:!. 


I  54  Thompson* s  Coast  Pilot. 

From  Grand  Island  to  Point  Abbaye  there  are  spits  extending 
from  Laughing  Fish  Point  and  Shot  Point,  both  in  a  northern  direc 
tion,  for  half  a  miie ;  east  from  Marquette  lighthouse  %  mile  are 
locks  ar.d  ahoal  water ;  /a  of  a  mile  from  the  northern  end  of  Presque 
Isle  are  rocks  running  parallel  with  the  coast.  A  spit  extends  half  a  mile 
to  the  north  from  a  point  one  mile  east  from  Little  Iron  River.  From 
Big  Bay  Point  a  dangerous  spit,  with  only  8  feet  water,  extends  one 
mile  to  the  north.  A  large  shoal  extending  i>4  miles  NE  from  Huron 
River  Point,  has  to  be  carefully  avoided,  as  also  a  7  feet  shoal  lying  i 
miles  east  from  Point  Abbaye. 

From  Point  Abbaye  to  Keweenaw  Point. 
From  Pe  qua-qua-wa-ming  Point  extends  a  spit  to  the  SW.  A 
flat  fills  up  most  of  the  bay  of  Portage  Entry.  Shoal  water  extends 
for  a  mile  to  the  south,  to  the  east  and  to  the  north  from  Point  Isa- 
belle.  There  is  a  3  foot  spot  a  quarter  of  a  mile  south  of  Keweenaw 
Point.         From  Keweenaw  Point  to  Ontonogan. 

A  rocky  flat  extends  from  Manitou  Island  to  Gull  Rock  light- 
house, and  for  half  a  mile  to  the  NW.  From  Eagle  Harbor  to  Eagle 
River'a  succession  of  reefs  extends  along  the  coast  in  a  southwestern 
direction,  from  yi  to  ?<  of  a  mile  distant.  One  mile  north  of  Portage 
is  a  spit  extendmg  >4  mile  to  the  north.  From  Fourteen  Mile  Pomt 
also  extends  a  spit  to  the  north  for  yi  a  mile. 

Isle   Royal  and  Vicinity. 
There  are  many  detached  rocks  lying  SW,  south  and  NE  from 
Washington  Island,  which  must  be  carefully  avoided  going  in  or  out 
from  Washington  Harbor  or  Grace  Harbor.     Siscowit  Bay  has  a  dou- 
ble set  of  islets,  stretching  for  8  miles  in  the  general  direction  of  the 
south  shore  of  the  island,  connected  by  hidden  reefs,  and  having  also 
some  reefs  outside  of  the  islets.      No  attempt  ought  to  be  made  to 
enter  between  these  islets.    The  north  shore  of  Isle  Royal  can  be  ap- 
proached with  safely  within  half  a  mile  in  the  general  direction  of  the 
coast.    There  is  a  reef  >^  a  mile  south  of  Gull  Island,  and  a  danger- 
ous spot  lies  >^  of  a  mile  east  from  Batteau  Rock.     East  from  Blake's 
Point,  ?<  of  a  mile  distant,  is  a  5  foot  spot,  for  which  a  sharp  lookout 
has  to  be  kept  in  entering  or  leaving  the  eastern  entrance  of  Rock 
Harbor. 


m 
th 


are  spits  extending 
in  a  northern  direc- 
ithouse  j{  mile  are 
hern  end  of  Presqiie 
t  extends  half  a  mile 
Iron  River.  From 
water,  extends  one 
iles  NEfrom  Huron 
,  7  feet  shoal  lying  2 

w  Point. 

pit  to  the  SW.  A 
shoal  water  extends 
rth  from  Point  Isa- 
south  of  Keweenaw 
onogan. 

to  Gull  Rock  light- 
gle  Harbor  to  Eagle 
St  in  a  southwestern 
mile  north  of  Portage 
Fourteen  Mile  Point 


louth  and  NE  from 
ded  going  in  or  out 
cowit  Bay  has  a  dou- 
eral  direction  of  the 
eefs,  and  having  also 
ught  to  be  made  to 
Isle  Royal  can  be  ap- 
eneral  direction  of  the 
island,  and  a  danger- 
It.  East  from  Blake's 
irhich  a  sharp  lookout 
n  entrance  of  Rock 


Canada  Side  of  Lake  Superior. 


Corbay  Point,  Bachewana  Bay,  40  miles  above  the  Soo  Canal,  a 
fixed  white  light,  visible  20  miles,  height  of  tower,  63  feet,  height  of 
land,  ibout  46  feet.    Tower  octagonal,  wood,  with  dwelling  attached. 

Michipicoton  Island  Lighthouse. 
On  South  Point,  fixed  white,  visible  18  miles,  56  feet  above  lake 
level,  white  square  wooden  tower.     A  fog  bell  is  placed  at  this  station. 

Agate  Island  Lighthouse. 

In  Quebec  Harbor,  near  Michipicoton  Harbor,  a  guide  to  enter 
the  harbor.  Tower,  white  square  wood,  visible  10  miles,  32  feet 
above  lake  level. 

Battle  Island  Lighthouse,  entrance  to  Nepigor  Bay,  in  course  of 

construction. 

Lamb  Island  Lighthouse,   entrance  to  Nepigon  Bay,  in  course  of 

construction. 

Porphyry  Point. 

Entrance  to  Black  Bay,  Edward  Island,  Algoma,  a  fixed  white 
light,  visible  16  miles,  56  feet  above  lake  level.  This  light  is  for 
general  purposes  of  navigation,  and  for  guiding  vessels  to  Silver  Island 
and  Black  Bay. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  Cape  Thunder. 

And  to  Fort  William,  NWbyW^W,  iSp.miles,  to  Blake's  Point, 
bearing  SbyW  3  miles.  Thence  Wby  N  28^  miles,  to  Cape  Thunder 
light,  bearing  N  E  2  miles;  thence  NW  20  miles,  to  Prince  Arthur's 
Landing  If  bound  to  Fort  \  VUiam,  run  on  your  NW  course  loi^ 
miles,  till  the  north  end  of  East  Welcome  Island  bears  west  2  miles; 
thence  WbyN^N,  5  miles,  or  until  you  drop  into  2}^  fathoms  water. 


■-ir»?*fflK: 


.;^^- 


^,1 


156 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


then  bring  the  lights  in  range  at  the  mouth  of  Kaministiquia  Rive  r, 
and  run  in  on  range  until  the  river  is  entered,  leaving  a  sunken  crib 
outside,  to  starboard,  with  a  red  flag  on  it.  Eleven  feet  over  bar  and 
plenty  of  water  up  river. 

Prince  Arthur's  Landing. 

Is  3  miles  from  Fort  William  and  20  miles  NVV  from  Cape  Thun- 
der light,  has  an  excellent  dock  running  out  from  the  town  ESE  and 
VVNW,  with  an  angle  to  the  same  running  NNE  and  SSW,  with  the 
corner  squared  off.  There  are  3  ligiits— green  close  in  shore  on  the 
pier,  and  red  on  the  corner  of  the  ESE  pier,  and  a  white  light  on  the 
end  of  the  NNE  pier.  In  runnmg  for  the  landing,  bring  the  red  and 
green  lights  in  range,  and  run  up  to  the  pier ;  14  to  16  feet  water. 
This  is  one  of  the  best  constructed  wooden  piers  in  the  country,  and  the 
town  is  quite  a  lively  place. 

Cape  Thunder  Lighthouse,  Algoma. 

This  light  is  on  the  low  point  under  the  cape,  which  is  1,350  feet 
high.  Is  a  flash  light,  visible  13  miles,  45  feet  above  lake  level,  and 
is  a  white,  square  tower.  Hare  Island  lies  2  miles  NW  from  Cape 
Thunder  lighthouse.  You  leave  it  to  starboard  2  miles,  on  your  course 
to  the  landing. 


pl< 
Ni 
sts 


St£ 

M 


pi 

StJ 

P( 

Ai 
sa 


be 


a. 


ministiquia  River, 
ing  a  sunken  crib 
k  feet  over  bar  and 


/  from  Cape  Thun- 
;he  town  ESE  and 
id  SSW,  with  the 
le  in  shore  on  the 
white  light  on  the 
bring  the  red  and 
to  1 6  feet  water, 
le  country,  and  the 

roma. 

which  is  1,350  feet 
ive  lake  level,  and 
es  NW  from  Cape 
liles,  on  your  course 


Life    Saving  Stations. 


On  the  Coast  of  Lake  Ontario. 

Mexico  Bay,  about  seven  miles  westward  of  Stony  Point,  a  com- 
plete life-saving  station  ;  Mexico  Bay,  about  seven  miles  eastward  of 
Nine  Mile  Point,  a  complete  life  saving  station  ;  Oswego,  a  life-boat 
station  ;  Charlotte,  a  life-boat  station. 

On  the  Coast  of  Lake  Erie. 

Buffalo,  a  life-boat  station ;  Prcsqu'ile,  a  complete  life  saving 
station;  Fairport,  a  life-boat  station;  Cleveland,  a  life-boat  station; 
Marblehead,  (Sandusky,)  a  life-boat  station. 

On  the  Coast  of  Lake  Huron. 

Point  aux  Barques,  a  complete  life-saving  station  ;  Tawas,  a  com- 
plete life-saving  station ;  Sturgeon  Point,  a  complete  life-saving 
station ;  North  Point,  Thunder  Bay,  a  life-boat  station ;  Forty  Mile 
Point,  a  complete  life-saving  station  ;  Old  Point  au  Barques,  near  Port 
Austin,  a  complete  life-saving  station  ;  Middle  Island,  a  complete  life- 
saving  station  ,  Sand  Beech,  a  life-boat  station. 

On  the  Coast  of  Lake  Michigan. 

Beaver  Island,  a  life  boat  station ;  North  Manitou  Island,  a  life- 
boat station;  Point  aux  Bee  Scies,  a  complete  life-saving  station; 
Grand  Point  au  Sauble,  a  complete  life-saving  station  ;  Grand  Haven, 
a  life-boat  station ;  Saint  Joseph's,  a  life-boat  station  ;  Chicago,  a  life- 
boat station  ;  Grosse  Point,  a  complete  life-saving  station ;  Racine,  a 
life-boat  station ;  Milwaukee,  a  life-boat  station ;  Sheboygan,  a  life- 
boat station ;  Twin  Rivers  Point,  a  life-boat  station ;  Sleeping  Bear 
Point,  a  complete  life-saving  station ;  Bayley's  Harbor,  a  complete 
life-saving  station ;  Kenosha,  a  life-boat  station  ;  Muskegon,  a  life- 
boat station. 


..*«<>85^, 


:ij 


158 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


On  the  Coast  of  Lake  Superior. 

Between  White  Fish  Point  and  Point  au  Sauble,  four  complete 
life-saving  stations. 

Note  — A  red  coston  light  is  used  at  the  stations,  to  let  those  on 
board  a  wreck  know  that  their  peril  is  understood,  also  by  building 
a  fire  on  shore  indicates  the  same.  At  each  of  the  houses  of  refuge, 
the  nature  of  the  coast  not  requiring  the  usual  life-saving  appliances, 
a  keeper  is  only  employed,  who  resides  there  with  his  family.  These 
houses  are  furnished  with  accommodations  and  provisions  for  the 
succor  and  maintenance  of  persons  cast  ashore,  until  they  are  able  to 
leave  the  station. 


.jr— ■ 


le,  four  complete 

ns,  to  let  those  on 
,  also  by  building 
houses  of  refuge, 
saving  appliances, 
lis  family.  These 
provisions  for  the 
til  they  are  able  to 


Explantion  of  Nautical  Terms. 


Aback  j  the  situation  of  the  sails  when  their  surfkcei  are  prewed  aft  against 
the  mast  by  the  force  of  the  wind. 

Abaft,  «t  aft;  the  stc-nmoet  part  of  the  ship.  Carry  aft  anything ;  that  Is, 
carry  towards  the  stern.  The  mast  rakes  aft;  that  is  hangs  towards  the  stern. 
"  I/»w  cheer  ye  fore  and  aft  f"  that  Is,  how  fares  all  the  ship's  company  ? 

Abaft  the  beam,  denotes  the  rrlative  .ituation  of  any  object  with  the  ship, 
when  the  object  Is  placed  in  ■  '  part  of  'hat  arc  of  the  horizon  which  is  contained 
between  a  line  at  right  angles  with  the  Kcel,  and  th  ,  point  o>  the  compass  which 
Is  directly  opposite  the  ship's  course.     See  Bearing 

Aboard;  the  inside  of  a  ship.  "  Aboard  t^i  nun  lack  /"  the  order  to  draw 
the  lower  corner  of  the  mainsail  dowr  '->  the  chesi-tree. 

About;    the  situation  of  a  ship    i  'o.  n  as  she  has  tnci.  -i,  or  changed  her 


course. 


"  About  ship  !  "  the  order  to  the  ship's  crew  to  prepare  for  tacking. 

Abreast;  the  situation  of  two  or  more  ships,  lying  with  their  sides  parallel, 
and  their  heads  equally  advanced  ;  in  which  case  they  are  abreast  of  each  other. 

Adrift ;  the  slate  of  a  ship  broken  from  her  moorings,  and  driving  about 
without  control. 

Afloat :  buoyed  up  by  the  water  from  the  ground. 

Afore ;  all  that  part  of  a  ship  which  lies  forward,  or  near  the  stem.  It  also 
signifies  farther  forward. 

After ;  a  phrase  applied  to  any  object  in  the  hinder  part  of  the  ship,  as  the 
after- hatchway,  the  after-sails,  etc. 

Aground  ;  the  situation  of  a  ship  when  her  bottom,  or  any  part  of  It,  rests 
on  the  grofind. 

Ahead;  anythuig  -vhlch  Is  situated  on  that  point  of  the  compass  to  which  a 
ship's  stem  is  directed,  is  said  to  be  ahead  of  her.  .  See  Bearing. 

Ahull ;  the  situation  of  a  ship  when  all  her  sails  are  furled,  and  her  helm  U 
lashed  to  the  ice  side;  by  which  she  lies  nearly  with  her  side  to  the  wind  and  sea, 
and  her  h^iaci  being  somewhat  inclined  to  the  direction  of  the  wind. 

A-lee;  the  position  of  the  helm  when  It  Is  put  down  to  the  lee  side. 

All  in  the  wind;  the  state  of  a  ship's  sails  when  they  are  parallel  to  the 
direction  of  the  wind,  so  as  to  shake  or  shiver. 


■.-.■=~„s^. 


d 


i6o 


ThompsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


"  All  hands  ahoy  I "  the  call  by   which  all  the  ship's  company  is  summoned 
upon  deck. 

Aloft;  up  in  the   tops,  at  the  mast-heads,  or  anywhere  above  the  higher 

rigging. 

Alongside  ;  side  by  side,  or  joined  to  a  ship,  wharf,  etc. 
Along  shote;  iljng  the  coast ;  a  course  which  is  in  sight  of  the  shore,  and 
nearly  parallel  to  it. 

Aloof;    at  a  distance.       Keep  aloof;    that  is,  keep  at  a  distance. 
Amain  ;  the  old  term  for  yield,  used  by  a  man  of- war  to  an  enemy ;  but  it 
now  signifies  anything  done  suddenly,  or  at  once,  by  a  number  of  men. 

Amidships;  the  middle  of  a  ship,  either  with  regard  to  her  length  or  breadth. 

Anchor;  the  instrument  by  which  a  ship  is  held.       The  anchor  is  foul ;  that 

is,  the  cable  has  got  about  the  fluke  of  the  anchor.       The  anchor  is  a  peak;  that 

is,  directly  under  the  hawse-hole  of  the  ship.       The  anchor  is  a- cock-bill ;  that  is, 

hangs  up  and  down  the  ship's  side. 

An  end ;  the  position  of  any  mast,  etc.,  when  erected  pet  jendicularly  on  the 
deck.  The  top-masts  are  said  to  be  an-end  when  they  are  hoisted  up  to  their 
usual  station. 

A-peak  ;  perpendicular  to  the  anchor,  the  cable  having  been  drawn   so  tight 
as  to  bring  the  ship  directly  over  it.      The  anchor  is  then  said  to  be  n-peak. 
Ashore  ;  on  the  shore,  as  opposed  to  aboard.     It  also  means  aground. 
Astern  ;  any  distance  behind  a  ship,  as  opposed  to  ahead.     See  Bearing. 
At  anchor  ;  the  situation  of  a  ship  riding  by  her  anchor. 
Athwart;  across  the  line  of  a  ship's  course.       Athwart  hawse  ;  the  situation 
of  a  ship  when  driven  by  accident  across  the  fore  part  of  another,  whether  they 
touch   or   at  a    short   distance  from  each  other ;  the  transverse  position  of  the 
former  being  principally  understood.       Athwart  the  fore-foot;  when  any  object 
crosses  the  line  of  a  ship's  course,  but  ahead  of  her,  it  is  said  to  be  athwart  the 
forefoot.    Athwart-ships  ;    reaching,  or  in  a  direction,  across  the  ship  from  one 
side  to  the  other. 

Attip  ;  when  applied  to  the  anchor,  it  means  that  the  anchor  is  drawn  out  of 
the  ground,  and  hangs  in  a  perpendicular  direction,  by  the  cable  or  buoy.rope. 
The  topsails  are  said  to  be  atrip  when  they  are  hoisted  up  to  the  mast-head,  or  to 
their  utmost  extent. 

"Avast!"  a  term  used  for  Stop  f  or  .Stay  I  as  "  Avast  heaving  I "  do   not 

heave  any  more. 

Aweigh  ;  the  same  as  atrip,  when  applied  to  the  anchor. 

Awning;  a  shelter  or  screen  of  canvas,  spread  over  the  decks  of  ships,  to 
keep  off  the  heat  of  the  sun.  Spread  the  awning;  extend  it  so  as  f-  cover  the 
deck,     furl  the  awning;  that  is,  roll  it  up. 


■'^4*^-5. 


company  is  summoned 
lere  above  the  higher 

ght  of  the  shore,  and 

t  distance. 

'  to  an  enemy ;  but  it 

ber  of  men. 

her  length  or  breadth. 

\e  anchor  it  foul;  that 

anchor  is  a  peak;  that 

r  is  acockbill;  that  is, 

pet  jendicularly  on  the 
re  hoisted  up  to  their 

g  been  drawn   so  tight 
said  to  be  a-peak. 
means  aground, 
•ad.     See  Bearing. 
or. 

■t  hawse  ;  the  situation 
another,  whether  they 
nsverse  position  of  the 
foot;  when  any  object 
said  to  be  athwart  the 
ross  the  ship  from  one 

:  anchor  is  drawn  out  of 
lie  cable  or  buoy.rope. 
to  the  mast-head,  or  to 

vast  heaving/'*  do   not 

jr. 

r  the  decks  of  ships,  to 
nd  it  so  as  t''  cover  the 


ThompsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


i6i 


To  Back  the  Anchor  ;  to  carry  out  a  small  anchor  ahead  of  the  large  one, 
in  order  to  support  it  in  bad  ground,  and  to  prevent  it  from  loosening  or  coming 
home. 

To  back  astern,  in  rowing,  is  to  impel  the  boat  with  her  -stern  foremost,  by 
means  of  the  oars. 

To  back  the  sails  ;  to  arrange  them  in  a  situation  which  will  occasion  the  ship 
to  move  astern. 

To  bagpipe  the  mizien ;  to  lay  it  aback,  by  bringing  the  sheet  to  the  mizzen 
shrouds. 

To  balance  ;  To  contract  a  sail  into  a  narrower  compass,  by  folding  up  a  part 
at  one  corner.  Balancing  is  peculiar  only  to  the  mizzen  of  a  ship,  and  the  main- 
sail of  those  vessels  wherein  it  is  extended  by  a  boom. 

Bale— Bale  the  boat;  that  is,  throw  the  water  out  of  her. 
^fl//<M/ is  either  pigs  of  iron,  stones,  or  gravel,  which  last  is  called  shingle 
ballast;  and  its  use  is  to  bring  the  ship  down  to  her  bearings  in  the  water,  which 
her  provisions  and  stores  will  not  do.  Trim  the  ballast  ;  that  is,  spread  it  about, 
and  lay  it  even.  The  ballast  shoots  ;  that  is,  it  shifts,  or  runs  over  from  one  side 
of  the  hold  to  the  other. 

Bate  poles;  when  a  ship  has  no  sail  set,  she  is  under  bare  poles. 
Barge  ;  a  caravel-built  boat,  that  rows  with  ten  or  twelve  oars. 
Batten  ;  a  thin  piece  of  wood.       Batten  down  the  hatches,  is  to  lay  battens 
upon  the  tarpaulins,  which  are  over  the  hatches  in  bad  weather,   and  nail  them 
down,  that  they  may  not  be  washed  off. 

Beacon,  a  post  or  stake  erected  over  a  shoal  or  sand-bank,  as  a  warning  to 
seamen  to  keep  at  a  distance  ;  also,  a  signal  placed  at  the  top  of  hills,  etc. 

Beams,  strong  pieces  of  timber,  stretching  across  a  ship  from  side  to  side,  to 
support  the  decks,  and  retain  the  sides  at  their  proper  distance. 
"^Mr  a  Ao(»<// "  make  haste,  dispatch. 

^^<»n»^  signifies  the  point  of  the  compass  which  any  two  or  more  places  bear 
from  each  other,  or  how  any  place  bears  from  the  ship  by  the  compass ;  or  it  may 
be  said  to  liear  on  the  beam,  abaft  the  beam,  on  the  bow,  the  head,  or  stem,  etc. 
Bearings  of  a  ship,  are  that  line  which  is  formed  by  the  water  upon  her  sides 
when  she  is  at  anchor,  with  her  proportion  of  ballast  and  stores  on   board.       To 
bear  to,  is  tq  sail  into  a  harbor,  etc.      Bear  round  up,  that  is,  put  her  right  before 
the  wind.       ^r»«^^<»Mr^4»j  to  iwr,  is  to  point  them  to  the  object. 
To  bear  in  with  the  land,  is  when  a  ship  sails  tpward  the  shore. 
To  bear  off,  to  thrust  or  keep  off  from  the  ship's  side,  etc.,  any  weight,  when 
hoisting.    ' 

Beating  up,  or  bearing  away,  the  act  of  changing  the  course  of  a  ship,  in  order 
to  make  her  run  before  the  wind,  after  she  has  sailed  some  time  with  a  side  wind, 
or  close-hauled.  It  is  generally  performed  to  arrive  at  some  port  under  the  lea, 
or  to  avoid  some  imminent  danger,  occasioned  by  a  violent  storm,  leak,  or  enemy 
in  sight. 


■ir 
Si" 


■m^ 


1 62 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


Beating  to  windiuard,  the  making  a  progress  against  the  direction  of  the  wind, 
by  stee.ing  alternately  close-hauled  on  the  starboard  and  port  tacks. 

To  becalm,  to  intercept  the  current  of  the  wind,  in  its  passage  to  a  ship,  by 
any  contiguous  object,  as  a  shore  above  her  sails,  a  high  sea  behind,  etc.,  and 
thus  one  sail  is  said  to  becalm  another. 

Before  the  beam,  denotes  an  arc  of  the  horizon  comprehended  between  the  line 
of  the  beam,  which  is  at  right  angles  to  the  keel,  and  that  point  of  the  compass 
on  which  the  ship  stems.       See  Bearing, 

Belay,  to  make  fast  any  running  rope,  as,  Belay  the  main  brace,  or,  make  it 

fast 

Bend,  to  apply  to,  and  fasten;  as.  Bend  the  jr*— apply  them   to  the  yards 

and  fasten  them.       Unbend  the  sails,  that  is,  cast  them  off,  and  take  them  from  the 

yards.       Her  sails  art  unbent,  she  has  none  fixed.      Bend  the  cable,  make  it   fast 

to  the  anchor. 

Beneaped.      See  Neaped, 

Birth;  a  place;  as  the  ship's  berth,  the  place  where  she  is  moored.— Ww  offi- 
cer's berth;  his  place  in  the  ship  to  eat  or  sleep  m.— Berth  the  ship's  company; 
that  is,  allot  to  them  their  places  to  mess  in,— Berth  the  hammocks  ;  point  or' 
where  each  man's  hammock  is  to  hang. 

Between  decks,  the  space  contained  between  any  two  decks  of  a  ship. 

Bight  of  a  rope;  the  double  part  of  a  rope  when  it  is  ioXAeA,— Bight ;  a  nar- 

row  inlet  of  the  sea. 

Bilge;  lohK2\i,—  Theship  is  bilged;  that  is,  her  planks  are  broken  in  by 

violence. 

Bilge-water  is  that  which,  by  reason  of  the  flatness  of  the  ship's  bottom,  lies 

on  her  floor,  and  cannot  go  to  the  well  of  the  pump. 

Binnacle;  a  kind  of  box  to  contain  the  compasses  in  upon  deck. 

Bitts  ;  very  large  pieces  of  timber  in  the  fore  part  of  a  ship,  round  which  the 
cables  are  fastened  when  the  ship  is  at  mchox,—After.bitts;  a  smaller  kind  of 
bitts  upon  the  quarter-deck,  for  belaying  the  running  rigging  to. 

7b3»«M^<^a*/^.  is  tocontine  thecable  to  the  bitts  by  one  turn  under  th? 
cross-piece,  and  another  turn  round  the  billhead.  In  this  position  it  may  be 
either  kept  fixed,  or  it  may  be  veered  away. 

Bitter;  the  turn  of  the  cable  round  the  h\\i%.—Bitterend ;  that  part  of  the  ca- 
ble  which  stays  within  board,  round  about  the  bitts,  when  'he  ship  is  at  anchor. 

Block  ;  a  piece  of  wood  with  running  sheaves  or  wheels  in  it,  through  which 
the  running  rigging  is  passed,  to  add  to  the  purchase. 

Board;  to  board  a  ship  is  to  enter  it  in  a  hostile  manner,  to  enter  a  ship. 

Board;  to  make  a  board  is  making  a  stretch  upon  any  tack,  when  a  ship  is 
working  upon  a  wind.— 7>  board  it  up  ;  that  is,  to  turn  to  windward.— r-i^  ship 
has  made  a  stern  board;  that  is,  when  she  loses  ground  in  working  upon  a  wind. 

Boatswain ;  the  officer  who  has  charge  of  all  the  cordage,  rigging,  anchors, 
•tfc 


^^^^ 


direction  of  the  wind  , 
rt  tacks. 

assnge  to  a  ship,  by 
;a  behind,  etc.,   and 

™ded  between  the  line 
)oint  of  the  compass 

i»  brace,  or,  make  it 

'  them  to  the  yards 
id  take  them  from  the 
he  cable,  make  it   fast 


is  moored. — An  offU 

the  ship^s  company; 

hammocks ;  point  o'-' 

;ks  of  a  ship. 
AAeA.— Bight ;  a  nar- 
ks are  broken  in  by 
le  ship's  bottom,  lies 

3n  deck, 

ship,  round  which  the 
;;  a  smaller  kind  of 
r  to. 

one  turn   under  th; 
s  position  it  may  be 

d;  that  part  of  the  ca- 
he  ship  is  at  anchor. 
}  in  it,  through  which 

er,  to  enter  a  ship, 
tack,   when  a  ship  is 
windward. —  The  ship 
working  upon  a  wind, 
lage,  rigging,  anchors, 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


163 


Bold-shore;  a  steep  coast,  permitting  the  close  approach  of  shipping. 

Bolt-rope ;  the  rope  which  goes  round  a  sail,  and  to  which  the  canvas  is 
sewed.  The  side  ropes  are  called  leach-ropes  ;  that  .it  the  top,  the  head-rope  ;  and 
that  at  the  bottom,  \.hc  foot-rope. 

Bonnet  of  a  sail  is  an  additional  piece  of  canvas,  put  to  the  sail  in  moderate 
weather,  to  hold  more  wind. — Lace  on  the  bonnet;  that  is,  fasten  it  to  the  sail, — 
Shake  of  the  bonnet;  take  it  off. 

Boot-topping;  cleaning  the  upper  part  of  a  ship's  bottom,  or  that  part  which 
lies  immediately  under  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  daubing  it  over  with  tallow, 
or  with  a  mixture  of  tallow,  sulphur,  resin,  etc. 

Both  sheets  aft;  the  situation  of  a  ship  sailing  right  before  the  wind. 

Bow-grace ;  a  frame  of  old  rope  or  junk,  laid  out  at  the  bows,  stems,  and 
sides  of  ships,  to  prevent  them  being  injured  by  flakes  of  ice. 

Bowlines ;  lines  made  fast  to  the  sides  of  the  sails,  to  haul  them  forward 
when  upon  a  wind,  which,  being  hauled  taut,  enable  the  ship  to  come  nearer  to 

the  wind. 

To  bowse  ;  to  pull  upon  any  body  with  a  tackle,  in  order  to  remove  it. 
Bowsprit;  a  large  mast  or  piece  of  timber  which  stands  out  from  the  bows 

of  a  ship. 

Boxhauling;  a  particular  method  of  veering  a  ship,  when  the  swell  of  the 

sea  renders  tacking  impracticable. 

Boxing  ;  an  operation  somewhat  similar  to  boxhauling.  It  is  performed  by 
laying  the  head  sails  aback,  to  receive  the  greatest  force  of  the  wind  in  a  line 
perpendicular  to  their  surface,  in  order  to  turn  the  ship's  head  into  the  line  of  her 
course,  after  she  has  inclined  to  the  windward  of  it. 

Braces  ;  the  ropes  by  which  the  yards  are  turned  about,  to  form  the  sails  to 
the  wind. 

To  brace  the  yards;  to  move  the  yards,  by  means  of  the  braces,  to  any  direc- 
tion required,— ?b  brace  about ;  to  brace  the  yards  round  for  the  contrary  tack. — 
To  brace  sharp;  to  brace  the  yards  to  a  position  in  which  they  will  make  the 
smallest  possible  angle  with  the  keel,  for  the  ship  to  have  headway.—  To  brace  to  ; 
to  ease  off  the  lee  braces,  and  round  in  the  weather  braces,  to  assist  the  motion 
of  the  ship's  head  in  taking. 

Brails  ,•  a  name  peculiar  only  to  certain  ropes  belonging  to  the  mizzen,  used 
to  truss  it  up  to  the  mast ;  but  it  is  likewise  applied  to  all  the  ropes  which  are 
employed  in  hauling  up  the  bottoms,  lower  corners,  and  skirts  of  the  other  great 
sails. —  To  brail  up  ;  to  haul  up  a  sail  by  means  of  the  brails,  for  the  more  ready 
furling  it  when  necessary. 

To  break  bulk  ;  to  begin  to  unload  a  ship. 

To  break  sheer.  When  a  ship  at  anchor  is  forced  by  the  wind  or  current,  from 
that  position  in  which  she  keeps  her  anchor  most  free  of  herself,  and  most  firm 
in  the  ground,  so  as  to  endanger  the  tripping  of  her  anchor,  she  is  said  to  break 
her  shttr. 


1 


'"I 


1 64 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


Breaming,  burning  off  the  filth  from  a  ship's  boltora. 

Breastfasl,  a  rope  employed  to  confine  a  ship  sideway.  to  a  wharf,  or  to  some 

other  ship, 

T:>  Mng  by  the  Ue, — See  To  broach  to. 

To  bring  to,  to  check  the  course  of  a  ship  when  she  is  advancing,  by  arranging 
the  sails  in  such  a  manner  that  they  shall  counteract  each  other,  and  prevent  her 
from  either  retreating  or  advancing.— See  To  lie  to. 

To  broach  to,  to  incline  suddenly  to  windward  of  the  ship's  course,  so  as  to 
present  her  side  to  the  wind,  and  endanger  her  oversetting.  The  diflference 
between  broaching  to  and  bringing  by  the  lee  n..y  be  thus  defined  :  Suppose  a 
ship,  under  great  sail,  is  steering  south,  having  the  wind  at  NNW;  then  west  is 
the  weather  side  and  east  the  lee  side.  If,  by  any  accident,  her  head  turns 
round  to  the  westward,  so  that  her  sails  are  all  taken  aba  ck  on  the  weather-side, 
she  is  said  to  broach  to.  If,  on  the  contrary,  her  head  declines  so  far  eastward  as 
to  lay  her  sails  aback  on  that  side  which  was  the  lee-side,  it  is  called  bringing 

by  the  lee. 

Broadside,  a  discharge  of  all  the  guns  on  one  side  of  a  ship,  both  .\bove  and 

below. 

Broken-backed,  the  state  of  a  ship   which  is  so  loosened  in  her  frame  as  to 

drop  at  each  end. 

By  the  board,  over  the  ship's  side. 

By  the  head,  the  state  of  a  ship  when  she  is  so  unequally  loaded  as  to  draw 
more  water  forward  than  aft. 

By  the  wind,  the  course  of  a  ship  as  near  as  possible  to  the  direction  of  the 
wind,  which  is  generally  within  six  points  of  it. 

Bunt  lines,  ropes  fastened  to  the  foot-rope  of  square-sails,  to  draw  ihem  up 
to  the  middle  of  the  yards  for  furling. 

Buoy,  a  floating  conical  cask,  moored  npon  shoals,  to  show  where  the  dar.ger 
is ;  it  is  also  attached  to  anchors,  to  show  where  they  lie,  in  case  the  cable  breaks. 

Cap,  a  strong,  thick  block  of  wood,  having  two  large  holes  through  it,  the 
one  square,  the  other  round  ;  used  to  confine  the  two  masts  together. 

Capsize,  overturn.— TVi-r  boat  is  capsized,  that  is,  overset.— Ca/rw*  the  coil  of 
rope,  t'lat  is,  turn  it  over. 

Capstan,  an  instrument  by  which  the  anchor  is  weighed  out  of  the  ground  J 
used  also  for  setting  up  the  shrouds,  and  other  work  where  a  great   purchase  is 

required. 

To  careen,  to  incline  a  ship  on  one  side  so  low  down  by  shifting  the  cargo  or 
stores  on  one  side,  that  her  bottom  on  the  other  side  may  be   cleansed  by 

breaming. 

To  carry  away,  to  break ;  as  A  ship  has  carried  away  her  bowsprit,  that  is, 

has  broken  it  off. 

Casting,  the  motion  of  falling  off,  so  as  to  bring  the  direction  of  the  wind  on 


'\ 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


165 


o  a  wharf,  or  to  some 


Ivancing,  by  arranging 
ilher,  and  prevent  her 

ship's  course,  so  as  to 
ing.  The  difference 
defined :  Suppose  a 
t  NNW;  then  west  is 
dent,  her  head  turns 
[  on  the  weather-side, 
ines  so  far  eastward  as 
!,  it  is  called  bringing 

.  ship,  both  ..'.bove  and 

ed  in  her  frame  as  to 


illy  loaded  as  to  draw 

:o  the  direction  of  the 

lails,  to  driw  ihem  up 

how  where  the  dauger 
1  case  the  cable  breaks. 
>  holes  through  it,  the 
together, 
et. — Capsize  the  toil  of 

ed  out  of  the  ground  > 
e  a  great   purchase  is 

jy  shifting  the  cargo  or 
:  may  be   cleansed  by 

V  ker  bowsprit,  that  is, 

rection  of  the  wind  on 


. 


either  side  of  the  ship,  after  it  has  blown  some  time  right  ahead.     It  is  particu- 
larly  applied  to  a  ship  about  to  weigh  anchor. 

Cat-heads,  the  timbers  on  a  ship's  bows,  with  sheaves  in  them,  by  which  the 
anchor  is  hoisted,  after  it  has  been  hove  up  by  the  cable. 

To  (at  the  anchor,  is  to  hook  the  cat-block  to  the  ring  of  the  anchor,  and  haul 
it  up  close  to  the  cat-head 

Cafs-paw,  is  a  light  air  of  wind  perceived  at  a  distance  in  a  calm,  sweeping 
the  surface  of  the  sea  very  lightly,  and  dying  away  before  it   reaches   the  ship. 

Caulking,  is  filling  the  seams  of  the  ship  with  oakum. 

Center.  This  word  is  applied  to  that  squadron  of  a  fleet,  in  a  line  of  battle, 
which  occupies  the  middle  of  a  line ;  and  to  'hat  column,  in  the  order  of  sailing, 
which  is  between  the  weather  and  lee  columns. 

Chains,  a  place  built  on  the  side  of  a  ship,  projecting  out,  and  at  which  the 
shrouds  are  fastened,  ^or  the  purpose  of  giving  them  a  greater  angle  than  they 
could  have  if  fastened  to  the  ship's  side,  and  of  course  giving  them  a  greater 
power  to  r-eci'.re  the  mast. 

Chain  plates,  are  plates  of  iron  fastened  to  the  ship's  sides  under  the  chains, 
and  to  these  plates  the  dead-eyes  are  fastened. 

Chapeling,  th«*  act  of  turning  a  ship  round  in  a  light  breeze  of  wind,  when 
she  is  close-br^dled,  so  that  she  will  lie  the  same  way  she  did  before.  This  is 
usually  occasioned  by  nej-ligence  in  steering,  or  by  a  sudden  change  of  wind. 

Chase,  a  vessel  pursued  by  some  other.— CArtJ^r,  the  vessel  pursuing. 

Cheerily,  a  phrase  implying  heattily,  .jt-ickly,  cheerfully. 

To  claw  off,  to  turn  to  windward  from  .-  lee  shore,  to  escape  shipwreck,  etc. 

Clear  is  variously  implied.  The  weather  is  said  to  be  clear  when  it  is  fair 
and  open  ;  the  sea  coast  is  clear  when  the  navigation  is  not  interrupted  by  rocks, 
etc.  It  is  applied  to  cordage,  cables,  etc.,  when  they  are  disentangled,  so  as  to 
be  ready  tor  immediate  service.  In  all  these  senses  it  is  opposed  to  fml.—  To 
clear  the  anchor,  is  to  get  the  cable  off  :he  flukes,  and  to  disencumber  it  of  ropes, 
ready  for  dropping.— C//ar  hawse,  when  the  cables  are  directed  to  their  anchors 
without  lying  athwart  the  stem.  To  clear  the  hawse  is  to  untwist  the  cables 
when  they  are  entangled  by  having  either  a  cross,  an  elbow,  or  a  round  turn, 

Clew  lines  are  ropes  which  come  down  from  the  yards  to  the  lower  corners  of 
the  sails,  and  by  which  the  corners  or  clews  of  the  sails  are  hauled  up. 

Clew  of  a  sail,  the  lovirer  corners  of  square-sails,  but  the  aftermost  only  of 
stay-sails,  the  lower  comers  being  called  the  tad. 

To  clew  up,  to  haul  up  the  clews  of  a  sail  to  its  yard  by  means  of  the  clew- 
lines, etc. 

Clinched,  made  fast,  as  the  cable  is  to  the  ring  of  the  anchor. 

Close-hauled,  that  trim  of  the  ship's  sails,  when  she  endeavors  to  make  a 
progress  in  the  nearest  direction  possible  toward  that  point  of  the  compass  from 
which  the  wiad  blows.  —  '  ■  . 


k. 


■■r=\-wmmiiiimm^m 


1 66 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


(3»i  P* 


To  club-hatii,  it  inelhod  of  tacking  a  ship  when  it  is  expected  she  will  miss 
stays  on  a  l«e  -hore, 

Coasting.  i>ie  ,h  '  ;•(  makirijT  a  prMj;r'.s<  along  the  sea  coast  of  any  country. 

To  coil  a  fiype,  n  ctM,-.  etc.,  to  lf,v  \\  ,  land  in  a  ring,  one  turn  or  fake  over 
ani'Uier. 

To  come  horti<r.  The  anchor  is  siaid  -o  come  home  when  it  loosens  from  the 
groun  l  by  the  et\V'  rt  of  the  cable,  and  approaches  the  place  wiiere  the  ship  floated, 
at  the  length  of  her  mooring.;-. 

Coming  to,  denot  r»  the  approach  of  i    hip's  head  to  the  direction  of  the  wind. 

Coutse,  ;he  point  of  the  compass  upon  which  the  ship  sails. — Courses,  a  ship's 
lower  sails. ;  as,  the  for.rsnil  is  the  />V*  lOurse,  the  mainsail  the  main-course,  etc. — 
TAe  r,kip  :.'  under  ktr  cow  .  •  ihat  is,  has  no  sail  set  but  the  mainsail,  foresail, 
and  inlzzen. 

Coxswain.^  the  person  who  steers  the  boat. 

Crank.— The  ship  is  crank,  that  is,  she  has  not  a  sufficient  cargo  or  ballast  to 
render  her  capable  of  bearing  sail,  without  being  exposed  to  the  danger  of 
oversetting, 

Crovj-foot,  is  a  number  of  small  lines,  spread  from  the  fore  parts  of  the  tops, 
by  means  of  a  piece  of  wood  through  which  they  pass,  and,  being  hauled  taut 
upon  the  stays,  they  prevent  the  foot  of  the  topsails  catching  under  the  top  rim  ; 
they  are  also  used  to  suspend  the  awningj. 

Cun,  to  .iirect.     To  cun  a  ship,  is  to  direct  the  man  at  the  helm  how  to  steer. 

To  cut  and  run,  to  cut  the  table,  and  make  sail  instantly,  without  waiting  to 
weigh  anchor. 

Davit,  a  long  beam  of  timber,  used  as  a  crane,  whereby  to  hoist  the  flukes 
of  the  anchor  to  the  top  of  the  bow,  without  injuring  the  planks  of  the  ship's 
sides  as  it  ascends.  There  is  always  a  davit,  of  a  smaller  kind,  fixed  to  the  long- 
boat to  weigh  the  anchor  by  the  buoy-rope. 

To  deaden  a  ship's  viay,  to  impede  her  progress  through  the  water. 

Dead  eves,  blocks  of  wood  through  which  the  laniards  of  the  shrouds  are 
reeved. 

Dead-lights,^  kind  of  window  shutter  for  the  windows  in  the  stern  of  a  ship, 
used  in  very  bad  weather  only. 

Dead-water,  the  eddy  of  water,  which  appears  like  whirlpools,  closing  in 
with  the  ship's  stern  as  she  sails  on. 

Dead-wind,  the  wind  right  against  the  ship,  or  blowing  from  the  very  point 
to  which  she  wants  to  go. 

Dismasted,  the  state  of  a  ship  that  has  lost  her  mast. 

Dog-vane,  a  small  vane  with  feathers  and  cork,  and  placed  on  the  ship's 
quarter  for  the  men  at  cun  and  helm  to  see  the  course  of  the  wind  by. 

Dog-watch,  the  watches  from  four  to  six,  and  from  six  to  eight  in  the  evening. 


y 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


167 


xpected  she  will  miss 

ast  of  any  country, 
one  turn  or  fake  over 

en  it  loosens  from  the 
wiiere  the  ship  floated, 

I  direction  of  the  wind. 

■3X^%.— Courses,  a  ship's 

the  main-course,  etc. — 

the  mainsail,  foresail, 


ent  cargo  or  ballast  to 
>ed   to   the  danger  of 

fore  parts  of  the  tops, 
ind,  being  hauled  taut 
ng  under  the  top  rim  ; 

the  helm  how  to  steer, 
tly,  without  waiting  to 

eby  to  hoist  the  flukes 
e  planks  of  the  ship's 
dnd,  fixed  to  the  long- 

;h  the  water. 

-ds  of  the  shrouds  are 

i  in  the  stern  of  a  ship, 

whirlpools,  closing  in 

ig  from  the  very  point 


1  placed  on  the  ship's 

le  wind  by. 

to  eight  in  the  evening. 


Doubting,  the  act  of  sailing  round,  or  passing  beyond  a  cape  or  point  of  land. 
Doubling  upon,  the  act  of  inclosing  any  part  of  a  hostile  fleet  between  two  fires, 
or  of  cannonading  it  on  both  sides. 

Douse,  to  lower  suddenly,  or  slaken  ;  to  strike  or  haul  down  ;  as,  Douse  tht 
top-gallant- sails,  that  is,  lower  them. 

Down  haul,  the  rope  by  which  any  sail  is  hauled  down,  as  the  jib  down-haul. 

Ta  drag  tht  anchor,  to  trail  it  along  the  bottom  after  it  is  loosened  from  the 
ground. 

To  draw,  when  a  sail  is  inflated  by  the  wind,  so  as  to  i  dvance  the  vessel  in 

her  course,  the  sail  is  said  to  draw,  and  so,  to  keep  all  drawing,  is  to  inflate  all  the 

sails. 

Drift,  the  angle  which  the  line  of  a  ship's  motion  makes  with  the   nearest 

m«idian,  when  she  drives  with  her  side  tj  the  wind  and  waves,  and  is  not  gov- 

erned  by  the  power  of  the  helm.       It  also  implies  the  distance  which  the   ship 

drive!,  on  that  line. 

Driver,  a  large  sail  set  upon  the  mizzen-yards  in  light  winds.  Drive — tht 
ship  drives,  that  is  her  anchor  comes  through  the  ground. 

Drop,  used  sometimes  to  denote  the  depth  of  a  sail ;  The  fore-top-sail  drops 
twelve  yards. 

To  drop  anchor,  used  synonymously  with  to  anchor.  To  drop  astern,  the  ret- 
rograde motion  of  a  ship. 

Dunnage,  a  quantity  of  loose  wood,  etc.,  laid  at  the  bottom  of  a  ship,  to  keep 
the  goods  from  being  damaged. 

Barings,  small  ropes  used  to  fasten  the  upper  corners  of  the  sails  to  the 
yards. 

To  ease,  to  east  away,  or  to  east  off—io  slacken  gradually ;  thus  they  say, 
Ease  the  bow-line,  ease  the  sheet. 

'•  Ease  the  shipt"  the  command  given  by  the  pilot  to  the  steersman,  to  put 
the  helm  hard  alee,  when  the  ship  is  expected  to  plunge  her  fore  part  deep  in 
the  water  when  close-hauled. 

To  edge  away,  to  decline  gradually  from  the  shore,  or  from  the  line  of  the 
course  which  the  ship  formerly  held,  in  order  to  go  more  large. 

To  edge  in  wUh,  to  advance  gradually  towards  the  shore,  or  any  other  object. 

Elbffw  in  the  hawse,  is  when  a  ship,  being  moored,  has  gone  round,  upon  the 
shifting  of  the  tides,  twice  the  wrong  way,  so  as  to  lay  the  cables  one  over  the 
other.  Having  gone  once  wrong,  she  makes  a  cross  in  the  hawse  ;  and  going 
three  times  wrong,  she  makes  a  round  turn. 

End  for  end,  a  term  used  when  a  rope  runs  all  out  of  a  Wock,  and  is  un- 
reeving ;  or,  in  coming  to  an  anchor,  if  the  stoppers  are  not  well  put  on,  and  the 
cable  runs  all  out,  it  is  said  to  have  gone  out  end  for  end. 

End  OH,  when  a  ship  advances  to  a  shore,  rock,  etc.,  without  any  apparent 
possibility  of  preventing  her,  she  is  said  to  go  end  on  for  the  shore,  etc. 


1 68 


TliompsotCs  Coast  Pilot, 


Kngat^ement,  action  or  fight. 
Ensign,  the  flag  worn  at  the  stern  of  a  ship. 

KnUring-port,  a  large  port  in  the  «ide  of  three-deckers,  leading  into  the 
middle  deck,  to  save  the  trouble  of  going  up  the  ship's  side  to  get  on  board. 

Even  keel,  when  the  keel  is  parallel  with  the  horizon,  a  ship  is  said  to  be  upon 

an  even  keel. 

Fair,  a  general  term  for  the  disposition  of  the  wind,  when  favorable  to  t 

ship's  course. 

Fair  way,  the  channel  of  a  narrow  bay,  river  or  haven,  in  which   ships 

usually  advance  in  their  passage  up  and  down. 

Eack,  or  fake,  one  circle  of  any  rope  or  cable  coiled. 

fag-end,  the  end  of  any  rope  which  is  become  untwisted  by  frequent  use*  to 
prevent  which,  the  ends  of  ropes  are  wound  round  with  pieces  of  twine,  which 
operation  is  called  whipping. 

To  fall  aboard  of,  to  strike  or  encounter  another  ship,  when  one  or  both  are 
in  motion  To  fall  astern,  the  motion  of  a  ship  with  her  stern  foremost.  To 
fall  (aim,  to  become  in  a  state  of  rest  by  a  total  cessation  of  the  wind.  To  fall 
down,  to  sail  or  to  be  towed  down  a  river  nearer  towards  its  mouth. 

Ealling  off,  denotes  the  motion  of  the  ship's  head  from  the  direction  of  the 
wind.       It  is  used  in  opposition  to  coming  to. 

"  Fall  not  off,  ormthing  off'"  the  command  of  the  steersman  to  keep  the 
ship  near  the  wind. 

Fathom,  a  measuie  of  six  feet. 

To  fetch  away,  to  be  shaken  or  agitated  from  one  side  to  another,  so  as  to 
loosen  anything  which  before  was  fixed. 

Fid,  a  square  bar  of  wood  or  iron,  with  shoulders  at  one  end,  used  to  sup- 
port the'  weight  of  the  topmast,  when  erected  at  the  head  of  a  lower  mast.— /^irf 
for  splicing,  a  large  piece  of  wood,  of  r  conical  figure,  used  to  extend  the  strands 
and  layers  of  cables  in  splicing. 

To  fill,  to  brace  the  sails  so  as  to  receive  the  wind  in  them,  and  advance  the 
ship  in  her  course,  after  they  have  been  either  shivering  or  braced  aback. 

Fish,  a  large  piece  of  wood.— //jA  the  mast,  apply  a  large  piece  of  wood  to  it 
to  strengthen  it. 

Fish-hook,  a  large  hook,  by  which  the  anchor  is  received  and  brought  to  the 
cat-head  ;  and  the  tackle  which  is  used  for  this  purpose  is  called  the  fish-tackle. 

To  fish  the  anchor,  to  draw  up  the  flukes  of  the  anchor  towards  the  top  of  the 
bow,  in  order  to  stow  it,  after  having  been      tted. 

Flag,  a  general  name  for  colors  worn  and  used  by  ships  of  war. 

Flat-aft,  the  situation  of  the  sails  when  their  surfaces  are  pressed  aft  against 

the  mrst  by  the  force  of  the  wind. 

To  fiat  in,  to  draw  in  the  aftermost  lower  corner,  or  clew,  of  a  sail  towards, 
the  middle  of  the  ship,  to  give  the  sail  a  greater  power  to  turn  the  vessel.— TV 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


169 


in,  leading  into  the 
to  get  on  board, 
ship  is  said  to  be  upon 

I,  when  favorable  to  t 

aven,  in  which   ships 


id  by  frequent  use*  to 
ieces  of  twine,  which 

when  one  or   both  are 
r  stern  foremost.       To 
i)f  the  wind.       To  fall 
s  mouth. 
n  the  direction  of  the 

iteersman  to  keep  the 


ide  to  another,  so  as  to 

one  end,  used  to  sup- 
of  a  lower  mast. — Fid 
I  to  extend  the  strands 

them,  and  advance  the 
braced  aback, 
arge  piece  of  wood  to  it 

■ed  and  brought  to  the 
sailed  the  fish-tackle. 
r  towards  the  top  of  the 

ps  of  war, 

;  are  pressed  aft  against 

ew,  of  a  sail  towards. 
»  turn  the  vessel. —  To 


Hat  in  forwarJ,  to  'Iraw  in  the  fore  sheet,  jib  sheet  and  fore  staysailslieet  towards 
the  middle  uf  the  ship. 

Flaw,  a  su'Ulen  breeze  or  gust  of  wind. 

Fioaling,     ,e  state  of  being  buoyed  up  by  the  water  from  the  ground. 

Flood-tlJe,  the  state  of  a  tide  when  it  flows  or  rises 

/V'i)7c/n(i<--M/<'/T,  the  position  of  the  sheets  of  the  principal  sails  when  they  are 
loosened  from  the  wind  so  as  to  receive  it  into  their  cavities  more  nearly  perpen- 
dicular  than  when  close-hauled,  but  more  obliquely  than  when  the  ship  sails  be> 
fore  the  wind.       A  ship  going  two  or  three  points  large  has  fiowing  s/teets. 

Fore,  that  part  of  the  ship's  frame  and  machinery  that  lies  near  the  stem. — 
Fere  and  aft,  throufjhout  the  whole  ship's  length  ;  lengthwise  of  the  ship. 

Fore-reach,  to  shoot  ahead,  or  go  past  another  vessel. 

To  fore*  over,  to  shoot  a  ship  violently  over  a  shoal  by  a  great  quantity  of 

sail. 

Forward,  toward  the  fore  part  of  a  ship. 

Foul'xi  used  in  opposition  to  hoih  clear  and/a(>.  As  opposed  to  dear,  we 
say.  foul  weather,  foul  bottom,  foul  ground,  foul  anchor,  foul  ha-ou.  As  opposed 
io  fair,  yie  say,  foul  wind. 

To  founder,  to  sink  at  sea  by  filling  with  water. 

To  free.  Pumping  is  said  io  free  a.  ship  when  it  discharges  more  water  than 
leaks  into  her. 

To  freshen.  When  a  gale  increases,  it  is  said  \n  freshen,— To  freshen  the 
hawse,  to  veer  out  or  heave  in  a  little  cable,  to  let  another  part  of  it  endure  the 
stress  of  the  hawse-hole.  It  is  also  applied  to  the  act  of  renewing  the  service 
round  the  cable  at  the  hawse-hole. 

Freshen  the  ballast,  divide  or  separate  it. 

Fresh  way.  When  a  ship  increases  her  velocity,  she  is  said  to  get  ffesh 
way. 

Full,  the  situation  of  the  sail*  when  they  are  kept  distended  by  the 
wind. 

Full  and' by,  the  situation  of  a  ship  with  regard  to  the  wind,  when  close- 
hauled,  and  sailing  so  as  neither  to  steer  too  nigh  the  direction,  nor  to  deviate  to 
leeward. 

Tiifurl,  to  wrap  or  to  roll  a  sail  close  up  to  the  yard  or  stay  to  which  it  be« 
longs,  and  to  wind  a  cord  around  it  to  keep  it  fast. 

Gauge  op  the  Sitip,  her  depth  of  water,  or  what  water  she  draws.  ' 

To  gain  the  wind,  to  arrive  on  the  weather  side,  or  to  windward  of  some  ship 
or  fleet  in  sight,  when  both  are  sailing  as  near  the  wind  as  possible. 

Gammon  the  bowsprit,  secure  it  by  turns  of  a  strong  rope  passed  round  it,  and 
into  the  cutwater,  to  prevent  it  from  having  too  much  motion. 

Gangway,  that  part  of  a  ship's  side,  both  within  and  without,  by  which  per- 
sons enter  and  depart. 


:#-.> 


170 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


Garboard  Xrrak,  the  fir.t  mnge  or  Mre.k  ..f  plnnUs  lai.l  in  •  »hip'i  bottom 

next  Ihe  keel. 

Cask'l.  the  r..pe  which  ii  |.«*«.»  round  the  sail,  to  hind  it  to  the  yard,  when 

it  is  (uried. 

To)^atlur.       A  ship  is  said  10  .^aM^r  on    another   as   she   come*   nearer   to 

*"'  Cimhlmi;,  the  action  of  turning  the  anchor  roun.l  by  the  stock,  io  that  the 
motion  of  the" stock  .ipp""  «""''"  '°  ""'»  "^  ""^  *"*"'"*  "^  "  8'""'"  ""*""  ""' 
pliiye*!  to  turn  the  wire. 

aiyt.      The  ship  is  c'r'  with  her  cal.le^  when  she  is  too  tight  moored. 

To  give  thiiH  lo,  to  pursue  a  ship  or  fleet. 

Goofi  wingt  of,:  sail,  the  clews  or  lower  corners  of  a  ship's  mainsail  or  fore- 
sail,  when  the  middle  part  i»  furled  or  lied  up  lo  the  yard. 

Grapfliugiron,  a  thit.B  i"  the  nature  of  an  anchor,  with  four  or  six    flukes 

°  ' '(7wT'Mo  burn  ofl"  the  filth  from  a  ship'sboltom. 

(;,,/^e^aJ/i«>.  that  thin  part  of  her  which  is  under  the  counter,  and  to 
which  the  .tern-post  joins. --/■/"•  .v>4//<?r«/«,  that  is.  turns  her  head  too  much  to 

'  ''crommel,  a  piece  of  rope  laid  into  a  circuUr  form,  and  used  for  large  boats- 
oars  instead  of  rowlocks,  and  also  for  many  other  purposes. 

GrounJhts,  the  laying  the  ship  ashore,  in  order  to  repair  her.  It  is  also 
applied  to  running  aground  accidentally. 

Ground  Tackle,  everything  belonging  to  a  ship's  anchors,  and  which  are  nec- 
essary tor  anchoring  or  mooring,  such  as  cable.,  hawsers,  tow-lines,  warps,  buoy- 
ropes,  etc.  .      .      .    ij         1 

Ground  tier,  that  is,  the  tier  of  water  casks  which  is  lowest  in  the  hold,  and 

is  among  the  shingle  ballast. 

Gnnving,  stretching  out;  applied  to  the  direction  of  the  cable  from  the  ship 
toward  the  anchors  ;  as.  7//e- r«Wf^r««  OM  M^  ^/<ir*<?orrf  *<w. 

Gun-Male,  the  upper  edjje  of  a  ship's  side. 

Gun.rocm,  a  division  of  the  lower  deck  abaft,  inclosed  with  nefwork,  for  the 
use  of  the  gunner  and  his  stores. 

Gyiing,  the  act  of  shifting  any  boom-sail  from  one  side  of  the   mast  to   the 

other. 

Hail,  to  call  lo  another  ship. 

Halliards,  the  roiies  by  which  the  sails  are  hoisted;  m,  i\i^  top-sail  halliards 

OT  jib-hilliards,  etc. 

Handing,  the  same  as  furling. 

//arrf  a  iwfl/A^r,  put  the  tiller  quite  up  to  windward. 

IJaul,  pull.  .  •  L   1. 

To  haul  the  wind,  to  direct  the  ship's  course  nearer  to  the  point  from  which  the 

wind  blows. 


~s^^-^u'hs.'-. 


j..^„:i>,.  ■■  x*^^g^ 


Thompson  s  Coast  Pilot. 


171 


•  I   in  •  »hip'i  bottom 
d  it  to  the  yard,  when 

she   come*  nearer  to 

the  ntDck,  «o  that  the 
of  a  gimlet  when  em- 

Bo  light  moored, 

hip's  mainsail  or  fore- 

ith  four  or  six   flukes 

r  the  counter,  and  to 
her  hoad  too  much  to 

id  used  for  Inrge  boats' 

■epair  her.       It  is  also 

lors,  and  which  are  nee- 
towlines,  warps,  buoy- 
lowest  in  the  hold,  and 

the  cable  from  the  ship 
'low. 

id  with  nefwork,  for  the 
ide  of  the  mait  to  the 

;  as,  the  top-sail  halliards 


the  point  from  which  the 


Hawsohohs  the  holes  in  the  Iwws  of  the  ship  through  which  the  cables  jiass,— 
Frtsh-n  Hawtt,  veer  out  more  cable. — C/<i/*  a  sennet  in  tkt  httwst,  put  somewhat 
round  the  table  at  the  hawse-hole  to  prevent  it  clmlirig.  - /b  cUar  hawse,  is  to  un- 
twist the  cables  when-  the  ship  is  moored,  and  has  got  a  foul  hawse. — Athwart 
Hawse,  is  to  be  across  or  before  another  ship's  head. 

Hawser,  a  small  kind  of  cable. 

Uead.fast,  a  rope  employed  to  confine  the  head  of  a  ship  to  a  wharf  or  to  some 
other  ship, 

Htiidmoit,  the  situation  of  any  ship  or  ships  which  are  most  advanced  in  a 
fleet. — Head  sails,  all  the  sails  which  belong  to  the  foremast  and  bowsprit. 

Head  <f(i.  When  the  waves  meet  the  head  of  a  ship  in  her  course,  they  are 
called  a  hend  sea.  It  is  likewise  applii^d  to  a  single  wave  coming  in  that  di- 
rection. 

Head  to  wind,  the  situation  of  a  ship  when  her  head  is  turned  to  tlie  point  from 
which  the  wind  blows,  as  it  must  be  when  tacking. 

Headway,  the  motion  of  advancing,  used  in  opposition  to  stern-way. 

To  heave,  to  turn  about  a  capstan,  or  other  machine  of  the  like  kind,  by  means 
of  bars,  handspikes,  etc. —  To  heave  ahead,  to  advance  the  ship  by  heaving  in  the 
cable  or  other  ropes  fastened  to  an  unchor  ut  some  distance  before  her. —  To  heavt 
a-peak.  to  heave  in  the  cable  till  the  anchor  is  a  peak.  To  heave  astern,  to  move 
a  ship  backwards  by  an  operation  similar  to  tkat  of  heaving  ahead. —  To  heave 
down,  to  careen. —  To  heave  in  the  cable,  to  draw  the  cable  into  the  ship,  by  turn, 
ing  the  capstan. —  To  heave  in  stays,  to  bring  a  ship's  head  to  the  wind  by  a  man- 
agement of  the  sails  and  rudder,  in  order  to  get  on  the  other  tack. —  To  heave  out, 
to  unfurl  or  loose  a  sail ;  more  particularly  applied  to  the  staysails  ;  thus  we  say, 
loose  the  topsails,  and  heave  out  the  stay  sails. —  To  heave  short,  to  draw  so  much  of 
the  cable  into  the  ship  as  that  she  will  be  almost  perpendicularly  over  her  anchor. 
To  heave  tight  or  taut,  to  turn  the  capstan  round  till  the  rope  or  cable  becomes 
straightened. —  To  heave  the  lead,  to  throw  the  lead  overboard,  in  order  to  find  the 
depth  of  water. —  To  heave  the  hi;,  to  throw  the  log  overboard,  in  order  to  find  the 
velocity  of  the  ship.— ^^-nv^  the  capstan,  that  is,  turn  it  round  with  the  bars. — 
Heave  handsomely,  heave  gently  or  leisurely. — Heave  heafty,  heave  strong  and 
quick. 

Heave  of  the  sea,  is  the  powe>  l'ti<  1  »l'e  swells  of  the  sea  have  upon  a  ship  in  driv- 
ing her  out,  or  faster  on  in  her  coi  c«e,  and  for  which  allowance  is  made  in  the 
day's  work. 

Heelw  incline.— She  heels  to  port,  that  is,  inclines  or  lays  down  upon  her  lar- 
board or  left  side. 

Helm,  the  instrument  by  which  the  ship  is  steered,  and  includes  both  the  wheel 
and  the  tiller  as  one  general  \txm.~ Helm" s-a-lee,  that  is  the  tiller  is  quite  down  to 
leeward. 


,  ^~..--. 


■ifjMftWSilB**'' 


172 


Thompson  s  Coast  Pilot. 


High  and  (tty,  the  situation  of  a  thip  when  to  far  run  agrouml  m  to  be  seen  dry 
upon  the  strnnH. 

f/iteh,  to  make  fast. 

JMsl,  to  haul,  sway,  or  lift  up. 

IMd,  it  the  xpace  between  the  lower  deck  and  the  bottom  of  the  ship,  where 
her  csrgo,  etc.,  lie. 

To  slim  the  hold,  {%  to  place  the  things  in  it. 

To  hold  Its  own,  it  applied  to  the  relative  Hituation  of  two  thipt  when  neither 
tdvancfs  upon  the  other  ;  each  is  then  said  to  hold  Us  mvn.  It  i»  likewise  said  of 
a  ship,  which,  by  meant  of  contrary  winds,  cannot  make  a  progress  towards  her 
destined  port,  but  which,  however,  keeps  nearly  the  distance  she  had  already 
run. 

J/ome,  implies  the  proper  situation  of  any  object;  as  To  haul  home  Iht  tofisail- 
sheets,  is  to  extend  the  bottom  of  the  topsail  to  the  lower  yard,  by  means  of  the 
sheets.  In  stowing  a  hold,  a  cask,  etc.,  is  said  lo  be  home,  when  It  lies  close  to 
some  other  oliject. 

Hulk,  a  ship  without  masts  or  rigging;  alsoa  vessel  employed  In  the  removal  of 
masts  into  or  out  of  ships  by  means  of  sheers,  from  which  it  it  called  a  sheer 
hulk. 

Hone,  a  rope  reaching  from  the  middle  of  a  yard  to  its  arms  or  extremities,  for 
the  men  to  stand  on  when  they  are  loosing,  reefing  or  furling  a  sail. 

Hull  of  the  ship,  the  body  of  it.—  To  lay  a  hull  is  to  lay  to  with  only  a  small  sail, 
in  a  gale  of  wind,  —  To  hull  a  vessel,  is  to  fire  a  shot  into  any  part  of  her  hull. 

Hull  down,  is  when  a  ship  is  so  far  off  that  you  can  only  see  her  masts,  —  To  hull 
a  ship,  to  fire  cannon  balls  into  her  hull  within  the  point-blank  range.  Hull  to, 
the  situation  of  a  ship  when  she  lies  with  all  her  sails  furled,  as  in  trying. 

In  stays.     See  To  heave  in  stavs. 

Jamming,  the  act  of  inclosing  any  object  between  two  bodies  so  as  to  render 
it  immovable. 

Jeer-blocks,  the  blocks  through  which  jeers  are  reeved. 

Jeers,  the  ropes  by  which  the  lower  yards  are  suspended. 

Jib,  the  foremost  sail  of  a  ship,  tet  upon  a  boom  which  runs  out  upon  the 
bowsprit. 

Jib-boom,  a  spar  that  runs  out  upon  the  bowsprit. 

Jolly  boat,  a.  &ma\\hoai. 

Junk,  old  cable,  or  old  rope. 

Jury  mast,  a  temporary  or  occasional  mast,  erected  in  a  ship  in  the  place  of 
one  which  has  been  carried  away  by  accident,  etc. 

Keuge,  a  small  anchor  with  an  iron  stock. 

Keel,  the  principle  piece  of  timber  in  a  ship,  which  is  usually  first  laid  on 
the  blocks  in  building. 


\£i  .  i 


oun>l  M  to  be  lecn  dry 


torn  of  the  ship,  where 


wo  (hips  when  neither 

It  I*  likewise  itaid  of 

I  progress  towards  her 

tance  she  had  already 

0  haul  home  the  topsail- 
yard,  by  means  of  the 
when  it  ties  close  to 

loyed  In  the  removal  of 
ich  it  is  called  a  ihttr 

irms  or  extremities,  for 
ig  a  sail. 

>with  only  a  small  sail, 
ly  part  of  her  hull. 
Be  her  masts,  —  To  hull 
blank  range.     Hull  to, 
I,  as  in  trying, 

bodies  so  as  to  render 


ch  runs  out  upon  the 


a  ship  in  the  place  of 


s  usually  firit  laid  on 


ThompsovLS  Coast  Pilot, 


173 


A'eelhaul,  to  drag  a  person  backwards  and  forwards  under  •  ship's  keel  for 
certain  offenses. 

A'ttkltJ,  any  part  of  a  cable  covered  over  with  old  ropes,  to  prevent  lis  tur* 
face  from  rubliing  ajjninst  the  ship's  Low  or  fore-top. 

To  ketpawny,  to  alter  the  ship's  course  to  one  rather  more  larjje,  for  a  little 
time,  to  avoid  some  ship,  danger,  etc. — "  Keep  away !  "  is  likewise  said  to  the 
steersman  who  is  apt  to  go  to  windward  cf  the  ship's  course. —  To  keep  full,  KQ 
keep  the  sails  distended  by  the  wind. —  To  keep  hold  of  the  land,  to  steer  near  to  or 
in  sight  of  the  land.—  To  keep  off,  to  sail  off,  or  keep  at  a  distance  from  the  shore. 
—  To  keep  the  land  aboard,  the  same  as  to  keep  hold  of  the  land  —  To  keep  the  luff, 
to  continue  close  to  the  wind.      To  keep  the  wind,  the  same  as  to  keep  the  tuff. 

Kelson,  a  piece  of  timber  forming  the  interior  of  the  keel,  being  laid  on  the 
middle  of  the  Hoor  timbers  immediately  over  the  keel,  and  serving  to  unite  the 
former  to  the  latter. 

Kentledge,  pigs  of  iron  for  ballast,  laid  upon  the  floor,  near  the  kelson,  fore 
and  aft. 

Kenk,  a  sort  of  twist  or  turn  in  a  cable  or  rope. 

Knippers,  a  large  kind  of  plaited  rope,  which  being  twisted  round  the  mes- 
senger and  cable  in  weighing,  binds  them  together. 

Knot,  a  division  of  the  log-line,  answering,  in  the  calculation  of  the  ship's 
velocity,  to  one  mile. 

Kumatage,  a  bright  appearonce  in  the  horizon,  under  the  sun  or  moon,  arising 
from  the  reflected  light  of  those  bodies  from  the  small  rippling  waves  on  the 
surface  of  the  water. 

To  Labor,  to  roll  or  pitch  heavily  in  a  turbulent  sea. 

Laden  in  bulk,  freighted  with  a  cargo  not  packed,  but  lying  loose,  as  corn, 
salt,  etc. 

Laid  up,  the  situation  of  a  ship  when  moored  in  a  harbor,  for  want  of 
employ. 

Landfall,  the  first  land  discovered  after  a  sea  voyage.  Thus  z.  good  landfall 
implies  the  land  expected  or  desired  ;  a  bad  landfall,  the  reverse. 

Land-locked,  the  situation  of  a  ship  surrounded  with  land,  so  as  to  exclude 
the  prospect  of  the  lea,  unless  over  1   me  intervening  land. 

Laniards  of  the  shrouds,  are  the  small  ropes  at  the  ends  of  them,  by  which 
they  are  hove  taut  or  tight. 

Larboard,  the  left  side  of  a  ship,  looking  towards  the  head. — Port  tack,  the 
situation  of  a  ship  when  sailing  with  the  wind  blowing  upon  her  port  side. 
Lash,  to  bind. 

"  Launch  hot"  signifies  that  the  object  is  high  enough,  and  must  be  sud* 
denly  lowered. 

Laying  the  land.  A  ship  which  increases  her  distance  from  the  coast,  so  as 
to  make  it  appear  lower  and  smaller,  is  said  to  lay  the  land. 


fi    -'-; 


W). 


'■itmi^»^''' 


^       imw<tW*«'*'W6l>M 


t74 


ThompsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


im 


tw 


Leading  wind,  a  fair  wind  for  a  ship's  course. 

Leak,  a  chink  or  break  in  the  sides  or  bottom  of  a  ship,  through  which  the 
water  enters  into  the  hull. 

Lee,  that  part  of  the  hemisphere  to  which  Ihe  wind  is  directed,  to  distinguish 
it  from  the  other  part,  which  is  called  to  windward.— Lee  gage.  A  ship  or  fleet 
to  leeward  of  another  is  said  to  have  the  gage.— Lee  lurches,  the  sudden  and 
violent  rolls  which  a  ship  often  takes  to  leeward,  in  a  high  sea,  particularly  when 
a  large  wave  strikes  her  on  the  weather  side.— />^  quarter,  that  quarter  ol  a  ship 
which  is  on  the  lee  side.— Z^^-  shore,  that  shore  upon  which  the  wind  blows.— Z« 
side,  that  side  of  a  ship,  lengthwise,  which  liss  between  a  line  drawn  through  the 
middle  of  her  length  and  the  side  which  is  farthest  from  the  point  of  wind.— TV 
leeward,  toward  that  part  of  the  horizon  to  which  the  wind  blows.— Z*««/«rrf 
ship,  a  ship  that  falls  much  to  leeward  of  her  course  when  sailing  close-hauled.- 
Leeward  tide,  a  tide  that  sets  to  leeward. 

Leeway,  the  lateral  movement  of  a  ship  to  leeward  of  her  course;  or  the 
angle  which' the  line  of  her  way  makes  with  a  line  in  the  direction  of  her  keel. 

To  tie  along,  to  be  pressed  down  sideways  by  a  weight  of  sail  in  a  fresh  wind. 

Leeches,  the  borders  or  edges  of  a  sail. 

To  lie  to,  to  retard  a  ship  in  her  course,  by  arranging  the  sails  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  counteract  each  other  with  nearly  an  equal  effort,  and  render  the 
ship  almost  immovable  with  respect  to  her  progressive  motion  or  headway. 

Lifts,  the  ropes  which  come  to  the  ends  of  the  yards  from  the  mast-heads, 
and  by  which  they  are  suspended  when  lowered  down. 

Limbers,  or  liniber  holes,  square  holes  cut  through  the  lower  part  of  a  ship's 
floor  timbers,  very  near  the  keel;  forming  a  channel  for  water,  and  communi- 
eating  with  the  pump-well  throughout  the  whole  length  of  the  floor. 

List,  incline.— T-A^  ship  has  a  list  to  pott,  that  is,  she  heels  to  the  larboard. 

Log,  and  log-line,  by  which  the  ship's  path  is  measured,  and  her  rate  of  going 

ascertained. 

Log  board,  on  which  are  marked  the  transactions  of  the  ship,  which  from 
thence  are  copied  into  the  log-book  every  24  hours. 
y<  /<»»^  «a,  a  uniform  motion  of  long  waves. 

Look  out,  a  watchful  attention  to  some  important  object  or  event  that  is  ex- 
pected to  arise.  Thus  persons  on  board  of  a  ship  are  occasionally  stationed  to 
look  out  for  signals,  other  ships,  for  land,  etc. 

To  loom,  to  appear  above  the  surface  either  of  the  sea  or  the  land,  or  to  ap- 
pear larger  than  the  real  dimensions,  and  indistinctly ;  as  a  distant  object,  a  ship 
at  sea,  or  a  mountain.      The  ship  looms  large,  or  the  land  looms  high. 

7>  loose,  to  unfurl  or  cast  loose  any  sail. 

To  lower,  to  ease  down  gradually. 

'•  Luffr  the  order  to  the  steersman  to  put  the  helm  towards  the  lee  side  of 
the  ship,  in  order  to  sail  nearer  to  the  wind. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


175 


),  through  which  the 

rected,  to  distinguish 
ige.  A  ship  or  fleet 
hes,  the  sadden  and 
•a,  particularly  when 
tat  quarter  oi  a  ship 
he  wind  blows. — Lee 
le  drawn  through  the 
I  point  of  wind. — To 
nd  blows. — Leeward 
liling  close-hauled, — 

f  her  course ;  or  the 
•ection  of  her  keel, 
if  sail  in  a  fresh  wind. 

t  the   sails  in  such  a 
effort,  and  render  the 
on  or  headway, 
from  the  mast-heads, 

lower  part  of  a  ship's 
water,  and  communi- 
he  floor. 

els  to  the  larboard. 
,  and  her  rate  of  going 

the  ship,  which  from 


ct  or  event  that  is  ex. 
casionally  stationed  to 

or  the  land,  or  to  ap- 
L  distant  object,  a  ship 
looms  high. 


owards  the  lee  side  of 


Mast,  the  upright  timber  on  which  the  masts  and  sails  are  set. 

Masted,  having  all  her  masts  complete. 

Mend  the  service,  put  on  more  service. 

Messenger,  a  small  kind  of  cable,  which,  being  brought  to  the  capstan  and  the 
cable  by  which  the  ship  rides  made  fast  to  it,  purchases  the  anchor. 

To  middle  a  rope,  to  double  it  into  two  equal  parts. 

Midships,    See  Amidships, 

Mirage,  an  optical  phenomenon,  arising  from  an  irregular  refraction  or  reflec- 
tion of  the  light  near  the  horizon,  by  which  it  often  happens  near  the  sea  coast, 
that  a  ship,  seen  at  a  distance,  appears  as  if  painted  in  the  sky,  and  not  supported 
by  the  water.  Sometimes  the  image  of  the  ship  is  inverted.  A  similar  effect  is 
observed  in  sandy  deserts,  as  in  Egypt,  where  the  blue  light  of  the  sky  is  reflected 
upwards  from  the  heated  saads,  which  makes  the  whole  plain  at  a  distance  ap- 
pear like  a  large  lake,  and  the  elevated  villages  appear  like  islands  in  this  lake. 

To  miss  stays,  a  ship  is  said  to  miss  stays  when  her  head  will  not  fly  up  into 
the  direction  of  the  wind,  in  order  to  get  her  on  the  other  tack. 

Mizzenmast,  the  mast  which  stands  abaft,  and  from  which  its  rigging  and 
sails  are  named  ;  as  of  the  sails,  mizzen,  mizzen-topsails,  etc.,  and  so  also  are  the 
other  sails,  etc.,  named  from  the  other  masts. 

Moor,  is  to  secure  a  sh'p  with  two  anchors. 

Mooring,s.tc\xr\ng  a  ship  in  a  particular  station  by  chains  or  cables,  which  are 
either  fastened  to  an  adjacent  shore  or  to  anchors  at  the  bottom.  Mooring  ser- 
vice, when  a  ship  is  moored,  and  rides  at  one  cable's  length,  the  mooring  service 
is  that  which  is  at  the  first  splice. 

Mouse,  a  kind  of  ball  or  knob,  wrought  upon  the  collar  of  (t*  tJays. 

Muster,  to  assemble. 

To  make  a  board,  to  run  a  certain  distance  upon  one  tack,  in  beating  to 
windward.  To  make  foul  water,  to  muddy  the  water  by  running  in  shallow 
places,  so  that  the  ship's  keel  disturbs  the  mud  at  the  bottom.  To  make  saii, 
to  increase  the  quanity  of  sail  already  set,  either  by  unreeting  or  setting  others. 
To  make  the  land,  to  discover  it  from  afar.      To  make  water,  to  leak. 

To  man  the  yard,  etc.,  to  place  men  on  the  yard,  in  the  tops,  down  the  lad- 
der, etc.,  io  execute  any  necessary  duties. 

Narrows,  a  small  passage  between  low  lands. 

Neap  tides,  the  tides  of  the  first  and  last  quarters  of  the  moon,  which  are  not 
either  so  high,  so  low  or  so  rapid  as  spring  tides.  A  ship  is  said  to  be  beneaptd 
when  she  has  not  water  enough  to  take  her  off  the  ground,  or  over  the  bar,  etc. 

"  Near!"  or  "  No  near!"  an  order  to  the  steersman  not  lo  keep  the  ship  so 
close  to  the  wind. 

Nippers,  certain  pieces  of  cordage  used  to  fasten  the  messenger  to  the  cable 
in  heaving  up  the  anchor.  _  - 


im^m(i^iimi!»^^^m0m^s^'S0mmiiis^a' 


,J 


176 


Thompson!  s  Coast  Pilot. 


sr'a 


\  t 


i^m 


"  Nothing  off!"  a  term  used  by  the  man  at  the  cun  to  the  steersman,  direc- 
ing  him  not  to  go  from  the  wind. 

Nun  buoy,  the  kind  of  buoy  used  by  ships  of  war. 

Oakum,  old  rope  untwisted  and  pulled  out. 

Off  and  on,  when  a  ship  is  beating  to  windward,  so  that  by  one  board  she 
approaches  towards  the  shore,  and  by  the  other  stands  out  to  sea,  she  is  said  to 
stand  off  and  on  shore. 

Offing,  to  seaward  from  the  land.  A  ship  is  in  the  offing,  that  is,  she  is  to 
seaward,  at  a  distance  from  the  land.      She  stands  for  the  offing,  that  is,  towards 

the  sea.  j      u 

Offward,  from  the  shore,  as  when  a  ship  lies  aground,  and  leans  towards  the 

sea,  she  is  said  to  heel  offward. 

On  board,  within  the  ship  ;  as,  He  is  come  on  board. 

On  the  beam,  any  distance  from  the  ship  on  a  line  with  the  beams,  or  at  right 
angles  with  the  keel.       See  Bearing. 

On  the  bow,  an  arc  of  the  horizon,  comprehending  about  four  points  </  the 
compass  on  each  side  of  that  portion  to  which  the  ship's  head  is  directed.  Thus 
they  say,  The  ship  in  sight  bears  three  points  on  the  starboard  bow  ;  that  is,  three 
points  towards  the  right  hand,  from  that  part  of  the  horizon  which  is  right  ahead. 

See  Bearing, 

On  the  quarter,  an  arc  of  the  horizon  comprehending  about  four  points  of 
the  compass  on  each  side  of  that  point  to  which  the  ship's  stern  is  directed.     See 

Bearing.  . 

Open,  the  situation  of  a  place  exposed  to  the  wind  and  sea.  It  is  also  ex- 
pressed  of  any  distant  object  to  which  the  sight  or  passage  is  not  intercepted. 

open  hawse,  when  the  cables  of  a  ship  at  her  moorings  lead  straight  to  theii 
respective  anchors,  without  crossing,  she  is  said  to  ride  at  an  open  hawse.      , 

Orlop,  the  deck  on  which  the  cables  are  stowed. 

Overboard,  out  of  a  ship  ;   as  He  fell  overboard,  meaning  he  fell  out  of  or  from 

the  ship. 

Overgrown  sea,  is  expressed  of  the  ocean  when  the  surges  and  billows  rise 

extremely  high. 

Overhaul,  to  clear  away  nnd  disentangle  any  rope ;  also,  to  come  up  with  the 
chase ;  as,  ^e  overhaul  her,  that  is,  we  gain  ground  on  her. 

O-.erfake,  when  a  ship  at  anchor  is  exposed  to  a  head  sea,  the  waves  of 
which  break  in  upon  her,  the  waves  are  said  to  over-rake  her. 

Overset,  a  ship  is  overset  when  her  keel  turns  upwards. 

0«/^/'/n>«,  the  state  of  a  ship  when  she  is  not  properly  balanced  for  tto 
purposes  of  navigation. 

Parcel  a  Rope,  is  to  put  a  quantity  of  old  canvas  upon  it  before  the  service 
is  put  on.  Parcel  a  seam,  is  to  lay  a  narrow  piece  of  canvas  over  it  after  it  is 
caulked,  before  it  is  payed. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


177 


le  steersman,  direc- 


at  by  one  board  she 
)  sea,  she  is  said  to 

»^,  that  is,  she  is  to 
%ng,  that  is,  towards 

[id  leans  towards  the 


lie  beams,  or  st  right 

it  four  points  </  the 
I  is  directed.  Thus 
d  bow  ;  that  is,  three 
which  is  right  ahead. 

about  four  points  of 
tern  is  directed.     See 

I  sea.       It  is  also  ex- 
,  not  intercepted, 
lead  straight  to  theii 
I  open  hawse. 

he  fell  out  of  or  from 

rges  and  billows  rise 

),  to  come  up  with  the 

ad  sea,  the  waves  of 
r. 

erly  balanced  for  the 

)n  it  before  the  service 
ivas  over  it  after  it  is 


Parliament  heel,  the  situation  of  a  ship  when  she  is  made  to  stoop  a  little  to 
one  side,  so  as  to  clean  the  upper  part  of  her  bottom  on  the  other  side.  See  Boot- 
topping, 

Parting,  being  driven  from  the  anchors,  by  the  breaking  of  the  cable. 

Pawl,  a  short  bar  of  wood  or  iron  fixed  close  to  the  capstan  or  windlass  of  a 
ship,  to  prevent  those  engines  from  rolling  back,  or  giving  way,  when  they  are 
charged  with  any  great  effort. 

To  pawl  the  capstnn,  to  fix  the  pawls  so  as  to  prevent  the  capstan  from  recoil- 
ing during  any  pause  of  heaving. 

To pay,\.o  daub  or  cover  the  surface  of  any  body  with  pitch,  tar,  etc.,  in 
order  to  secure  it  from  the  injuries  of  the  weather. 

To  pay  away,  or  pay  out,  to  slacken  a  cable  or  other  rope,  so  as  to  let  it  run 
out  for  some  particular  ourpose. 

To  pay  nff^  to  move  a  ship's  head  to  leeward. 

To  peak  the  m>z~.en,  to  put  up  the  mizzen-yard  perpendicular  by  the  mast. 

Peak,  to  tide  a  stay-peak,  is  when  the  cable  and  the  fore  stay  form  a  line. 
To  ride  a  short  peak,  is  when  the  cable  is  so  much  in  as  to  destroy  the  line  formed 
by  ihe  ntaypeak.  'J'o  ride  with  the  yards  a  peak,  is  to  have  them  topped  up  by  con- 
tiaiy  lift*,  so  as  to  repre^ent  St.  Andrew's  cross. 

Pennant,  the  long  narrow  flag  worn  at  the  mast-head  by  all  ships  of  the  navy. 
Brace  pennants  are  those  ropes  which  secure  the  brace-blocks  to  the  yard-arms, 
and  are  in  gentral  double,  so  that,  in  case  of  one  being  shot  away,  the  other  may 
secure  the  yard  in  its  proper  position. 

Broad  pennant,  a  broad  flag,  terminating  in  a  point,  used  to  distinguish  the 
chief  of  a  squailron. 

Pitching,  the  moveiiuMi'.  of  a  ship,  by  which  she  plunges  her  head  and  after 
part  alternately  into  the  !.u';'  ,v  of  the  sea. 

Point  blank,  the  direct:    .  of  a  gun  when  leveled  horizontally. 

Points,  a  number  of  piaited  ropes  made  fa»t  to  the  sails  for  the  purpose  of 
reeling. 

Poop,  the  highest  and  aftermost  t1eck  of  a  ship. 

Pooping,  the  '/ '.k  of  a  hi^h  and  heavy  sea  upon  the  stern  and  quarter  of  a 
ship,  when  she  scuiis  before  iho  wind  in  a  tempest. 

Port,  a  name  given,  on  some  occasions,  to  (he  larboard  side  of  the  ship;  as 
The  ship  heels  to  port,  Top  the yauis  to  port,  ^ic;  also,  a  harbor  or  haven. 

Par's,  the  holes  in  the  ship's  sides  from  which  the  guns  are  fired. 

"  Port  the  helm  !  ■'  the  order  to  put  the  helm  over  to  the  larboard  side. 

Port-last,  the  gunwale. 

Press  of  sail,  all  the  sail  that  a  ship  can  set  or  carry. 

Preventer,  an  additional  rope  emplced  at  times  to  support  any  other,  when 
the  latter  suffers  an  unusual  strain,  particularly  when  blowing  fresh,  or  in  a  gale  of 
wind. 


178 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


Pudding  and  dolphin,  a  larger  and  lesser  pad  made  of  ropes,  and  put  round 
the  mast  under  the  lower  yards. 

Purchase,  any  sort  of  mechanical  power  employed  in  raising  or  mov.ng  heavy 

bodiefi 

QUARTERS,  the  respective  stations  of  the  officers  and  people  in  time  of  action 

Quarterins,  distributing  the  men  into  different  plac.s.-C«../.r*,./,  the  list 
of  the  ship's  company,  ->vith  their  stations  for  action  noticed. 

QuaL.wind  is  when  the  wind  blows  in  from  that  part  of  the  horizon  situated 
on  the  quarter  o.'  the  ship.     See  On  the  quarter.  , 

Quoil.—Stc  To  coil  the  cable,  etc. 

To  RAISE,  to  elevate  any  distant  object  at  sea  by  approaching  it ;  thus  to 
raise  the  land  is  used  in  opposition  to  lay  the  land. 

To  rake,  to  cannonade  a  ship  at  the  stern  or  head,  so  that  the  balls  scour  the 

whole  lencth  of  the  decks.  ,    ,        ,  . 

Range  of  cable,  a  sufficient  length  of  cable  drawn  upon  deck  before  the  anchor 
is  cast  loose,  to  admit  of  its  sinking  to  the  bottom  without  any  check. 

Ratlines,  i\.^  small  ropes  fastened  to  the  shrouds,  by  which  the  men  go 

'^°^''^.<rc-A,  the  distance  between  any  two  points  on  the  b.uks  of  a  river,  wherein 
the  current  flows  in  an  uninterrupted  course. 

..  Ready  about  I  "  a  command  of  the  boatswain  to  the  crew,  and  implies  that 
all  hands  are  to  be  attentive,  and  at  their  stations  for  taking. 

Rear  the  last  division  of  a  squadron,  or  the  last  squadron  of  a  fleet.     It  is  ap- 
plied likewise  to  the  last  ship  of  a  line,  squadron,  or  division. 

Reef,  part  of  a  sail,  from  one  row  of  eyelet-holes  to  another.  It  is  applied  like- 
wise  to^a  chain  of  rocks  laying  near  the  surface  of  the  water. 

Reejing.  the  operation  of  reducing  a  sail  by  taking  m  one  or  more  of   the 

'''%o  re:ve,  to  pass"  the  end  of  a  rope  through  any  hole,  as  the  channel  of  a 
block  the  cavity  of  a  thimble,  ex. 

tendering,  the  giving  way  or  yielding  to  the  efforts  of  some  mechanical  pow- 
er.    It  is  used  in  opposition  to  jam  mi/ig  or  sticking.  " 

Ribs  of  a  ship,  a  figurative  expression  for  the  timbers. 

Ride  at  anchor,  is  when  a  ship  is  held  by  her  ancnors,  and  is  not  driven  by 
wind  or  tide.-r.  ride  nthwart,  is  to  ride  with  the  ship's  side  to  the  tide.-r. 
ride  ha^se  fallen,  is  when  the  water  breaks  into  the  hawse  in  a  rough  sea. 

Rigging  a  general  name  given  to  ail  the  ropes  employed  to  support  the 
masts,  to  extend  or  reduce  the  sails,  or  to  arrange  them  to  the  disposition  of  the 

^'""^ighting,  restoring  the  ship  to  an  upright  position,  either  after  she  has  been 
laid  on  a  careen,  or  after  she  has  been  pressed  down  on  her  side  by  the  wind. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


179 


ropes,  and  put  round 
sing  or  moving  heavy 

oplein  lime  oi  action, 
—Quarter  bill,  the  list 

of  the  horizon  situated 

jproaching  it ;  thus  to 

;hat  the  balls  scour  the 

deck  before  the  anchor 

iny  check. 

)y  virhich  the  men  go 

uks  of  a  river,  wherein 

crew,  and  implies  that 

g- 

ron  of  a  fleet.     It  is  ap- 

ion. 

other.  It  is  applied  like. 

it. 

in  one  or  more  of   the 

,ole,  as  the  channel  cf  a 

f  some  mechanical  pow> 


rs,  and  is  not  driven  by 
I's  side  to  the  tide.— 7b 
e  in  a  rough  sea. 
iraployed  to  support  the 
to  the  disposition  of  the 

iither  after  she  has  been 
er  side  by  the  wind. 


i 


To  right  the  helm,  is  to  bring  it  into  midships,  after  it  has  been  pushed  either 
to  starboard  or  laiboard. 

Rigging  o'.it  a  boom,  the  running  out  a  pole  at  the  end  of  a  yard,  to  extend 
the  foot  of  a  sail . 

To  rig  the  capstan,  to  fix  the  Vars  in  their  respective  holes. 

Road,  a  place  near  tht  laml  where  ships  may  anchor,  but  which  is  not 
sheltered. 

Robands,  or  rope  bands,  short,  flat  pieces  of  plaited  rope,  having  an  eye  worked 
at  one  end.  They  are  used  in  pairs  to  tie  the  upper  edges  of  the  square-sails  to 
their  respective  yards. 

Rolling,  the  motion  by  which  a  ship  rocks  from  side  to  side  like  a  cradle. 

Rough  tree,  a  name  applied  to  any  mast,  yard,  or  boom,  placed  in  merchant 
ships,  as  a  rail  or  fence  above  the  vessel's  side,  from  the  quarter  de'.k  to  the  fore- 
castle. 

Rounding  in,  the  pulling  upon  any  rope  which  passes  through  one  or  more 
blocks  in  a  direction  nearly  horizontal ;  as,  Round  in  th:  weather-hraces. 

Rounding,  old  ropes  fastened  on  the  cable,  near  the  anchor,  to  keep  it  from 
chafing. 

Round  turn,  the  situation  of  the  two  cables  of  a  ship  when  moored,  after  they 
have  been  several  times  crossed  by  the  swinging  of  the  ship. 

Rounding  tip,  similar  to  rounding  in,  except  that  it  was  applied  to  ropes  and 
blocks  which  act  in  a  perpendicular  direction. 

Rousing,  pulling  up  a  cable  or  rope  without  the  assistance  of  tackles. 

To  row,  to  move  a  boat  with  oars. 

Rowlock,  the  niche  in  a  boat's  side,  in  which  the  oars  are  use''.. 

Rudder,  the  machine  by  which  the  ship  is  steered, 

Rt,n,  the  aftermost  part  of  a  ship's  bottom,  where  it  grows  extremely  narrow 
as  the  stern  approaches  the  stern-post.  Run  is  also  the  distance  sailed  by  a  ship  ; 
and  is  likewise  used  by  sailors  to  imply  the  agreement  to  work  a  single  passage 
from  one  place  to  another. 

To  run  out  a  Karp,  to  carry  the  end  of  a  rope  out  from  a  ship,  in  a  boat,  and 
fasten  it  to  some  distant  object,  so  that  by  it  the  ship  may  be  removed  by  pulling 
on  It. 

To  SAG  TO  I EEWARD,  to  make  considerable  lee-v/ay. 

Sailing  ttim  is  expressed  of  a  ship  when  in  the  best  state  for  sailing. 

She  sands  or  sends,  when  the  the  ship's  head  or  stern  falls  deep  in  the  trougn 
of  the  sea. 

Scanting,  the  variation  of  the  wind,  oy  which  it  becomes  unfavorable  to  a 
ship's  making  great  progress,  as  it  deviates  from  being  large,  and  obliges  the  vessel 
to  steer  close-hauled,  or  nearly  so. 

Scud,  to  go  right  before  the  wind ;  and  going  in  this  direction  without  any 
sail  set,  is  called  spooning. 


* 

M 


4'!.' 

-^2 


\i^>%., 


180 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


Scuttling,  cutting  large  holes  through  the  bottom  or  sides  of  a  ship,  either  to 
sink  her,  or  to  unlade  lier  expeditiously  when  stranded. 

Sea,  a  l;\rge  wave  is  so  calk'd.  Tnus  th^y  say  a  hiavy  sea.  It  implies  like- 
wise,  the  agitation  of  the  ocean  ;  as,  a  ;'je,it  sea.  It  expresses  the  directi.  n  of 
the  waves ;  as,  a  /leaJ  sea.  A  long  sea  meani  a  uniform  and  steady  motion  of  long 
and  extensive  waves;  a  short  sea,  on  the  contrary,  \<.  when  they  run  irregularly, 
broken,  and  interrupted. 

Sea-boat,  a  vessel  that  bears  the  sea  firmly,  without  straining  her  masts,  etc, 

Sea-clothes,  jackets,  trousers,  etc. 

Seamark,  a  point  or  object  on  shore  conspicuously  seen  at  sea. 

Sea  rcom,  a  sufficient  room  distance  from  the  cor.st  or  any  dangerous  rocks, 
etc.,  io  that  a  ship  may  perform  all  nautical  operations  without  danger  of  ship- 
wreck. 

Seize,  to  bind  or  make  fast. 

Serve,  to  wind  something  about  a  rope  to  prevent  it  from  chafing  or  fretting. 
The  service  is  the  thing  so  wound  about  the  rope. 

Stttini;,  the    act   of  observing    the  situation  of  any   distant  object  by  the 

compass. 

To  set  sail,  to  unfttrl  and  expxnd  the  sails  to  the  wind,  in  order  to  give  mo- 

lion  to  the  ship. 

To  set  up,  to  increase  the  tension  of  the  shrouds,  back-stays,  etc.,  by  tackles, 

laniards,  etc. 

Settle,  to  lower  ;  as,  Settle  the  topsail  halliards  ;  lower  them. 

To  settle  the  land,  to  lower  in  appearance.     It  is  synonymous  with  to  lay  the 

land. 

Shank,  the  beam  or  shaft  of  an  anchor. 

Shank  painter,  the  rope  by  which  the  shank  of  the  anchor  is  held  up  to  the 
ship's  side  ;  it  is  also  made  fast  to  a  piece  of  iron  chain,  in  which  the  shank  of  the 

anchor  lodges. 

To  shape  a  course,  to  direct  or  appoint  the  track  of  a  ship,  in  order  to  prose- 

cute  a  voyage. 

Sheer.  The  sheer  of  a  ship  is  the  curve  that  is  between  the  head  and  the 
stern  upon  her  side.— r,4<^  ship  sheers  about;  that  is,  she  goes  in  and  out. 

To  sheer  off,  to  remove  to  a  greater  distance. 

Sheers  are  spars  lashed  together,  and  raised  up,  for  the  purpose  of  getting  out 

or  in  a  mast. 

Sheet,  a  rope  fastened  to  one  or  both  of  the  lower  corners  of  a  sail,  in  order 
to  extend'and  retain  it  in  a  particular  situation.  When  a  ship  sails  with  a  side 
wind,  the  lower  corners  of  the  main  and  fore  sails  are  fastened  by  a  tark  and  a 
sheet,  the  former  being  to  windward,  and  the  latter  to  leeward.  The  tack  is  never 
used  with  a  stern  wino,  whereas  the  sail  is  never  spread  without  the  assistance  of 
one  or  both  of  the  sheets.    The  staysails  and  studdingsails  have  only  one  tack  and 


^«fcm 


wl 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


i8i 


;s  of  a  ship,  either  to 

■ea.     It  implies   like- 

sses  the  direcii  n  of 

steady  motion  of  long 

they  run  irregularly, 

ling  her  masts,  etc. 

at  sea. 

any  dangerous  rocks, 

hout  danger  of  ship- 


im  chafing  or  fretting, 
distant  object  by  the 
i,  in  order  to  give  mo- 
stays,  etc.,  by  tackles , 

lem. 

^mous  with  to  lay  the 


ichor  is  held  up  to  the 
vhich  the  shank  of  the 

hip,  in  order  to  prose- 
ween  the  head  and  the 
es  in  and  out. 

purpose  of  getting  out 

•ners  of  a  sail,  in  order 
ship  sails  with  a  side 
istened  by  a  lark  and  a 
\xA.  The  tack  is  never 
thout  the  assistance  of 
liave  uulv  one  tack  and 


one  sheet  each.  The  staysail-tacks  are  fastened  forward,  ond  the  sheets  drawn 
aft,  but  the  studdingsall-tacks  draw  the  outer  corner  of  the  sail  to  the  extremity 
of  the  boom,  while  the  sheet  is  employed  to  extend  the  inner  corner. 

To  sheet  home,  to  haul  the  sheets  of  a  sail  home  to  the  block  on  the  yard-arm. 

To  shijt  the  helm,  to  alter  its  position  from  right  to  left,  or  from  left  to  right. 

To  ship,  to  take  any  person,  goods  or  things  on  board.  It  also  implies  to  fix 
any  thing  in  its  proper  place  ;   as.  To  ship  the  oars,  to  fix  them  in  their  rowlocks. 

Ship-shape,  in  a  seamanlike  manner  ;  as.  That  mast  is  not  rigged  ship  shape  ; 
Put  her  about  ship-shape,  etc. 

Shivering,  the  state  of  a  sail  when  fluttering  in  the  wind. 

Shoal,  shallow. 

Shoe  of  the  anchor,  a  small  block  of  wood,  convex  on  the  back,  and  having  a 
hole  sufficiently  large  to  contain  the  point  of  the  anchor  fluke  on  the  fore  side ;  it 
is  used  to  prevent  the  anchor  from  tearing  the  planks  on  the  ship's  bow,  when 
ascending  or  descending. 

7'o  shoot  ahead,  \a  ^A'^zi.ncQ  forward. 

Shore,  a  general  name  for  the  sea  coast  of  any  country. 

To  shorten  sail,  used  in  opposition  to  make  sail, 

Shrouds,  a  range  of  large  ropes  extended  from  the  mast-heads  to  the  right 
and  left  sides  of  a  ship,  to  support  the  masts  and  enable  them  to  carry  sail. 

Sinnett,  a  small  plaited  rope  made  from  rope-yarns. 

Slack  xuater,  the  interval  between  the  flux  and  reflux  of  the  tide,  when  no  mo- 
tion is  perceptible  in  the  water. 

Slatch  is  applied  to  the  period  of  a  transitory  breeze. 

To  slip  the  cable,  to  let  it  run  quite  out,  when  there  is  not  time  to  weigh  the. 
anchor. 

To  slue,  to  turn  any  cylindrical  piece  of  timber  about  its  axis,  without  remov- 
ing il  ;  thus,  /rt  slue  a  mast  or  boom,  is  to  turn  it  in  its  cap  or  boomiron.  Also  to 
turn  any  package  or  cask  around. 

Sound,  to  try  the  depth  of  water. 

Sounding  line,  a  line  to  sound  with,  which  is  marked  in  the  following  man- 
ner :  Black  leather  at  2  and  3  fathoms  ;  white  at  5  ;  red  at  7  ;  black  at  10 ;  white 
at  13  (some  seamen  use  black  at  10  and  13)  ;  white  at  15  as  at  5  ;  red  at  17  as  at 
7  ;  two  knots  at  10  fathoms,  and  an  additional  knot  at  ever  ten  fathoms,  with  a 
single  knot  midway  between  each  ten  fathoms,  to  mark  the  line  at  every  hve 
fathoms. 

To  spill  the  mizzen.  To  let  go  the  .sheet  and  peak  it  up. 

To  spill,  to  discharge  the  wind  out  of  the  cavily  or  belly  of  a  bail,  when  it  is 
drawn  up  in  the    Tails,  in  order  to  furl  or  reef  it. 

Spillinglines  f  re  ropes  contrived  to  keep  the  sails  from  being  blown  away, 
when  they  are  clew.;d  up  in  blowing  weather. 


l82 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


*J:.. 


Splice,  to  make  two  ends  of  ropes  fast  together  l)y  untwisting  them  and  then 
putting  the  strands  of  one  piece  with  the  strands  of  the  other. 

Split,  the  state  of  a  sail  renl  by  the  violence  of  the  wind. 

Spoon-drift,  a  sort  of  showery  sprinkling  of  the  sea  water  swept  from  the  sur. 
face  of  the  waves  in  a  tempest,  and  flying  like  a  vapor  before  the  wind. 

Spray,  the  sprinkling  of  a  sea,  driven  occasionally  from,  the  top  of  a  wave,  and 
not  continual  as  a  spoon-drift. 

To  spring  a  ntast,yard,  etc.,  to  crack  a  mast,  yard,  etc.  by  means  of  strain- 
ing in  blowing  weather,  so  that  it  is  rendered  unsafe  f'<r  use.— "^f  spring  aleak. 
When  a  leak  first  commences,  a  ship  is  said  tosptinq  a  .c.tk.—  7^o  spring  the  luff. 
A  ship  is  said  to  spring  her  luff,  when  she  yields  to  the  efforts  of  the  helm,  by 
sailing  nearer  to  the  wind  than  before. 

Spring-stays  .ire  rather  smaller  than  the  stays,  and  placed  above  them,  and 
in  tended  to  answer  the  purpose  of  the  stay,  if  it  should  be  shot  away,  etc. 

Spring-tides  are  the  tides  at  new  and  full  moon,  which  flow  highest  and  ebb 
lowest. 

Spurling  line  is  a  line  that  goes  round  a  small  barrel  abaft  the  baiTel  of  the 
wheel,  and,  coming  to  the  front  beam  of  the  poop-deck,  moves  the  telltale  with 
the  turning  of  the  wheel,  and  keeps  it  always  in  such  a  position  as  to  show  the  po- 
sition  of  the  tiller. 

Spur  shoes,  a  large  piece  of  timber  which  comes  abaft  the  pump-well. 

Squall,  a  sudden,  violent  blast  of  wind. 

Square.    This  term  is  applitd  to  yards  that  arc  very  long,  as  taunt  is  to  high 

masts. 

To  squart  the  yards,  to  brace  the  yards  so  that  they  may  hang  at  right  angles 

with  the  keel. 

To  stand  on,  to  continue  advancing.—  To  stand  in,  to  advance  towards  the 
shore. —  To  stand  of,  to  recede  from  the  shore. 

Starboard,  the  right-hand  side  of  a  ship,  when  looking  {oxvimA.— Starboard 
tack,  A  ship  is  said  to  be  on  the  starboard  tack  when  sailing  with  the  wind  blow- 
ing upon  her  starboard  side. 

" Starboard  the  helm  ."'  an  order  to  push  the  helm  to  the  starboard  side. 

To  stay  a  ship,  to  arrange  the  sails  and  move  the  rudder  so  as  to  bring  the 
ship's  head  to  the  direction  of  the  wind,  in  order  to  get  her  on  the  other  tack. 

Stays  large  ropes  coming  from  the  mast-head  down  before  the  masts,  to  pre- 
vent them  from  springing,  when  the  ship  is  sending  doep. 

"Steady  I"  the  order  to  the  helmsman  to  keep  the  ship  in  the  direction  she  is 
going  at  that  instant. 

Steering,  the  art  of  directing  the  ship's  way  by  the  movement  of  the  helm. 

Steerage-way,  such  degree  of  progressive  motion  of  a  ship  a'  will  give  effect 
to  the  motion  of  the  ship. 

Stem,  a  circular  piece  of  timber,  into  which  the  two  sides  of  a  ship  are  united 


%.. 


sting  them  and  then 


't  swept  from  the  sur. 

t  the  wind. 

he  top  of  a  wave,  and 

by  means  of  strain- 
se. —  ''"o  sprin);  aleak, 
k, —  To  spring  the  luff. 
ifforts  of  the  helm,  by 

iced  above  them,  and 

hot  away,  etc. 

flow  highest  and  ebb 

abaft  the  bairel  of  the 
noves  the  telltale  with 
lion  as  to  show  the  po- 
le pump'well. 
ing,  as  taunt  is  to  high 
ly  hang  at  right  angles 
I  advance  towards  the 

ig  forward. — Starboard 
ig  with  the  wind  blow- 

le  starboard  side, 
Ider  so  as  to  bring  the 
on  the  other  tack, 
lefore  the  masts,  to  pre- 

I  in  the  direction  she  is 

vement  of  the  helm, 
ship  as  will  give  ciTect 

les  of  a  ship  are  united 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


183 


r 

■  at  the  fore  end ;  the  lower  end  is  scarfed  to  the  keel,  and  the  bowsprit  rests  on  the 
upper  end. 

To  stem  the  tide.  When  a  ship  is  sailing  against  the  tide,  at  such  a  rate  as  to 
enable  her  to  overcome  its  povveis,  she  is  said  to  stem  the  tide. 

Sleeve,  turning  up. —  The  bowsprit  steeves  too  much,  that  is,  it  is  too  upright. 

Sternfast,  a  rope  confining  a  ship  by  her  stern  to  any  other  ship  or  to  a  wharf. 

Stetnmost,  the  farthest  astern,  oiiposed  to  headmost. 

Stern  way,  the  motion  by  which  a  ship  f.alls  back  with  her  stern  foremost. 

Siiff,{ht  condition  of  a  ship  when  she  will  carry  a  great  quantity  of  sail 
without  hazard  of  oversetting.     It  i    used  in  opposition  to  erank. 

Stoppers,  a  large  kind  of  ropes,  which,  being  fastened  to  the  cable  in  different 
places  abaft  the  bitts,  are  an  additional  security  to  the  ship  at  anchor. 

To  stow,  to  arrange  and  dispose  a  ship's  c.".rf;o. 

.'strand,  one  of  the  twists  or  divisions  of  which  a  rope  is  composed.  It  also 
implies  the  sea  beach. 

Stranded.  This  term,  speaking  of  a  cable  or  rope,  signifies  that  one  of  its 
strands  is  broken  ;  applied  to  a  vessel,  it  means  that  she  is  run  aground  and  is  lost 

To  stream  the  buoy,  to  let  it  fall  from  the  ship's  side  into  the  water,  previously 
to  casting  anchor. 

'^Stretch  out!"  a  term  used  to  men  in  a  boat  when  they  shouU  pull  strong. 

To  strike,  to  lower  or  let  down  anything ;  used  emphatically  10  denote  the 
lowering  of  colors  in  token  of  surrender  to  a  victorious  enemy. 

To  strike  sounding,  to  touch  ground  when  endeavoring  to  tind  the  depth  of 
water. 

Sued,  or  sewed.  When  a  ship  is  on  shore,  and  the  water  leaves  her,  she  is 
said  to  be  sued ;  if  the  water  i«aves  her  two  feet,  she  sues  or  is  sued  two  feet. 

Surf,  the  swell  of  the  sea  that  breaks  upon  the  shore  or  on  any  rock. 

To  surge  the  capstan,  to  slacken  the  rope  heaved  round  upon  it. 

Sway  away,  hoist. 

Swell,  the  fluctuating  motion  of  the  sea,  either  during  or  after  a  storm. 

Sweeping,  the  act  of  dragging  the  bight  or  loose  part  of  a  rope  along  the 
surface  of  the  ground,  in  a  harbor  or  road,  in  order  to  drag  up  something  lost. 

Swinging,  the  act  of  a  ship's  turning  round  her  anchor  at  the  change  of  wind 
or  tide. 

To  TACK,  to  turn  a  ship  about  from  one  tack  to  another,  by  bringing  her 
head  to  wind. 

Tafferel,  the  uppermost  part  of  a  ship's  stern. 

Taking  in,  the  act  of  furling  the  sails,  used  it  opposition  to  setting. 

Taking  aback. — See  Aback. 

Tamkin,  or  iomkin ;  tampion,  or  tompion,  the  bung  or  piece  of  wood,  by 
which  the  mouth  of  a  cannon  is  filled  to  keep  out  wet. 


*«"*5*^ 


4 


KS6»«Ml!Ijai»(lt#li«»SaV' 


184 


Thomp  m's  Coast  Pilot. 


^m 


rrtr/>««A>/,  it  f'oth  of  canvas  covr  ,d  with  some  tar  or  s'^me  other  composi- 
tion,  so  as  to  m.kt  it  waterproof. 

Ttuit,  itnp'-operly,  thoutjli  very  ,;;enerally  used  for  /•;,-///. 
TauiX,  h'«li,  "r  l-i"  ;  pariiciil:irly  applied  to  masts  of  uxtraordiiiary  length. 
Tell-la!,',  an  instrument  .vhich  iraversis  upon  an  index  in  front  of  the  poop- 
deck,  to  .show  the  position  of  the  tiller. 

Tending,  the  turning  or  swinnin;;  of  a  nhip  round  her  anchor  in  a  tideway  at 
the  lieginnim;  of  ebli  and  floo<l. 
7'/i«'a>/.— See  .'llliwarl. 
T/ncaif  s/ii/s.—^-ie  Atliwnrt  i/iifs. 

"  Thitsr  M\  order  to  the  helmsman  to  keep  the  ship  in  her  present  situation, 
when  sailing  with  a  scant  wind. 

To  tide,   to  work  in  or  out  of  a  river,  haihor,  or  channel,  by   fav<  rs  of  the 
tide,  anchoring  whenever  it  beco,   js  .idversc. 

Tide  it  rip,  to  go  with  the  ..de  n^-ainst  the  wind. 

Tide-way,  that  pirt  of  t!io  river  in  which  the  tide  elibs  and   fl  )W.s  strongly. 
Tier  a  row  ;  ixs  a  tier  of  gnus,  a  tier  ol'  casks,  a  Her  of  ships,  etc.—  Tier  <^'    ; 
cable,  a  ran-e  of  the   fakes   or  windings  of  a  caMe   which  are   laid  within  one 
another,  in  a  horizontal  po  ition.— Or/'/?  //,■;-,  the  space  in   the  midst  of  a  cable 
when  it  is  coiled  ;  also  the  place  in  wh'.ch  it  is  coiled. 

Tiller,  a  l.irge  piece  of  wood,  or  a  beam,  put  into  the  head  of  the  rudder,  and 
l)y  which  means  the  rudder  is  moved. 

Topping,  pulling  one  of  the  ends  of  a  yard  higher  th.^u  the  other. 
Tori,  or  tout,  signifies  tight. 

TotoK.  to  draw  a  ship  in  the  water  by  a  rope,  fixed  to  a  boat  or  other  ship 
which  is  rowing  or  sailing  on. 

Tow-line,  a  small  hawser  or  rope,  used  to  remove  a  ship  from  one  part  of  a 

harbor  to  another. 

Transoms,  certain  beams  or  timbers  extended  across  the  stern  post  of  a  ship 
to  strengthen  her  after  part,  and  to  give  it  the  figure  most  suitable  to  the  service 
for  which  she  is  calculated. 

Traverse,  to  go  backwards  .and  forwards. 

Treenails  or  tiumiels,  long  wooden  pins  employed  to  connect  the  planks  of 
the  ship's  side  and  bottom  to  the  corresponding  timbers. 

Trice,  trice  up,  to  haul  up  and  fasten. 

Trim,  the  state  or  disposition  by  which  a  ship  is  best  calculated  for  the  pur- 
pose  of  navigation.— rc>  tnm  the  hold,  to  arrange  the  cargo  regularly. 

To  trim  the  sails,  to  dispose  the  sails  in  the  best  arrangement  for  the  course 

which  a  ship  is  steering. 

To  trip  the  anchor,  to  loosen  the  anchor  from  the  ground,  either  by  design  or 

accident. 

Trough  of  the  sea,  the  hollow  between  two  waves. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot, 


185 


»ome  other  compoai- 


lrai)nliiiary  length, 
in  front  of  the  poop- 

ichur  in  a  fiiL'  way  nt 


her  present  situation, 
nel,  by    fav    s  of  the 

\\\i\  fl  )ws  strongly, 
-liijis.  elc.—  Tier  o!  ,1 
iire   laid  within  one 
the  mill-it  of  a  cable 

aii  of  the  rud  ler,  and 

the  other. 

)  a  boat  or  other  sl.ip 

lip  from  one  part  of  a 

e  stern  post  of  a  ship 
suitable  to  the  service 

connect  the   planks  of 


calculated  for  the  pur- 

regularly. 

ngement  for  the  course 

id,  either  by  design  or 


Triui,  a  rouna  piece  of  wood  put   upon  the  top  of  flag-staves,  with  shuMves 
on  each  side  for  the  hilliards  of  the  tlags  to  reeve  in. 

Trysiii/,  a  small  s.iil  used  by  cutlers  and  brigs  in  blowing  weather, 

Turning  fi>  wini/wnrJ,  that  operation  in  sailing,  whereby  a  ship  endeavors  to 
advance  iigaiiist  the  winil. 

To  u.NUAi.i  Asr,  to  discharge  the  ballast  out  of  a  ship. 

To  unbend,  to  take  the  sails  off  from  their  yards  and  stays ;  to  cast  loose  the 
anchor  from  th»'  cable;  to  untie  two  ropes. 

To  unl-iii        remove  the  turns  of  a  cable  from  off  the  bitts. 

^pressed  of  an  anchor  that  is  directly  under  the  shir. 

'•''  wav.    When  a  ship  is  sailing,  she  is  said      be  <.i.' tfr 


Vttdfrf 
Umk 

way. 

Under 

ward  of  the 


share,  is  to  be  close  under  the  shore  which  lies  to  wind- 


ip- 


i 


Unfurl,  cast  loose  the  gahket  of  the  sail. 

To  unmoor,  to  reduce  a  ship  to  the  state  of  ridini;  at  single  anchor,  after  she 
has  been  moored. 

To  unreeve,  to  draw  a  rope  from  out  of  a  block,  timber,  etc. 

To  unrig,  to  deprive  the  ship  of  her  ri,jBi"g' 

UvroH,  the  piece  of  wood  by  which  the  legs  of  the  crofoot  arc  extended. 

Van,  the  foremost  division  of  a  fleet  in  one  line.  It  is  likewise  applied  to  the 
foremost  ship  of  a  division  . 

Vine,  a  small  kind  of  flag  worn  at  each  mast-head. 

To  veer  or  ^i'«u■  the  ^hip,  to  i  iiange  a  ship's  course  from  one  tack  to  the 
other,  by  turning  her  stern  to  windward. 

Veer,  to  let  out ;  as  Veer  away  tht  cable. 

Veer,  shift. —  The  wind  veers,  that  is,  it  shifts,  changes. 

To  veer  and  haul,  to  pull  light  or  slacken  alternately. 
Viol,  or  voyal,  a  M   ck  through  which   the  messenger  passes  in  weighing  the 
anchor.     A  large  me>.scnL   r  is  called  a  viol. 

Wake,  the  path  or  track  impressed  on  the  water  by  the  ship's  passage  through 
it,  leaving  a  smoothness  in  the  sea  behind  it.  A  ship  is  said  to  come  into  the  wake 
of  another,  when  .she  follows  her  in  the  same  track,  and  this  is  chiefly  done  in 
bringing  ships  to,  or  in  forming  the  line  of  battle. 

Wales  are  strong  timbers  that  go  round  a  ship  a  little  above  her  water  line. 

IVarp,  a  small  rope  employed  occasionally  to-  remove  a  ship  from  one  place 
to  another. 

To  warp,  to  remove  a  ship  by  means  of  a  warp. 

Waist,  that  part  of  a  ship  contained  between  the  quarter-deck  and  the  fore- 
castle. 

Water-line,  the  line  made  by  the  water's  edge  when  a  ship  has  her  full  pro- 
portion of  stores,  etc.,  on  board. 


i86 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


■  -'  1 

«1  - 


Water />o>nf,  the  stale  of  a  ship  when  there  ii  b»rely  »  suniclenl  depth  of  wa- 
ter to  float  her  off  from  the  ground. 

lVater-hi;se,i,  the  state  of  a  nhip  become  heavy  and  inactive  on  the  tea,  from 
ihegre^t  r|unntity  of  water  lealteil  into  her, 

Haterlighl,  the  slate  of  a  ship  when  not  leaky. 

\Vtalher.—  To  wmM/"*  anything  is  to  get  to  windward  of  it.— Synonymoui 

with  whtilivitrJ, 

WtiUhahealm,  shattered  by  a  i,\»xm.—  W(atherlnt,  a  turn  of  the  cable  about 
the  end  of  the  windl.ns.— JK-rtM-v ••.c",V'.  When  a  Heet  or  a  ship  is  to  windward  of 
nn.ilhcr,  she  is  said  to  have  the  vc„lhe>.i:a^i  of  her.-  W'tathtr-qmuUr,  that  quar- 
ter of  tli'e  ship  which  is  on  the  windward  <\At.—  \Vtalhernde,  thcsid^e  upon  which 
the  wind  blows. 

To  xveii^h  anchor,  to  heave  up  an  anchor  from  the  bottom. 

To  wind  a  shi/<Ao  chanRo  her  position,  bringinH  her  head  where  her  stern  wa.. 

mnJ-rcad.  When  a  ship  is  at  anchor,  and  the  wind,  being  against  the  tide, 
is  so  strong  as  to  overcome  its  power,  and  keep  the  ship  to  leeward  of  her  anchor, 
she  is  said  to  be  wind- road. 

mud's  eye,  the  point  from  which  the  wind  blow.^. 

To  windward,  toward  that  part  of  the  horizon  from  which  the  wind  blows. 

Windward  tide,  a  tide  that  sets  to  windward. 

To  work  a  ship,  to  direct  the  movements  of  a  ship  by  adapting  the  sails  and 
managing  the  rudder  according  to  the  course  the  ship  has  to  make. 

lo  work  to  windward,  to  mnke  a  progress  against  the  direction  of  the  wind. 

Wooled,  to  bind  round  with  ropes. 

Yards,  the  spars  upon  which  the  sails  are  spread. 

Yawing,  the  motion  of  a  ship  when  she  deviates  from  her  course  to  the  right 

or  left. 


nicient  depth  of  wf 
live  on  the  tea,  from 

I  of  it,— Synonymoui 

rn  of  the  cable  about 
lip  is  Id  windward  of 
frqiimter,  that  quar- 
,  the  side  upon  which 


where  her  stern  was. 
eing  iigainsl  the  tide, 
eward  of  her  anchor, 


ch  the  wind  blows. 

,dapling  the  sails  and 
make, 
reclion  of  the  wind. 


er  course  to  the  right 


^, 


M\ 


'i 


'll^iptti 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1.1 


11.25 


\&WiA     |Z5 
u&  I3ii   12.2 

■luu 

U   il.6 


PhotDgraphic 

Sciences 

Corporalion 


^.V 


23  Wis.  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14S80 

(716)S72-4S03 


>>*M-«f«[MM#B|MM«;. 


,,i,^,pgyjy;r<..^j,i,.,|!fl,i|»iA,i,M-.,Ji.^,i||Mi-WWJjUI)IM|iM 


^ 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICIVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


b' 


^^ 


5s  '^o^ 


INSTRUCTIONS  AND  DRILL 


IN  THE  USE  OF  THE 


Rocket  and  Mortar  Apparatus. 


The  rocket  and  mortar  apparatus  consists  of  the  following  articles  : 


Articles  of  rocket  apparatus, 


Articles  of  mortar  apparatus. 


Line  rockets. 
Rocket  frame. 
Rocket  staves. 
Rocket  pins. 
Washers, 
Detonating  tubes. 
Priming  wire. 
Trigger  line. 


5-inch  Eprouvette  mortar  and  bed. 

Cast-iron  balls. 

Spiral  wires. 

Priming  wires. 

Friction  primers. 

Tank  (6  pounds)  best  sporting  powder. 

Powder  flask,  with  shoulder  belt. 

Match  stock,  with  match  rope. 

Quick-matches  in  tin  case. 


Articles  Common  to  Both. . 


Box  hand  light  j  and  portfires. 

Haversack, 

Hand  cart. 

Shot  or  rocket  line. 

Hawser. 


Sand  anchor  and  backer. 

Tarpaulin,  with  tent  pegs. 

Pickaxe. 

Shovel. 

Lantern. 


Hauling  or  whip  line  rove  through  a  sin-  Signal  flag. 

gle  tail-block.  Tally-boards. 

Double  block  tackle  purchas:.  Life  car. 

Spare  tail-blocks.  Breeches  buoy. 
Crotch  or  triangle. 


m 


i  (  1 


1 88 


Thompson!  s  Coast  Pilot. 


General  Directions. 

The  line  should  be  first  thrown  from  its  box  after  the  frame  with  the  faking 
pins  has  been  carefully  lifted  clear  of  the  line.  If  the  first  shot  fails,  the  line 
may  be  afterwards  French-faked  on  the  tarpaulin  or  along  the  beach. 

The  following  engraving  shows  the  shot  or  rocket  line  faked  in  the  box  : 


In  aiming  due  allowance  should  be  made  for  the  force  and  direction  of  the 
wind  Accuracy  of  aim  can  only  be  acquired  by  frequent  practice  in  throwing 
the  line  along  the  beach  in  all  conditions  of  wind  and  weather.  The  line,  whether 
in  its  box  or  faked  on  the  ground,  should  be  placed  at  least  six  or  eight  feet  to 
the  windward  of  the  rocket  frame  or  mortar.  In  firing,  care  should  be  taken 
to  stand  by  the  side  of,  and  not  behind,  the  rocket  frame  or  mortar. 

When  the  shot  or  rocket  line  is  over  the  wreck  and  has  been  seized  by  those 
on  board,  signal  should  be  made,  from  the  ship,  in  the  day   time,   by  some  one 
standing  apart  from  the  rest,  by  waving  a  flag,   handkerchief,  hat,  or  h.s    hand  ; 
or,  if  at  night,  a  rocket,  a  blue  light,  or  a  gun  should  be  fired,  or  a  hght    should 
be  shown  over  the  ship's  side  for  a  short  time  and  then  concealed       When  th.s 
signal  is  observed  on  shore,  the  shore  end  of  the  shot  or  rocket   hne  should  be 
bent  on  to  the  whip,  around  both  parts  of  it.  about  two  fathoms    above  the  tail- 
block.  ..nd  signals  should  be  made  by  the  man  on  shore  attending  signals  standing 
apart  from  the  rest  and  waving  the  signal  flag,  if  in  the  daytime,  or  showing  a  red 
light  for  a  short  time,  if  at  n.ght.      When  this  signal  is  seen  by  those  on   the 
wreck,  they  will  haul  on  the  shot  or  rocket  line  until  the  whip  and  ta.l-block  are 
on  board,  when  they  will  make  fast  the  tail  of  the  block,  as  directed  by  .he  taUy- 
board  attached  to  the  whip,  and  make  signal  to  the  .hore  as  before.      At   this 
signal  those  on  shore  will  haul  the  hawser,  which  has,  in  the  meantime  been  rove 
through  the  rings  of  the  life-car  or  the  block   of  the   traveler  attached  to  the 
bre  .hes  bouy.  on  board  the  wreck,  by  the  whip,  which  has  also  been  previously 
made  fast  to  the  hawser.      When  the  hawser  is  on  board  it  will  be  made  fast  to 
the  wreck,  in  accordance  with  the  directions  on   the  tally-board  attached  to  it 
and  disconnected  from  the  whip,  and  signal  will  again  be  made.      At  this  s.gn^ 
(the  sand  anchor  having  been  securely  planted  in  the  beach)  the  hawser    will  be 


rame  with  the  faking 
t  shot  fails,  the  line 
he  beach, 
faked  in  the  box  : 


:  and  direction  of  the 

practice  in  throwing 
,er.  The  line,  whether 
t  six  or  eight  feet  to 
care   should  be  taken 

mortar. 

IS  been  seized  by  those 
y  time,  by  some  one 
ief,  hat,  or  his  hand; 
red,  or  a  light  should 
oncealed.      When  this 

rocket  line  should  be 
thorns  above  the  tail- 
tending  signals  standing 
ytime,  or  showing  a  red 

seen  by  those  on  the 
whip  and  tail-block  are 
s  directed  by  the  tally- 
re  as  before.  At  this 
the  meantime,  been  rove 
aveler  attached  to  the 
as  also  been  previously 
it  will  lie  made  fast  to 
ly-board  attached  to  it, 
made.  At  this  signal 
ch)  the  hawser    will  be 


ThompsorCs  Coast  Pilot, 


189 


set  up  by  means  of  the  tackle-purchase,  and  the  whip,  having  been  bent  on  to 
each  end  of  the  life-car  or  secured  to  the  bre«ches  box,  will  be  used  by  the  crew 
on  shore  to  haul  the  car  or  buoy  off  to  the  wreck.  At  ihc  next  signal  fiom  the 
vessel,  indicating  that  the  car  or  buoy  has  received  its  freight,  it  will  be  hauled 
ashore.  Those  drawn  ashore  will  be  duly  taken  charge  of,  and  the  car  or  buoy 
returned  to  and  from  the  vessel  until  all  who  can  be  are  saved. 

The  following  illustration  shows  the  method  of  using  the  hawser  and  whip 
line : 


Should  the  motion  of  the  sea  cause  the  vessel  to  rock  violently,  the  hawser 
should  not  be  set  up,  but  should  be  rove  through  the  block  of  the  triangle  and 
manned  with  as  many  men  as  can  be  spared,  who  will  haul  and  veer  on  it  accord- 
ing  to  the  motion  of  the  vessel,  keeping  the  strain  as  uniform  as  possible  to  pre- 
vent its  being  carried  away. 

Where  the  wreck  happens  on  a  flat  shore,  or  there  is  imminent  danger  of  the 
immediate  breaking  up  of  the  wreck,  the  hawser  should  not  be  set  up,  but  the 
whip  alone  should  be  used,  as  represented  in  the  following  illustration : 


Rocket  Drill. 


The  crew  should  be  numbered  consecutively  i,  a,  3,  4,  S  and  6,  the  keeper 
acting  as  Captain.  If  the  crew  of  an  adjacent  station  should  be  present,  the  surf- 
men  will  form  auxiliary  numbers,  7,  8,  9,  10,  u  and  12,  and  the  keeper  will  be 
second  in  command. 


"-■^s 


I  go 


Thompsonfs  Coast  Pitoi. 


Words  of  Command. 
"  Rocket  party,  fall  in."      "  Form  order  of  mnrch ;  "  (or,  if  auxiliaries  are 
present,  "  Form  order  of  march,  double.")     •'  Halt."     "  Action."      "  Ready." 
"Fire."      "  Bend  on."      "  Haul  out."      "  Haul  ashore." 
"  Rocket  party,  Fall  in !  " 

8,2,4,6,10,12 Rear  rank. 

«.  3,  5,  7.9.  II Front  rank. 

Rocket  Nos 1,2,3,4,5,6. 

Auxiliaries 7,8,9,10,11,12. 

Form  of  Order  of  March,  Double. 


6 

— e 

4. 

0 

2. 

0- 

1 

22 

10 

e 

e- 

1 

8 

0 

7  S  3 

In  case  auxiliaries  are  not  present,  the  single  order  of  march  will  be  formed 
by  the  regular  rocket  numbers,  as  above,  by  No,  6  taking  the  place  of  No.  8. 

Providing    Stores. 

[Stores  are  always  to  be  kept  in  the  cart  in  a  serviceable  condition  ;  a  list  of 
the  stores  printed  on  calico  will  be  posted  on  the  rear  end  of  the  cart.  The  stores 
are  to  be  carefully  examined  after  use,  and  put  in  order;  they  will  also  be  inspect, 
ed  and  aired  monthly.] 

The  rof;ket  numbers  will  be  charged  with  providing  and  caring  for  the  stores 
as  follows : 

No.  I— Rocket  frame,  tube  box,  (containing  tubes,  primers,  washers,  and 
pins  for  the  rockets,  priming  wire,  and  trigger  line.) 

No.  2— Six  rockets,  box  of  hand  lights  and  port-fires,  six  staves,  line  and  box 
with  small  stores,  (attached  to  the  side  of  the  cart  before  the  wheel.) 

No.  3— Rocket  line,  whip  and  tally-boards,  two  tail-blocks,  (one  on  whip  and 
one  spate.) 

No.  4— Signal  flag,  lantern,  (if  at  night,)  straps,  tarpaulin,  and  eight  tent 
pegs,  (tarpaulin  to  be  fitted  for  pegging  down  on  the  beach.) 

No.  5 — Hawser  and  tally-boards,  snatch-block  and  triangle. 

No.  6— Anchor  and  packer,  tackle,  pickaxe,  shovel,  and  life-car  or  breeches 

buoy. 

The  Captain — A  flask  of  spirits  from  the  medicine  chest  to  revive  the  ship- 
wrecked if  necessary. 

All  auxiliaries  are  to  assist  in  carrying  stores  from  the  cart  to  point  of  action. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


191 


(or,  if  auxiliaries  are 
Action."      "  Ready." 


ank. 
ank. 
5,6. 
,  12. 


march  will  be  formed 
lie  place  of  No.  8. 

le  condition  ;  a  list  of 
)f  the  cart.  The  stores 
ley  will  also  be  inspect. 

id  caring  for  the  stores 

primers,  washers,  and 

iix  staves,  line  and  box 

le  wheel.) 

ocks,  (one  on  whip  and 

)aulin,  and  eight  tent 

^.) 

ingle. 

»d  life-car  or  breeches 

St  to  revive  the  ship- 
cart  to  point  of  action. 


Duties  at  the  Words  of  Command,  "  Halt,"  "  Action." 

No.  I  places  rocket  frames,  uncaps  and  places  rocket  in  frame,  points,  ele- 
vates, primes,  sees  all  clear. 

No.  2  assists  No.  3  to  place  box  with  line  six  yards  to  windward  and  abreast 
of  frame,  and  with  him  lifts  box  clear  of  pins,  places  and  pins  staff  to  rocket  and 
hands  it  to  No.  I. 

No.  3  takes  out  rocket  staves,  and,  assisted  by  No.  2,  places  box  with  line  six 
yards  to  windward  and  abreast  of  frame,  and  with  him  lifts  box  clear  of  pins  and 
cants  it  in  the  direction  of  the  wreck  ;  wets  about  three  fathoms  of  end  of  line, 
reeves  it  through  staff  and  puts  on  two  India-rubber  washers  and  a  metal  one, 
and  then  knots  end  of  line  securely. 

No.  4,  assisted  by  even  numbers  of  auxiliaries,  takes  the  whip  and  carries  it 
eight  yards  to  the  right,  rear  of  frame,  and  sees  it  clear  for  running  and  bending 
on  hawser. 

Nos.  5  and  6,  assisted  by  odd  numbers  of  auxiliaries,  take  end  of  hawser  and 
tally  to  No.  4,  and  clear  it. 

Auxiliary  No.  7,  assisted  by  No.  9,  spreads  and  pegs  down  tarpaulin ;  then 
attends  signals  under  direction  of  the  Captain.  (If  there  be  no  No.  7,  Captain 
attends  signals.) 

No.  8  assists  No.  7  and  keeps  ground  clear, 

Nos.  9  and  11  assist  Nos.  5  and  6,  as  indicated  in  directions  to  them  above* 

Nos.  10  and  12  assist  No.  4,  as  indicated  in  direction  to  him  above. 

"  Ready." 

No.  I  sees  trigger  line  clear  and  cocks  the  lock  or  lights  port  fire,  retiring  to 

the  left. 

No.  2  attends  steadying  line.  >%•■ 

"Fire." 

No.  I  fires  with  steady  pull  or  with  a  port-fire,  and,  if  communication  is 
effected,  removes  the  frame.  (Note.— If  rocket  fails,  Nos.  3  and  4  haul  in  line; 
Nos.  I  and  2  take  down  clear  for  running ;  No.  I  corrects  the  pointing  and 
elevating,  and  then  the  party  proceed  as  before.) 

"Bend  on "— "  Haul  out." 

Nos.  I  and  2  bend  shot  line  on  the  whip  ;  No.  I  mans  hauling  part  of  whip  ; 
and  No.  2  takes  charge  of  the  right  side  of  whip. 

Nos.  3  and  4  bend  on  hawser  *  and  tally  about  two  fathoms  from  the  end, 
and  No.  4  takes  charge  of  left  side  of  whip. 

No.  5,  assisted  by  odd  numbers  of  auxiliaries,  clears  hawser  away  for  hauling 
off  to  the  wreck,  reeves  it  through  rings  of  life-car  or  the  block  of  the  traveller 
attached  to  the  breeches  buoy  ;  bends  on  whip  to  car  or  buoy. 


*  In  bending  on  the  hawser  de  not  stop  Ike  end  up  with  a  reft  yam,  but  leave  two  or 
three  fathoms  hanging  loose. 


192  Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 

No.  6,  assisted  by  odd  numbers  of  auxiliaries,  buries  anchor  and  backer, 
hooks  on  takle  to  anchor,  and,  securing  it  to  hawser,  raises  triangle  and  snatches 

hawser. 

Nos.  9  and  II  assist  No.  $  to  clear  away  hawser,  keeping  a  slight  strain  on  it 
while  being  hauled  oflf  to  the  wreck,  keeping  to  the  left  of  the  whip ;  man  the 
tackle  and  veer  and  haul  as  necessary. 

Nos.  lo  and  12  assist  No.  4  in  working  the  whip.f  hauling  off  hawser,  &c. 

[In  working  the  apparatus  with  only  six  men,  Nos.  3  and  5  assist  No.  6  to 
raiKe  triangle  snd  attend  to  hawser ;  Nos.  I,  2,  and  4  attend  to  the  whip.] 

Connections  being  made,  Nos  I,  2,  and  3,  assisted  by  even  numbers  of 
auxiliaries,  haul  out  hawser  and  life-car  or  breeches  buoy. 

"  Haul  Ashore." 

Nos.  I,  3,  and  4,  assisted  by  even  numbers  of  auxiliaries,  man  the  hauling 
side  of  whip. 

No.  2  attends  veering  part,  assisted  if  necessary  by  an  auxiliary  number.  As 
persons  are  landed.  No.  8  and  spare  numbers  attend  to  them. 

When  the  service  or  exercise  is  over  the  stores  are  to  be  returned  to  the  cart, 
the  party  fall  in  to  the  order  of  march  and  return  to  the  station. 

Mortar  Drill, 

[Note.— The  chamber  or  bore  of  the  mortar  should  be  wiped  clear  of  all 
sand  or  dirt  before  it  is  used.  In  loading,  raise  the  muzzle  and  pour  the  powder 
into  the  chamber  until  it  is  full.  When  practicable  the  charge  should  be  covere 
with  paper  of  sufficient  size  to  fit  the  bore  snugly  over  the  chamber.  Two  spiral 
wires  should  be  attached  securely  to  the  shot,  and  the  shot  lowered  down  on  the 
charge.  The  shot  line  should  be  made  fast  to  the  spiral  wires  by  firmly  splicing  it 
in  the  eyes  of  the  wires.  The  sand  should  then  be  dug  away,  until  the  bedpiece 
of  the  mortar  lies  level.  This  gives  the  proper  elevation  for  throwing  a  line  from 
350  to  400  yards ;  if  no  spiral  wires  are  on  hand  the  line  may  be  fastened  to  the 
shot  after  wel'.ing  two  or  three  feet  of  the  line.  When  all  is  ready  for  firing,  a 
quick-match  will  be  put  into  the  vent.] 

Words  of  command,  numbers,  and  stations  same  as  for  rocket  drill,  excent 
that  the  word  mortar  is  substituted  for  rociei. 

Providing  Stores. 
No.  I — Mortar  and  bed,  tube  box,  (containing  tubes  and  primers,  priming 
wire  and  powder  flask.) 

No.  2— Mortar  and  bed  with  No.  I,  then  balls,  port -fires,  and  spiral  wires. 


tWhen  working  the  whip  keep  the  veering  part  well  separated  from  the  hauling  part, 
the  parties  at  each  standing  as  far  apart  as  possiole,  the  hawser  being  between  the  two.  Lilt 
the  whip  well  in  order  to  keep  clear  of  surf  or  seaweed  &c. 


i  anchor  and  backer, 
triangle  and  snatches 

ng  a  slight  strain  on  it 
of  the  whip  ;  man  the 

ling  off  hawser,  &c. 
3  and  5  assist  No.  6  to 
i  to  the  whip.] 
by   even  numbers  of 


ries,  man  the  hauling 

auxilii'.ry  number.     As 

m, 

^e  returned  to  the  cart, 

ition. 


I  be  wiped  clear  of  all 
:  and  pour  the  powder 
large  should  be  covere 
!  chamber.  Two  spiral 
;  lowered  down  on  the 
ires  by  firmly  splicing  it 
way,  until  the  bedpiece 
or  throwing  a  line  from 
may  be  fastened  to  the 
all  is  ready  for  firing,  a 

or  rocket  drill,  excent 


s  and  primers,  priming 
res,  and  spiral  wires. 


ted  from  the  hauling  part, 
iing  between  the  two.    Lift 


iSsa*»msfB,-j-:i^§gs^?*':''"; 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


193 


No.  3— Shot  line,  hauling  line,  and  tallies,  two  tail-blocks,  (one  on  whip  and 
one  to  spare. ) 

No.  4— Straps,  signal  (lag  (or  lantern  if  at  night,)  and  tarpaulin. 

No.  S— Hawser,  tally,  and  triangle  or  crotch. 

No.  6 — Anchor,  tackle,  pickaxe,  shovel,  life-car  or  breeches  buoy. 

The  Captain— a  flask  of  spirits  from  the  medicine  chest  to  revive  the  «hip- 
wrecked  if  necessary. 

All  auxiliaries  are  to  assist  in  carrying  stores  from  the  point  of  action. 

Duties  at  the  Command  "Halt,  "Action." 

No.  I  places  and  levels  mortar  and  bed,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  2,  cleans 
bore  and  chamber,  loads  with  powder  and  ball,  cleans  vent,  primts.  and  sees  all 
clear.  ♦• 

Nc.  2  assists  No.  i  in  levelling  and  placing  mortar  and  bed,  attaches  spiral 
wires  to  shot,  lowers  shot  into  mortar,  and  fastens  shot  line  to  spiral  wires. 

Duties  of  other  numbers  same  as  in  rocket  drill. 

At  the  words  "Ready,"  "Fire,"  Bend  on,"  Haul  out,"  and  "Haul  ashore," 
the  duties  of  all  numbers  are  the  same  as  in  the  rocket  drill. 


'KB' 


Towing  of  Life  Boats. 


On  no  account  must  nny  life  bo.it  be  towed,  either  by  a  steamer  or  sailing- 
vessel,  without  hor  crew  being  in  her,  or  at  least  a  sufficient  number  of  men  to 
manage  her,  in  the  event  of  her  l)rcaking  adrift,  or  having  to  cast  off  from  the 

towing  vessel. 

A  life  boat  may  be  towed  by  either  one  or  two  ropes.  If  the  former  be 
adopted,  it  is  recommended  to  tow  with  a  long  scope,  from  forty  to  sixty  fathoms, 
the  tow'rope  being  rove  through  n  fair-leadcr  or  lizard  at  the  stemhead,  and 
screwed  to  a  I)ollard  shipped  in  the  ivuni<  or  tabernacle  of  the  foremast. 

If  towed  with  two  ropes,  one  from  each  quarter  of  the  towingsteamer,  they 
should  not  he  taken  to  the  stem  of  the  boat,  but  he  made  fast,  one  to  each  bow, 
for  which  purpose  some-life  l.oats  are  lilte.l  with  a  bollard  on  each  bow.  In 
either  case,  the  crew  should  be  seated  well  aft  in  the  boat  to  weigh  her  by  the 
stern,  excepting  one  man  forward  with  n  small  hatchet  by  him,  ready  to  cut  the 
tow  rope  in  r  moment  if  it  should  hecome  necessary. 

A  life-boat  will  always  be  found  to  tow  better  against  a  heavy  head-sea  than 
from  one.  as  there  will  be  a  more  steady  and  regul.ir  strain  on  her,  and  she  will 
low  less  wildly,  and  therefore  with  less  violent  jerks  and  strains  on  the  tow-rope. 
Great  advantage  is  found,  when  lowing  a  life-boat  before  a  heavy  sea,  by  tow- 
ing a  drogue  astern  of  the  boat,  to  prevent  her  running  ahead  in  front  of  a  sea. 
(at  risk  of  damage  against  the  towing  vessel.)  and  to  keep  up  a  more  equable 
strain  on  the  tow  rope.  . 


J7*?S=sr*7Vr'-^T,.--  ,  ■:„_f.. : 


I^^TJLES 


FOR   THE 


ts. 


sleanner  or  sailing- 
number  of  men  to 
[  lo  cast  off  from  the 

.  If  tlie  former  be 
rty  to  sixty  fathoms, 
tlie   stem-head,  and 

foremast. 

owingsltamer,  they 
ist,  one  lo  each  l)ow, 

on  each  bow.  In 
to  weigh  her  by  the 
im,  ready  to  cut  the 

heavy  head-sea  than 
on  her,  and  she  will 

lins  on  the  tow-rope, 
a  heavy  sea,  by  tow- 

nl  in  front  of  a  sea. 

p  up  a  more  eciuable 


Management  of  Open  Row-Boats 

IN  A  SURF— BEACHING  THEM,  Ac. 


RULES  OP  MANAGEMENT. 

I.     In  rowing  to  Seaward. 

As  a  general  rule,  speed  must  he  given  to  a  Doat  rowing  against  a  heavy  surf. 
Indeed,  under  some  circumstances,  her  safety  will  depend  on  the  utmost  possible 
speed  being  attained  on  meeting  a  sen.  For  if  the  sea  be  really  heavy,  and  the 
wind  blowing  a  hard,  on  shore  gale,  it  can  only  be  by  the  utmost  exertions  of  the 
crew  that  any  headway  can  be  made.  The  great  danger  then  is,  that  an  approach- 
heavy  sea  m.-iy  carry  the  boat  away  on  its  front,  and  turn  it  broadside  on,  or  up- 
end it,  either  effect  being  immediately  fatal.  A  boat's  only  chance  in  such  a  case 
is  to  obtain  such  way  as  shall  ennhle  her  to  pass,  end  on,  through  the  crest  of  the 
sea,  and  leave  it  as  soon  as  possible  behind  her.  Of  course,  if  there  be  a  rather 
heavy  surf,  but  no  wind,  or  the  wind  off  shore,  and  opposed  to  the  surf,  as  is  often 
the  case,  a  boat  might  be  propelled  so  rapidly  through  it  that  her  bow  would  fall 
more  suddenly  and  heavily  after  topping  the  sea  than  if  her  way  had  been  check- 
ed ,  and  it  may,  therefore,  only  be  when  the  sea  is  of  such  magnitude,  and  the 
boat  of  such  a  character,  that  there  may  be  a  chance  of  the  former  carrying  her 
back  before  it,  that  full  speed  should  be  given  to  her. 

It  may  also  happen  that,  by  careful  management  under  such  circumstances,  a 
boat  may  be  made  to  avoid  the  sea,  so  ihat  each  wave  may  break  ahead  of  her, 
which  m.Ty  be  the  only  chance  of  safety  in  a  small  boat ;  but  if  the  shore  be  flat, 
and  the  broken  water  extend  to  a  great  distance  from  it,  this  often  will  be  im- 
possible. 

The    following    general    rules    for  rowing   to   seaward  may,    therefore    be 

relied  on : 

I.  If  sufficient  command  cm  be  kept  over  a  boat  by  the  skill  of  those  on 
board  her,  avoid  or  "  dodge  "  the  sea,  if  possible,  so  as  not  to  meet  it  at  the  mo- 
ment of  Its  breaking  or  curling  over. 


"•ygimiim^ 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


196 

a.  Ag«lii»t  a  held  K.\le  on<l  heavy  nurf,  ijet  all  poitible  speed  on  a  bo»t  on 
lh«  opproach  of  every  sea  which  caiinoi  lie  uvdideil. 

3.  If  more  speed  can  be  given  to  a  boat  than  is  sufRcient  to  prevent  her  be- 
ing carried  back  by  a  lurf,  her  way  may  be  checked  on  its  approach,  which  will 
give  her  an  easier  pasxa^e  over  it. 

II.    On  Running  Before  a  Broken  Sea,  or  Surf,  to  the  Shore. 

TWe  one  great  danger,  when  running  before  a  broken  sea,  in  that  of  itMchmg- 
to.  To  that  peculiar  eflTect  of  the  sea  so  fre4uently  destructive  of  human  life,  the 
utmost  atteuti  1  must  be  directed.  - 

The  cause  of  a  boat'*  broaching-to  when  running  before  a  broken  sea  or  surf, 
is,  that  her  own  motion  being  in  the  same  direction  as  that  of  the  sea,  whether  it 
be  given  by  the  force  of  oars  or  sails,  or  by  the  force  of  the  sea  itself,  she  opposes 
no  resistance  to  it,  but  is  c.irried  before  it.  Thus,  if  a  boat  be  running  with  her 
bow  to  the  shore  and  her  stern  to  the  sea,  the  first  etfect  of  the  surf  or  roller,  on 
its  overtaking  her,  is  to  throw  up  the  stern,  and  as  a  consequence  to  depress  the 
bow  ;  if  she  then  has  sufficient  inertia  (which  will  be  proportional  to  weight)  to 
allow  the  .,ea  to  pass  her,  she  will  in  succession  pas^  through  the  descending,  the 
horizontal,  and  the  ascending  p<Jsilion.s.  as  the  crest  of  the  wave  passes  successive- 
ly her  stern,  her  midships,  and  her  bow,  in  the  reverse  order  in  which  the  same 
positions  occur  to  a  boat  propelled  to  seaward  against  a  surf.  This  may  be  defined 
as  the  safe  mode  of  running  before  a  broken  sea. 

But  if  a  boat,  on  being  overtaken  by  a  heavy  surf,  has  not  sufficient  inertia  to 
allow  it  to  pass  her,  the  first  of  the  three  positions  above  enumerated  alone  occurs  ; 
her  stern  is  raised  high   in  the  air,  and  the  wave  carries  the  boat  belore  it.  on  its 
front  or  unsafe  side,  sometimes  with  frightful  velocity,  the  bow  all  the  time  deeply 
immersed  in  the  hollow  of  the  sja,  where  the  water,  stationary  or  compa-atively 
10,  offers  a  resistance,  whilst  the  crest  of  the  sea,  having  the  actual  motion  which 
causes  it  to  break,  forces  onward  the  stern  or  rear  end  of  the  boat.     A  boat  will, 
in  this  position  sometimes,  aided  by  careful  oar-steerage,  run  a  considerable  dis- 
tance  until  the  wave  has  broken  and  expended  itself.     But  it  will  often  happen 
that  if  the  bow  be  low  it  will  be  driven  under  water,  when  the  buoyancy  being 
lost  forward,  whilst  the  sea  presses  on  the  stern,  the  boat  will  be  thrown  (as  it  is 
termed)  end  over  end  ;  or  if  the  bow  be  high,  or  it  be  protected,  as  in  most  life- 
boats, by  a  bow  air  chamber,  so  that  it  does  not  become  submerged,   that  the  re- 
sistance forward,  acting  on  one  bow,  will  slightly  turn  the  boat's  head,  and  the 
force  of  the  surf  being  transferred  to  the  opposite  quarter,  she  will  in  a  moment 
be  turned  round  broadside  by  the  sea.  and  be  thrown  by  it  on  her  beam-ends  or 
altogether  capsized.     It  is  in  this  manner  that   most  boats  are  upset  in  a  surf, 
especially  on  flat  coasts,  and  in  this   way   many  lives  are   annually  lost  amongst 
merchant  seamen  when  attempting  to  land  after  being  compelled  to  desert  their 
vessels.  ^'''  ■•  - 


speed  on  a  bott  on 

it  to  prevent  her  be- 
pproacli.   which  will 

9  the  Shore. 

,  U  that  of  btoathmg. 
t  ot  human  life,  the 

a  broken  sea  or  surf, 
■  the  sea,  whether  it 
!ft  itself,  she  opposes 
be  running  with  her 
the  surf  or  roller,  on 
ience  to  depress  the 
)riional  to  weight)  to 
1  the  descending,  the 
»ve  passes  successive- 
tr  in  which  the  same 
This  may  be  defined 

ot  sufficient  inertia  to 
nerated  alone  occurs  ; 

boat  belore  it,  on  its 
w  all  the  time  deeply 
lary  or  compa'atively 

actual  motion  which 
e  boat.  A  boat  will, 
1(1  a  considerable  dis- 
r  it  will  often  happen 
n  ilie  buoyancy  being 
rill  be  thrown  (as  it  is 
jcted,  as  in  most  life- 
bmerged,  that  the  re- 
•  boat's  head,  and  the 
he  will  in  a  moment 
t  on  her  beam-ends  or 
s  are  upset  in  a  surf, 
innually  lost  amongst 
ipelled  to  desert  their 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


197 


I'f  n:»,  It  follows,  that  the  management  of  a  boat,  when  landing  through  a 
heavy  surf,  muti  as  far  a»  |>  utilile,  be  as-iimilatcil  to  that  when  proceeding  to  sea. 
ward  against  one,  at  least  so  far  at  to  stop  her  progress  shor  wanl  at  the  moment 
of  being  overtaken  by  a  heavy  sea,  and  thus  enabling  it  to  pass  her,  There  art 
difTerent  ways  of  efT<!cting  this  object  : 

I.  By  turning  a  boat's  head  to  the  sen  before  entering  the  broken  water,  and 
then  backing  in  stern  foremost,  pulling  a  few  strokes  ahead  to  meet  each  heavy 
sea,  and  then  again  backing  astern.  If  a  .tea  be  really  heavy  and  a  boat  small  this 
plan  will  be  generally  the  safe^tt,  as  a  boat  can  be  kept  more  under  command  when 
the  full  force  of  the  oars  can  be  used  against  a  heavy  surf  than  by  backing  them 
only. 

a.  If  rowing  to  shore  with  the  stum  to  seaward,  by  backing  all  the  oars  on  the 
approach  of  a  heavy  sea,  and  rowing  ahead  again  as  soon  as  it  has  passed  to  the 
bow  of  the  boat,  thus  rowing  in  on  the  back  of  the  wave ;  or,  as  is  practised  in 
some  lifeboats,  pl.^cing  the  after  oarsmen  with  their  faces  forward  and  making 
them  row  back  at  each  sea  on  its  approach. 

3.  If  rowed  in  bow  foremost,  by  towing  astern  a  pig  of  ballast  or  large  stone, 
or  a  large  banket,  or  a  canvas-bif;,  termed  a  "drogue"  or  drag,  made  for  the  pur^ 
pose,  the  object  of  each  being  to  hold  the  boat's  stern  back,  and  prevent  her  being 
turned  broadside  to  the  sea  or  broaching-to, 

Drogues  are  in  common  use  by  the  b  latmen  on  the  Norfolk  coast ;  they  are 
conical  shaped  bags  of  about  the  same  form  and  proportionate  length  and  breadth 
as  a  candle-extinguisher,  about  two  feet  wide  at  the  mouth  and  four  and  a  half 
feet  long.  They  are  towed  with  the  mouth  foremost  by  a  stout  rope ;  a  small  line 
'ermcd  n  tripping-line,  being  fast  to  the  apex  or  pointed  end.  When  towed  with 
the  mouth  foremost  they  till  with  water  and  offer  a  considerable  resistance,  thereby 
holding  back  the  stum ;  by  letting  go  the  stouter  rope  and  retaining  the  smaller 
line  their  position  is  reversed,  when  they  collapse,  and  can  be  readily  hauled  into 
the  boat 

Drogues  are  chiefly  used  in  sailing. boats,  when  they  both  serve  to  check  a 
boat's  way  and  to  kei'p  her  end  on  to  the  sea.  They  are,  however,  a  great  source 
of  safety  in  rovvin;»-boais,  and  the  rowini;  life-boats  of  the  National  Life-Boat  In- 
stitution are  now  provided  with  them. 

A  boat's  Siiil  bent  to  a  yanl  and  towod  astern  loosed,  the  yard  being  attached 
to  a  line  capable  of  being  veered,  hiuled,  or  let  go,  will  act  in  some  measure  as  a 
drogue,  and  will  tend  much  to  break  the  force  of  the  sea  immediately  astern  of  the 
boat. 

Heavy  weights  should  be  kept  out  of  the  extreme  ends  of  a  boat ;  but  when 
rawing  before  a  heavy  sea  the  best  trim  is  deepest  by  the  stern,  which  prevents 
the  stern  being  readily  thrown  on  one  side  by  the  sea, 

A  boat  should  be  steered  by  an  oar  over  the  stern,  or  on  one  quarter  when 
running  before  a  sea,  as  the  rudder  will  th«n  at  times  be  of  no  use.  If  the  rudder 
be  shipped,  it  should  be  kept  amidships  on  a  sea  breaking  over  the  stem. 


J 


1 98 


Thompson! s  Coast  Pilot. 


The  following  general  rules  may  therefore  be  depended  on  when  running  be- 
fo.e,  or  attempting  to  land,  through  a  heavy  surf  or  broken  water  : 

'i.  As  far  as  possible  avoid  each  sea  by  placing  the  boat  where  the  sea  will 
break  ahead  or  astern  of  her. 

2.  If  the  sea  be  very  heavy,  or  if  the  boat  be  very  small,  and  especially  if 
she  have  a  square  stern,  bring  her  bow  round  to  seaward  and  back  her  in,  rowing 
ahead  against  each  heavy  surf  that  cannot  be  avoided  sufficiently  to  allow  it  to 

pass  the  boat. 

3.  If  it  be  considered  safe  to  proceed  to  the  shore  bow  foremost,  back  the 
oars  against  each  sea  on  its  approach,  so  as  to  stop  the  boat's  way  through  the 
water  as  far  as  possible,  and  if  there  is  a  drogue,  or  any  other  instrument  in  the 
boat  which  may  be  used  as  one,  to>v  it  astern  to  aid  in  keeping  the  boat  end  to  the 
sea,  which  is  the  chief  object  in  view. 

4.  Bring  the  principal  weights  in  the  boat  towards  the  end  that  is  to  seaward, 
but  not  to  the  extreme  end. 

5.  If  a  boat,  worked  by  both  sails  and  oars,  be  running  under  sail  lor  the 
land  through  a  heavy  sea,  her  crew  should,  under  all  circumstances,  unless  the 
beach  be  quite  steep,  take  down  her  masts  and  sails  before  entering  the  broken 
water,  and  take  her  to  land  under  oars  alone,  as  above  described.  If  shehave 
sail  only,  her  sails  should  be  much  reduced,  a  half-lowered  foresail  or  other  small 
head.sail  being  sufficient. 

III.    Beaching  or  Landing  Through  a  Surf. 
The  running  before  a  surf  or  broken  sea,  and  the  beaching  or  landing  of  a 
boat,  are  two  distinct  operations  ;  the  management  of  boats  as  above  recommended 
has  exclusive  reference  to  running  before  a  surf  where  the  shore  is  so  flat  that  the 
broken  water  extends  to  some  distance  from  the  beach.     Thus,  on  a  very  steep 
beach,  the  first  heavy  fall  of  broken  water  will  be  on  the  beach  itself,  whilst  on 
some  very  Hat  shores  there  will  be  broken  water  as  far  as  the  eye  can  reach,  some- 
times extending  to  even  four  or  five  miles  from  the  land.     The  outermost  line  of 
broken  water,  on  a  flat  shore,   where  the  waves  break  in  three  and  four  fathoms 
water,  is  the  heaviest,  and  therefore  the  most  dangerous  ;  and,  when  it  has  been 
passed  through  in  safety,  the  d.xnger  lessens  as  the  water  sho.ils,  until,  on  nearing 
the  la-..d,  its  force  is  spent  and  its  power  harmless.     As  the  character  of  the  sea  is 
quite  different  on  steep  and  flat  shores,  so  is  the  customary  management  of  boats 
on  landing  different  in  the  two  situations.     On  the  flat  shore,  whether  a  boat  be 
run  or  backed  in,  she  is  kept  straight  before  or  end  on  to  ihe  sea  until  she  is  fairly 
aground,  when  each  surf  takes  her  further  in  as  it  overtakes  her,  aided  by  the 
crew,  who  will  then  generally  jump  out  to   lighten  her  and  drag  her  in  by  her 
sides.     As  above  stated,  sail  will  in  this  case  have  been  previously  taken  in  if  set, 
and  the  boat  will  have  been  rowed  or  backed  in  by  oars  alone. 

On  the  other  hand,  on  the  steep  beach  it  is  the  general  practice,  in  a  boat  of 
any  size,  to  retain  speed  right  on  to  the  beach,  and  in  the  act  of  landing,  whether 


on  when  running  be- 
water  : 
jat  where  the  sea  will 

lall,  and  especially  if 
1  back  her  in,  rowing 
iiciently  to  allow  it  to 

w  foremost,  back  the 
loat's  way  through  the 
ther  instrument  in  the 
ing  the  boat  end  to  the 

end  that  is  to  seaward, 

ning  under  sail  lor  the 
cumstances,  unless  the 
ire  entering  the  broken 
escribed.  If  shehave 
foresail  or  other  small 

Surf, 
aching  or  landing  of  a 

as  above  recommended 
shore  is  so  flat  that  the 

Thus,  on  a  very  steep 

beach  itself,  whilst  on 
fie  eye  can  reach,  some- 

The  outermost  line  of 
three  and  four  fathoms 

and,  when  it  has  been 
hoals,  until,  on  nearing 
;  character  of  the  sea  is 
•y  management  of  boats 
hore,  whether  a  boat  be 
he  sea  until  she  is  fairly 
takes  her,  aided  by  the 
and  drag  her  in  by  her 
eviously  taken  in  if  set, 
lone. 

il  priictice,  in  a  boat  of 
act  of  landing,  whether 


.V'.i..^,*/j^.    V;,. 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


199 


under  oars  or  sail,  to  turn  the  boat's  bow  half  round  towards  the  direction  from 
which  the  surf  is  running,  so  that  she  may  be  thrown  on  her  broadside  on  the 
beach,  where  abundance  of  help  is  usually  at  hand  to  haul  her  as  quickly  as  pos- 
sible out  of  the  reach  of  the  sea.  In  such  situations,  we  believe,  it  is  nowhere 
the  practice  to  back  a  boat  in  sternforemost  under  oars,  but  to  row  in  under  full 
speed  as  above  described. 

IV.    Boarding  a  Wreck,  or  a  Vessel,  under  Sail  or  at  Anchor,  in  a  Heavy 

Sea. 

The  circumstances  under  which  Ife-boats  or  other  boats  have  to  board  vessels, 
whether  stranded  or  at  anchor,  or  under  way,  are  so  various  that  it  would  be  im- 
possible to  draw  up  any  general  rule  for  guidance.  Nearly  everything  must  de- 
pend on  the  skill,  judgment,  and  presence  of  mind  of  the  coxswain  or  officer  in 
charge  of  the  boat,  who  will  often  have  those  qualities  taxed  to  the  utmost,  as 
undoubtedly  the  operation  of  boarding  a  vessel  in  a  heavy  sea  or  surf  is  frequently 
one  of  extreme  danger. 

It  will  be  scarcely  necessary  to  state  that,  whenever  practicable,  a  vessel, 
whether  stranded  or  afloat,  should  be  boarded  to  leeward,  as  the  principal  dangers 
to  be  guarded  against  must  be  the  violent  collision  of  the  boat  against  the  vessel, 
or  her  swamping  or  upsetting  by  the  rebound  of  the  sea,  or  by  its  irregular  direc- 
tion on  coming  in  contact  with  the  vessel's  side ;  and  the  greater  violence  of  the 
sea  on  the  windward  side  is  much  more  likely  to  cause  such  accidents.  The 
danger  must,  of  course,  also  he  still  further  increased  when  the  vessel  is  aground 
and  the  sea  breaking  over  her.  The  chiel  danger  to  be  apprehended  on  boarding 
a  stranded  vessel  on  the  lee  side,  if  broadside  to  the  sea  is  the  falling  of  the  masts ; 
or  if  they  have  been  jireviously  carried  away,  the  damage  or  destruction  of  the 
boat  amongst  the  floating  spars  and  gear  alongside.  It  may  therefore,  under  such 
circumstances,  be  often  necessary  to  take  a  wrecked  crew  into  a  life-boat  from  the 
bow  or  stf  rn  ;  otherwise  a  rowing-boat,  proceeding  from  a  lee  shore  to  a  wreck, 
by  keeping  under  a  vessel's  lee,  may  use  her  as  a  breakwater,  and  thus  go  off  in 
comparatively  smooth  water,  or  be  at  least  shielded  from  the  worst  of  the  sea. 
This  is,  accordingly,  the  usual  practice  in  the  rowing  life-boats  around  the  United 
Kingdom.  The  larger  sailing  life-boats,  chiefly  on  the  Norfolk  and  SuflTolk  coasts, 
which  go  off  to  wrecks  on  outlying  shoals,  are,  however,  usually  anchored  to  wind- 
ward of  stranded  vessels,  and  then  veered  down  to  100  or  150  fathoms  of  cable, 
until  near  enough  to  throw  a  line  on  board.  The  greatest  care,  under  these  cir- 
cumstances, has,  of  course,  to  be  taken  to  prevent  actual  contact  between  the 
bo.at  and  the  ship,  and  the  crew  of  the  latter  hove  sometimes  to  jump  overboard 
and  to  be  hauled  to  the  boat  by  ropes. 

In  every  case  of  boarding  a  wreck  or  a  vessel  at  sea,  it  is  important  that  the 
lines  by  which  a  boat  is  made  fast  to  the  vessel  should  be  of  sufficient  length  to 
allow  of  her  rising  or  falling  freely  with  the  sea ;  and  every  rope  should  be  kept 


;4 


ill 


200 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


in  hand  ready  to  cut  or  slip  it  in  a  nr*oment  if  necessary.  On  wrecked  persons  or 
other  passengers  being  taker,  into  a  boat  in  a  seaway,  they  should  be  placed  on 
the  thwarts  in  equal  numbers  on  either  side,  and  be  made  to  sit  down.  All  crowd- 
ing  or  rushing  headlong  into  the  boat  should  be  prevented  as  far  as  possible  ;  and 
the  captain  of  a  ship,  if  a  wreck,  should  be  called  on  to  remain  on  board  to  pre- 
serve order  until  every  other  person  had  left  her. 


vaHH^jnae^waiw 


wrecked  persons  or 
ihould  be  placed  on 
X  down.  All  crowd- 
'ar  as  possible  ;  and 
ain  on  board  to  pre- 


IDIK/BOTIOlsrS 


FOR 


Saving  Drowning  Persons. 


BY  SWIMMING  TO  THEIR  RELIEF. 


1.  When  you  approach  a  person  drowning  in  the  water  assure  him,  with  a 
loud  and  firm  voice,  that  he  is  safe. 

2.  Before  jumping  in  to  save  him,  divest  yourself  as  far  and  as  quickly  as  possi- 
ble of  all  clothes ;  tear  them  oft',  if  necessary ;  but  if  there  is  not  time,  loose  at  all 
events  the  foot  of  your  drawers,  if  they  are  tied,  as,  if  you  do  not  do  so,  they  fill 
with  water  and  drag  you, 

3.  On  swimming  to  a  person  in  *'  ■>  sea,  if  h'e  is  struggling,  do  not  seize  him, 
then,  but  keep  off  for  a  few  seconds  till  he  gets  quiet,  fur  it  is  sheer  madness  to 
take  hold  of  a  man  when  he  is  struggling  in  the  water,  and  if  you  do  you  run  a 
great  risk. 

4.  Then  get  close  to  him  and  take  fast  hold  of  the  hair  of  his  head,  turn  him 
as  quickly  as  possible  on  to  his  back,  give  him  a  sudden  pull,  and  this  will  cause 
him  to  float,  then  throw  yourself  on  your  back  also  and  swim  for  the  shore,  both 
hands  having  hold  of  his  hair,  you  on  your  back  and  he  also  on  his,  and  of  course 
his  back  to  your  stomach,  in  this  way  you  will  get  sooner  and  safer  ashore  than 
than  by  any  other  means,  and  you  can  easily  thus  swim  with  two  or  three  persons  ; 
the  writer  has  even,  as  an  experiment,  done  it  with  four,  and  gone  with  them  forty 
or  fifty  yards  in  the  sea.  One  great  advantage  of  this  method  is  that  it  enables 
you  to  keep  your  head  up,  and  also  to  hold  the  persons  head  up  you  are  trying  to 
save.  It  is  of  primary  importance  that  you  take  fast  hold  of  the  hair  and  throw 
both  the  person  and  yourselt  on  your  backs.  After  many  experiments  it  is  usually 
found  preferable  to  all  other  methods.  You  can  in  this  manner  float  nearly  as 
long  as  you  please,  or  until  a  boat  or  other  help  can  be  obtained. 

5.  It  is  believed  there  is  no  such  thing  as  a  de&thgras/i ;  at  least  it  is  very  un- 
usual to  witness  it.  As  soon  as  a  drowning  man  begins  to  get  feeble  and  to  lose 
his  recollection,  he  gradually  slackens  his  hold  until  he  quits  it  altogether.     No 


-..OaWMBUMlMMaKiMNI 


202 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


apprehension  need  therefore,  be  felt  on  that  head  when  attempting  to  retcue  a 
drowning  person, 

6.  After  a  person  has  sunk  to  the  bottom,  if  the  water  be  smooth,  the  exact 
position  where  the  body  lies  may  be  known  by  the  air-bubbles.  which  will  occa- 
sionally rise  to  the  surface,  allowance  being  of  course  made  for  the  motion  of  the 
water,  if  in  a  tide-way  or  stream,  which  will  have  carried  the  bubbles  out  of  a 
perpendicular  course  in  rising  to  the  surface.  A  body  may  be  often  regained 
from  the  bottom,  before  too  late  for  recovery,  by  diving  for  it  in  the  direction  in- 
dicated  by  these  bubbles. 

7.  On  rescuing  a  person  by  diving  to  the  bottom,  the  hair  of  the  head  should 
be  seized  by  one  hand  only,  and  the  other  used,  in  conjunction  with  the  feet,  in 
raising  yourself  and  the  drowning  person  to  the  surface. 

8.  If  in  the  sea  it  may  someti.nes  be  a  great  error  to  try  to  get  to  land.  If 
there  be  a  strong  "  outsetting"  tide,  and  you  are  swimming  either  by  yourself,  or 
having  hold  of  a  person  who  cannot  swim,  then  get  on  your  back  and  float  till 
help  comes.  Many  a  man  exhausts  himself  by  stemming  the  billows  for  the  shore 
on  a  back-going  tide,  and  sinks  in  the  eftort,  when,  if  he  had  floated,  a  boat  or 
other  aid  might  have  been  obtained . 

9.  These  instructions  apply  alike  to  all  circumstances,  whether  as  regards 
the  roughest  sea  or  smooth  water. 


Note.— The  following  life  saving  stations  are  in  contemplation  :  Two  com- 
plete  life-saving  stations  on  the  coast  of  Lake  Michigan,  to  be  located,  one  at 
or  near  Sleeping  Bear  Point,  and  one  at  or  near  Bayley's  Harbor,  and  four 
life.boat  stations,  to  be  located  one  at  or  near  Manistee,  and  one  at  Ludington  ; 
one  at  or  near  Muskegon,  and  one  at  Kenosha;  one  life-boat  station  on 
the  coast  of  Lake  Superior,  at  or  near  the  mouth  of  Portage  Lake  and 
Lake  Superior  Ship  Canal ;  two  complete  life-saving  stations  on  the  coast  of  Lake 
Huron,  one  at  or  near  Port  Austin  and  one  on  Middle  Island,  and  a  life-boat  sta- 
tion  at  or  near  Sand  Beach  Harbor  of  Refuge. 

NoTE.-Station  No.  4  will  be  on  Thunder  Bay  Island  instead  of  north  point 

of  Thunder  Bay. 

The  stations  on  Lake  Superior  are  in  commission  from  May  iSth  until  the 
close  of  navigation,  and  on  the  rest  of  the  lakes  from  April  1st  till  the  first  of 
June  and  again  from  the  first  of  September  to  the  close  of  navigation.      Our  ves- 
sel  owners  and  merchant  marine  men  generally  favor  the  continous  operation  of 
the  service  throughout  the  entire  season  of  navigation  on  all  the  lakes. 


attempting  to  retcue  a 


T  be  smooth,  the  exact 
ibles,  which  will  occa- 
e  for  the  motion  of  the 
d  the  bubbles  out  of  a 
may  be  often  regained 
or  it  in  the  direction  in- 

hair  of  the  head  should 
iction  with  the  feet,  in 

I  try  to  get  to  land.  If 
ig  either  by  yourself,  or 
'our  back  and  float  till 
he  billows  for  the  shore 
s  had  floated,  a  boat  or 

;es,  whether  as  regards 


:emplation :  Two  com- 
n,  to  be  located,  one  at 
ey's  Harbor,  and  four 
and  one  at  Ludington  ; 
e  life-boat  station  on 
of  Portage  Lake  and 
ins  on  the  coast  of  Lake 
land,  and  a  life-boat  sta- 

i  instead  of  north  point 

om  May  iSth  until  the 
\pril  1st  till  the  first  of 
f  navigation.      Our  ves- 
>  continous  operation  of 
all  the  lakes. 


Diie/EiOTioisrs 


FOR 


Restoring  the  Apparently  Drowned. 


Rule  I.  Arouse  (he  patient.— \3n\t%%  in  danger  of  freezing,  do  not  move  the 
patient,  but  expose  the  face  to  a  current  of  fresh  air,  wipe  dry  the  mouth  and 
nostrils,  rip  the  clothing,  so  as  to  expose  the  chest  and  waist,  and  give  two  or 
three  quick  smarting  slaps  on  the  stomach  and  chest  with  the  open  hand.  If  the 
patient  does  not  revive,  then  jjroceed  thus  ; 

Rule  II.  To  draw  off  water,  &'c.,/rom  the  stomach  and  chest.— {Sw  Fig.  I.)— 


Fie.  I.    Shawinr  the  firtt  step  iakiH,  by  vikick  tke  eketl  it  tmptitd  of  air,  and  tkt  ejectitn 
of  anyfluiHt  tvialtowed  is  astisttd. 

If  the  jaws  are  clenched,  separate  them,  and  keep  the  mouth  open  by  placing  be- 
tween the  teeth  a  cork  or  small  bit  of  wood ;  turn  the  patient  on  the  face,  a  large 


i 


204 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


^  -, 

II 
ii 


bundle  of  tightly-rolled  clothing  being  placed  beneath  the  stomach,  and  press 
heavily  over  it  for  half  a  minute,  or  so  long  as  fluids  flow  freely  from  the  mouth. 
Rule  III.    To  produce  breathing.— (Sta  Fig.  II.)— Clear  the  mouth  and  throat 


.  •  Fir.  II.    ShiioiHg  tht  position  and  action  of  the  operator,  in  alttmatily  producing  artificial 

expiration  and  inspiration  of  air. 

of  mucus,  by  introducing  into  the  throat  the  corner  of  a  handkerchief  wrapped 
closely  around  the  forefinger ;  turn  the  patient  on  the  back,  the  roll  of  clothing 
being  so  placed  beneath  it  as  to  raise  the  pit  of  the  stomach  above  the  level  of  any 
other  part  of  the  body.  If  there  be  another  person  present,  let  him,  with  a  piece  of 
dry  cloth,  hold  the  tip  of  the  tongue  out  of  the  corner  of  the  mouth,  (this  prevents 
the  tongue  from  falling  back  and  choking  the  entrance"  to  the  windpipe.)  and  with 
the  other  hand  grasp  both  wrists  and  keep  the  arms  forcibly  stretched  back  above 
the  head,  thereby  increasing  the  prominence  of  the  ribs,  which  tends  to  enlarge 
the  chest.  The  two  last-named  positions  are  not,  however,  essential  to  success. 
Kneel  beside  or  astride  the  patient's  hips,  and  with  the  ball  of  the  thumbs  resting 
ing  on  either  side  of  the  pit  of  the  stomach,  let  the  fingers  fall  into  the  grooves 
between  the  short  ribs,  so  as  to  afford  ihe  best  grasp  of  the  waist.  Now,  using 
your  knees  as  a  pivot,  throw  all  your  weight  forward  on  your  hands,  and  at  the 
same  time  squeeze  the  waist  between  them,  as  if  you  wished  to  force  everything  in 
the  chest  upward  out  «f  the  mouth  ;  deepen  the  pressure  while  you  can  count 
slowly  one,  two,  three  ;  then  suddenly  let  go  with  a  final  push,  which  springs  you 
back  to  your  first  kneeling  position.  Remain  erect  on  your  knees  while  you  can 
count  one,  two,  three;  then  repeat  the  same  motions  as  before  at  a  rate  gradually 
increased  from  four  or  five  to  fifteen  times  in  a  minute,  and  continue  thus  this  bel. 
lows  movement  with  the  same  regularity  that  is  observable  in  the  natural  motions 
of  breathing  which  you  are  imitating.     If  natural  breathing  be  not  restored,  after 


Hi. 


he  stomach,  and  press 
-eely  from  the  mouth. 

ir  the  mouth  and  throat 


Hatefy  froducine  artificial 

handkerchief  wrapped 
ck,  the  roll  of  clothing 
I  above  the  level  of  any 

let  him,  with  a  piece  of 
le  mouth,  (this  prevents 
tie  windpipe,^  and  with 
ly  stretched  back  above 

which  tends  to  enlarge 
ver,  essential  to  success. 
.11  of  the  thumbs  resting 
;ers  fall  into  the  grooves 
the  waist.  Now,  using 
I  your  hands,  and  at  the 
:d  to  force  everything  in 
■e  while  you  can  count 
push,  which  springs  you 
3ur  knees  while  you  can 
sfore  at  a  rate  gradually 
d  continue  thus  this  bel. 
e  in  the  natural  motions 
ig  be  not  restored,  after 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


205 


a  trial  of  the  bellows  movement  for  the  space  of  three  or  four  minutes,  then,  with 
out  interrupting  the  artificial  respiration,  turn  the  patient  a  second  time  on  the 
stomach,  as  directed  in  Rule  II,  rolling  the  body  in  the  opposite  direction  from 
that  in  which  it  was  first  turned,  for  the  purpose  of  freeing  the  air-passages  fro  m 
any  remaining  wat^'.  Continue  the  artificial  respiration  from  one  to  four  hours, 
or  until  the  patient  breathes;  and  for  a  while,  after  the  appearance  of  returning 
life,  carefully  aid  the  first  short  gasps  until  deepened  into  full  breaths.  Continue 
the  drying  and  rubbing,  which  should  have  been  unceasingly  practised  from  the 
beginning,  taking  care  not  to  interfere  with  the  means  employed  to  produce 
breathing.  Thus  the  limos  of  the  patient  should  be  rubbed,  always  in  an  upward 
direction  towards  the  body,  with  firm-grasping  pressure  and  energy,  using  the  bare 
hands,  dry  flannelsor  handkerchiefs,  and  continuing  the  friction  under  the  blankets 
or  over  the  dry  clothing.  The  warmth  of  the  body  can  also  be  promoted  by  the 
application  of  hot  flannels  to  the  stomach  and  armpits,  bottles  or  bladders  of  hot 
water,  heated  bricks,  &c.,  to  the  limbs  and  soles  of  the  feet.  ,"  , 

Rule  IV.  After-Treatment.— £.r/^r«a//^  .•  As  soon  as  breathing  is  estab- 
lished  let  the  patient  be  stripped  of  all  wet  clothing,  wrapped  in  blankets  only, 
put  to  bed  comfortably  warm,  but  with  a  free  circulation  of  fresh  air,  and  left  to 
perfect  rest.  JnUrnally  :  Give  a  little  brandy  and  hot  water,  or  other  stimulant 
at  hand,  every  ten  or  fifteen  minutes  for  the  first  hour,  and  as  often  thereafter  as 
may  seem  expedient.  Lattr  mani/istalions  :  After  reaction  is  fully  established, 
there  is  great  danger  of  congestion  of  the  lungs,  and  if  perfect  rest  is  not  main- 
tained for  at  least  forty-eight  hours,  it  sometimes  occurs  that  the  patient  is  seized 
with  great  difficulty  of  breathing,  and  death  is  liable  to  follow  unless  immediate 
relief  is  afforded.  In  such  cases  apply  a  large  mustard-plaster  over  the  breast.  If 
the  patient  gasps  for  breath  before  the  mustard  takes  effect,  assist  the  breathing 
by  carefully  repeating  the  artificial  respiration. 

Note. — An  eminent  authority.  Dr.  Labordette,  the  Supervising  Surgeon  of 
the  Hospital  of  Lisieux,  in  France,  appears  to  have  established  that  the  clenching 
of  the  jaws  and  the  semi-contraction  of  the  fingers,  which  have  hitherto  been  con- 
sidered signs  of  death,  are,  in  fact,  evidences  of  remaining  vitality.  After  numer- 
ous experiments  with  apparently  drowned  persons,  and  also  with  animals,  he  con- 
cludes that  these  are  only  signs  accompanying  the  first  stage  of  suffocation  by 
drowning,  the  jaws  and  hands  becoming  relaxed  when  death  ensues.*  This  being 
so,  the  mere  clenching  of  the  jaws  and  semi- contraction  of  the  hands  must  not  be 
co'.isidered  as  reasons  for  the  discontinuance  of  efforts  to  save  life,  but  should  serve 
as  a  stimulant  lo  vigorous  and  prolonged  efforts  to  quicken  vitality.  Persons  en- 
gaged in  the  tasks  of  resuscitation  are,  therefore,  earnestly  desired  to  take  hope 
and  encouragement  for  the  life  of  the  sufferer,  from  the  signs  above  referred  to, 
and  to  continue  their  endeavors  accordingly.  In  a  number  of  cases  Dr.  Labor- 
dette restored  to  life  persons  whose  jaws  were  so  firmly  clenched  that,  to  aid  re- 
spiration, their  teeth  had  to  be  forced  apart  wiih  iron  instruments. 


tion 


♦  The  muscular  ridgity  of  death  {rigor  morlit)  occurs  later,  after  the  temporary  relaxa- 
here  leierred  to. 


Additions  and  Corrections. 


Laws  for  Vessels  in  Fogs. 

Of  all  the  laws  regulating  navigation  none  are  more  ignored  or  imper- 
fectly understood  by  sailors  than  those  for  vessels  in  a  fog  That  vessels 
when  lying  to  or  at  anchor  must  sound  a  bell  does  not  seem  to  be  generally 
understood,  and  that  our  readers  may  become  fully  conversant,  they  are 
here  reproduced  in  full : 

Ever)'  steamer,  when  under  way,  shall  use  a  steam  whistle.  Saihng 
vessels  and  all  other  craft  propelled  by  sails,  shall  use  a  fog  horn. 

Whenever  there  is  a  fog,  whether  by  day  or  night,  the  fog  signals 
described  below  shall  be  sounded. 

Sailing  vessels,  and  every  craft  propelled  by  sails,  upon  the  oceans, 
lakes  and  rivers  shall,  when  on  their  starboard  tack,  sound  one  blast  of  their 
fog  horn  ;  when  on  their  port  tack  they  shall  sound  two  blasts  of  their  fog 
horn  :  when,  with  the  wind  free  or  running  large,  they  shall  sound  three 
blasts  of  their  fog  horn  ;  when  lying  to  or  at  anchor  they  shall  sound  the 
bell.  In  each  instance  the  above  signals  shall  be  sounded  at  intervals  of 
not  more  than  two  minutes. 

Sailing  vessels,  when  not  under  way  and  anchored  or  moored  in  the 
channel  or  fairway  of  commerce,  shall  sound  the  bell  signal  at  intervals  of 


fli 


ThompsofCs  Coast  Pilot. 


207 


:tions. 


jre  ignored  or  imper- 

a  fog     That  vessels 

t  seem  to  be  generally 

1  conversant,  they  are 

jam  v/histle.     Sailing 

!  a  fog  horn. 

night,  the  fog  signals 

Ills,  upon  the  oceans, 
aund  one  blast  of  their 
two  blasts  of  their  fog 
they  shall  sound  three 
ir  they  shall  sound  the 
}unded  at  intervals  of 

)red  or  moored  in  the 
1  signal  at  intervals  of 


not  more  than  two  minutes,  and  all  steamers  navigating  in  a  fog  or  thick 
weather  shall,  by  the  ruies  governing  pilots,  sound  their  steam  whistle  at 
intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute. 

Sailing  vessels  shall  at  all  times,  on  the  approach  of  any  steamer  during 
the  night-time,  show  a  lighted  torch  upon  that  point  or  quarter  to  which 
such  steamer  shall  be  approaching.  And  upon  any  craft  navigating  rivers 
without  being  in  tow  of  a  steamer,  such  as  rafts,  flat  boats,  wood  boats  and 
other  like  craft,  they  shall  sound  a  fog  horn  at  intervals  of  not  mure  than 
two  minutes. 

It  shall  at  all  times  be  the  duty  of  steamers  to  give  to  tb£  sailing  vessel, 
or  other  craft  propelled  by  sails,  every  advantage  and  keep  out  of  her  way. 

Toronto,  Lake  Ontario.  Five  feet  water  can  be  carried  into  the  bay 
through  the  eastern  gap. 

Oswego  Breakwater.  The  breakwater  runs  out  from  the  shore  N  5° 
yi"  E  900  feet,  and  from  this  point  it  runs  north  59"'S3'''  east.  The  finished 
part  of  the  breakwater  is  about  2500  feet,  and  is  1000  feet  NNW  from  shore 
-line,  and  when  completed  will  be  4900  feet  long,  and  will  then  bear  from  the 
light  on  the  end  of  the  west  pier  SSE><E  about  700  feet..  The  depth  of 
water  going  in  is  18  feet,  and  the  same  under  that  part  of  the  breakwater 
that  is  finished.  Dredging  and  other  improvemeiits  are  going  on  at  the 
west  end  of  this  outer  harbor.    Page  31. 

Page  41.— Silver  Creek  to  Dunkirk  NNW  1  mile;  thence  WSW  29 
miles. 

Page  56.— To  enter  Detioit  River  by  the  American  Channel,  leave  out 
Bar  Point  in  first  line. 

Page  48.— From  Bois  Blanc  Lighthouse  to  Cleveland.  Run  out  four 
miles  S^W  from  Bois  Blanc  Lighthouse;  thence  ESE  wyi  miles  to 
abreast  of  Little's  Point,  bearing  N  \yi  miles;  thence  SEbyE^E  73^ 
miles,  to  Cleveland,  leaving  Colchester  Reef  light  ship,  red  light,  one  mile 
to  starboard,  and  Point  Pelee  Island  Lighthouse  i  X  miles  to  southward. 

From  Detroit  River  to  Point  Pelee.  Second  line  read  bearing  north 
instead  of  test. 

Page  60.— Sand  Beach,  Harbor  of  Refuge.  Read  on  the  sixteenth  line: 
thence  along  shore  at  the  distance  of  \]i  miles  ;  leaving  out  1500  feet  from 
piers. 

Page  66.— From  Presqu'ile  North  Point  Lighthouse.  Third  line.  You 
leave  Spectacle  Reef  Lighthouse  4  miles  to  the  northward. 

April  15,  1878.— Soundings  at  Chicago  by  Harbor  Master  Carey.  From 
Rush  Street  Bridge  out  to  slip  A,  \\)i  feet  water,  and  from  slip  A  to  the 
main  lighthouse  15  feet  water.    The  outer  harbor   I2>^  to  14  feet  water. 


208 


Thompson's  Coast  Pilot. 


The  north  end  is  full  of  holes  and  the  bottom  uneven.  These  soundings 
are  only  an  average.  The  water  rises  and  falls  from  6  inches  to  a  foot  and 
a  half,  and  more,  by  the  atmospheric  pressure  outside,  and  from  distant 
parts  of  the  lake,  at  short  interv.-\ls.  Vessels  running  under  the  breakwater  in 
a  NEgale,  will  find  the  water  high,  and  should,  if  drawing  14  feet  water, 
get  into  the  river  as  soon  as  the  gale  slackens  up. 

Portage  Canal,  Lake  Superior.  The  depth  of  water  is  reported  to  be 
at  this  date  only  g^i  feet ;  but  the  water  generally  rises  about  the  latter  part 
of  June.     Dredging  is  going  on  at  this  harbor. 

Palermo  Harbor,  Lake  Huron,  is  4^/  miles  west  of  Presqu'ile  Point, 
bearing  N  ^  of  a  mile;  run  on  this  course  until  you  open  the  bay,  and  steer 
in  SSW.  The  soundings  are  gradual  from  7  to  3  fathoms.  In  making  the 
harbor  from  the  eastward,  you  run  past  the  east  point  of  the  bay,  and  give 
the  point  a  berth  of  Yi  and  >i  of  a  mile,  as  the  water  is  only  6  feet  }i  mile 
from  the  point,  in  a  N  W  line  from  it.  Keep  on  this  course  till  you  open  the 
dock  on  the  east  side  of  the  bay  ;  then  run  in  SE>iS  until  near  abreast  of 
the  dock,  and  come  to  anchor  or  run  alongside  the  dock.  This  dock  has  1 1 
feet  water  on  the  outside  and  6  feet  on  the  inside  ;  is  1 50  feet  long  with  an 
elbow,  and  lays  N\V  and  SE.  Owned  by  Brownlee  &  Co.  Buoys  are 
placed  in  the  channel,  painted  red  and  black.  From  Brownlee's  Dock  to 
Adams' Point  8  miles.  Adams' Point  to  Crawford's  Quarry  i>^  miles.  To 
run  out  to  the  westward  when  200  yards  from  Brownlee's  Dock,  haul  up  N 

The  two  piers  at  Devil  River,  or  Osenic,  Thunder  Bay,  Lake  Huron,  run 
out  north  and  south.     Eleven  feet  water. 

Campbel's  Dock,  outside  Alpena  Harbor.  Runs  out  ESE  and  WNW. 
Twelve  to  fourteen  feet  water. 

Black  River  pier  runs  out  SW  and  NE,  To  run  to  this  dock,  make 
Black  River  Island  pretty  close  to  to  starboard,  and  rdnge  the  lights,  which 
are  in  a  diagonal  line  on  the  pier  ;  run  to  the  dock  on  the  range,  which  is 
about  SSW,  leaving  a  bunch  of  spiles  to  starboard,  in  12  feet  water,  and 
another  bunch  of  spiles  near  the  end  of  the  pier  to  port  in  12  feet  water. 
The  depth  of  water  alongside  the  outer  part  of  the  pier  is  10  to  1 1  feet.  A 
reef  makes  off  from  the  land  a  little  to  the  southward  of  the  pier,  extending 
nearly  one  mile,  which  makes  a  good  lee  from  southerly  winds,  and  if  the 
water  was  deepened  around  the  pier  end  it  would  make  a  good  harbor. 

Alcona  Docks,  north  of  Sauble  river.  Run  out  WbyS>4S  and  EbyN 
>iN.     Twelve  to  14  feet  water.     Loud,  Gay  &  Co's.  Mills. 

Pier  at  Old  Mackinaw  runs  out  EbyN)4N  and  WbyS>iS.  Fourteen 
feet  water. 


ThompsorCs  Coast  Pilot. 


209 


These  soundings 
nches  to  a  foot  and 
,  and  from  distant 
r  the  brcaicwater  in 
wing  14  feet  water, 

is  reported  to  be 
bout  the  latter  part 

if  Presqu'ile  Point, 
1  the  bay,  and  steer 
IS.  In  making  the 
the  bay,  and  give 
only  6  feet  %  mile 
•se  till  you  open  the 
ntil  near  abreast  of 
This  dock  has  1 1 
o  feet  long  with  an 
k  Co.  Buoys  are 
Jrownlee's  Dock  to 
arry  i  yi  miles .  To 
!'s  Dock,  haul  up  N 

ay,  Lake  Huron,  run 

t  ESE  and  WNW. 

to  this  dock,  make 
ige  the  lights,  which 
the  range,  which  is 

1 2  feet  water,  and 
jrt   in  1 2  feet  water. 

is  10  to  II  feet.  A 
f  the  pier,  extending 
•ly  winds,  and  if  the 

a  good  harbor. 
VbyS>4Sand  EbyN 
lis. 
byS^S.      Fourteen 


Point  .St.  Ignace,  East  Moran  Bay,  has  a  saw  mill  and  two  docks.  The 
south  one  has  a  T  across  the  end,  with  12  to  14  feet  water,  and  is  a  fishing 
station. 

Norwood,  in  East  Traverse  Bay  has  a  good  dock,  with  14  feet  water. 
Wood  of  the  best  quality  is  shipped  from  this  place. 

Docks  in  Green  Bay. 

Docks  at  Menomonee,  outside,  lay  WSW  and  ENE.  Fourteen  feet 
water.  Eleven  feet  water  can  be  carried  into  the  river,  where  improvements 
are  going  on  every  season. 

Th;  dock  at  Oconto  runs  out  SWbyW>(W.  Fourteen  feet  water. 
Vessels  load  to  anchor. 

Docks  at  Big  Sturgeon  Bay  lay  along  shore  SSE  and  NNW.  Twelve 
feet  water. 

Washington  Harbor,  7  miles  from  Rock  or  Louse  Island  Lighthouse. 
Headquarters  for  fishermen.  Is  open  to  the  N£.  Has  a  dock  on  each  side 
of  the  bay,  near  the  head.  (Furlong  &  Son.)  Fourteen  feet  water  alongside. 
Vessels  can  lay  to  anchor  in  1 1  fathoms  water,  soft  bottom,  a  little  to  the 
southward  of  Furlong's  Dock,  which  is  on  the  west  side.  I  have  laid  here 
in  a  heavy  gale  from  the  NE  with  a  long  scope  of  cable  in  perfect  safety. 

Fayette,  Snail  Shell  Harbor,  east  side  of  Big  Bay  De  Noc.  This 
harbor  has  good  docks,  plenty  of  water  alongside,  and  a  furnace. 

Katt's  Bay,  a  few  miles  to  the  northward,  and  near  the  head  of  Big 
Bay  De  Noc,  has  good  holding  ground,  and  is  safe  from  all  winds.  There 
are  good  farms  in  this  vicinity. 

Kaministiqua  River,  Thunder  Bay,  Lake  Superior.  The  water  in  this 
river  is  reported  to  be  only  10  feet  this  spring. 

The  number  of  lighthouses  on  the  lakes  from  Odgensburg  to  Duluth: 

On  the  American  side  of  the  lakes  are  184,  three  of  which  are  not  yet 
finished.  • 

The  number  of  lighthouses  on  the  Canada  side  from  Prescott  to  Fort 
William  on  Lake  Superior  are  82,  two  of  which  are  not  yet  finished. 

From  White  Fish  Point  to  first  life  saving  station,  8  miles  ;  A'om  first 
station  to  the  second  station,  7  miles ;  from  second  station  to  the  third 
station,  8  miles. 

Kincardine  Harbor  east  side  of  Lake  Huron.  The  piers  run  out  WS 
W  and  ENE.  Range  lights  on  the  north  pier.  Red  in  front  an  ■  'vhite  in 
rear.  There  is  a  square  basin  on  the  south  side  after  entering  the  piers, 
abreast  the  inner  light  The  end  of  both  piers  run  off  to  an  angle  of  about 
two  points  from  the  range  only  a  short  distance. 


J 


."■* 


3IO 


Thompsi        Coast  Pilot, 


Page  Ml.— Leaving  the  beacon  light  on  Grand  Island.     Lust  line;  the 
channel, .'':.,  3  104  fathoms  deep. 

A  red  li^jht  in  conjunction  with  a  white  light  will  be  »hown  from  th* 
end  of  Whittemcre's  dock,  Tawas  Bay. 

Page  75.— From  mouth  St.  Clair  River  to  Point  Clark  NNE  easterly 
83  miles,  bearing  east  3  miles. 

Page  78.— Top  line:  Island  W>iN  60  »«7«. 

The  following  notice  is  given  to  ca.iiains  and  mariners  entering  Ron- 
deau Harbor  :  "On  entering  .  '  tor  is  you  pass  the  range  light  on  the 
north  end  of  the  east  pit-r  uop  m  rai  /  ol  the  said  pier  and  go  in  about 
from  40  to  60  rods,  bringm  /  th"  dwelling  house  and  lighthouse  in  range, 
then  let  no  your  an  t-.or  and  you  n  -il  have  from  14  to  16  feet  water  and  good 
anchorage.  Jut  k  1  .  ear  of  the  west  side  after  you  pass  the  west  pier,  as 
it  is  filling  up  from  he  west  gap  veiy  fust,  and  you  cannot  pass  in  a  range 
with  it  ami  have  more  than  3  01  4  feet  of  water.  There  will  be  bi^hes  or 
poles  -^luck  at  the  edge  of  the  dredged  water  to  show  where  it  is,  and  at  a 
sunken  crib  close  to  the  east  pier.  The  light  keeper  will  always  be  happy 
to  give  instructions  and  a  helping  hand  when  required." 


and.  Lust  line;  the 
be  shown  from  th* 
:!ark  NNE  easterly 


ners  entering  Ron- 
ic  range  light  on  the 
pier  and  go  in  about 
lighthouse  in  range, 
i  feet  water  and  good 
ass  the  west  pier,  as 
ot  pass  in  a  range 
;re  will  be  bi\$hes  or 
vhere  it  is,  and  at  a 
Arill  always  be  happy 


CONTENTS. 


ises  OB  American  Shore 

ises  of  Canada  Side , 

n  Niagara  Rivtr , 

s  oi  Lake  Erie— both  shorn., 
Lake  Erie 


Erie. 


I'i 

Rerr  >rks  on  M    -iner'i  CompoM , 

Not<     ^nd  Remark*  on  Baromelcr , , 

Expli.     Monof  Aneroid  Barometer 

Rules    or  Baromitricai  Observation 

Tal>!e  of  Distances ,  , , 

Table  of  Angles .,,, 

Magnitudes'  the  Lak   s., , ,', 

Lake  Ontari .".,„ 

Courses  and       -tanrw  on  Lake  Ontario 

Oiurses  and  Distances  on  Lake  Oulario  at   ordinff       '"hart  <.    Cant.  Ford, 
U.  S.  N. „ , 

Sailing  Direction    for  Lake  Ontario,  from  U.  S.  Surve-  

Magnetic  Varin'i     n 

Additional  Ligh 
Lights  and  Liglii 
Lake  Erie— Buoy 
Courses  and  Disiam 
Sailing  Direc  ins  fi 
Head  of  Lake  Erie.. 
North  Shore  of  Lakt 
Lake  St.  Clair  and  Ri 

Lake  Huron ,.., 

Ports  Along  Shore ^^  j^.] 

Dangers  on  Lake  Huroi  „_„, 

Stralu  of  Mackin.-iw  and  Lake  Michigan 

Sailing  Directions  for  LaKe  Michigan,  according  to  U.  S.  Sur 

Dangers -Magnetic  Vai    iiion 

Green  Bay ; .' 

Directions  for  Sailing  Noi  h  of  Beaver  Islands .".'.IH 

Harbors  and  Anchorages    , 

Dangers  in  Green  Bay 

Lake  Superior— South  Shore ' 

SaultSte.  Marie  River 

Sailing  Directions  for  Grand  Island  according  to  last  Survey 

Dangers  to  be  Avoided 

Lake  Superior —Canada  Shore .V.V.*..i 

Life  Saving  Stations 

Explanation  of  Nautical  Terms 

Instructions  and  Drill  in  the  use  of  Rocket  and  Mortar  Apparatus. 

Towing  of  Life  Boats 

Rules  for  the  Management  of  Open  Row  Boats 

Directions  for  Saving  Drowning  Persons 

Directions  for  Restoring  the  Apparently  Drowned 

Laws  for  Vessels  in  a  Fog 

Additions  and  Corrections 


3 

4 


■'49 


8 

9 

«4 

17 

as 
a; 
30 
3« 
33 
37 
39 

IS 

60 

61 

69 

83 

95 

99 

106 

116 

119 

lao 

'23 
137 

«33 

■«S3 

»S5 

»57 
«S9 
187 
194 

'95 
201 
203 
206 
206 


,+ 


— , J...^.^T"*I  . 


1 

4] 


ffOT  P.  HnrcHMAiT  &  ca, 


■  AND- 


GENERAL  SHIP  STORES 

ALWAYS  OM   HAMD. 

i6  and  i8  Atwater  St.,  Foot  of  GriswoldSt. 


&C0., 


I. 

1? 


OAKUM, 

lr,  pitch, 

N,  OILS, 
ANCHORS, 

:.,  ETC. 


TORES 


Jriswold  St. 


Ingalls  &  Company, 


ILLUMINATING  AND  LUBRICATING 


SOLE  AGENTS  FOR  MICHIGAN 


—  FOR  — 


DOWNER'S 

Mineral   Sper^vl   Oil, 

FOR  STEAMBOAT  USB. 

CYIiIHDBR  S  PUM  HBCCA  OILS  A  SPKCIAliTY, 


Stanley's  Lard  and  all  kinds  of  Steamboat  Oils 

constantly  on  hand  at  Bottom  Prices, 

for  prompt  pay. 


Office,  38   Jefferson    Avenue, 
DETROIT.  MICH. 


■m 


**; 


^ 


-j^isrjD- 


WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN' 

CORDAGE,  TWINESI^COTTON  DUCK 


i^^> 


Chains,  Oakum,  Oars,  Naval  Stores,  Tackle  Blocks,  Wire 

Rope,  India  Rubber  Packing  and  Hose,  Roofing 

Felt  and  Cement. 

Sails,  AwMinigs,  Teiate,  Flags,  Etc. 

OFFICE,  22  WOODWARD  AVE., 


.ERS 


Wi 


ON  DUCK 

le  Blocks,  Wire 
B,  Roofing 


VE., 


H.  D.  EDWAEDS  &  CO. 


8efall,Sa7&Co.'iXaBiIlaEoiii, 


EMie'i  Spirit  CoipuNi. 


Sole  MiehigmnAcenU  for  the  MT.;VERNON    COTTON    DUCK. 

Oar  Sail  and  Rigging  Loft  i«  conducted  by  CAPT.  ED.  MAYES  >i"l 
J,  J.  WATTS,     ^c  v'iU  cheerfully  give  eitimatei  for  fitting  out  Veuelt  complete,  or  ibr 

SaliSi'Rigging,  etc. 

IV- GET  OUR  PRICES.'**      Rubber  Clothing,  :Oil  lOiothing, 
Rubber  Boots  and  Shoes.    COME  AND  SEE  US. 

M.  2>.  EDWARDS  &  CO., 
No^  16, 18  and  20  Woodward  Are.,  DETROIT,  MICH. 

,  (Nmk  Fh»v  Dock.) 


-I 


JOHN  GREENSLADE, 


MANUFACTURER  OP 


CIDER, 

MALT 
AND 


WHITE 
WINE 
VINEGAR 


KEROSENE,  NAPTHA,  VIRGINIA  ROCK,  LARD, 

AND  ALL  KINDS  OF  MACHINERY  OIL, 
NO.  40  JEFFERSON  AVENUE, 

BichMt  Cadi  Prl«e  piUd  Ibr  Empty  Bwreli  DETROIT,    MICH. 


GILBERT  HUBBARD. 


0X0.  B.  CARPENTER. 


G^ilbeft,  Subbkfd  &  do. 


.)  DEALERS  IN  (- 


iirn 


Cotton  Duck,  Steel  and  Iron  Wire  Rope.  Chains.  Blocks. 

dfiiCSGto,  ii<i(iKoig. 


LADE, 

WHITE 
WINE 
l/INEGAR 


LOCK,  LARD, 

[INERY  OIL, 
ENUE, 
ROIT,  MICH. 

OSO.  B.  CARPENTER. 

&  do. 


le.  Chains.  Blocks. 

ii<i<iKoig. 


DIXON  &  PETERS. 


SHIPPING  AqEWTS 


I 


I  Shelby  Street  on  the  Pook.  I 

I , 

I  DETROIT,  MICH.  | 

BROWNLEE  &  CO. 

DEALERS   IN 


GIBM  TEliEBBAPHgOIiES 

FENCE  POSTS, 

Paving  Timber,  Railway  Ties,  Tan  Bark,  Ac. 

OFFICE  FOOT  OF  SHELBY  ST. 

3DBTK/OIT,  -  :m:ioec. 

Dock  at  Palermo,  Lake  Huron. 


GEO.  WARNER. 


M.  BECKER. 


» 


U 


drmii  d  ^echei[. 


AND- 


NO.  101  BIVEB  SOCZ, 


Vjf 


CLEVELAND,  O. 


VESSELS  CHARTERED  for  Coal,  Lumber,  Grain,  and  all  kinds  of  Mer- 
chandise. Special  attention  given  to  Iron  Ore  Charters,  Highest  rates  obtained 
either  for  Season  or  Single  Charters. 

Agents  for  the  Pnrehase  and  Sale  of  Tessela. 

19*  Orders  for  Purchase  and  Shipment  of  Coal  promptly  attended  to. 

JOHN  MAGLET, 

OEALSt  IN 


PROVISIONS 


AND 


SHIP   STORES, 

162    RIVEB    STREET, 
OLE  VICL  AND,         •  OHIO. 


mmmti- 


M.  BBCKSK. 


Vjf 


2LAND,  O. 

ind  all  kinds  of  Mer- 
Highest  rates  obtained 

D  of  Tessela. 

>tly  attended  to. 


ET, 

IS 
R  E  S, 

OHIO. 


G.  D.  NORRIS  &  CO. 


Ji.2SrJD 


Nos.  19  and  21   Erie  Street, 
MILWAUKEE,  WIS. 

»    m    » 

Everything  usually  found  in  a  complete  Ship-Chandlery 

kept  in  stock.    Experienced  Riggers  for  Wire 

and  other  work. 

WILLJLMD  Ci&HAL 


iii 


Eii^inrfl 


-AND- 


Pi^ocer^Stoi^e, 


East  Street,  opposite  New  Lock, 


Vessels   Supplied  both  Day  and  Night.      Remember 

the   Name, 


THOMPSON'S  COAST  PILOT  for  Sale,  Revised  Edition  for  1878. 


r*. 


— ^FOR   SALE   BYo- 


T.   8.    HA^TVKS, 

81  East  Seneca  St.,  Opposite  the  Postofflce, 
.  BUFFALO,    N.    Y- 


A  New  Treatise  on  the  Practice  of  Navigation  at  Sea,  by  Capt.  William  Thorns $  5  oo 

Ship  Bultdinc  Theoretical  and  PraciicaT,  by  Watts,  Ranlcin,  Barns  and  Napier..........  33  00 

Treatine  on  Marine  and  NavaJ  Architecture,  or  Theory  and  Practice  blended  in  Ship 

Building,  by  John  Griffith ; ••••■•■• ; -. nr-r-  »»  "*• 

A  Rudimentary  Treatise  on  the  History,  Construction  and   Illumination  of  Light 

houses,  by  Allan  Stevenson •••••••" '  ** 

The  Forms  of  Shins  and  Boats  with  Illustration,  by  William  Bland. ..; 75 

The  Sailor's  Sea  Book,  Rudimentary  Treatise  on  Navigation,  by  James  Greenwood...  i  00 

Rudiments  of  Naval  Architecture,  by  James  Peake «  5o 

Sails  and  Sailmaking,  by  Robert  Kipping '  »» 

A  Trieatise  on  Ships  Anchors,  by  George  Cotsell.... .........^.... 75 

The  Ship'Builder's  Manual  and  Nautical  Keferee,  by  John  Griffith,  a  vols «  00 

A  Manual  of  Naval  Tactics,  by  James  H.  Ward...................... 3  00 

Nautical  Roulin>^  and  Stowage,   with  Short  Rules  m  Navigation,  by  John  McLeod 

Murphy  and  W.  N.  JeiTeri •••.••••—•. •••••" •• 3  S» 

Professional  Recolleccioni  on  Points  of  Seamanship,   Discipline,  by  Capt.  Francis 

Liardet *  ~ 

The  Young  Seaman's  Manual •— •• y,"" ,V/'"j *  -_ 

Elementary  Instruction  in  Naval  Ordnance  and  Gunnery,  bv  James  H.  Ward„. 3  00 

Submarine  Warfare,  Offensive  and   Defensive,   by  Lieut.-Commander  J.  S.  Barnes, 

U.  S.  N " J  ~ 

The  Marine  Steam  Engine,  by  Mam  and  Brown 5  00 

Thompson's  Coast  Pilot  for  the  Lakes :-;;,:::r ^"•v-i _  ~ 

Treatise  on  Iron  Ship  Building,  its  History  and  Progress,  by  William  Fairbarrn 9  00 

The  Kedge-Anchor,  or  Young  Sailors'  Assistant,  by  William  N.  Brady ^  50 

The  New  American  Practical  Navigator,  by  Nathaniel  Bowditch 5  00 

Bluat's  American  Coast  Pilot ....i "  ^ 

Blunt's  Shipmates  Assistant VV" i:"r; \""L' T ..•..•■•••.......•••  »  00 

The  Physical  Geography  of  the  Sea,  by  M.  F.  Maury,  c'oth $3.00,   half  calf. 4  00 

Land  and  Marine  Engines  and  BoiUrs,  by  N.  P.  Bur   h «  5o 

Questions  on  Marine  Engine,  by  Main  and  Brown •  Jo 

'f  he  Seaman's  Friend,  by  R.  H.  Dana •■••••••. ••••• •••••••  •  «» 

Nyslromon  Technological  Education  and  the  construction  of  Ship*  and  Screw  Pro- 

oellers • " ••'*  '  ^ 

Seamanship  and  itrAMOC^Me'dDuiiesin  the'Xoyal  Navy,  by  Lieut.  A.  H.  Alston 3  00 

A  Treatise  on  Ordinance  and  Naval  Gunnery,  by  Lieut.  Edward  Simpson 5  00 

Roper's  Hand  Book  of  the  Locomotive 3  SO 

Roper's  Hand-Book  of  Modern  Steam  Fire  Engines 3  SO 

Roper's  Hand-Book  of  Land  and  Main  Engines 3  SO 

Roper's  Use  and  Abuse  of  the  Steam  Boiler •  «» 

Roper's  Catechism  of  Steam  Engines •  "• 

Trautwine's  Engineer's  PocketBook "  »  "J 

Nystrom's  Mechanics .• •• f  s" 

Haswell's  Kadneer's  and  Mechanics*  Pocket  Book 3  00 

Burt's  Solar  Compass ..^.... ••..•" ■  *» 

Electricity  and  the  Electric  Telegraph,  by  George  B.  Prescott 5  00 

A  large  assortment  of  Miscellaneous  Books,  including  Novels,  Letter-Writers,  Draaas 
Books,  Song  Books,  ftc.    Also  a  full  assortment  ol  Sutionery. 

T.  S.  HAWKS,  Buffido. 


..-jmtmmm* 


ammmmmmmaiimmmiimmmm^ 


KS, 

?08tofflce. 


am  Thorns $  5  oo 

ind  Napier 33  oo 

!  blended  in  Ship 

15  oo 

lination  of  Light 

«  50 

75 

nes  Greenwood...  too 

«  50 

I  as 

.  75 

I  voU 18  00 

••  3  00 

by  John  McLeod 

3  so 

by  Capt.  Francis 

S  00 

3  00 

H.  Ward 3  "» 

der  J.  S.  Barnes, 

, S  00 

5  00 

*  00 

FairbaFrn 9  °o 

[ly ^  50 

5  00 

6  00 

6  00 

00,   half  calf. 4  00 

«  SO 

«  so 

a  00 

>  and  Screw  Pro- 

„ a  so 

A.  H.  Alston 3  oo 

ipson S  00 

3  so 

3  so 

3  so 

a  oo 

a  00 

5  00 

3  SO 

3  00 

a  50 

S  00 

Letter-Writers,   Drwkfls 

rKS,  BufBEdo, 


M.  I.  WILCOX. 


LtN.  WILCOK 


WILCOX  Brothers, 

Ship  Chandlers 


-J^.2iT] 


OS 


03 


6^  AND  66  Watei^  Street, 
TOLEDO,  OHIO. 


"V7"S   2k^A.3CE   .A.   SrSCIA.Ijmr    OE» 


W*  have  the  Beat  Sail  Maker  on  the  Lakee,  and  Guarantee  both 
Quality  and  Price. 


WM.  A.  SCRIPPS, 

BOOl   AID   JOB 


46  Larned  Street  West, 


Detroit, 


Michigan. 


All    kinds    of    Railroad,    Steamboat,    Book    and 
Commercial  Printing  done  on  Short  Notice. 


•SEND   FOR  ESTIMATES. 

828  H 


liriwwaiwhwnawtttiittirtiTWWiiriiitaiiiff 


[PPS, 


m 


1878 


/est, 


CHIGAN. 


,    Book    and 
ort  Notice. 


ES. 


,y 


T 


=^3aJ^'^ 


